Home

Yamaha 4XE-F8199-13 Offroad Vehicle User Manual

1. Table 1 Table 4 Table 7 Table 12 LFO Frequency Reverb time Delay Time 400 0ms Wah Release Time Data Value Data Value Data Value Data Value Data Value Data Value Data Value Data Value Data Value Data Value Data Value Data Value 0 0 00 32 1 35 64 2 69 96 8 41 0 0 3 32 3 5 64 17 0 0 0 1 32 100 9 64 201 6 96 3024 52 10 0 1 0 04 33 1 39 65 2 78 97 8 75 1 0 4 33 3 6 65 18 0 1 3 2 33 104 0 65 204 8 97 305 5 53 15 0 2 0 08 34 143 66 2 86 98 9 08 2 0 5 34 3 7 66 19 0 2 6 4 34 107 2 66 207 9 98 308 7 54 25 0 3 0 13 35 147 67 2 94 99 9 42 3 0 6 35 3 8 67 20 0 3 9 5 35 110 3 67 211 1
2. Address Size Data Parameter Recognized Description Default H H H value H 10 n 0 1 00 01 INPUT GAIN x 0 MIC 1 LINE 0 1 1 00 BANK SELECT MSB x 0 127 0 2 1 00 BANK SELECT LSB x 0 127 0 3 1 00 PROGRAM NUMBER x 1 128 0 4 1 00 Rev CHANNEL A1 A16 B1 6 7F 5 1 NOT USED 6 1 NOT USED 7 1 NOT USED 8 1 NOT USED 9 1 NOT USED 0A 1 NOT USED 0B 1 00 7F VOLUME 0 127 0 DC 1 NOT USED DD 1 NOT USED 1 01 7 L63 C R63 1 64 127 40 OF 1 NOT USED 10 1 NOT USED 11 1 00 7 DRY LEVEL 0 127 12 1 00 7 CHORUS SEND 0 127 0 13 1 00 7F REVERB SEND 0 127 0 14 1 00 VARIATION SEND 0 127 0 TOTAL SIZE 15 Address Size Data Parameter Recognized Description Default H value H 10 nn 30 1 NOT USED 31 1 NOT USED 32 1 00 01 PROGRAM CHANGE x 1 33 1 00 01 Rev CONTROL CHANGE x 1 34 1 NOT USED 35 1 NOT USED 36 1 NOT USED 37 1 NOT USED 38 1 NOT USED 39 1 00 01 Rcv VOLUME x 1 3A 1 00 01 Rcv PAN x 1 3B 1 00 01 Rcv EXPRESSION x 1 3C 1 NOT USED 3D 1 NOT USED 3E 1 NOT USED 3F 1 NOT USED 40 1 00 01 Rev BANK SELECT x 1 41 1 NOT USED 42 1 NOT USED 43 1 NOT USED 44 1 NOT
3. Memorized Wird gespeichert m moris x Not memorized x Wird nicht gespeichert x m moris ON Always ON when the corresponding function is called up ON Ist immer eingeschaltet wenn die zugeh rige Funktion ON toujours activ lorsque la fonction correspondante est aufgerufen wird appel e Jef 31 13 5 8 d c 5 a d 5 9 9g m 5 5 5 p 5 a S ou Am D a D SISSE So 915 5 a FeloalaSlalo N 00 N 2518 95 3 5 z 95 9525 g 3 5 0 gt 58 54 22 85 2 Auto Accompaniment Acmp Pad Part Panpot x x Acmp x Style lolo x Acmp x Acmp Phrase 1 Part Panpot x x Acmp x Auto Acmpaniment ON OFF ON o Jojo x Acmp x Acmp Phrase 2 Part Panpot x Acmp Fingering x x lolo x Fingering Acmp Rhythm 1 Part Reverb Depth x x Acmp Rhythm 2 Part Reverb Depth Split Point x x Jojo x Acmp Spt i Acmp Bass Part Reverb Depth x x Acmp D Main Variation MainA B C D x Acmp Chord 1 Part Reverb Depth D x Acmp x
4. Set Alt 6 Esc Fi Fe Fa ra Fs Fe F7 le d e 21111111 SE ECC m Lol ar Lalor GLE E E IIIS IE Gr I EEPREPPPILLLEI D Lol Lal Jefes GLE Reference 165 MIDI Functions Built into the rear panel of the 9000Pro are two standard sets to MIDI terminals MIDI IN A B MIDI OUT A B a TO HOST terminal and a HOST SELECT switch The MIDI Functions give you a comprehensive powerful set of tools for expanding your music recording and performance possibilities This section explains what MIDI is and what it can do as well as how you can use MIDI on your 9000Pro What s MIDI No doubt you have heard the terms acoustic instrument and digital instrument In the world today these are the two main categories of instruments Let s consider an acoustic piano and a clas sical guitar as representative acoustic instruments They are easy to understand With the piano you strike a key and a hammer inside hits some strings and plays a note With the guitar you directly pluck a string and the note sounds But how does a digital
5. Bank Select MSB 0 127 127 127 127 127 127 127 Bank Select LSB 0 127 0 0 0 0 0 0 Program Change 1 128 1 2 5 9 17 25 Note jos Keyboard Key jg Standard Kit 1 Standard Kit 2 Hit Kit Room Kit Rock Kit Electro Kit 13 CH 1 C 0 3 Surdo Mute 14 D 1 D 0 3 Surdo Open 15 1 0 0 HiQ 16 E 1 0 Whip Slap 17 1 0 4 Scratch H 18 Fe 1 F 0 4 Scratch L 19 1 G_ 0 Finger Snap 20 GH 1 G 0 Click Noise 21 A 0 Metronome Click 22 A 1 A 0 Metronome Bell 23 B 1j B 0 Seq Click L 24 0 C Seq Click H 25 C 0 C Brush Tap 26 D Brush Swirl 27 D D Brush Slap 28 E 0 E Brush Tap Swirl Reverse Cymbal 29 0 F Snare Roll 30 FR FR Castanet Hi Q2 31 G Snare Soft Snare Soft 2 Snare Electro Snare Noisy Snare Snappy Electro 32 08 Sticks 33 A D A Kick Soft Kick Tight L Kick 3 34 0 Open Rim Shot Open Rim Shot H Short Snare Pitched 35 B 0 B Kick Wet Kick 2 Kick Gate 36 C 2 Kick Short Kick Tight H Kick Gate Kick Gate Heavy 37 CH CH 2 Side Stick Side Stick Light Stick Ambient 38 D D 2 Snare Snare Short Snare Ambient Snare Snappy Snare Rock Snare Noisy 2 39 D D 2 Hand Clap 40 E E 2 Snare Tight Snare Tight H Snare Tight 2 Snare Tight Snappy Snare Rock Tight Snare Noisy 3 41 2 Floor Tom L Hybrid Tom 1 Tom Room 1
6. These settings determine the original key of the source pattern i e the key used when E recording the pattern The default CM7 the source root is the source chord type is When NTR is set to ROOT 7 is automatically selected whenever the preset data is deleted prior to recording a new FIXED and NTT also above is set to BYPASS the SOURCE style regardless of the source root and chord included in the preset data ROOT and SOURCE CHORD arameter names change to When you change the chord of the source pattern from the default CM7 to others the chord ROOT and pers notes and scale notes will change depending on the currently selected chord type See page CHORD In this case it is possi 133 for information on chord notes and scale notes ble to change chords and hear how the results sound for all parts ex Source Chord Root of C 2 maj e Maj6 CM Maj7 CM 7 11 7811 CM add9 9 c 5 c jc C7 9 7 9 69 6 9 Caug aug Cm mine C S C 5 8 1 sic 5 sicic Cm7 min7 5 7 5 9 m 9 9 7 9 Cm 7 11 m7 11 C SC 5 51 51 5 C C CmM7 7 7 9 mM7 9 Cdim dim Cdim7 dim7 C7 7th Tw wi qup C7susa4 7sus4
7. Floppy disk drive START STOP button The following disks are compatible for playback on the 9000Pro Refer to page 6 for more details on the logos GENERAL MIDI Disks bearing this logo contain song data for voices defined in the GM standard note GM song files not having the extension MID in the name cannot be handled by the 9000Pro Disks bearing this logo contain song data using the XG format an extension of the Mei GM standard that provides a wider variety of voices and more comprehensive sonic control Disks bearing this logo contain song data for voices defined Yamaha s DOC format ORCHESTRA C Playback of Song Disks gt Insert the disk that contains song data into the disk drive 1 LY gt 2 Turn the SONG PLAYER on 22 3 Press the SONG FILE DIRECTORY 1 button SONG SONG FILE DIRECTORY SONG SETUP 4 Select a song file 272 SONG SELECT LSA 14 ESAk 16 ui 1arabe2 mid 2sheher mid s eK mid O8dancin mid 004 2 foos O4etud15 mid OSvals12 mid E 068 010 GA oJ O5syiphe mid 10paspie mid 000080 d 30 Quick Guide 5 Start playback EET wore With song data software Stan k
8. IS Wurt 9000 Set settings 178 Reference MIDI transmit MIDI OUT MIDI IN UMB MIDI IN MIDI receive control MFC10 Fe i 000000 891 169 MIDI Data Compatibility This section covers basic information on data compatibility whether or not other MIDI devices can playback the data recorded by 9000Pro and whether or not the 9000Pro can playback com mercially available song data or song data created for other instruments or on a computer Depending on the MIDI device or data characteristics you may be able to play back the data without any problem or you may have to perform some special operations before the data can be played back If you run into problems playing back data please refer to the information below Sequence format Sequence format refers to the way in which MIDI data for playback such as songs and styles is stored to disk A number of popular sequence formats described below are compatible with the 9000Pro Playback is only possible when the sequence format of the disk matches that of the MIDI device SMF Standard MIDI File This is the most common sequence format Standard MIDI Files are generally available as one of two types Format 0 or Format 1 Many MIDI devices are compatible with Format 0 and mos
9. 0 0 0 101 101 1 1 1 VOICER2 0 O 0 101 1 101 1 1 VOICER3 0 O 0 VOICEL O 0 101 1 1 1 101 Auto All Tracks ww o 101 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 O O O 10101 1 1 1 1 BASS 10101 1 1 1 1 O 010 01 01 CHORD2 o 0 010 o o o PAD 10101 1 1 1 1 0 0 O 0 10101 1 1 1 1 5 2 0 0 O O 10101 1 1 1 1 Multi Pad Multi 0101 1 1 1 1 1 1 4 Song AllTracks 0 0 0 O 10101 1 1 1 1 TRACK 0 0 O 01 0 TRACK2 0 0 0 0 0 01 01 16 0 0 0 10101 1 1 1 1 Sound available Same as the TRANSPOSE button pages 61 and 162 Game as the UPPER OCTAVE button page 18 P EZ wort Cannot be applied to the part using the Plug in voice from the PLG150 PF I
10. 126 Style Assembly Creating a Style 129 Revoice Easy Ed 130 Groove amp Dynamics Easy Edit 131 H Style Recording Full Edit 132 S Style Editing Full Edit 134 VOICE 192 Custom Style Recording an External Keyboard Drum Assignments 200 Sequence 138 Plug in Volce LIST E 204 Step Recording Full Edit 140 51016 sies 212 Multi Pad Creator 141 Multi Pad Bank LIS tier tiis certos 213 Multi Pad 142 Parameter Chart 214 142 Effect Type List esses 220 M 142 Effect Parameter List 222 Turning Chord Match and Repeat On Off 142 Effect Data Value Assign Table 227 Step Recording sss 143 MIDI Data Format 228 Mixing Console 144 MIDI Implementation Chart 244 Dette Eege eege 144 SPS CISA OS 246 Effect Type 146 Master Equalizer Settings
11. 2 3 see next page Mode 1 OMNI ON POLY Mode 2 OMNI ON MONO Yes Mode 3 OMNI OFF POLY Mode 4 OMNI OFF MONO x No e Appendix Anhang Annexe 819 619 Feuille d impl mentation MIDI A Ge S 1 2 3 The tracks for each channel can be selected on the panel See page 175 for more information The tone generator normally functions as a 16 channel multi timbre tone generator in response to MIDI input MIDI messages therefore do not nor mally affect the panel voices or other panel settings The MIDI messages listed below however do affect the panel voice style Multi Pad and song settings MIDI MASTER TUNE XG System parameter MASTER TUNE XG System parameter TRANSPOSE System exclusive messages which change the REVERB CHORUS DSP EFFECT settings MULTI EQ parameters Also the MIDI messages affect the panel settings when one of the following MIDI reception modes is selected These modes can be selected on the panel see page 176 RIGHT1 RIGHT2 RIGHTS LEFT KEYBOARD RHYTHM1 ACMP RHYTHM2 ACMP BASS ACMP CHORD1 CHORD2 ACMP PAD ACMP PHRASE1 ACMP PHRASE2 CHORD ROOT These Control Change Messages are not transmitted by 9000Pro panel operation but may be transmitted by the ACCOMPANIMENT or SONG playing Die Tracks k nnen f r jeden Channel auf dem Panel eingestellt werden
12. 28 Using the Preset Registration Memory 28 Registering the Panel Settings 29 Disk Song Playback 30 Playback of Song Disks 30 Vocal Harmony 32 ECH TEE 32 Vocal Harmony with Accompaniment Playback 32 Vocal Harmony with Song Playback 33 The Multi 34 Playing the Multi 34 eg 34 Voice ENGCES 35 Applying the Voice 35 Song Creator e 36 QuicilsRecordilige US 36 Multi Track 38 Sampling ennnen 40 Recording 40 Using the Optional Plug in Board 42 Playing a Plug in 42 Basic Operation Display based Controls 44 Display Messages 45 Name ENUY 46 Computer Keyboard 46 Niege EE 48 dilhipgn Ce 50 Memory Structure 54 Reference Demonstration 56 VOICES 57 Parts Right1 Right2 Right3 and Left
13. This SCSI 2 50 pin connector D sub half pitch can be used to connect to an external SCSI data storage device allowing you to conveniently save and store large quantities of data Refer to page 150 vr Depending the SCSI device you may need a special connecting cable or adap tor to connect the device properly to the 9000Pro Make sure to confirm the con nection configuration of both the 9000Pro and the SCSI device before purchasing the device The SCSI ID number of the 9000Pro is fixed at 7 Make sure to set the ID num ber of the external SCSI device to a num ber other than this 0 6 2 VIDEO IN Television You can connect the 9000Pro to a television or video monitor to display the lyrics and chords in your song data on a larger screen Refer to page 165 1 1227 The 9000Pro s default setting for the external televi sion video monitor signal is PAL Depending on your particular locale the standard may be different and the setting should be changed accordingly For example NTSC is generally used in North America Check the standard used by your television or video monitor and if itis not PAL change the setting in the VIDEO OUT display to NTSC page 165 2 Starting Up Use the following procedure to start up the 9000Pro 1 Make sure that the POWER switch is in the OFF position 2 5
14. MIC LINE IN SE ut PRESE DIGITAL STUDIO FLASH STYLE e E EL Si x St E gt S aen E gt Gare gt Gs Ga G gt E ce gt ce EP DANCE COUNTRY BALLROOM m f e Sp 223 ACCOMPANIMENT 7 JOJ C m 1 INTRO TAPTEMPO ENDING rit ACCOMPANIMENT o o CONTROL 1 TAIN VARY Floppy Disk Drive page 25 30 150 The 9000Pro also features a built in disk drive that lets you save all your important original data to floppy disk for future recall The 9000Pro is compatible with a wide variety of disk formats allowing you to playback song data on commercially available XG GM DOC an Disklavier Piano Soft disks d Keyboard page 162 The keyboard of the 9000Pro is equipped with a touch response feature initial touch and after touch that lets you dynamically and expressively con trol the level of the voices with your pl
15. Category voice Name MSB amp LSB Category Voice MSB LSB pean Change Change 51 Log Drum 0 98 12 105 Stl amp Body 0 41 25 52 Xylophon 0 0 13 106 Mandolin 0 96 25 53 TubulBel 0 0 14 107 Jazz Gtr 0 0 26 54 ChrchBel 0 96 14 108 MelloGtr 0 18 26 55 Carillon 0 97 14 109 JazzAmp 0 32 26 56 Dulcimer 0 0 15 110 CleanGtr 0 0 27 57 Dulcimr2 0 35 15 111 ChorusGt 0 32 27 58 Cimbalom 0 96 15 112 Mute Gtr 0 0 28 59 Santur 0 97 15 113 FunkGtr1 0 40 28 60 DrawOrgn 0 0 16 114 MuteStlG 0 41 28 61 DetDrwOr 0 32 16 115 FunkGtr2 0 43 28 62 60sDrOr1 0 33 16 116 Jazz Man 0 45 28 63 60sDrOr2 0 34 16 117 Ovrdrive 0 0 29 64 70sDrOr1 0 35 16 118 Gt Pinch 0 43 29 65 DrawOrg2 0 36 16 119 Dist Gtr 0 0 30 66 60sDrOr3 0 37 16 120 FeedbkGt 0 40 30 67 EvenBar 0 38 16 121 FeedbGt2 0 41 30 68 16 2 2 3 0 40 16 122 GtrHarmo 0 0 31 69 Organ Ba 0 64 16 123 GtFeedbk 0 65 31 70 70sDrOr2 0 65 16 124 GtrHrmo2 0 66 31 71 CheezOrg 0 66 16 125 Aco Bass 0 0 32 72 DrawOrg3 0 67 16 126 JazzRthm 0 40 32 73 PercOrgn 0 0 17 127 VXUprght 0 45 32 74 70sPcOr1 0 24 17 128 FngrBass 0 0 33 75 DetPrcOr 0 32 17 129 FingrDrk 0 18 33 76 LiteOrg 0 33 17 130 FlangeBa 0 27 33 77 PercOrg2 0 37 17 131 Ba amp DstEG 0 40 33 78 RockOrgn 0 0 18 132 FngrSlap 0 43 33 79 RotaryOr 0 64 18 133 FngBass2 0 45 33 80 SloRotar 0 65 18 134 ModAlem 0 65 33 81 FstRotar 0 66 18 135 PickBass 0 0 34 82 ChrchOrg 0 0 19 136 MutePkBa 0 28 34 83 ChurOrg3 0 32 19 137 Fretless 0 0 35 8
16. 8 Refer to the XG EFFECT PARAMETER LIST depends on insertion 1 ype 0A 1 00 7F INSERTION EFFECT PARAMETERS Refer to the XG EFFECT PARAMETER LIST depends on insertion 1 ype 0B 1 00 7F INSERTION EFFECT PARAMETER10 Refer to the EFFECT PARAMETER LIST depends on insertion 1 ype 0C 1 00 7F INSERTION EFFECT PART x Part1 16 0 15 7F AD1 64 OFF 16 63 65 127 1 00 7F MW INSERTION CONTROL DEPTH 40 1 00 7F BEND INSERTION CONTROL DEPTH 40 OF 1 00 7F CAT INSERTION CONTROL DEPTH 40 10 1 00 7F AC1 INSERTION CONTROL DEPTH x 40 11 1 00 7 AC2 INSERTION CONTROL DEPTH x 40 TOTAL SIZE 12 04 00 14 1 00 7F UNIQUE INSERTION EFFECT EXTER 1 16 0 15 off 127 7F NAL CONTROL CH1 HARMONY CHANNEL 15 1 00 7F UNIQUE INSERTION EFFECT EXTER 1 16 0 15 off 127 7F NAL CONTROL CH2 MELODY CHANNEL TOTAL SIZE 2 04 00 20 1 00 INSERTION EFFECT PARAMETER11 Refer to the XG EFFECT PARAMETER LIST depends on insertion 1 ype 21 1 00 7F INSERTION EFFECT PARAMETER12 Refer the XG EFFECT PARAMETER LIST depends on insertion 1 ype 22 1 00 7F INSERTION EFFECT 13 Refer to the XG EFFECT PARAMETER LIST depends on insertion 1 ype 23 1 00 7F INSERTION EFFECT PARAMETER14 Refer to the XG EFFECT PARAMETER LIST depends on insertion 1 ype 24 1 00 7F INSERTION EFFECT PARAMETER15 Refer to the EFF
17. Effects Voice Start Stop x x x x x x Right 1 Chorus Depth o o o Effects Voice Song Right 1 Poly Mono ON OFF Voice Voice Song On Off x x o x x Song x Right Portamento Poly Mono x Voice Lyrics Search On Off x x x Song x Right Tuning ER Ee 2 Right1 Pi i Ultra Quick Start On Off x x D Song x ight Pitch Bend Range ES ES i x mE Song Full Path Including the file name 5 x Soi x Right Portamento Time Voice Voice for the Registration Memory 9 Right1 Harmonic Content o o Voice Voice Song Full Path Not including the file name for the Backup x 9 x Song x Right1 Brightness o Voice Voice Song Select Song x Right EQ Low EQ Voice Appendix Anhang Annexe Parameter Chart Parameter Tabelle Tahleau des param tres a a Ze 12 8 S 8 413 2 3 5 5 9 e 5 5 5 8 o 5 2 v ZS 8 le p 5 S Ezl ig Sol SEZI E 2 5 N E 10 2092 2 N 952 S S 0 gt 6 gt Right1 EQ High EQ
18. Example 2 Surround Sound System In this example send each output to a different speaker for a rich surround effect Line Out Settings Part Right1 2 3 Left MAIN Settings MAIN Multi Pad 1 2 3 4 MAIN Auto Accompaiment SUB1 amp 2 Rhythm1 Rhythm2 Bass Chord1 Chord2 Pad Phrase1 Phrase2 Metronome MAIN Song MAIN Song Tr1 16 Drum All instruments SUB3 amp 4 Settings Example 3 Recording In this system connect a multi track recorder and record each part separately just as is done in profes sional recording studios Line Out Settings Part Right1 2 3 Left MAIN Settings MAIN Multi Pad 1 2 3 4 MAIN Auto Accompaiment MAIN Rhythm1 Rhythm2 Bass Chord1 Chord2 Pad Phrase1 Phrase2 Metronome MAIN Song MAIN Song Tr1 16 Drum Bass Drum SUB1 Settings Snare Drum SUB2 Other instruments 508384 147 Mixing Console Right1 2 3 Left Auto Accompaniment Song Multi Pad 1 2 3 4 stereo LINE OUT Microphone sound Metronome All instruments Drum Right1 2 3 Left Metronome Multi Pad 1 2 3 4 Microphone sound stereo LINE OUT HH stereo stereo Auto Accompaniment All instruments Drum Right1 2 3 Left Metron
19. Press the H LCD button to call up the Organ Flutes pre set voices display then select an Organ Flutes voice Reference on page 62 Reference on page 70 Style related buttons Auto Accompaniment related buttons i Using Auto Accompaniment gt Select style group STYLE amp STYLE MANAGER PRESET STYLE 8 BEAT SWING amp JAZZ LATIN gt gt 16 R amp B MARCH amp WALTZ gt CG DANCE COUNTRY BALLROOM STYLE BALLROOM eiie 01 ESR 01 001 5 ViennaWaltz Samba nsLMaltz Rumba Slowfox 1 Cha Cha Cha 5 Quickstep 003 M Pasodoble 1 ET wc The 9000Pro styles are divided into two groups Preset styles and Flash styles For details about Flash styles see page 55 005 010 M Tanso Jive For this example BALLROOM E is selected 2 Select a style KSE ISCH ESR 01 STYLE BALLI 001 006 ViennaWaltz Samba Enal Waltz Rumba E Stowfox 1 Cha Cha d E 003 Quickstep Pasodoble 1 000 C For this example ze BS Cl wl The point on the keyboard that separates the auto acc
20. PD MIS sarme Fesch 28 Ee ug E c nave oxen 8 Press the NEXT button gt 9 Set the key range to which the new sample will be assigned gt 10 Press the NEXT button twice to call up the sample recording display Press the NEXT button twice PAGE CONTROL avy 1 av nore The notes and cautions con tained on page 80 also apply to Sampling Cl we Since this is the first sample you are recording it is auto matically assigned and fixed to the lowest available key As a result the START KEY cannot be set 11 8 B B B 3 9 3 8 B 9 99000000 90049909 Quick Guide gt 1 Press the LCD START button and speak into the micro phone to start the sampling Sampling starts when the input level reaches the Auto Trigger level page 84 99 RECORDING Now recording Press STOP to stop recording Indicates the amount of remaining sampling memory time gt 2 Press the LCD STOP button to stop the sampling Sampling will stop automatically when the available wave memory is full so be sure to press LCD STOP button as soon as the sound you want to sample is recorded otherwise you ll end up sampling unwanted silence which can be edited out later gt 5 Store voice parameters for the recorded sample as Cus tom voice 1 Fol
21. 36 2 26 1 Fatty 36 0 105 7 Caner 36 0 75 2 Bronze 36 0 107 8 J Hammer 36 0 84 3 HardBrss 36 0 17 9 On One 36 2 27 4 ToToHorn 36 2 56 10 SupaSync 36 2 28 5 CS80Bras 36 2 57 11 Prophetic 36 2 29 6 ProBrass 36 1 23 12 Slum 36 2 30 7 Smoovey 36 2 58 13 Lipstick 36 0 16 8 Chick 36 0 77 14 MegaDron 36 0 95 9 Sharpsyn 36 1 50 15 Unstable 36 0 25 10 SQR 36 0 46 206 Appendix Anhang Annexe 088 Plug in Voice List Plug In Stimmenliste Liste des voix plug in Category voice Name MsB 1588 Program Category Voice Name MSB amp LSB Zoe Change Change 11 SyncBrPd 36 1 45 6 X Bass 36 0 49 12 Stevie 36 0 66 7 ANSynBas 36 0 40 13 Willy 36 2 59 8 Dog Bass 36 2 84 14 Pulser 36 2 60 9 DuckBass 36 2 85 15 Lucky 36 0 72 10 RubbaBas 36 0 58 16 Zoik 36 2 61 11 Stringer 36 0 112 17 Rock It 36 2 62 12 Mg Fretless 36 2 86 18 ANSoftBr 36 0 108 13 BirdWorld 36 0 56 19 Fire 36 2 63 14 Woodbass 36 0 57 20 ObDetune 36 1 17 15 Smooth 36 0 59 Vil 16 Hardily 36 2 87 1 AnalogBrass 36 0 109 17 Loom 36 1 24 2 Soar 36 1 46 18 SeqWater 36 2 88 3 Major Brass 36 2 64 19 EthTeck 36 2 89 4 High Sweep 36 1 55 20 India 36 2 90 5 Waspad 36 0 55 6 Sync Sweep 36 1 56 1 HiQ Reso 36 0 29 7 Mountain 36 1 57 2 SynthTom 36 2 91 8 BPF Pad 36 2 65 3 SynShake 36 2 9
22. Play Em7 Reference 081 121 Song Creator 2 Press the FILL button to specify the section FILL IN C and enter the chords as shown at 111 Heart Beat right 4 002 3 000 148 000 Chord D wi 000 Chord E Dm7 000 Sect F FillInc 1 004 1 000 End FILL IN amp BREAK 002 4 000 HEAS E BEAT f CLK Play G7 Select this resolution and play chords as shown at right MAIN D FILL INC 3 Xe d JJJ t t tt 1 Dm7 Em7 Dm7 G7 3 The MAIN C section is automatically _step REC WSR NSS 001 1 000 Sty 01 Heart Beat selected 001 1 000 Sect D 4 001 1 000 Chord C 001 1 000 Tempo 148 001 3 000 Chord ACCOMPANIMENT 002 1 000 Chord UL 002 3 000 Chord m 4 902 3 000 sect Pint 1 leet 003 1 000 002 4 000 Chord 7 e 758 4 004 1 000 End Play C 00 000 m J HEAS EBERT CLK MAIN D FILL IN C MAIN C Bee Ee t t ttt T Dm7 Em7 Dm7 G7 STEP REC WAUA 001 1 000 Sty 01 HeartBeat 001 1 000 Sect M D 4 001 1 000 Chord C M7 001 1 000 Tempo 148 001 3 000 Chord D m D Press the button to move the cursor to ee ee een EO ech the beginning of the song and press the D 4 002 3 0
23. x Acmp x Rhythm 2 Part Variation DSP3 x Acmp x Acmp Chord 1 Part Track On Off A E i SE 2 9 S Ee d S Acmp Bass Part Variation DSP3 Depth x x Acmp Chord 2 Part Track On Off x o x Acmp x Am Dep Chord 1 Part Variation DSP3 3 x Acmp x Acmp Pad Part Track On Off Acmp Chord 2 Part Variation DSP3 Acmp Phrase 1 Part Track On Off x x Acmp x Depth up Acmp x Acmp Phrase 2 Part Track On Off x x Acmp x Acmp Pad Part Variation DSP3 Depth x x Acmp Rhythm 1 Part Volume x x Acmp x Phrase 1 Part Variation DSP3 x x Acmp Rhythm 2 Part Volume x cua Phrase 2 Part Variation DSP3 x x Acmp Bass Part Volume Acmp x Acmp Chord 1 Part Volume x x Acmp x ee Jai Violon Change x Acmp Acmp Chord 2 Part Volume x oO x Acmp x Acmp Rhythm 2 Part Voice Change 6 xx 2 Voice Acmp Pad Part Volume x x Acmp x Acmp Bass Part Voice Change Voice x x Acmp D Acmp Phrase 1 Part Volume x x Acmp x Chord 1 Part Voice Change Voice x x Acmp x Acmp Phrase 2 Part Volume x oO x A
24. 2ndbeat c 3rd beat BUS a 4th beat El 2 Display Messages The large 9000Pro display panel facilitates operation by making it possible to display comprehensive message and prompts that will guide you through certain operations These messages can be displayed in one of five different languages When such mes sages appear simply follow the instructions as shown by pressing the corresponding LCD button VOICE 1 WAVEFORM REATOR p VOICE SET SSS STORE CLEAR Store NEH VOICE to CUSTOH VOICE 1 OK 7 C COMPARE EXECUTE operation Selecting the desired language of the display message You can select the desired language of the display messages from the following English German French Spanish Italian Follow the instructions in the chart below MENU DISK SCSI FUNCTION MIDI 9 amp 5 _ Press the FUNCTION button FUNCTION MENU veo ovr 4 HASTER TUNE ALE TUNE 2 HARMONY ECHO F8 UTILITY CONFIGURATION For this example press the YES LCD button to execute the Store LANGUAGE PAGE CONTROL LANGUAGE ENGLISH a Sm 1 PC KEVBORRD OHNER NAHE LANGUAGE PC KEYBOARD ENGLISH DEUTSCH Type2 FRANCAIS Type3 ESPANOL Typea ITALIANO Types Wavy Select UTILITY
25. Macintosh Series Connect the RS 422 terminal modem or printer terminal on the computer to the TO HOST terminal on the 9000Pro Mac using a serial cable system peripheral cable 8 bit Set the l 9000Pro HOST SELECT switch to the Mac position Set the MIDI interface clock in the sequencer software you are using to 1 MHZ For details carefully read the owner s manual for the soft ware you are using am mini OIN mini DIN For details about the necessary MIDI settings for computer UU and sequence software you are using refer to the relevant 9000 owner s manuals About the Thru Port Function This function can be used when a computer is connected to the TO HOST terminal of the 9000Pro It gives you exceptionally flexible and comprehensive control over the routing of incoming MIDI data For example you could use this to selectively play back parts of song data from a computer having the 9000Pro respond to certain parts of the song while playing back other parts on a separate connected tone generator as shown in the illustration Select the desired THRU PORT settings from the MIDI SYSTEM display page 174 on the 9000Pro as described below and make the appropriate port settings on your computer sequencer software Tone Generator MIDI data and its por
26. Select the desired language Note that the example LCD screens shown in this manual are in English Basic Operation Display based Controls Name Entry A number of 9000Pro functions allow you to enter a name for for example a file you will be saving to disk a custom voice or style etc The name entry procedure is essen tially the same in all cases only the maximum number of characters which can be entered will vary An example display which includes NAME entry parameters is EA When this icon appears in the mU display you can directly call up the Name Entry page by press ing the corresponding button Rename Name the voice shown below Selecting a character Use these buttons to move up or down in the You can also select Characters with the data dial or enter them directly from aPC keyboard Press END or NEXT to continue Press CANCEL or to cancel You can also enter the name directly from a computer key board PC compatible only See below for details character list To move laterally through the character list use the AIBCDEFGHIIKLHNOPQRSTUVHXYZ abcdefghigkilmnopqrstuvuxyz data dial 1234562880 85 87 3 99 0 00000 NAME 773575177 Press one of these after you ve finished entering the name to actually assign the name to the data Clears all characters Deletes the
27. STORE RETURN Call up the Store display Select the number to be stored and store your settings Parameters Tm 4 2 1 J Adjust the Footage Select this to call up the Preset Organ Flutes display Select this to call up the display of various settings A The Organ Flutes settings are applied to the currently selected part Custom settings can be stored as a User Organ Flutes voice but the current part cannot itself be stored For example you can edit the Organ Flutes settings from the R1 part and store them then reselect those settings from the R3 part M 2 Ej The echo tremolo and trill effects set via the Harmony Echo function page 164 may not affect the Organ Flutes sound as expected Organ Type This parameter specifies the type of organ tone generation to be simulated Sine or Vin tage Rotary SP Speed The Rotary SP Speed LCD button alternately switches between the slow and fast ro tary speaker speeds when a rotary speaker effect is selected for the Organ Flutes see DSP Type below and the VOICE EFFECT DSP 4 7 button is turned on the Rotary SP Speed LCD button has the same effect as the VOICE EFFECT DSP SLOW FAST button Vibrato On Off This LCD button alternately turns the vibrato effect for the Organ Flutes voice ON or OFF Reference 09 61 Organ Flutes Vibrat
28. the HANUAL and ACHP track settings See page 125 43 To delete the track hold down DEL ED and select Delete status above Rec Press NEXT when settings are ready Press START to begin ReheansaLnecondino 1 amp Set the desired track to REC v MANUAL ACHP Change the measure at which recording starts E Delete When the DEL LCD button is pressed DELETE will appear for tracks which contain data Select DELETE via the corresponding LCD buttons while holding the DEL button to delete all data in the corresponding tracks The data is actually deleted when the DEL LCD button is released Reference Song Creator Song Edit Functions Multi Track Recording The explanations here apply to step 6 on page 111 Quantize Quantize lets you clean up or tighten the timing of a previously recorded track For example the following musical passage has been written with exact quarter note and eighth note values Even though you think you may have recorded the passage accurately your actual performance may be slightly ahead of or behind the beat or both Quantize allows you to align all the notes in a track so that the timing is absolutely accurate to the specified note value 98 MULTI Ede 01 E55 01 SONG NAHE NEHSONG HID Press this to quantize the data SIZE STRENGTH This determines how strongly the notes E 12 Ab 9 will be
29. with the Right and Left d i dk CM Care Cas ae 21 Hands PART ON OFF Voice Voice R1 R2 Lower Upper Split Point A Playing a Chord with the i d d 00 Left hand See page 20 d CS Voice R1 R2 R3 Auto Accompaniment Upper section Lower Each key has a note name for example the lowest a farthest left key on the keyboard corresponds to and the highest farthest right key to C1 DIET F1 G1 A1 BT C1 B1 C2 B2 C3 B3 C4 B4 C5 B5 C6 G6 Part Selection The desired voice can be selected for the current selected part described above select the desired part press the corresponding PART SELECT button If you want to turn only a specified part on press the corresponding LCD button from the main SE Det E Strs ee c 27 2 62 DES 7 7 v LEFT HOLD LEFT Reference Voices Voices The 9000Pro actually includes several voice categories the 9000Pro original preset voices percussion kits the XG voices the Organ Flutes voices and Custom voices In addition you can expand the amount of voices by installing the Plug in Boards to the 9000Pro SSS S BSS SS SH Vill BOARD
30. 175 LOOP 89 126 LOOP SEND jacks 12 el 79 M Main Mixer 25 31 Main variation 22 160 Master HO secet een 147 Master 158 Master 14 112 113 Message Switch 175 21 37 39 166 i iden 178 MIC LINE IN jack 13 Microphone 13 32 80 83 MID TA 168 MIDI Data Format 228 MIDI Implementation Chart 244 MIDI templates 174 MIDI terminals 13 Mixing console 144 Mode i orreee 83 881 189 59 161 MODULATION wheel 59 161 Mul 151 Multi Assign eee 164 Multi Finger eee 70 Multi 34 77 141 Multi Pad Creator 141 Multi Pad Recording 142 Multi Part Plug in Board 65 Multi Track record 38 110 Music Database 26 76 Music stand esie eite 10 N Name entty 46 Native Part Parameter
31. How to use the manual Starting Up Top Panel amp Connections Rear Panel amp Connections Contents Before going on to any other part of the manual we strongly suggest you read this section first It shows you how to get started playing and using your new 9000Pro Use this section to find out about all of the buttons and controls of the 9000Pro All topics features functions and operations are listed here in the order they appear in the manual for easy reference Quick PEL 16 Unless you enjoy reading manuals you re probably eager to start playing your new 9000Pro right now Basic Operations Function Tree Reference Installing Optional Hardware Appendix Troubleshooting If so read this section This section introduces you to the basic operating conventions of the 9000Pro such as editing values and changing settings and shows you how to use the convenient Direct Access functions This lists all functions of the 9000Pro according to their hierarchical structure letting you easily see the rela tionship of the various functions and quickly locate desired information Once you re familiar with everything above lightly go over this comprehensive guide to all functions You won t need or want to rea
32. 57 VOICES 58 PITCH BEND Wheel amp MODULATION Wheel 59 Voice e 60 Other Keyboard related 61 s ET TE 62 gib E 64 Plug in Manager eese 66 Auto Accompaniment 70 Chord FEingerings sess 70 Fade ins and Fade outs 72 Tempo Control 72 Synchro Stop 73 One Touch 73 Style Manager 74 Music Database 76 Creating the Music Database 76 The Multi Pads crar iai assi cias 77 Turning Chord Match and Repeat 77 Disk Song Playback 78 Selecting a Gong 78 Other Functions Viewing the Lyrics and Fast Forward Reverse 79 Song Setup 79 Vocal Harmony 80 Applying the Vocal Harmony Effect 80 Selecting Producing the Vocal Harmony effect 81 Changing the Vocal Harmony Microphone SEWING S cx re eheu 82 Sampling mec 84 Recording 86 Importing Wave Files from Disk 87 Clearing Wave 87 Editing Wave data 88 Custom Voice Creating 92 Easy Editing eee dn
33. 64 63 40 nn 49 1 00 7F SCALE TUNING o 64 63 cen 40 nn 4A 1 00 SCALE TUNING A x 64 63 40 nn 4B 1 00 SCALE TUNING As x 64 63 40 nn 4 1 00 7 SCALE TUNING x 64 63 40 Appendix Anhang Annexe MIDI Data Format MIDI Datenformat Format de donn es MIDI nn 4D 1 CAT PITCH CONTROL 24 24 semitones 40 m 4 1 CAT FILTER CONTROL x 9600 9450 cent 40 nn 4F 1 CAT AMPLITUDE CONTROL x 100 100 40 nn 50 1 CAT LFO PMOD DEPTH x x 0 127 0 nn 51 1 CAT LFO FMOD DEPTH x x 0 127 0 nn 52 1 CAT LFO AMOD DEPTH x 0 127 0 nn 53 1 PAT PITCH CONTROL 40 nn 54 1 PAT FILTER CONTROL x 40 nn 55 1 PAT AMPLITUDE CONTROL x x x x x x x 40 nn 56 1 PAT LFO PMOD DEPTH x x x x x x x 0 57 1 PAT LFO FMOD DEPTH 0 nn 58 1 PAT LFO AMOD DEPTH x x x x x x x 0 nn 59 1 AC1 CONT
34. 7 1 Remove the four screws from the Plug in stand and remove the Plug in stand from the cover Do not remove the other screws Gold color screws 7 2 Attach another Plug in board turning over the Plug in board stand and using the same operations in steps 6 1 and 6 2 When turning over the board let it rest on a soft surface Gold color screws Plug in board stand _ 7 3 Attach the Plug in board stand to the Plug in board Hard disk cover with the four screws removed in step 7 1 9 Gold color screws Plug in Board second board Plug in board Hard disk cover Reference Plug in Board first board 08 181 Installing Optional Hardware 9 Unfasten the cable inside the 9000Pro as shown in the following illus tration There are three cables available for installation The two smaller cables are used for the Plug in Boards the larger cable is for the hard disk Cable clip gt 9 Carefully plug the cable connector into the Plug in board connector until the two notches on the cable connector lock into the sockets on the board as shown in the illustration The two cables can be used interchangeably The cable that is used determines the slot number used by the 9000Pro The cable with the single orange cord corresponds to Slot 1 The cable with the yellow cord corresponds to Slot 2 Keep in mind that the slot number is determined by the cable not the actual installation position o
35. 2 This selects the pop up page shown below POP UP 01arabe2 mid O2sheher mid 04edud15 mid 05sylphe mid Select the directory that contains the song files DEVICE FD DIRECTORY 7 FILE 551 01 O6praul6 mid 07saraba mid 08dancin mid 09vals12 mid 10paspie mid Classico1 ClassicO1a 01lente mid 029 walk md Classic02 C Classic02b Classic03 F Classic03a Classic03b Reference select the desired song Press NEXT to continue If an optional hard disk DEVICE CONTENTS has been installed or an optional SCSI device has been connected the appropriate device must be selected here Select the directory that contains the song files You can return to the next DIRECTOR 7 17 highest level by pressing EE the IN LCD button while the cursor is located at EI ClassicO1la ClassicO1b E3 Ollente mid 029_walk mid 008 009 005 010 M Ce POPU These steps are identi cal to all other 9000Pro disk file selection opera tions for example see 151 In the file selection display a maximum 250 file or directory names can be displayed If the number of files or directories exceeds 250 the 251st and
36. 3 4 Install the Optional Plug in Board to the 9000Pro See page 180 for installation instructions In this example a PLG150 VL Virtual Acoustic Plug in Board has been installed to SLOT 1 The PLG150 VL lets you expand the sonic palette of your 9000Pro by adding 256 dynamic VL voices including 137 VL XG voices created with the unique Virtual Acoustic Synthe sis system PLG150 VL After you ve installed the Plug in Boards turn the power ON When turning the power ON for the first time after installing the board a mes sage appears indicating that the board settings are being initialized followed after a while by the main display Note that it takes a short amount of time before the main display appears espe cially if two boards have been installed If an error message appears check that the board or boards have been properly installed to the 9000Pro After the main display appears insert the Plug in Custom Voice disk supplied with the 9000Pro and load the file lee 150VL CsVce xvc to the 9000Pro via the Plug in Manager function See page 66 for details Press the R1 LCD button to turn the RIGHT1 part LEFT GHT1 iae Live Grand _ RIGHTS i Coot orsan_ SON 5 Press the SLOT 1 button and select a voice group Sloti Flash 2 A CISH ESR 01 PLUG IN VOICE LL VL Soprano 006 Sop
37. Disco Synth Boogie IV 1 Bebop Swing amp Jazz Bebop X 5 Lovely Shuffle R amp B Pop Shuffle 1 2 XIII 6 Musette March amp Waltz Musette Reference B T Quick Guide on page 26 For basic information on using the Music Database feature refer to page 26 in the Quick Guide This section covers how to create your own Music Database setups For a list of Music Database setup parameters refer to page 214 Creating the Music Database MUSIC DATABASE Press the MUSIC DATABASE button ka MUSIC DATABASE CATEGORY HUSIC DATA TENPO ey Great Pop Songs Love is Deep 98 ids Saxy Tenor WICH Swinging Sultan 152 Strait Guitar 152 Evergreen Proud of 156 Romantic Hood Loud Guitars 1563 5156 98 ave cag Harp Solo 116 Hhite and Pale 78 Soprano Shade 78 Procol Synth c9 Ballroom Gala IDo Everything 70 M MUSIC DATABASE Called to Say in Great Pop Songs elected reate Your Music Database Create the Music Database by following the on screen instructions Gwe Since all Music Database data is stored to Flash ROM any data in the selected Music Database location will be erased and replaced by your new settings This includes all of the factory programmed preset setups If you ve deleted the fac tory set data you can use the Restore function page 154 to load a copy of it from the included disks page 6
38. Music Database setups in Flash ROM All preset setups can be edited MUSIC_DATABASE For details about Flash ROM refer to Memory Structure page 54 Reference vL 75 The Multi Pads Quick Guide on page 34 This section explains two important functions of the Multi Pads that are not covered in the Quick Guide For basic information on using the Multi Pads refer to page 34 in the Quick Guide Turning Chord Match and Repeat On Off STOP M PAD BANK 1 60 MULTIPAD MULTI PAD BANK VIEH 001 006 4 M Live Tom ArabicPerc 1 002 007 Live Crash 2 tive Kit 1 Latin Pere 1 Latin Perc 2 Live Kit 2 K 010 M Dance Kit Repeat Press the buttons simultaneously Select REPEAT or CHORD MATCH MULTI PAD BANK VIEH CURRENT BANK 01 Live Ton REPEAT CHORD MATCH PRDi PRD2 PRD3 PRDa 04 Live Kit 2 w APADI f 2 papa Select a Bank REPEAT ON ON 1 OFF OFF Select this to store d the settings Refer to the CAUTION note below Turn Repeat of each pad On or Off Use the same operation to turn Chord Match On Off Unless the Repeat function is on for the selected pad playback will end automatically a
39. esses 79 cecinere tet 166 Fall Wit siti Rer etes 22 Filet ss soni rente 93 145 Fingered 70 FEingenng uer eer tees 70 Fixed Piteh iue 86 Flash ROM eee 54 Flash style use tes 55 Floppy Disk nm 5 150 Foot controller 13 159 FOOT PEDAL SWITCH jacks 13 FOOT PEDAL VOLUME jack 13 Footswitch 13 160 Format 156 Borwatd cecinit 79 28 163 Frequency 82 93 145 147 Full Edit 94 132 134 140 Full keyboard 70 Functions 158 G GM uenire nid eic 6 171 Droe 131 H Hard disk installation 184 Harmonic Content 145 Harmony echo 35 160 164 Headphone 10 Highest key t 136 HOST SELECT switch 13 169 Initial touch 60 162 22 160 K Keyboard drum assignments 200 Keyboard percussion 58 Keyword esee 27 L LAMP ise ee 12 15 Language esiti eem 45 LCD CONTRAST control 44 LCD display enmt d 44 18 57 Left hold eee 61 Lame Qut EUR 148 54 66 74 152 Local control
40. D Controller x MIDI Chord Sys Ex Receive x x 010 D D D Initial Touch Fixed Velocity x x x Controller x MIDI Root x x x 1010 x x x Initial Touch Assign Controller x MIDI Chord Detect x x 1010 D x x After Touch Sensitivity x x x Controller x MIDI MFC10 User Ch x D x x x x After Touch Assign x x x Controller x MIDI MFC10 Template No x x jojo x x x Multi Pad MIDI MFC10 Foot Control x x x D D D MultiPad Bank x MultiPad x MIDI SW Control X es MultiPad Bank Name x x x xix x x x MIDI Template UserData x x x x x MultiPad Chord Match On Off Curent MIDI On Off x Bank Pad 1 4 BN Re es pae ae MIDI MFC10 Template User Data x x x D D x MultiPad Stop x x x D D D UTILITY MultiPad 1 2 3 4 x x x D D D AutoLoad On Off x x x D D D MultiPad Repeat ON OFF Track1 60 x x x x x Speaker On Off x x x D D D MultiPad Volume MultiPad x Display MIDI Bank Select amp Program MultiPad EQ Low Change x MultiPad EQ High x MultiPad x Metronome Volume For Rec x x 1010 D D D MultiPad Panpot x D MultiPad x Poly Count x x x D D D MultiPad Reverb Depth x D MultiPad x FD Cache x x x 010 D D D MultiPad
41. L63 1 HL LOH C 2 HIGH G8 VELOCITY LIMIT LOH 0 HIGH 127 4 COMPARE KEY On COARSE FINE VOLUME DELAY PAN Custom Voice Creating Use the CATEGORY VOICE and WAVE FORM LCD buttons to select the waveform for the custom voice This is the raw sound on which the voice is based Wave forms created by the SAMPLING feature page 84 are also available for selection in the SAMPLING CATEGORY 93 maximum velocity range for the voice NOTE When a Drum Kit is selected the WAVE FORM parameter is replaced by the INSTRUMENT parameter and individual instruments can be selected rather than waveforms These parameters adjust the pitch of the voice COARSE tunes in semitone steps and FINE tunes in 1 cent steps a cent is 1 100th of a semitone Sets the position of the voice in the stereo field Sets the amount of delay before the sound is heard in other words the time between when the key is pressed and when the envelope begins The higher the value the longer the delay Sets the waveform volume Example for NOTE LIMIT Els When the voice OCTAVE is set to a value other than 0 the range specified by the NOTE LIMIT parameters is shifted by the corresponding amount and some notes may not sound If LOW HIGH PLI sound is No sound is this happens check the R1 produced produced OCTAVE setting in the MIXING CONSOLE TUNE display NOTE LIMIT and VELOCITY
42. Track Setting for Recording Multi Track Recording The explanations here apply to step 5 on page 111 MULTI 01 SONG NAHE NEHSONG HID Select the desired menu See page 125 12345678910 aiam ami ai acr ini ini REC HODE REPLACE Press NEXT when settings are ready Press START to begin See Part Selecting Record Selecting on page 113 No data Muted track Play track Select the part for the corresponding track Record track REC 39055 PLAY PLAY D See Delete on page 113 Set the desired track to REC Select REC MODE which appears when selecting CURRENT SONG in step 3 01 E55 01 Select this to return to the TRACK main display SS REC MODE PUNCH IN 3 PUNCH 001 5 Press NEXT when settings are ready Press START to begin Rehearsal recordin 1234565789 1011 12 13 19 15 16 PUNCH IN RECORD HODE MEASURE SET TRIGGER FIRST Set the related parameter REPLACE ER FOOT PUNCH IN FOOT SH2 For details see below Available when PUNCH IN TRIG dl 1 av GER is set to AUTO SET Record Mode e Replace Follow the normal recording procedure described in the previous sec w The only difference is
43. been connected the SC NEXT appropriate device must be selected here Execute the Save operation by following the on screen instructions CAUTION When overwriting an exist ing file all data is saved This means that previous data corresponding to unchecked OFF items will be over writ ten with empty data Saving style data can be exe cuted via the Style Manager function page 74 Reference Disk SCSI Operations Copying Files amp Copying Floppy Disks The Copy File function allows you to copy files to a different directory on the same disk or to another disk The Copy Floppy Disk COPY FD function allows you to make complete copies of floppy disks a perfect way to make backup copies of your important data The explanations here apply to step 3 of the Basic Procedure on page 150 Select the desired menu gt COPY FILE FD 77 wore J The COPY FD function cannot be used to copy hard disk data Copies can only be made to the same type of floppy disk as the source disk i e 2HD to Execute the COPY FD operation by 2HD or 2DD to 2DD following the on screen instructions Some types of pre recorded music software disks are copy _ protected Select the source files Select the destination device and directory Press this button to COPY FILE FD MEE 1355 K change the type of COPY FILE FD ME 1365K BAGEGO
44. stop sounding the instant they are released 1 Key Off Mit D bezeichnete Tasten h ren sofort auf zu klingen sobald sie losgelassen wer 2 Alternate Group Playing any instrument within a numbered group will immediately stop the den sound of any other instrument in the same group of the same number 2 Alternate Group Wenn ein Instrument innerhalb einer numerierten Gruppe gespielt wird 3 Same as Standard Kit wird sofort der Klang jedes anderen Instruments mit derselben Nummer innerhalb dieser 4 No Sound Gruppe gestoppt 5 StyleLvStd MSB 127 LSB 0 PC 124 is the same assignments as Live Standard Kit 3 Entspricht dem Standard Kit 6 StyleLvFunk MSB 127 LSB 0 PC 125 is the same assignments as Live Funk Kit 4 Kein Klang 5 StyleLvStd MSB 127 LSB 0 PC 124 ist die gleiche Zuordnung wie Live Standard Kit 6 StyleLvFunk MSB 127 LSB 0 PC 125 ist die gleiche Zuordnung wie Live Funk Kit Appendix Anhang Annexe 7 8 575 Affectation des percussions de clavier Bank Select MSB 0 127 127 127 127 127 127 127 Bank Select LSB 0 127 0 0 0 0 0 0 Program Change 1 128 26 28 33 41 49 81 124 MIDI Keyboa
45. x x x Right 3 Harmonic Content Voice Voice D Variation DSP3 Effect parameter 2 x P 9 x x Right 3 Brightness 9 9 Voleo mE Variation DSP3 Connection x x x x x x Right EQ Low 2 EQ Voice A Variation DSP3 Part x x x x x Right 3 EQ High EQ Voice x DSP3 Variation DSP3 Return Level x x X x x Return Left Part On Off D Acmp x Level Left Voice D Acmp x Ins1 DSP4 On Off o Effects Voice x Left Voice Octave o Voice Acmp x Ins1 DSP4 Insertion Type o Effects Voice x Left Part Volume 1151 DSP4 Effect parameter x x x x x D D x Left Part Panpot x Acmp x Ins1 DSP4 Fast Slow Sw Effects Voice x Left Reverb Depth Effects x Appendix Anhang Annexe 06S 591 Parameter Chart Parameter Tabelle Tahleau tles param tres s 8 a 8 JS 6 g 8 3 c 6 a 3 5 5 m 5 o S 9 o z o g S ols 8 2 8 81818 v F Plo dla 9 5 9 8 315 5 415 8 85 25 05 5 5 85 85 05 5 2 3 5 68 2
46. 005 5 I JazzSisters VibratoRate VibratoDetay Harmony 1volume Harmony 2volumi 010 M SpdyMouse VALUE Qa e 1 Press the VOCAL HAR MONY SELECT button 2 Select a Vocal TYPE PARAMETER 3 Edit the desired Vocal Harmony Harmony type parameters Vocal Harmony Parameters Chordal Type Vocoder Type Determines how the harmony notes are applied Harmony Gender Type Lead Gender Type Can be set to Off or Auto When Auto the gender of the harmony sound is changed automati cally Determines whether and how the gender of the lead vocal sound i e the direct microphone sound will be changed When no gender change occurs When Unison Male or Female is selected the corresponding gender change is applied to the lead vocal In this case the number of harmony notes which can be produced in addition to the lead vocal is reduced to one Lead Gender Depth Adjusts the degree of lead vocal gender change produced when one of the Lead Gender Types above is selected Lead Pitch Correction Auto Upper Gender Threshold When Correct is selected the pitch of the lead vocal is shifted in precise semitone steps This parameter is only effective when one of the Lead Gender Types is selected Gender change will occur when the harmony pitch reaches or exceeds the specified number
47. 104 Native System Parameter 105 Noise Gate ettet e 82 Normahze 90 Note Limits 95 137 INGER 127 136 NTSC PAL 5 A rtt 165 nu 127 136 0 OCTAVE ete iot 18 61 145 Offset Volume 105 ON Bass aves 70 One Touch Setting 24 73 Oe 180 Organ Plutes 19 62 126 Packing list eerte 6 Panel logos eere 6 Panpot E 145 Parameter 214 Parameter lock 166 214 Part on off 16 17 18 24 31 aout URS 57 Password 156 IPIE 121 PC keyboard 12 46 167 PHONES jack 13 Pitch bend 145 PITCH BEND wheel 59 Play mode eee 56 Playback 21 30 32 33 34 78 Plug in Board 42 64 100 Plug in Board installation 181 Plug in Custom Voice 64 100 Plug in Manager 64 66 100 Plug in Setting uses 69 Plug in Voice 43 64 100 Poly counter eee 166 Poly Expansion sess 69 Poly mono eese 35 60 POR eebe 173 145 160 POWER
48. DEVICE FD DIRECTORY CONTENT NL CsVce xvc Press NEXT to continue PAGE CONTROL LORD PLUG IN CUSTOM VOICE DIRECTORY CONTENT 150UL CsVce xvc Press NEXT to continue PAGE CONTROL Follow the on screen instructions Reference Plug in Voices Save This allows you to copy Plug in Voice data from Flash ROM to disk The explanations here apply to step 4 on page 66 SAVE PLUG IN CUSTOH VOICE Select the save SLOT He recommend COMPLETE after editing Board Custom Voices with a PC This performs Board Custom Voice Backup first then saves the data to disk select QUICK in other cases vor j The Plug in Voice related data in Flash ROM page 64 is maintained even if the Plug in Board has been removed Make sure to execute the save operation if you have important data in Flash ROM that you wish to keep Press NEXT to continue mc Follow the on screen instructions SLOTA PLG150 L ROSCH SLOT2 PLG150 AN COMPLETE BAC Select the appropriate Slot number cor Select QUICK or COMPLETE responding to the board which applies to See below about these two types of sav the voice parameters you wish to save to ing methods disk PAGE CONTROL PLUG IN CUSTOM VOICE MEMORY Tans GIT Quick Save Saves all the Plug in Custom Voice Native System parameters and the Board Custom Voice data in Flash ROM to a disk Complete Used for backin
49. LORD PLUG IN CUSTOM VOICE Select the Load SLOT DEVIC D DIRECTORY 50UL CsVce xvc PLUG IN CUSTOM VOICE SLOT1 PLG150 VL PAGE CONTROL Follow the on screen instructions This method lets you individually load the three types of parameters explained in the chart on page 66 EI LOAD PLUG IN CUSTOM VOICE display the Press MEXT to continue mes property of the DEVICE X DIRECTORY CONTENTS selected file rom 15 Csvce xvc 150UL CsVce xvc BACK If an optional SCSI device is connected Select the file to be loaded See page 151 for details on or the optional internal hard disk is installed select the appropriate device directory file selection See page 150 for details See below about this function EI LORD PLUG IN CUSTOH VOICE Select the load SLOT Choose one of the STINRTION SLOT 1 PLG150 VL three methods for selecting files erer vorce _ See page 151 for instructions on selecting files eee NERY CATEG DESTINATION Hero Trumpet 2 8 ChaosGuitat FiugetHorn Synpick Tuba VL Sapper No Data c LI M 2 3 a 5 6 2 8 E 10 11 Lay Disk Flash ROM You can select the desired Plug in Voice and load it to the desired loca tion in Flash ROM See CAUTION on page 151 Select this to PAGE CONTROL LORD PLUG IN CUSTOM VOICE fj M INDIVIDUAL
50. of the most common voice allocation formats sEven ithe devis Many MIDI devices are compatible with GM System Level 1 as is most commercially used satisfy all the conditions available software above keep in mind that the The 9000Pro is compatible with GM System Level 1 sounds may differ slightly depending on the particular Wei XG MIDI device used for playback XG is a major enhancement of the GM System Level 1 format and has been developed this includes the 9000Pro by Yamaha specifically to provide more voices and variations as well as greater expres sive control over voices and effects and to ensure compatibility of data well into the future The 9000Pro is compatible with XG DOC This voice allocation format is compaible with many of Yamaha s MIDI devices including the Clavinova series instruments This is also a common format used with various Yamaha software The 9000Pro is compatible with DOC Reference 171 MIDI Functions Connecting to a Personal Computer Connecting the 9000Pro to a computer via the TO HOST terminal or the MIDI termi nals lets you take advantage of the enormous processing power and editing flexibility of computer generated music Connection can be done in one of two ways Using the 9000Pro MIDI terminals E Using the TO HOST terminal In the explanation examples here the MIDI A terminals Usin
51. In general the extensive built in effects and other Part controls of the 9000Pro provide all you need for processing and mixing complex multi Part songs However there may be times when you want to sweeten or process a certain Voice or sound with a favor ite outboard effect unit or record a Part to a separate track of a tape recorder The Line Out settings are designed just for these kinds of applications M PAD REG 55i 01 Yea HIXING CONSOLE Select the desired Sets the output con part figuration for the selected part See below for details cannot be applied to the SUB LINE OUT jacks the PHONES jack sponding jack jack Reference HIXING CONSOLE 285 01 jem 258 vore 1 1 Snare Drum Select the desired drum instrument sound An individual percussion setting overrides the Part settings made from the display at left When assigned to one of the SUB settings DSP effects cannot be applied to the percussion sound When set to one of the SUB settings the sound of the Part will not be output through When set to SUB1 amp 2 the Part is output in stereo 1 left 2 right selected When set to SUB384 the Part is output in stereo 3 left 4 right M 2 Settings of SUB1 SUB2 SUB3 an
52. 0 gt 3 Press the MEMORY button The LCD display will prompt you to select the desired Registration number Press the MEMORY button again to exit from this display MEMORY REGISTRATION ee ONE TOUCH SETTING 0 gt 4 Press one of the REGISTRATION MEMORY buttons 1 through 8 REGISTRATION MEMORY FREEZE REGIST BANK 1 64 mag In this example the panel settings are memorized to button number 3 Since all Registration Memory data is stored to Flash ROM any data in the Registration Memory location you selected in step 2 above will be erased and replaced by your new settings This includes the factory programmed preset Reg istration Memory settings banks 01 03 If you ve deleted the factory set data you can use the Restore function page 154 to load a copy of it from the included disks page 6 Registration Memory banks 64 banks in Flash ROM All banks can be edited 04 64 BANK 01 DEC banks do not 2 contain preset setups 221 5 2 01 03 These banks contain preset setups factory settings For details about Flash ROM refer to Memory Structure on page 54 Disk Song Playbac EDIT Make sure to read the section Using the Floppy Disk Drive FDD and Floppy Disks on page 5 Song related buttons
53. 001 006 Live Strs Solo Violin gt E 002 007 Live Arco Orch Brass 003 H 008 Flute Symphon Str Orch FLBr 005 2 010 M berStrinss Orch Oboe 00000 Press the corresponding buttons to select the various pages a Quick Guide FL Playing Two or Three Voices Simultaneously gt Press the PART ON OFF RIGHT2 button to turn the RIGHT2 part ON Automatically turned on PART SELECT SCH La LEFT HOLD LEFT RIGHT1 RIGHT2 RIGHTS CH d Cs MM m PART ON OFF 2 Select a voice group For example select CHOIR amp PAD Se 4 Select a voice For example select Hah Choir Play the voices The voice selected for R1 page 16 and the voice selected here are sounded simultaneously in a layer Voice RIGHT 3 can be set in the same way described above by using the RIGHT3 button instead Try out some of these other voices Category Voice Name Comment Category Voice Name Comment Piano Live Grand Stereo sampled grand piano Brass Live Horn Stereo sampled powerful horn with realistic sound over entire section Sforzando style is also keyboard range
54. 3 Move to a position facing the front panel of the keyboard and remove the eight screws from the Plug in board Hard disk cover with a Phillips screwdriver Do not remove the other screws 5 1 1 Black screws Plug in board Hard disk cover 4 Remove the Plug in board Hard disk cover WARNING In order to drop any screws inside the 9000Pro keep the Plug in Board and cover away from the 9000Pro in the following steps 5 7 Keep the removed 8 screws pw in a safe place They will be used when attaching the Plug in board Hard disk cover to the keyboard again Reference Installing Optional Hardware z gt 5 Turn over the Plug in board Hard disk cover This is the location for the Hard disk unit See page 184 Plug in board stand ee 0 Plug in board Hard disk cover a 6 Attach the Plug in Board to the Plug in board stand Dn Remove the four screws from the Plug in stand with a Phillips screwdriver Do not remove the other screws Gold color screws 65 Attach the Plug in board to the the Plug in board stand using the four screws removed in the previous step 6 1 8 2 Gold color screws Plug in board Plug in board connector If you are installing a second board go on to step 7 below If you are installing only one board go on to step 8 e 7 As required attach another Plug in board to the Plug in board stand
55. 008 CShufle2 sty 8BeatPop sty 009 DscLatn1 sty BBandSlu sty 010 M DscLatn2 sty POPUP NOTE It may be necessary to wait for a while in step 3 until the 9000Pro can play the accom paniment since it lakes some time to read the style data from the floppy disk 3 Select a style For example select 16Balad3 4 Play the auto accompaniment page 22 About the Style Data This diagram illustrates the relationship among the style data stored to different types of memory Refer to Memory Structure on page 54 Accompaniment playback Disk Direct See above Preset Style Flash Style Save Disk Style ch Load Style Manager Store See page 74 style creator See page 126 Reference on page 76 MUSIC DATABASE button If you want to play in a certain genre of music but don t know which style and voice settings would be appropriate the convenient Music Database can help you out Simply select the desired genre from the Music Database and the 9000Pro automatically makes all appropriate panel settings to let you play in that music style For a list of Music Database setup parameters refer to page 214 Using the Music Database gt Pres
56. 147 Line Out Settings 148 Disk SCSI Operations 150 Loading Data from a Disk to Flash ROM 152 Saving Data from Flash ROM to a Disk 153 Copying Files amp Copying Floppy Disks 154 Backing Up Restoring the Data in Flash ROM 154 Converting files sssrinin 155 Renaming deleting Disk Files 155 Renaming deleting creating Directories 156 Formatting a 156 Checking a Disk sss 157 The 9000Pro Functions 158 Master Tuning Scale Tuning 158 Split Point Chord Fingering 159 Controller 159 Registration Freeze Group Voice Set Settings 163 Harmony Echo Settings 164 Video Monitor 5 165 NEU 165 Utility Settings 166 8 Connections PHONES jack page 13 PHONES INPUT VOLUME control POWER ON OFF switch MASTER VOLUME control PITCH BEND wheel MODULATION wheel SONG buttons STYLE buttons Music stand The 9000Pro is supplied with a music stand that can be attached to the instrument by inserting it into the holes as shown
57. 601 MIDI Data Format MIDI Datenformat Formatle donnees Many MIDI messages listed in the MIDI Data Format are expressed in decimal numbers binary numbers and hexadecimal numbers Hexa decimal numbers may include the letter H as a suffix Also can freely be defined as any whole number To enter data values refer to the table below Decimal Hexadecimal Binary Decimal Hexadecimal Binary Decimal Hexadecimal Binary Decimal Hexadecimal Binary 0 00 0000 0000 32 20 0010 0000 64 40 0100 0000 96 60 0110 0000 1 01 0000 0001 33 21 0010 0001 65 41 0100 0001 97 61 0110 0001 2 02 0000 0010 34 22 0010 0010 66 42 0100 0010 98 62 0110 0010 3 03 0000 0011 35 23 0010 0011 67 43 0100 0011 99 63 0110 0011 4 04 0000 0100 36 24 0010 0100 68 44 0100 0100 100 64 0110 0100 5 05 0000 0101 37 25 0010 0101 69 45 0100 0101 101 65 0110 0101 6 06 0000 0110 38 26 0010 0110 70 46 0100 0110 102 66 0110 0110 7 07 0000 0111 39 27 0010 0111 71 47 0100 0111 103 67 0110 0111 8 08 0000 1000 40 28 0010 1000 72 48 0100 1000 104 68 0110 1000 9 09 0000 1001 41 29 0010 1001 73 49 0100 1001 105 69 0110 1001 10 0 0000 1010 42 2 0010 1010 74 4 0100 1010 106 6A 0110 1010 11 0000 1011 43 2B 0010 1011 75 4B 0100 1011 107 6B 0110 1011 12 oc 0000 1100 44 2c 0010 1100 76 4c 0100 1100 108 6 0110 1100 13 oD 0000 1101 45 2D 0010 1101 77 4 0100 1101 109 6 0110 1101 14 0 00
58. 7 13 7 9 C75 C7aug C7sus4 C 14245 Chord Name Abbreviation Normal Voicing Display for root Major e Notes in parentheses be Add ninth 9 1 2 3 5 9 omitted Sixth 6 1 3 5 6 C6 If you play any three adjacent Sixth ninth 6 9 1 2 3 5 6 6 9 keys including black keys the Major seventh M7 1 3 5 7 CM7 chord sound will be canceled Major seventh ninth M7 9 1 2 3 5 7 CM7 9 and i oid SCH ments will continue playin Major seventh add sharp eleventh M7 11 2 2 or CM7 11 9 Fated 65 Ges 5 Major seventh flatted fifth 7 5 1 3 55 7 CM7b5 octaves produces accompani Suspended fourth sus4 1 4 5 Csus4 ment based only on the root Augmented aug 1 3 5 Caug A perfect fifth 1 5 produces Major seventh augmented M7aug 1 3 35 7 CM7aug accompaniment based only on Minor m 1 3 5 the root and fifth which can be Minor add ninth 9 1 2 b3 5 Cm 9 used with both major and minor chords Minor sixth m6 1 53 5 6 ae it ee ee ee The chord fingerings listed are Minor seventh m7 1 b3 5 b7 Cm7 all in root position but other Minor seventh ninth m7 9 1 2 b3 5 b7 Cm7 9 inversions can be used with Minor seventh eleventh m7 11 1 2 b3 4 5 b7 Cm7_11 the following exceptions Minor major seventh mM7 1 b3 5 7 CmM7 m7 m7b5 6 m6 sus4 aug Minor major seventh ninth mM7
59. At 3 AR 4 Maracas Stereo Tabla Roll of Edge Wind Punch 71 B 3 B 4 Tabla Flam Stream Heart Beat 72 4 10 5 Sagat 1 Bubble Foot Steps Maracas Stereo Maracas Stereo 73 CK 4 c 5 Guiro Short Stereo Tabel Dom Feed Shaker Stereo Shaker Stereo 74 D 4 D 5 Guiro Long Stereo Sagat 3 Cabasa Stereo Cabasa Stereo 75 D 4 D 5 Tabel Tak Cuica Mute Stereo 76 4 E 5 Sagat 2 Cuica Open Stereo 77 F 4 F 5 Rik Dom 78 FR 4 FR 5 Cuica Mute Stereo Rik Tak 2 79 G 4 G 5 Cuica Open Stereo Rik Finger 1 80 GH 4 08 5 2 Triangle Mute Stereo Rik Tak 4 81 A 4 5 2 Triangle Open Stereo Rik Finger 2 Triangle Mute Stereo 82 At 4 AR 5 Shaker Stereo Rik Brass Tremolo Triangle Open Stereo 83 B 4 B 5 Rik Sak 84 C 5 6 Wind Chime Stereo Rik Tik Dog Machine Gun Wind Chime Stereo 85 CH 5 C 6 Horse Laser Gun 86 D 5 D_ 6 Bird Tweet 2 Explosion 87 D 5 D 6 Firework 88 E 51 6 89 5 6 90 FR 5 FR 6 Ghost 91 G 5 8 6 Maou Appendix Anhang Annexe Plug in Voice List Plug In Stimmenliste Liste des voix plug in The voices in the list below are created by loading the data from the included Plug in Custom Voice Disk to the 9000Pro via the Plug in Manager function page 66 Die Stimmen in der untenstehenden Liste werden erzeugt indem die Daten von der beiliegenden Diskette Plug In Benutzerstimme mit Hilfe der Plug In Managerfunk tion in das 9000Pro geladen werden siehe Seite 6
60. Data Range is different according to the Effect type value Appendix Anhang Annexe MIDI Data Format MIDI Datenformat Format de donn es MIDI lt Table 3 6 gt MIDI PARAMETER CHANGE TABLE SPECIAL EFFECT Address Size Data Parameter Recognized Description Default H 04 00 00 2 00 7F INSERTION EFFECT TYPE MSB Refer to the XG EFFECT 49 DISTORTION 00 7F INSERTION EFFECT TYPE LSB 00 basic type 00 02 1 00 INSERTION EFFECT PARAMETER1 Refer to the XG EFFECT PARAMETER LIST depends on insertion 1 ype 03 1 00 7F INSERTION EFFECT PARAMETER2 Refer to the XG EFFECT PARAMETER LIST depends on insertion 1 ype 04 1 00 7F INSERTION EFFECT PARAMETERS Refer to the XG EFFECT PARAMETER LIST depends on insertion 1 ype 05 1 00 7F INSERTION EFFECT Refer to the EFFECT PARAMETER LIST depends on insertion 1 ype 06 1 00 7F INSERTION EFFECT PARAMETERS Refer to the EFFECT PARAMETER LIST depends on insertion 1 ype 07 1 00 7F INSERTION EFFECT Refer to the XG EFFECT PARAMETER LIST depends on insertion 1 ype 08 1 00 7F INSERTION EFFECT PARAMETER7 Refer to the XG EFFECT PARAMETER LIST depends on insertion 1 ype 09 1 00 7F INSERTION EFFECT
61. Disk The 9000Pro also allows you to store your data to floppy disk an optional hard disk drive or an external optional SCSI device such as a hard disk drive or removable storage System Backup See next page Floppy disk Dm Hard disk optional installed SCSI device optional connected One Touch Setting One Touch Setting Restore Panel settings page 214 Registration Memory Registration Memory Load Restore Back Music Database Music Database Restore Multi Pad Creator Save Back up page 141 Multi Pad Load Restore Save Back up Style Creator page 126 Flash Style Flash Style Load Restore Save Back up Setup MIDI settings etc page 214 Setup Setup Load Restore Save Load Save Load Save Load Save Custom Voice d Load Organ Flutes page 62 Organ Flutes Organ Flutes Mixing Console page 144 Effect data Effect data Plug in Custom Voice page 100 Plug in Custom Voice Plug in Custom Voice Custom Voice page 92 Custom Voice Sampling page 84 Can be expanded by installing optional SIMM memory modules page 185 Wave Song Creator page 110 Song Storing your original data to Flash ROM erases the corresponding factory d
62. EI we Loading style data can be exe cuted via the Style Manager function page 74 EI LOAD FRON DISK Lk INDIVIDUAL DEVICE FD DIRECTORY FILE UF_001 USR Press NEXT to continue PAGE CONTROL PAGE CONTROL UEM LORD FRON DISK AER SETUP All setup data l USER DATA LOAD see list on page 214 SETUP MULTI PAD 1 CEFEETDATR COSTUH UOCE EFFECT All User effect data ion BRNK 01 REGISTRATION ORGAN FLUTES DATA page 146 Press to continue REGIS All Registration DATA CONTENT DESTINATION e TRATION 7 MS e erie es pan 02 SETUP DATA REGIST PAD VOICE FLUTES MULTI All Multi Pad data Voice BANK 23 BANK 04 PAD page 141 0 BANK 05 BANK 05 LON BANK 06 BANK 06 OFF OFF OFF OFF CUSTOM All Custom Voice VOICE data including wave avr es av 1 Lass seess sel data saved using Set the data type to ON or OFF the Wave save op Select the source data Select the destination Data types set to ON will be loaded tion page 92 in the disk Flash ROM data for which the data ORGAN All Organ Flutes PAGECONTROL type has been set to OFF will be FLUTES settings page 62 BACK NEXT retained Execute the Load operation by following the on screen instructions Reference 081 151 Disk SCSI Operations Saving Data from Flash ROM to a Disk The data types described below can be sa
63. MIC fader in the MAIN VOLUME display to an appropriate level INPUT VOLUN note Refer the important notes and caution message on page 80 Els Turn the INPUT VOLUME control all the way down when disconnecting a micro phone zi Since the MIC LINE jack is highly sensitive it may pick up and produce noise when nothing is connected To avoid this always set the INPUT VOL UME to minimum when nothing is con nected to the MIC LINE IN jack 2 Vocal Harmony with Accompaniment Playback gt Turn AUTO ACCOMPANIMENT and start the accompani 2 Press the VOCAL HARMONY V H 9 button to turn the Vocal ment page 20 Harmony effect on VOCAL HARMONY 3 Press the VOCAL HARMONY SELECT button 4 Select a Vocal Harmony type VOCAL HARMONY Q TALK Q DSP 8 V H 9 For this example M 001 CountryQuar RES 01 006 Std Duet 002 ClsdMenQuar 007 A M MenChoir 003 MixAcapQuar 008 M ClosedChoir r WomenChoir E 005 _JazzSisters M Girl Duet 010 M SpdyMouse Q SELECT JazzSisters is selected np Play the keyboard while singing into the microphone The Vocal Harmony effect can be controlled by the chords you play in the Auto Accompaniment section the
64. Modern 8 beat that uses the Hit and Live Standard drum kits 8Beat Adria This gorgeous style evokes the north Mediterranean but can be used well for a variety of songs AcousticBld An unplugged style with a half time 3 4 feel Check out the great guitar sounds 16 BEAT Slow amp Easy This style evokes the sophisticated relaxed atmosphere of a modern jazz club Category SWING amp JAZZ Style Name Big Band 3 Comment Traditional big band style especially suited for ballads and slow blues Swingfox Check out the different major and mi nor patterns for Intro IIl This style is good for a wide wide range of songs BBandBallad This style is perfect for recreating the sound and atmosphere of the great big bands and orchestras of the swing era Piano Swing A swinging Pianist style Turn the CHD1 chord part on and off for dif ferent arrangements Smooth Jazz Enjoy the Latin feel of this modern fu sion style DANCE House Musik Analog synths techno drums rave beat today s modern dance music at your fingertips DiscoChoco Try starting this classic 70 s disco style with Intro III Flip Hop This contemporary hip hop rhythm features sine wave acid lines and high pitched snare Rap along with this Metronome and Bass Chord Hold These are two special styles designed for practice purposes they do not have any of the normal
65. fects especially distortion type effects Some filter resonance settings in the Custom Voice Creator display can result in distorted sound s the gain of the Low band set too high in the Master Equalizer display Mixing Console page 147 If this applies to the Sampled voice you may have recorded the sam ple s at too high a level See page 84 A strange flanging or doubling sound occurs The sound is slightly different each time the keys are played Are the R1 and R2 parts set to ON and both parts set to play the same voice If you are routing the MIDI OUT on the 9000Pro to a sequencer and back to the MIDI IN you may want to set Local Control page 175 to off to avoid MIDI feedback When a disk is inserted into the disk drive the DISK IN USE lamp automatically lights and the data starts loading auto matically even though no disk functions have been execut ed This is normal and no cause for concern if FD CACHE page 166 has been set to ON If you do not need the data loaded to cache memory you can eject the floppy disk You can also operate other functions from the panel without disturbing the automatic cache loading process Reference A eee 103 Accompaniment starting 20 Accompaniment volume 25 After Touch 60 162 INT qe 28 56 151 ATL E
66. v8 85 Pre Effect You can set up a maximum of three DSP effects to be applied to the source sound as it is sampled The DSP blocks are connected in series as shown below The following dis play will be shown in step 10 on page 40 92 RECORDING Press this button to DSP 1 3 are applied to the audiosignal j Adjust the settings as desired switch between the cur Press NEXT or BACK rently selected wave and the currently selected DSP 1 HmEnhance1 panel voice Select the desired DSP block Select this to call up the TYPE PARAMETER VALUE storing display Select the desired 00 280 5 is type of the selected Anp 2RotsP Drive 1 hange the balance between the BSP block PitchCh91 Peien direct dry and effect wet sound Select the parameter and adjust the value of the selected parameter Note that the contents of the parameter may be different depending on the selected DSP type Importing Wave Files from Disk To import previously saved waveform files via the PSR 8000 or standard WAV or AIFF format files from disk insert the appropriate disk into the 9000Pro floppy disk drive then press the FILE IMPORT LCD button in step 3 in Basic Procedure on page 86 FILE IMPORT Select this and press the Import a wave file and make a Custom NEXT button to call up the voice Hhich file do you want to inport display that imports the press NEXT or BACK WAV or AIFF format file d WAV AIFF
67. x x x Scale Harmony Echo Assign Harmony Harmony x Scale Tuning A x x x Scale Harmony Echo Chord Note Only Harmony Harmony x Scale Tuning A x x x Scale x Harmony Echo Touch Limit Harmony Scale Tuning x x x Scale x Harmony Echo Speed Harmony Scale Tuning Arabic Equal Temp D x Scale Master EQ Scale Tuning User Data Multi Pad Bank 60 Scale x EQ No x x Voice Master Transpose EQ Low EQ1 Gain D x x x x D Master Master Transpose x x x x EQ Low Mid EQ2 Gain x x x x 4 4 Song Transpose x x D x EQ Mid EQ3 Gain x x D D D D Keyboard Transpose x x D Tune x EQ Mid High EQ4 Gain x D D D 4 4 Transpose Assign x x x x EQ High EQ5 Gain x x x x Master Tempo M Tempo x x Tempo x EQ Low EQ1 Freq x x D D D D Controller EQ Low Mid EQ2 Freq x x D D D D Master Foot Volume Master Individual x x D Controller D EQ Mid EQ3 Freq x x x x x x Foot Volume Assign x x x Controller x M Foot Swi Type x x x Controller x EQ Mid High EQ4 Freq x x x Ed Foot Sw1 Part Assign D Controller D Master EQ High EQS Freq E x Foot Sw1 Percussion Kit x x D
68. 1 36 EQ frequency4 100 10 0 kHz 2E OF 1 01 78 EQQ4 0 1 12 0 7 10 1 x 11 1 34 4C EQ 5 12 12 dB 40 12 1 1 EQ frequency5 0 5 16 0 kHz 34 13 1 01 78 EQ Q5 0 1 12 0 7 14 1 00 01 EQ shape5 00 shelving 01 peaking 0 TOTAL SIZE 15 lt Table 3 5 gt MIDI PARAMETER CHANGE TABLE EFFECT 2 ae Data Parameter Recognized Description Default 3 On 0 2 00 7F INSERTION EFFECT n TYPE MSB Refer the MIDI EFFECT 49 DISTORTION 00 7F INSERTION EFFECT n TYPE LSB 00 basic type 00 2 1 00 7F INSERTION EFFECT 1 Refer the MIDI EFFECT PARAMETER LIST on insertion 1 ype 3 1 00 7F INSERTION EFFECT n PARAMETER2 Refer the MIDI EFFECT PARAMETER LIST depenas on insertion 1 ype 4 1 00 7F INSERTION EFFECT n PARAMETERS Refer the MIDI EFFECT PARAMETER LIST depends on insertion 1 ype 5 1 00 7F INSERTION EFFECT n PARAMETER4 Refer the MIDI EFFECT PARAMETER LIST depends on insertion 1 Appendix Anhang Annexe 019 MIDI Data Format MIDI Datenformat Format de donn es MIDI 611 6 1 00 7F INSERTION EFFECT n PARAMETERS Refer the MIDI EFFECT PARAMETER LIST dep
69. 15 EQ High Frequency 500 16 0kHz 28 58 16 EQ High Gain 12 1208 52 76 Appendix Anhang Annexe 96S 597 Liste des parametres d effet de voix CHORUS1 2 3 4 MSB 65 TREMOLO variation insertion block MSB 70 CELESTE1 2 3 4 chorus variation insertion block MSB 66 No Parameter Display Value See Table Control No Parameter Display Value See Table Control 1 LFO Frequency 0 00Hz 39 7Hz 0 127 tables e 1 LFO Frequency 0 00Hz 39 7Hz 0 127 tablet 2 AM Depth 0 127 0 127 2 LFO Depth 0 127 0 127 3 PM Depth 0 127 0 127 3 Feedback Level 63 63 1 127 4 4 Delay Offset 0 0mS 50mS 0 127 table 2 5 5 6 EO Low Frequency 32Hz 2 0kHz 4 40 table 3 6 EQ Low Frequency 32Hz 2 0kHz 4 40 table 3 7 EQ Low Gain 12 12dB 52 76 7 EQ Low Gain 12 412dB 52 76 8 EQ High Frequency 500Hz 16 0kHz 28 58 table 3 8 EQ High Frequency 500Hz 16 0kHz 28 58 table 3 9 EQHigh Gain 12 12dB 52 76 9 EQ High Gain 12 412dB 52 76 10 10 Dry Wet D63 gt W D W D W63 1 127 e 11 EQ Mid Frequency 100Hz 10 0kHz var ins1 4 block 14 54 table 3 11 EQ Mid Frequency 100Hz 10 0kHz var ins1 4 block 14 54 table 3 12 EQ Mid Gain 12 12dB var ins1 4 block 52 76 12 EQ Mid Gain 12 12dB var ins1 4 block 52 76 13 EQ Mid Width 1 0 12 0 var ins1 4 block 10 120 13 EQ
70. CLEAR Execute the Copy PAD operation BANK SELECT 02 2 3 m a Select the destination pad Select the source v zz Banks 59 and 60 cannot pad be selected Turning Chord Match and Repeat On Off Use the same operation as on page 77 Reference Ov Multi Pad Creator Step Recording The Step Recording features lets you record notes with absolutely precise timing The procedure is essentially the same as that for Song Recording with the exception of the points listed below Recording resolution for the Multi Pad Creator is 96 parts per quarter note for Song Recording it is 384 Just as with Song Recording the End Mark position can be changed freely the Multi Pad Creator This allows you to finely adjust the phrase length for the Pad This would be convenient for example in synchronizing repeat playback of a Pad set to Repeat On with the keyboard and auto accompaniment playback Since the Multi Pads have only one track the track cannot be changed l7 148 E5501 CURRENT BANK FREE 01 0 1 ARER RECORDING CLEAR REPEAT CHORD HATCH 1 RECORDING 2_ CLEAR copy BANK 01 User Pad 1 m 02 User Pad 2 2 03 User Pad 3 04 User Pad d User Padi 1 Reso 96 ppo 001 1 000 End 001 1 000 HEAS f BEAT Reference 141 Mixing Console A full screen
71. CUSTOM VOICE CREATOR Grand Piano CUCTOM UNICE CDEOTOAD Crand Diann emn gt aan 2 STORE CLEAR 31777117 2 3 a VOICE SET CLEAR D HASTER VOLUHI 1 1 Select the desired SCALE CURVE FLRT menu by pressing the SC button AFTER TOUCH FILTER EG COMPARE INITIAL TOUCH RESONANCE ATTACK DECAY RELEASE MASTER VOLUME CURVE SENS _SCALE CURVE 200 PRESET 2220 Sa inm dec E CURVEZ PIRNO2 CURVE3 PAGE CONTROL 7 Press the CUSTOM VOICE button to select the edited voice and play the keyboard The operations for each function corresponding to step 5 are covered in the following explanations e Reference 06 91 Custom Voice Creating Easy Editing Parameters FILTER Determines the timbre of the voice See below for details EG The EG Envelope Generator parameters affect the volume envelope o the voice See below for details VIBRATO Sets up the vibrato effect See below for details VOLUME Determines the volume of the voice FILTER FREQ and RESONANCE These settings determine the overall timbre of the sound by boosting or cutting a certain fre quency range In addition to making the sound either brighter or more mellow Filter can be used to produce electronic synthesizer like effects e FREQ Determines the cu
72. El wr Other notes besides those of Start recording the C major seventh scale can R di begi icall 1 he kevb d be recorded however this may ecording begins automatically as soon as you play on the keyboard es lt ini tha recorded phrase If Chord Match is set to on for the Multi Pad to be recorded you should record using not matching the chord when being played back the notes of the C major seventh scale C D E G A and B D The rhythm part of the cur rently selected style is used as chord note a rhythmic guide in place of a C S scale note metronome playing back dur 8 018 0 Others non scale note ing recording However it is not recorded to the Multi Pad M 2 Stop recording Press the STOP LCD button or the panel MULTI PAD STOP button to stop record ing when you ve finished playing the phrase Clear 95 Bini 01 CURRENT BANK ME sek RECORDING CLEAR REPEAT CHORD HATCH 1 RECORDING 2 CLEAR Ky copy Clears only the CLEAR CLEAR gt rently selected pad Clears all four pads in CLEAR the currently selected menn bank PRD 01 Live To C 0 182 C 0 1K 2 0 1K C 0 1K 3 0 1K c 0 1K 4 t 0 1K v Copy 95 Bini 01 CURRENT BANK 01 Live Tom ken PER RECORDING CLEAR REPEAT CHORD HATCH 1 RECORDING 2
73. OK Control 91 Reverb Send Level OK OK Control 93 Chorus Send Level OK OK Control 94 Variation Send Level OK OK Control 98 NRPN LSB OK Control 99 NRPN MSB OK Control 100 RPN LSB OK Control 101 RPN MSB OK Reference Style Creator Step Recording Full Edit The Step Recording features lets you record notes with absolutely precise timing The procedure is essentially the same as that for Song Recording with the exception of the points listed below Recording resolution for the Style Creator is 96 ppq parts per quarter note for Song Recording it is 384 ppq n Song Recording the End Mark position can be changed freely in the Style Creator it cannot be changed This is because the length of the style is automatically fixed depending on the selected section For example if you create a style based on a sec tion of four measures length the End Mark position is automatically set to the end of the fourth measure and cannot be changed in the Step Recording display Tracks can be changed in Song Recording however they cannot be changed in the Style Creator 9 Heart Beat Reso 96 ppq 1 SECTION HAIN PRTTERN LENGTH d 20 Rev Snd 2 148 BEAT a a Select this to up the 0 Cho 504 Part copy Step Recording display 0 DSP3 Snd Hrm Con 64 Brightns 127 Bank HSB PART
74. PAGE CONTROL Edit the Groove parameters HAIN A ORIGINAL BEAT Select this first BEAT CONVERTER Select desired beat SHING Produces a swing feel for straight 8 and 16 beat patterns FINE Use this to make fine adjustments to the downbeat timing Press NEXT to continue ORIGINAL BEAT BEAT CONVERTER SHING FINE 16 12 a 2 PUSH Edit the Dynamics parameters HAIN A PART Select the effective part ACCENT TYPE Select desired type STRENGTH Changes the accent strength EXPAND 110 4007 COMPRESS O 907 BOOST 110 400 CUT O 307 Press NEXT to continue STRENGTH ACCENT TYPE EXPAND COMP OFF BOOST 8Beat n 16 Store as Flash style to Flash ROM by following the on screen instructions Groove parameters Beat Specifies the beats to which groove timing is to be applied i e if 8 is selected groove timing is applied to 8th notes in the selected section or if 12 is selected groove timing is applied to 8th note triplets Beat Converter Actually changes the timing of the beats specified by the Beat to the specified value The available Beat Converter settings change according to the selected Beat With a Beat setting of 8 anda Beat Converter setting of 12 for example all 8th notes in the section are shifted to 8th note triplet timing The 16A and 16B Beat Conve
75. Plug in Boards have been installed in the two slots only the value set for SLOT 1 is available Reference Creating Plug in Custom Voices Voice Editing on a Computer You can edit Board Custom Voices and Native System Parameters from your computer using special plug in software for the XGworks or XGworks lite program gt Connect your personal computer to the 9000Pro See page 172 for details about connecting a computer Please note that the MIDI terminal or the TO HOST terminal should be used when editing the Board Custom Voices on a computer 2 Install the software to the computer The following software is required XGworks or XGworks lite Please see the readme txt file that can be found in the XGworks lite folder CBX driver for Windows or USB driver Please see the readme txt file that can be found in the CBX driver folder or in the USB driver folder Plug in Editor Software for XGworks lite For installation instructions refer to the Owner s Manual of your particular Plug in Board Plug in Editor Software PLG100 VL PLG150 VL VL Visual Editor PLG100 DX PLG150 DX DX Easy Editor DX Simulator PLG150 AN AN Easy Editor AN Expert Editor PLG150 PF PF Easy Editor Place check marks next to all the event types
76. Re attach the Plug in Board cable s if necessary gt 0 Attach the Plug in board Hard disk cover to the 9000 page 183 11 Check that the installed hard disk is functioning properly Turn on the power go to the DISK display and execute the Format Hard Disk func tion page 156 If the format is completed with no trouble the hard disk is OK Optional SIMM Installation The SIMMs used must meet the following minimum specifications but this does not guarantee that they will work properly with the 9000Pro Make sure to install the SIMMs in pairs only also make sure that both modules of the pair are of the same type and memory capacity and are from the same manufacturer Consult with your nearest Yamaha representative or an authorized distributor listed at the end of this manual before purchasing SIMMs for the 9000Pro 16 bit bus compatibility or compliance with JEDEC standards SIMMs which are only compatible with 32 bit buses can not be used 70 nanoseconds or faster access time note 60 nanosecond SIMMs are faster than 70 nanosecond SIMMs No more than 18 memory chips on each SIMM module SIMM modules must be no more than 25 4 mm in height and the thickness of the SIMM should not exceed 8mm on either side when measured from the center of the SIMM See below SIMMs with parity and EDO DRAM modules can also be used Use only SIMMs of 4 8 16 or 32 megabyte capacity Install SIMM memory at your o
77. Securely plug the female end of the AC power cord supplied with the 9000Pro into the rear panel AC cord socket Plug the power cord into a convenient AC outlet To disconnect the AC power cord set the POWER switch to OFF then unplug the AC power cord from the AC outlet and disconnect it from the 9000Pro AC INLET Make all necessary connections pages 12 and 13 making sure first that all level controls on those devices are set to the minimum Refer to the owner s manuals of the devices you are using for more information on connections Since the 9000Pro has no built in speakers you need to monitor its sound output via external audio equipment Alternatively you could use a pair of headphones Turn the power ON If you ve connected any external devices to the 9000Pro turn on the power of those devices in the following order MIDI controller 9000Pro AN Press the POWER switch After a while the main diaplay below appears E LEFT RIGHT1 21 Galaxy SONG RIGHT2 Live Strs E YLE RIGHT3 Cool Organ W 2 62 18 Hm HAIN VOLUHE WARNING 7 for the AC voltage supplied in the area in which it is to be used as listed on the rear panel Connecting the unit to the wrong AC supply can cause serious damage to the i
78. Weitere Informationen finden Sie auf Seite 175 Der Ton Generator funktioniert normalerweise in Antwort auf MIDI Input als Multi Timbre Ton Generator mit 16 Channels MIDI Nachrichten haben demnach keinen EinfluB auf die Panel Voices oder andere Panel Einstel lungen Die unten aufgef hrten MID Meldungen wirken sich jedoch auf Frontplat ten Voices Style Multi Pad und Songeinstellungen aus MIDI MASTER TUNE XG System Parameter MASTER TUNE XG System Parameter TRANSPOSE System Exclusive Nachrichten welche die Einstellungen REVERB CHORUS oder DSP EFFECT ndern XG MULTI EQ Parameter MIDI Nachrichten haben auch EinfluB auf die Panel Einstellungen wenn einer der folgenden MIDI Empfangsmodi gew hlt ist Diese Modi k nnen auf der Frontplatte ausgew hlt werden siehe Seite 176 RIGHT1 RIGHT2 RIGHTS LEFT KEYBOARD ACMP RHYTHM1 ACMP RHYTHM2 ACMP BASS ACMP CHORD1 ACMP CHORD2 ACMP PAD ACMP PHRASE1 ACMP PHRASE2 CHORD ROOT OFF Diese Control Change Nachrichten werden nicht durch die Panel Bedie nung des 9000Pro bermittelt sondern k nnen durch die ACCOMPANI MENT Begleitung oder die SONG Wiedergabe bermittelt werden 72 S Les pistes de chaque canal peuvent tre s lectionn es sur le panneau Pour plus d informations voir page 175 Le g n rateur de son fonctionne normalement comme un g n rateur de son multi timbre 16 canaux en r ponse une entr e MIDI Par cons
79. YAMAHA PROFESSIONAL Le Lee E KE b An ENGLISH _ FRAN AIS DEUTSCH A Owner s Manual Bedienungsanleitung Mode d emploi GENERAL VAS E4773 mi i for XG BUER LE Pe XG SPECIAL MESSAGE SECTION PRODUCT SAFETY MARKINGS Yamaha electronic products may have either labels similar to the graphics shown below or molded stamped facsimiles of these graph ics on the enclosure The explanation of these graphics appears on this page Please observe all cautions indicated on this page and those indicated in the safety instruction sec tion CAUTION RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK DO NOT OPEN CAUTION TO REDUCE THE RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK DO NOT REMOVE COVER OR BACK NO USER SERVICEABLE PARTS INSIDE REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL The exclamation point within the equi lateral triangle is intended to alert the user to the presence of important operat ing and maintenance servicing instruc tions in the literature accompanying the product The lightning flash with arrowhead sym bol within the equilateral triangle is intended to alert the user to the presence of uninsulated dangerous voltage within the product s enclosure that may be of sufficient magnitude to constitute a risk of electrical shock IMPORTANT NOTICE All Yamaha electronic products are tested and approved by an independent safety testing laboratory in order that you may be sure th
80. a normal Channel Mode Re Key Off vv 0 MFC10 altime message Control Change BnH 0 00H Bank Select MSB 0 OOH Normal Handled as a message for control by the Handled as a normal Channel Mode Re 126 7EH SFX kit MFC10 altime message 127 7FH Drum 1 01H Modulation 0 127 7FH Handled a message for control by the Handled a normal Channel Mode Re MFC10 altime message 2 02H No Assign 0 127 Handled as a message for control by the Handled as a normal Channel Mode Re MFC10 altime message 3 03H No Assign 0 127 7 Handled as a message for control by the Handled as a normal Channel Mode Re MFC10 altime message 4 04H Foot Control 0 127 7FH Handled a message for control by the Handled a normal Channel Mode Re MFC10 altime message 7 07H Main Volume 0 127 7 Handled as a message for control by the Handled as a normal Channel Mode Re MFC10 altime message Other Handled as a normal Channel Mode Re E ________afline message __j RealTime Message F8H MIDI Clock Handled as normal Channel Mode Re Handled as a normal Channel Mode Re altime message altime message Active Sens Handled as a normal Channel Mode Re Handled as a normal Channel Mode Re altime message altime message Other Other Handled as a normal Channel Mode Re LEE attine message S SN Table 2 gt MIDI B
81. available E Piano Galaxy EP Rich and dynamic DX type Saxophone Sweet Tenor Smooth tenor sax with natural Electric Piano vibrato Stage Ep 3 different dynamics sampled Sweet Sprno Soprano sax with natural vibra for realistic and expressive tim to Very expressive Play long bre changes notes Organ Cool Jazz Organ sample with authentic Sweet Clari Jazzy clarinet with natural vi chorus vibrato brato Rotor Organ Organ sample with real rotary Flute Sweet Flute Flute with natural vibrato Very speaker expressive Play strongly to get Accordion Musette Realistic French type accordi realistic overblown sample on Sweet Pan Authentic pan flute with natural Guitar Live Nylon Stereo sampled nylon guitar vibrato Dedicated flageolet sample for Choir amp Pad Live Gospel Stereo choir with individual high velocities smooth vibrato Cool J Gtr Dynamic fingered jazz guitar Live Vocal Very dynamic The vocal Carlos Gtr Soulful guitar sound with natu words change depending on ral distortion your playing strength Play Strings Live Strs Rich stereo sampled strings bass vocals with your left hand orchestra DreamHeaven Beautiful synth pad Live Arco Rich stereo sampled strings Synthesizer Matrix Expressive synth lead Play orchestra with fast attack long notes Trumpet Sweet Trump Expressive trumpet with natu Percussion Live StdKit Stereo sampled drums with ve ral vibrato locity switching of up to 4 lay Sweet Tromb Rea
82. buttons is pressed after the final half beat eighth note of the measure the fill in or break will begin from the next measure You can begin the accompaniment by using any of the other sections as well as the intro sections If you press one of the INTRO buttons while the ending is playing the intro section will begin playing after the ending is finished If you press one of the FILL IN amp BREAK buttons while the ending is playing the fill in or break will immediately start playing con tinuing with the main section Other Controls FADE IN OUT The FADE IN OUT button can be used to produce smooth fade ins and fade outs when starting and stopping the accompaniment e FADEIN OUT TAP TEMPO The auto accompaniment can be started at any tempo you desire by tapping out the tempo with the button For details see i page 72 TAP TEMPO SYNCRO STOP When the Synchro Stop function is engaged accompaniment playback will stop completely when all keys in the auto accompaniment section of the keyboard released Accompaniment playback will start again as soon as achord or note is played For details see page 73 SYNC STOP Quick Guide Aico ACcCcompanimen MAIN MIXER and PART ON OFF buttons ONE TOUCH SETTING buttons DISK DIRECT button One Touc
83. mipi Computer sequencer software MIDI V V interface MIDI IN RS 422 5 N MIDI OUT II 9000Pro When the HOST SELECT switch is set in the MIDI position input and output to the TO HOST terminal is ignored When using a Macintosh series computer set the MIDI interface clock setting in the application software to match the setting of the MIDI interface you are using For details carefully read the owner s manual for the software you are using When the computer has a USB interface use the Yamaha UX256 Computer sequencer software UX256 MIDI IN USB cable emu em mm MIDI OUT 9000Pro Reference 021 171 MIDI Functions Using the TO HOST terminal Connect the serial port of the personal computer RS 232C terminal or RS 422 terminal to the TO HOST terminal of the 9000Pro For the connection cable use the appropriate cable below sold separately that matches the per sonal computer type IBM PC AT Series Connect the RS 232C terminal on the computer to the TO HOST terminal on the 9000Pro using a serial cable D SUB 9P gt MINI DIN 8P cross cable Set the 9000Pro HOST SELECT switch to the PC 2 position vol EE _ fi ES 21 9000Pro
84. or 4 digits for Board voices then the ENTER key 2 digits for the style category followed by 2 digits for the specific style then the ENTER key e omg 2 digit for the song file directory followed by 3 digits for the spe cific song then the ENTER key Registration Memory 2 digits for the bank number followed by 1 digit for the specific Registration Memory then the ENTER key Step Recording Using a computer keyboard is a very convenient way to edit events in the Event List in the Song Style Multi Pad step recording pages 116 122 140 and 143 If you re familiar with operating a computer you ll find many of the editing conventions that you re used to such as moving the cursor and copying pasting apply to editing the 9000Pro data as well For a list of the parameters you can control operate from a computer keyboard see below Computer Keyboard Functions in Step Recording Keys Function Number keys 0 9 For typing in the desired timing measure beat clock or event data value ENTER Enters the event data value and moves to the next timing position T Enters the event data value and moves the cursor up Enters the event data value moves the cursor down lt Moves the cursor left gt Moves the cursor right BS Deletes a character ESC Cancels the value entry Insert Inserts the
85. quent les messages MIDI n affectent g n ralement pas les voix de pan neau ou les autres r glages de panneau Toutefois les messages MIDI list s ci dessous affectent les r glages de la voix du tableau du style des multitouches des morceaux MIDI MASTER TUNE param tres du syst me XG MASTER TUNE Param tres du syst me XG TRANSPOSE Messages exclusifs au syst me qui modifient les r glages REVERB CHORUS ou EFFET DSP Param tres XG MULTI EQ De plus les messages MIDI affectent les r glages du panneau lorsque l un des modes de r ception MIDI suivants est s lectionn Ces modes peuvent tre s lectionn s sur le tableau voir page 176 RIGHT1 RIGHT2 RIGHTS LEFT KEYBOARD ACMP RHYTHM1 2 ACMP BASS ACMP CHORD1 ACMP CHORD ACMP PAD ACMP PHRASE1 ACMP PHRASE2 CHORD OFF Ces messages de modification de commandes ne sont pas transmis par l op ration du panneau du 9000Pro mais peuvent tre transmis par la reproduction ACCOMPANIMENT Accompagnement ou SONG Morceau Appendix Anhang Annexe 245 Specifications Technische Daten Specifications Keyboard Polyphony Voices Preset Custom Organ Flute Orchestration Right Left Plug In System Slots Supported Boards Edit Sampling Quality File Import Edit RAM Capacity Expanded Capacity Consecutive Record Time Effects Reverb Chorus DSP Effect DSP Effect Number of Effects in DSP DSP Ef
86. see diagram e DELAY Determines the amount of time that elapses between the playing of a key and the start of the Vibrato effect see diagram Higher settings increase the delay of the Vibrato onset Time Reference e Custom Voice Creating Full Editing Element selection Each 9000Pro voice can have up to eight separate elements These elements are the basic sonic building blocks of the sound with each element having its own waveform envelope generator settings and other parameters CUSTOM VOICE CREATOR Grand Piano ER Ka 1 Grand 2 COARSE TUNE FINE TUNE 0 VOLUME KEY DELAY L63 Conan COARSE FINE ES SET STORE CLEAL When editing in the E1 WAVEFORM E2 EG E3 FILTER or E4 LFO pages you can select the element to be edited set the maximum number of elements to be used by the voice and mute individual elements via the ELEMENT page accessed by this button KEY On VOLUME DELAY PAN You can select the desired element by pressing these buttons CUSTOM VOICE CREATOR Grand Piano 1 Grand Piano_1 2 Piano_2 Sets the element to be edited when you return to the editing pages Sets the maximum number of elements to be used by the voice Parameters VOICE These parameters individually
87. the TR1 8 and the TR9 16 settings Set the desired track to REC REC Press NEXT when settings are ready Press START to begin ad Rehearsal rec REPLACE UR HUTE E HUTE B B HUTE E HUTE HUTE 2 f tra 1 TRS tre 1 2 00080000 t t 0 0 Quick Guide Select the part for the corresponding track The available parts for all tracks are RIGHT1 RIGHT2 RIGHT3 LEFT MULTI PAD1 4 RHYTHM1 RHYTHM2 BASS CHORD1 CHORD2 PAD PHRASE1 PHRASE2 VHRM MIDI 0 Press the NEXT button 7 Set up for recording Select the required voice s select a style if required Set up all parameters as desired for recording Turn the metronome on or off as required PAGE CONTROL 9 Start recording 98 MULTI MEASURE C HEUTE FREE AREA 295K STYLE Heart Beat mwm o F 2 G2 Live Strs Cool Organ TESGSS7ESONE OMS LJ 9090066 OFF 10 gt Press RUBATO and start with SYNC START1 Upper keyboard to record in rubato You can start recording with one of the following ways Press the START STOP button to start the rhythm parts of the accompa niment and recording at the same time Press the SYNC START button to enable synchronized standby th
88. used for a variety of other music styles as well LATIN Samba City This contemporary Samba pop style features dynamic toms from the new Live drum kit Check out Ending III BALLROOM Engl Waltz A fully orchestrated luscious waltz style perfect for elegant ballroom dancing AIioACcompanimen Style related buttons Auto Accompaniment section buttons Accompaniment Sections There are various types of Auto Accompaniment sections that allow you to vary the arrangement of the accompaniment to match the song you are playing They are Intro Main Fill in amp Break and Ending By switching among them as you play you can easily produce the dynamic elements of a professional sounding arrangement in your performance INTRO This is used for the beginning of the song When the intro finishes playing accompaniment shifts to the main section MAIN This is used for playing the main part of the song It plays an accompaniment pattern of several VARIATION measures and repeats indefinitely until another section s button is pressed FILL IN amp BREAK This lets you add dynamic variations and breaks in the rhythm of the accompaniment to make your performance sound even more professional ENDING This is used for the ending of the song When the ending is finished the auto accompaniment stops automatic
89. when a footswitch connected to the corresponding rear panel FOOT SWITCH jack is pressed Auto Set When AUTO SET is selected the punch in and punch out measures are specified by the IN and OUT buttons i e recording begins auto matically at the IN measure and ends at the OUT measure Part Selecting Record Selecting The default part for each track is displayed above the REC setting The parts can be changed as required by pressing the PART SEL LCD button the part names for each track will be highlighted selecting the desired parts via the corresponding but tons When the parts have been changed press the REC SEL LCD button the PART SEL LCD button will have changed to the REC SEL LCD button again to return to the normal track setup display Bi Delete When the DEL LCD button is pressed DELETE will appear for tracks which contain data Select DELETE via the corresponding LCD buttons while holding the DEL button to delete all data in the corresponding tracks The data is actually deleted when the DEL LCD button is released Song Save Delete This function saves the edited song to the disk e Delete This function deletes the specified song file from the disk Track Setting for Recording Quick Recording The explanations here apply to step 5 on page 111 QO REALTIME LE 01 01 SONG NAHE NEHSONG HID No data Play track Muted track
90. 0 112 8 21 60sEI P 0 64 4 7 Glocken 0 112 9 22 E Piano2 0 0 5 8 Music Box 0 112 10 23 El Pno2K 0 1 5 9 TubularBell 0 112 14 24 Chor EP2 0 32 5 10 Kalimba 0 112 108 25 DX Hard 0 33 5 11 Dulcimer 0 112 15 26 DXLegend 0 34 5 12 Timpani 0 112 47 27 DX Phase 0 40 5 13 Live StdKit 127 0 80 28 DX Analg 0 41 5 14 Live FunkKt 127 0 81 29 DXKotoEP 0 42 5 15 Live Brush 127 0 82 30 VX EI P2 0 45 5 16 Live Std P 127 0 83 31 Harpsi 0 0 6 17 Live Funk P 127 0 84 32 Harpsi K 0 1 6 18 Live Brsh P 127 0 85 33 Harpsi 2 0 25 6 19 Std Kit1 127 0 0 34 Harpsi 3 0 35 6 20 Std Kit2 127 0 35 Clavi 0 0 7 21 Hit Kit 127 0 4 36 Clavi K 0 1 7 22 Room Kit 127 0 8 37 ClaviWah 0 27 7 23 Rock Kit 127 0 16 38 PulseClv 0 64 7 24 Electro Kit 127 0 24 39 PierceCl 0 65 7 25 Analog Kit 127 0 25 40 Celesta 0 0 8 26 Dance Kit 127 0 27 41 Glocken 0 0 9 27 Jazz Kit 127 0 32 42 MusicBox 0 0 10 28 Brush Kit 127 0 40 43 Orgel 0 64 10 29 SymphonyKit 127 0 48 44 Vibes 0 0 11 30 Arabic Kit 126 0 35 45 VibesK 0 1 11 31 Live Cuban 126 0 40 46 HardVibe 0 45 11 32 Live PopLtn 126 0 43 47 Marimba 0 0 12 33 SFX Kit1 126 0 0 48 MarimbaK 0 1 12 34 SFX Kit2 126 0 1 49 SineMrmb 0 64 12 35 StyleLvStd 127 0 123 50 Balafon2 0 97 12 569 Appendix Anhang Annexe Voice List Stimmentiste Liste dles voix
91. 0 127 0 127 11 Drive 0 127 0 127 12 12 EQ Low Gain distortion 12 12dB 52 76 13 13 EQ Mid Gain distortion 12 12dB 52 76 14 14 LPF Cutoff 1 0kHz thru 34 60 table 3 15 15 Output Level 0 127 0 127 16 AMP SIMULATOR variation insertion block MSB 75 LSB 0 16 17 PITCH CHANGE 1 variation Insertion1 4 block MSB 80 LSB 0 16 No Parameter Display Value See Table Control No Parameter Display Value See Table Control 1 Drive 0 127 0 127 e 1 Pitch 24 24 40 88 2 Off Stack Combo Tube 0 3 2 Initial Delay 0 1mS 400 0mS 0 127 table 7 3 LPF Cutoff 1 0k Thru 34 60 table 3 3 Fine 1 50 50 14 114 4 Output Level 0 127 0 127 4 2 50 50 14 114 5 5 Feedback Level 63 63 1 127 6 6 T 7 8 8 9 9 10 Dry Wet D63 gt W D W D W63 1 127 10 Dry Wet D63 gt W D W D lt W63 1 127 H 11 Edge Clip Curve 0 127 0 127 mild sharp 11 Pan L63 R63 1 127 12 12 Output Level 1 0 127 0 127 13 13 2 L63 R63 1 127 14 14 Output Level 2 0 127 0 127 15 15 16 16 STEREO AMP SIMULATOR variation Insertion1 4 block MSB 75 LSB 8 18 19 20 21 PITCH CHANGE 2 variation Insertion1 4 block MSB 80 LSB 1 No Parameter Display Value See Table Control No Parameter Display Value See Table Control 1 Drive 0 127 0 127 e 1 Pitch 24 24 40 88 2 Off Stack Combo Tube 0 3 2 Initial Delay 0 1mS 400 0mS 0 127 table 7 3 LPF Cuttoff 1kHz Thru 34 60 3 Fine 1 50 50ce
92. 02H 02H mmH Auto Lower Gender Threshold x x x D D 02H 03H mmH Upper Gender Amound x x x x x x 02H 04H mmH Lower Gender Amound D D 02H 10H mmH 1 Volume x x 02H 11H mmH Harmony2 Volume D x x 02H 12H mmH Harmony3 Volume x D D 02H 20H mmH 1 D D 02H 21H mmH Harmony2 Pan x x x x D x 02H 22H mmH Harmony3 Pan D D D 02H 30H mmH 1 Detune D D 02H 31H mmH Harmony2 Detune D D 02H 32H Harmony3 Detune D D 03H 00H Lead Gender Type x x x x x x 03H 01H Lead Gender Amount x x x x D x lt Table 1 2 gt RPN RPN DATA ENTRY Parameter Recognized MSB LSB MSB LSB XG GM Keyboard R1 R2 Left Acmp 00H 00H Pitch Bend Sensitivity 00H 01H Fine Tune o o o o 00H 02H o 7FH Null o o o e Appendix Anhang Annexe 709 605 MIDI Data Format MIDI Datenformat Format de donn es MIDI System Exclusive Messages Systemexklusive Meldungen Messages exclusifs au systeme System Exclusive Messages Accompaniment Control Data Format Recognized Section Control FOH 43H 7EH OOH ss dd F7H 11110000 FO Exclusive status 01000
93. 112 V_DistSoft V Distortion Soft 98 02 164 164 TalkingMod Talking Modulation 93 00 113 113 StDistHard 75 18 165 3 2 No Effect 00 00 Stereo Distortion Hard 166 165 85 Thru 64 00 114 114 StDistSoft Stereo Distortion Soft 75 19 115 115 StDist Stereo Distortion 73 08 116 116 StOD Stereo Overdrive 74 08 117 117 StAmp3 Stereo Amp Simulator3 75 08 118 118 Comp Dist1 73 16 Compressor Distortion1 119 119 Comp Dist2 73 01 Compressor Distortion2 120 120 70 DistHard Distortion Hard 15 16 121 121 71 DistSoft Distortion Soft 15 17 122 122 72 DistHvy Distortion Heavy 73 00 123 123 73 OverDrive 74 00 124 124 74 AmpSim Amp Simulator 75 00 125 125 CmpDstTDly 101 00 Compressor Distortion Tempo Delay 126 126 CmpOD TDly 101 01 Compressor Overdrive Tempo Delay 595 Appendix Anhang Annexe Effect Parameter List Effektparameteriiste XG Effect Name TypeMSB Type LSB EARLY REF1 EARLY REF2 variation Insertion1 4 block MSB 09 HALL1 HALL2 MSB 01 No Parameter Display Value See Table Control ROOM1 ROOM2 ROOM3 MSB 02 BR d n m STAGE1 STAGE2 MSB 03 bed T 20 PLATE reverb variation insertion block MSB 04 fiti Dolsy eee ER No Parameter Display Value See Table Control 5 Feedback Level 163 463 5 1 127 Reverb Time pants 0 88 Ke 6 HPF Cutoff Thru 8 0kHz 0 52 table
94. 16 Output Level 0 127 15 16 Appendix Anhang Annexe Effect Parameter List Effektparameterliste Liste des parametres d effet de voix WAH DIST DELAY variation Insertion1 4 block COMP DIST TEMPO DELAY variation Insertion1 4 block WAH OVERDRIVE DELAY variation Insertion1 4 block MSB 97 DELAY variation Insertion1 4 block MSB 101 No Parameter Display Value See Table Control No Parameter Display Value See Table Control 1 Delay Time 0 1 1 4860s 1 14860 1 Delay Time 64th 3 4thx6 0 19 table 14 2 Delay Feedback Level 63 63 1 127 2 Delay Feedback Level 63 63 1 127 3 Delay Mix 0 127 0 127 3 Delay Mix 0 127 0 127 4 Dist Drive 0 127 0 127 4 Dist Drive 0 127 0 127 5 Dist Output Level 0 127 0 127 5 Dist Output Level 0 127 0 127 6 Dist EQ Low Gain 12 412dB 52 76 6 Dist EQ Low Gain 12 12dB 52 76 7 Dist EQ Mid Gain 12 412dB 52 76 7 Dist EQ High Gain 12 1208 52 76 8 8 UR Diffusion 1 63ms 64 0ms 127 63ms 1 127 9 9 Lag 1 63ms 64 0ms 127 63ms 1 127 10 Dry Wet D63 gt W D W D W63 1 127 10 Dry Wet D63 gt W D W D lt W 63 1 127 e 11 Wah Sensitive 0 127 0 127 11 Comp Attack ims 40ms 0 19 12 Wah Cutoff Freq Offset 0 127 0 127 12 Comp Release 10ms 680ms 0 15 13 Wah Resonance 1 0 12 0 10 120 13 Comp Threshold 48dB 6dB 79 121 14 Wah Release 10 680
95. 16 1 00 VIBRATO DEPTH x 64 63 40 nn 17 1 00 VIBRATO DELAY x 64 63 40 nn 18 1 00 7 FILTER CUTOFF FREQUENCY x 64 63 40 nn 19 1 00 FILTER RESONANCE X 64 63 40 nn 1A 1 00 7 EG ATTACK TIME 64 63 40 nn 1B 1 00 EG DECAY TIME x 64 63 40 nn 1 1 00 7F EG RELEASE TIME x 0 64 63 40 nn 1D 1 28 58 MW PITCH CONTROL 24 24 semitones 40 nn 1E 1 00 MW FILTER CONTROL x 9600 9450 40 nn 1 1 00 MW AMPLITUDE CONTROL 100 100 40 nn 20 1 00 MW LFO PMOD DEPTH 0 127 0 nn 21 1 00 MW LFO FMOD DEPTH x 0 127 0 22 1 00 MW LFO AMOD DEPTH 0 127 0 nn 23 1 28 58 BEND PITCH CONTROL x 24 24 semitones 42 nn 24 1 00 7F BEND FILTER CONTROL 9600 9450 40 25 1 00 7 BEND AMPLITUDE CONTROL x 100 100 40 nn 26 1 00 BEND LFO PMOD DEPTH 0 127 0 nn 27 1 00 BEND LFO FMOD DEPTH x 0 127 0 nn 28 1 00 BEND LFO AMOD DEPTH 0 127 0 TOTAL SIZE 29 Address Size Data Parameter Recognized Description De
96. 2 12 19 0 44 69 4 76 119 7 108 170 1 11 14 11 140 12 3 4K 44 980 0 76 573 0 108 405 0 13 13 45 45 77 7 7 109 21 8 13 20 6 45 70 9 77 121 3 109 171 7 12 16 12 170 13 3 2K 45 959 0 77 565 0 109 401 0 14 1 4 46 4 6 78 7 8 110 23 3 14 22 1 46 72 5 78 122 9 110 173 2 13 18 13 230 14 2 9K 46 938 0 78 558 0 110 397 0 15 1 5 47 4 7 79 791 111 24 9 15 23 7 47 741 79 1244 111 174 8 14 20 14 340 15 2 8K 47 919 0 79 551 0 111 394 0 16 1 6 48 48 80 8 0 112 26 5 16 25 3 48 75 7 80 126 0 112 176 4 15 23 15 680 16 2 6K 48 900 0 80 544 0 112 390 0 17 TI 49 4 9 81 8 1 113 28 0 17 26 9 49 77 2 81 127 6 113 178 0 16 26 17 2 5K 49 882 0 81 538 0 113 387 0 18 18 50 5 0 82 8 2 114 29 6 18 28 4 50 78 8 82 129 2 114 179 5 17 30 18 2 3K 50 865 0 82 531 0 114 383 0 19 19 51 83 8 3 115 31 2 19 30 0 51 80 4 83 130 7 115 181 1 18 35 T 19 2 2K 51 848 0 83 525 0 115 380 0 20 2 0 52 5 2 84 8 4 116 32 8 20 31 6 52 81 9 84 132 3 116 182 7 19 40 able 10 3 20 24K 52 832 0 84 519 0 116 377 0 21 2 1 53 53 85 8 5 117 34 3 21 33 2 53 83 5 85 133 9 117 184 3 Compressor Ratio 21 2 0K 53 817 0 85 513 0 117 374 0 22 2 2 54 54 86 86 118 359 22 34 7 54 851 86 135 5 118 185 8 Data Value 22 1 92K 54 802 0 86 507 0 118 371 0 23 23 55 5 5 87 8 7 119 375 23 36 3 55 86 7 87 137 0 119 187 4 0 1 0 23 184 55 788 0 87 501 0 119 368 0 24 2 4 56 5 6 88 8 8 120 39 0
97. 21 9 1 0 113 3 4 Accordion 0 116 21 10 2 0 114 3 5 Tango Accrd 0 112 23 11 CP 80 0 113 2 6 Steirisch 0 117 21 E Piano 7 Bandoneon 0 113 23 1 Galaxy EP 0 114 4 8 Soft Accrd 0 114 21 2 Stage EP 0 117 4 9 Modern Harp 0 113 22 3 Polaris EP 0 115 4 10 Blues Harp 0 114 22 4 Jazz Chorus 0 118 5 11 Harmonica 0 112 22 5 Hyper Tines 0 113 5 Guitar 6 Cool EP 0 119 4 1 Live Nylon 0 116 24 7 Phase EP 0 120 4 2 Cool J Gtr 0 115 26 8 New Tines 0 116 5 3 Cool E Gtr 0 114 28 9 Funk EP 0 112 4 4 12StrGuitar 0 113 25 10 DX Modern 0 112 5 5 SolidGuitar 0 118 27 11 Vintage EP 0 116 4 6 Vintage Amp 0 115 29 12 Modern EP 0 115 5 7 Aloha Gtr 0 118 26 13 Tremolo EP 0 113 4 8 Crunch Gtr 0 113 30 14 Super DX 0 117 5 9 Carlos Gtr 0 119 26 15 Clavi 0 112 7 10 60 s Clean 0 117 27 16 Suitcase EP 0 118 4 11 Live Class 0 115 24 17 Venus EP 0 114 5 12 Cool JSolo 0 116 26 18 Wah Clavi 0 113 7 13 VintageOpen 0 123 27 Organ 14 Folk Guitar 0 112 25 1 Cool Organ 0 118 18 15 Solid Chord 0 121 27 2 Rotor Organ 0 117 18 16 VintageMute 0 115 28 3 Rock Organ1 0 112 18 17 PedalSteel 0 115 27 4 Dance Organ 0 113 17 18 Lead Guitar 0 114 29 5 Gospel Org 0 119 16 19 SlideGuitar 0 125 27 6 Cool Jazz 0 117 16 20 Chorus Gtr 0 124 27 7 Purple Org 0 114 18 21 VintageTrem 0 120 27 8 Jazz Organ1 0 112 16 22 Spanish Gtr 0 113 24 9 Rock Organ2 0 113 18 23 Octave Gtr 0 113 26 10 RotaryDrive 0 116 18 24 Deep Chorus 0 114 27 11 Full Rocker 0 115 18 25 Campfi
98. 219 Tuba 0 0 58 166 X WireBa 0 64 39 220 Tuba 2 0 16 58 167 Violin 0 0 40 221 Mute Trp 0 0 59 168 SlowVIn 0 8 40 222 Fr Horn 0 0 60 169 Viola 0 0 41 223 FrHrSolo 0 6 60 170 Cello 0 0 42 224 FrHorn2 0 32 60 171 Contrabs 0 0 43 225 HornOrch 0 37 60 172 Trem Str 0 0 44 226 BrasSect 0 0 61 173 SlowTrStr 0 8 44 227 Tp amp TbSec 0 35 61 174 Susp Str 0 40 44 228 BrssSec2 0 40 61 175 Pizz Str 0 0 45 229 HiBrass 0 41 61 176 Harp 0 0 46 230 MelloBrs 0 42 61 177 YangChin 0 40 46 231 SynBras1 0 0 62 178 Timpani 0 0 47 232 QuackBr 0 12 62 179 Strings 0 0 48 233 RezSynBr 0 20 62 180 S Strngs 0 3 48 234 PolyBrss 0 24 62 181 SlowStr 0 8 48 235 SynBras3 0 27 62 182 ArcoStr 0 24 48 236 JumpBrss 0 32 62 183 60sStrng 0 35 48 237 AnaVelBr 0 45 62 184 Orchestr 0 40 48 238 AnaBrss1 0 64 62 185 Orchstr2 0 41 48 239 SynBras2 0 0 63 186 TremOrch 0 42 48 240 Soft Brs 0 18 63 187 VeloStr 0 45 48 241 SynBrss4 0 40 63 188 Strings2 0 0 49 242 ChoirBrs 0 41 63 189 S SlwStr 0 3 49 243 VelBrss2 0 45 63 190 LegatoSt 0 8 49 244 AnaBrss2 0 64 63 191 Warm Str 0 40 49 245 SprnoSax 0 0 64 192 Kingdom 0 4 49 246 Alto Sax 0 0 65 193 70s Str 0 64 49 247 Sax Sect 0 40 65 194 Str Ens3 0 65 49 248 HyprAlto 0 43 65 195 Syn Str1 0 0 50 249 TenorSax 0 0 66 196 ResoStr 0 27 50 250 BrthTnSx 0 40 66 197 Syn Str4 0 64 50 251 SoftTenr 0 41 66 198 SS Str 0 65 50 252 TnrSax 2 0 64 66 199 Syn Str2 0 0 51 253 Bari Sax 0 0 67 200 ChoirAah 0 0 52 254 Oboe 0 0 68 201 S Choir 0 3 52 255 Eng Horn 0 0
99. 34 9 4 66 18 2 98 28 1 2 32th 34 4thX 1 66 4thX53 2 28 35 1 1k 3 0 6 35 5 6 67 10 6 99 15 6 3 1 3 35 9 6 67 18 5 99 28 5 3 32th 3 35 4thx22 67 4thX54 4 32 36 12k 4 07 36 57 68 108 100 158 4 15 36 99 68 188 100 28 8 4 32 36 4thx23 68 4thX55 5 36 37 1 4k 5 0 9 37 5 9 69 10 9 101 15 9 5 18 37 10 2 69 19 1 101 29 2 5 16th 37 4thX24 69 4thX56 6 40 38 1 6k 6 1 0 38 6 1 70 11 1 102 16 1 6 2 0 38 10 4 70 19 4 102 29 5 6 16th 3 38 4thX25 70 4thX57 7 45 39 1 8k 12 39 6 2 71 11 2 103 16 2 2 2 3 39 10 7 71 19 7 103 29 9 T 1 th 39 4thX26 71 4thX58 8 50 40 2 0k 8 14 40 6 4 72 11 4 104 16 4 8 2 6 40 11 0 72 20 0 104 30 2 8 8th 40 4thX27 72 4thX59 9 56 41 2 2k 9 15 41 65 73 115 105 166 9 28 41 112 73 202 9 81 3 41 4hX28 73 4thX60 10 63 42 25k 10 17 42 67 74 117 106 167 10 31 42 115 74 205 10 8h 42 4hX29 74 4thX61 11 70 43 28k 11 18 43 68 75 19 107 169 11 33 43 118 75 208 11 4th 43 4hX30 75 4thX62 12 80 44 3 2k 12 2 0 44 7 0 76 12 0 108 17 0 12 3 6 44 12 1 76 21 1 12 4th 3 44 4thX31 76 4thX63 13 90 45 3 6k 13 2 1 45 7 2 77 12 2 109 17 2 13 3 9 45 12 3 77 21 4 13 4th 45 4thx32 77 4thX64 14 100 46 4 0k 14 23 46 73 78 12 3 110 17 3 14 4 1 46 12 6 78 21 7 14 2nd 46 4thX33 15 110 47 4 5k 15 25 47 75 79 125 111 175 15 44 47 129 79 220 15 2nd3 47 4thX34 16 125 48 5 0k 16 2 6 48 7 6 80 12 6 112 17 6 16 46 48 13 1 80 22 4 16 2nd 48 4thX35 17 140 4
100. 36 2 35 8 Mini Low 36 0 52 3 Resonant 36 1 51 9 Omega 36 2 5 4 SepaWays 36 2 36 10 Brainmill 36 2 6 5 Maxx 36 0 43 11 Power 36 2 7 6 DistOdsy 36 1 16 12 Lotus 36 1 124 7 Violynx 36 1 21 13 Filterflow 36 2 8 8 Pro Sync 36 1 22 14 Kraftworks 36 2 9 9 Susy 36 0 78 15 Hard Noize 36 2 10 10 Mars 36 1 53 16 TechPluck 36 2 11 11 Dawn 36 1 48 17 Xalimba 36 2 12 12 Saphire 36 2 37 18 Dist5th 36 1 121 13 Ropey 36 2 38 19 Sliver 36 0 71 14 Pulsate 36 2 39 20 BPF Step 36 2 13 15 Faaaat 36 2 40 H 16 BlapMoth 36 2 41 1 36 0 47 17 MaMa 36 2 42 2 Elec Groove 36 2 14 18 Yellow 36 1 42 3 Seq Bass 36 2 15 19 Stranger 36 2 43 4 Cool man 36 2 16 20 Earth Lead 36 0 79 5 Uni Bass 36 1 126 V 6 Free Cut 36 2 17 1 Rhubarb 36 2 44 7 Kick Line 36 0 123 2 Trabant 36 0 85 8 Zebedee 36 2 18 3 Billy 36 0 98 9 Touch 36 0 33 4 Nossi 36 0 71 10 Chiff 36 0 92 5 CyberBag 36 2 45 11 Sync Eko 36 1 49 6 Cream 36 2 46 12 FreeRthm 36 1 108 7 Astro Flute 36 2 47 13 Virtual 36 2 19 8 Bella 36 2 48 14 JarreSQ 36 2 20 9 MgWhistl 36 2 49 15 Hardcore 36 2 21 10 Mg Cat 36 2 50 16 Kangaroo 36 0 119 11 Chamleon 36 2 51 17 Acid Seq 36 2 22 12 Earthling 36 1 107 18 Acid Rain 36 2 23 13 BiggMac 36 0 6 19 Harmsync 36 0 122 14 Maise 36 0 9 20 Fat Run 36 2 24 15 Silence 36 2 52 16 KnivesLd 36 2 53 1 Bombastic 36 0 10 17 ANSyncHd 36 2 54 2 Sync Lead 36 2 25 18 Caliopsyn 36 0 91 3 Squeamer 36 0 12 19 Oizo 36 2 55 4 Dre full 36 0 13 20 Jack 36 0 27 5 SynGtr 36 0 37 6
101. 4 LPF Cutoff 63Hz Thru 10 60 table 3 5 5 Filter Type Thru PowerBass Radio Tel Clean Low 0 5 6 EQ Low Frequency 32Hz 2 0kHz 4 40 table 3 6 LPF Resonance 1 0 12 0 10 120 7 EQ Low Gain 12 412dB 52 76 7 Bit Assign 0 6 0 6 8 EQ High Frequency 500Hz 16 0kHz 28 58 table 3 8 Emphasis Off On 0 1 9 EQ High Gain 12 412dB 52 76 9 10 10 Dry Wet D63 gt W D W D W63 1 127 H 11 Crossover Frequency 100 2 10 0 2 14 54 table 3 11 12 Mic L R Angle Odeg 180deg resolution 3deg 0 60 12 13 13 14 14 15 15 Input Mode mono stereo 16 16 DIST 2WAY ROTARY SPEAKER variation Insertion1 4 block MSB 86 LSB 1 DIST DELAY variation Insertion1 4 block OD 2WAY ROTARY SPEAKER variation Insertion1 4 block MSB 86 LSB 2 OVERDRIVE DELAY variation Insertion1 4 block MSB 95 No Parameter Display Value See Table Control No Parameter Display Value See Table Control 1 Rotor Speed 0 0 39 7Hz 0 127 e 1 Lch Delay Time 0 1 1 4860s 1 14860 2 Drive Low 0 127 0 127 2 Rch Delay Time 0 1 1 4860s 1 14860 3 Drive High 0 127 0 127 3 Delay Feedback Time 0 1 1 4860s 1 14860 4 Low High Balance L63 gt H L H L lt H 63 1 127 4 Delay Feedback Level 63 63 1 127 5 5 Delay Mix 0 127 0 127 6 EQ Low Frequency 32 2 0kHz 4 40 6 Dist Drive 0 127 0 127 7 EQ Low Gain 12 1208 52 76 7 Dist Output Level 0 127 0 127 8 EQ High Frequency 500 16 0kHz 28 58 8 Dist EQ Low Gain 12 4 12dB 52 76 9 EQ High Gain 12 1208 52
102. 4 Select the desired menu to be set by using the NEXT or BACK button 4 Select the desired menu HFC10 HENU uis 228 TRANSHITS RECEIVE ROOT CHORDDETECTY STORE Use this menu to store your settings EASY SETUP 1 LEFT e 1 R2 R3 E 1 LocaL v v mud FULL SETUP 2 CLOCK INTERNAL TRANSHIT CLOCK OFF RECEIVE TRANSPOSE OFF THRU PORT 5 MESSAGE SVS EX Tx ON Rx ON SH CHORDSVS EX Tx ON ON Refer to page 177 3 Em e Since all MIDI settings data is stored to Flash ROM any data in the MIDI settings location will be erased and replaced by 4 v v Lasel your new settings This includes the factory pro grammed preset MIDI set tings If you ve deleted the factory set data you can use 5 5 the Restore function page Set the parameter of the selected menu Set the parameter of the selected menu 154 to load a copy of it from the included disks page 6 Refer to page 178 Refer to pages 175 176 177 V ON EM ON ON EM ON M ON M ON ON OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF or OFF The operations for each function corresponding to step 5 or 6 are covered in the fol lowing explanations Reference 743 173 MIDI Functions System Settings The explanations here apply to step 5 of the Basic Procedure on page 174 Local Control Local Control refers to the
103. 46 Voice Set settings R1 PART SELECT R1 163 47 Voice Set settings R2 PART SELECT R2 163 48 Voice Set settings R3 PART SELECT R3 163 49 Voice Set settings L PART SELECT LEFT 163 50 Harmony Echo settings 164 51 Video monitor settings DEMO 165 52 Talk Setting VOCAL HARMONY TALK 165 53 AutoLoad settings FUNCTION 166 54 Display MIDI Bank amp Program Change VOICE XG CUSTOM VOICE 166 55 Metronome Volume for Recording setting DIGITAL RECORDING 166 56 Parameter Lock settings MEMORY 166 57 Tap Count setting TAP TEMPO 166 58 Auto Exit Time setting PAGE CONTROL BACK 167 59 Language settings PAGE CONTROL NEXT 167 60 Style Manager Menu selection PRESET STYLE 8 BEAT BALLROOM 74 61 Loading Style into Flash ROM FLASH STYLE I VIII 74 62 Style Selection Directory selection DISK DIRECT 151 63 Song Selection Directory selection SONG DIRECTORY I V 78 64 Directory selection SONG SETUP 78 65 Directory selection SONG PLAYER 78 66 Multi Pad Repeat settings MULTI PAD 1 2 3 4 77 67 Chord Match settings MULTI PAD BANK 77 68 DISK SCSI Loading Data from a Disk to Flash ROM DISK SCSI 152 69 MIDI Clock setting MIDI 175 70 VocalHarmony Parameter settings VOCAL HARMONY V H 9 81 71 Parameter settings VOCAL HARMONY SELECT 81 72 Music Database Searching the Music Database MUSIC DATABASE 27 73 Restoring the default tempo setting of the selected style Data dial gt
104. 5 SweetMuteTp 0 114 59 50 DrySynBass 0 116 39 6 SoloTrumpet 0 112 56 51 Touch Bass 0 115 39 7 Air Trumpet 0 117 56 52 Hi Q Bass 0 113 38 8 SweetFlugel 0 118 56 53 Funk Bass 0 112 37 9 Trombone 0 116 57 54 Aco Bass 0 112 32 10 BaritonHorn 0 113 58 55 Fretless 0 112 35 11 Solo Tromb 0 112 57 56 Bass amp Cymbal 0 114 32 12 Soft Tromb 0 115 57 57 Fusion Bass 0 113 36 13 MellowTromb 0 114 57 58 Rave Bass 0 114 38 14 French Horn 0 112 60 59 Dance Bass 0 113 39 15 Muted Trump 0 112 59 60 Synth Bass 0 112 38 16 Bariton Hit 0 114 58 61 Snap Bass 0 114 39 17 Alp Bass 0 113 33 62 Click Bass 0 115 38 18 Flugel Horn 0 113 56 Strings 19 Tuba 0 112 58 1 Live Strs 0 117 49 Brass 2 Live Arco 0 122 49 1 Live Horns 0 118 62 3 Live Orch 0 116 49 2 Live Brass 0 117 62 4 Symphon Str 0 114 48 3 Live OctBr 0 116 62 5 OberStrings 0 113 51 4 MellowBrass 0 116 61 6 Solo Violin 0 112 40 5 Sforzando 0 125 61 7 Orch Brass 0 118 49 6 MoonLight 0 115 71 8 Orch Flute 0 119 49 T MillerNight 0 119 66 9 Orch FI Br 0 120 49 8 Saxy Mood 0 120 66 10 Orch Oboe 0 121 49 9 Jump Brass 0 113 62 11 Strings 0 112 48 10 Big Brass 0 121 61 12 OrchStrings 0 113 48 11 BrasSection 0 112 61 13 Str Quartet 0 114 49 12 BrightBrass 0 120 61 14 ConcertoStr 0 115 48 13 Soft Brass 0 123 61 15 Analog Strs 0 112 51 14 Full Horns 0 114 61 16 ChamberStrs 0 112 49 15 Brass Combo 0 115 66 17 Bow Strings 0 116 48 16 SmoothTromb 0 118 57 18 SlowStrings 0 113 49 17 High Brass 0 115 61 19 TremoloStr
105. 6 Slow Fast Time of H 0 127 0 127 8 7 Drive Low 0 127 0 127 9 8 Drive High 0 127 0 127 10 9 Low High Balance L63 gt H L H L lt H 63 1 127 10 11 12 11 EQ Low Frequency 32 2 0kH 4 40 table 3 13 12 EQ Low Gain 12 1208 52 76 14 13 EQ High Frequency 500 16 0kHz 28 58 table 3 15 14 EQ High Gain 12 1208 52 76 16 15 Mic L R Angle 0 180deg 0 60 16 Speed Control Slow Fast on THRU variation insertion block MSB 64 No Parameter Display Value See Table Control DIST TEMPO DELAY variation Insertion1 4 block 1 OVERDRIVE TEMPO DELAY variation Insertion1 4 block MSB 100 2 No Parameter Display Value See Table Control 3 1 Delay Time 64th 3 4thx6 0 19 table 14 4 2 Delay Feedback Level 63 63 1 127 5 3 Delay Mix 0 127 0 127 6 4 Dist Drive 0 127 0 127 7 5 Dist Output Level 0 127 0 127 8 6 Dist EQ Low Gain 12 1208 52 76 9 7 Dist EQ High Gain 12 1208 52 76 10 8 L R Diffusion 1 63ms 64 0ms 127 63ms 1 127 9 Lag 1 63ms 64 0ms 127 63ms 1 127 11 10 Dry Wet D63 gt W D W D lt W 63 1 127 12 13 11 14 12 15 13 16 14 15 Parameter 10 Dry Wet only affects insertion type effects 16 Appendix Anhang Annexe 009 Effect Data Value Assign Tahble Effektdatenwert Zuordnungstabelle Table d affectation des valeurs pour les donnees d effets
106. 62 20 CongaDrm 83 96 116 5 DX SBr 5 83 69 62 XI 6 DX SBr 6 83 70 62 1 Ana Poly 83 78 62 7 DX SBr 7 83 65 63 2 AnalogBr 83 97 62 8 Ensemble 83 71 63 3 SYN LEA1 35 0 13 9 Fanfare 83 72 61 4 Super DX 83 66 81 10 HardBrss 83 96 61 5 DXSyLd 5 83 68 81 11 Horn Ens 83 71 61 6 DXSyLd 9 83 99 81 12 Juice 83 80 62 7 LeadLine 83 0 87 13 MM Brss1 35 1 69 8 SoftLd 1 35 1 103 14 MM Brss2 35 1 70 9 DX SLd 2 83 65 80 15 MM Brss3 83 73 62 10 SnglLine 35 1 105 16 SinglBrs 83 67 63 11 DX SLd 7 35 1 99 17 SynHorns 35 1 74 12 Funkrhyt 35 1 71 18 TightBr1 83 66 61 13 PowerDrv 83 75 62 19 TightBr2 83 67 61 14 DX SLd 3 83 67 80 20 WarmBrss 83 70 61 15 DXSyLd 3 83 65 81 IX 16 LeadPhon 83 64 84 1 FLUTE 1 35 0 23 17 WhaserPd 83 75 90 2 Quena 83 65 76 18 DX Atms2 83 67 99 3 Harvest 35 1 96 19 DX MtPd1 35 1 92 4 CaliopL3 83 66 82 20 TrcrBell 35 1 116 5 DX Ocrn2 83 64 79 585 Appendix Anhang Annexe Style List Style Liste Liste des styles Flash Style Stil Blitz Style Flash Preset Style Stil Voreinstellung Style pr s lectionn e Appendix Anhang Annexe Category S
107. 64 0ms 127 63ms 1 127 11 6 12 7 13 EQ Low Frequency 32Hz 2 0kHz 4 40 table 3 8 14 EQ Low Gain 12 12dB 52 76 9 15 EQ High Frequency 500Hz 16 0kHz 28 58 table 3 10 Dry Wet D63 gt W D W D lt W 63 1 127 16 EQ High Gain 12 412dB 52 76 14 CROSS DELAY variation insertion block MSB 08 12 No Parameter Display Value See Table Control 13 EQ Low Frequency 32 2 0kH 4 40 1 LR Delay 0 1 743 0ms variation block 1 7430 14 EQ Low Gain 12 12dB 52 76 0 1 743 0ms insertion block 1 7430 15 EQ High Frequency 500 16 0kHz 28 58 2 R gt L Delay 0 1 743 0ms variation block 1 7430 16 EQ High Gain 12 12dB 52 76 0 1 743 0ms insertion block 1 7430 3 Feedback Level 63 63 1 127 TEMPO CROSS variation Insertion block MSB 22 4 Input Select 0 2 No Parameter Display Value See Table Control 5 High Damp 0 1 1 0 1 10 1 Delay Time L gt R 64th 3 4thx6 0 19 table 14 6 2 Delay Time 64th 3 4thx6 0 19 table 14 7 3 Feedback Level 63 63 1 127 8 4 Input Select L L amp R 0 2 9 5 Feedback High Dump 0 1 0 0 10 10 Dry Wet D63 gt W D W D lt W63 1 127 e 5 Lag 1 63ms 64 0ms 127 63ms 1 127 11 8 12 9 13 EQ Low Frequency 32Hz 2 0kHz 4 40 table 3 10 Dry Wet D63 gt W D W D lt W 63 1 127 14 EQ Low Gain 12 412dB 52 76 15 EQ High Frequency 500Hz 16 0kHz 28 58 table 3 11 16 EQ High Gain 12 12dB 52 76 12 13 EQ Low Frequency 32 2 0kH 4 40 14 EQ Low Gain 12 12dB 52 76
108. 74 Restoring the default tempo setting of the selected style ONE TOUCH SETTING 1 4 75 Returning to the default display that appears when the power is turned on EXIT 76 Exiting from the Direct Access mode DIRECT ACCESS Basic Operation o Function Iree Numbers at the left end correspond to ones in Top panel amp connections on page 10 Button Controller LCD title Function See pages 1 POWER ON OFF Turning the POWER on or off 14 2 MASTER VOLUME Adjusting the overall volume 14 3 PITCH BEND Bending notes played on the keyboard up down 59 4 MODULATION Applying vibrato effect to notes played on the keyboard 59 5 SONG SONG PLAYER Turning Song Player on or off 30 I IV Selecting a song 30 78 SONG SETUP Setting the way in which the 9000Pro reads the song data 79 6 STYLE amp STYLE MANAGER AUTO ACCOMPANIMENT Turning Auto Accompaniment on or off 20 BBEAT BALLROOM Selecting a preset style 20 STYLE MANAGER LOAD STYLE INTO FLASH ROM Loading style data from disk to the internal Flash ROM 74 SAVE STYLE IN FLASH ROM Saving style data in the internal Flash ROM to disk 75 COPY STYLE IN FLASH ROM Copying style data in the internal Flash ROM 75 DELETE STYLE IN FLASH ROM Deleting
109. 9 1 2 b3 5 7 CmM7 9 dim7 765 6 9 m7 11 Minor seventh flatted fifth m755 1 b3 b5 b7 Cm7b5 14245 Minor major seventh flatted fifth mM755 1 53 55 7 CmM7b5 Inversion of the 7sus4 chord is Diminished dim 1 b3 b5 Cdim Diminished seventh dim7 1 53 55 6 Cdim7 Th The auto accompaniment wi Seventh 7 7 ei 9r C7 sometimes not change when related chords are played Seventh flatted ninth 7 gt 9 1 52 3 5 57 7 59 sequence e g some minor Seventh add flatted thirteenth 7 b13 1 3 5 b6 b7 C7b13 chords followed by the minor Seventh ninth 7 9 1 2 3 5 b7 C7 9 seventh Seventh add sharp eleventh 7 11 1 2 3 4 5 b70r 7811 Two note fingerings will pro 1 2 3 4 5 b7 duce a chord based on the pre Seventh add thirteenth 7 13 1 3 5 6 7 C7 13 viously played chord Seventh sharp ninth 7 9 1 82 3 5 b7 C7 9 Seventh flatted fifth 75 1 3 b5 b7 C7b5 Seventh augmented 7aug 1 3 45 57 C7aug Seventh suspended fourth 7sus4 1 4 5 b7 C7sus4 One plus two plus five 1 2 5 1 2 5 1 2 5 Reference Auto Accompaniment Fade ins and Fade outs The FADE IN OUT button can be used to produce smooth fade ins and fade outs when starting and stopping the accompaniment To produce fade in out FADEIN OUT gt 1 Press the FADE IN OUT button so that its indicator lights 2 Start the accompaniment The sound will grad
110. 9000Pro does not start sampling immediately when the START LCD button is pressed in step 11 on page 41 Once the START LCD button is pressed the 9000Pro waits for a signal of a suitable level set by the trigger level When it hears such a signal it starts sampling The Trigger Level can be set in step 10 on page 40 The higher the trigger level the louder the signal must be to start trigger sampling Reference 28 83 To better understand how trigger level works let s look at a specific example sampling of the phrase a one and a two In this phrase one and two are louder than the other words Since the first is lower than the trigger level the 9000Pro doesn t actually start sampling until the word one If you want the phrase to be sampled from the first word the trigger level should be set lower With this new trigger level setting the entire phrase will be sampled Be careful however not to set the trigger level too low or else sampling may start from some accidental or extraneous sound such as breathing noises touching the microphone etc Waves amp Waveforms Volume Sampling start point level Trigger level Time Volume Sampling start point level New trigger level Time The terms wave and waveform have distinct meanings in 9000Pro sampling termi nology as follows Wave A is the ra
111. 99 311 8 55 350 4 0 17 36 1 51 68 3 03 100 9 76 4 0 7 36 3 9 68 25 0 4 12 7 36 113 5 68 214 2 100 315 0 56 45 0 5 0 21 37 1 56 69 3 11 101 10 1 5 0 8 37 40 69 30 0 5 15 8 37 116 6 69 217 4 101 318 1 57 55 0 6 0 25 38 1 60 70 3 20 102 10 8 6 0 9 38 41 6 19 0 38 119 8 70 220 5 102 321 3 58 65 0 7 0 29 39 1 64 71 3 28 103 11 4 7 1 0 39 42 S 22 1 39 122 9 71 223 7 103 324 4 59 75 0 8 0 34 40 1 68 72 3 37 104 12 1 8 1 1 40 4 3 8 25 3 40 126 1 72 226 8 104 327 6 60 85 0 9 0 38 41 1 72 73 3 45 105 12 8 9 12 41 44 9 28 4 41 129 2 73 230 0 105 330 7 61 100 0 10 0 42 42 1 77 74 3 53 106 13 5 10 1 3 42 45 10 31 6 42 132 4 74 233 1 106 333 9 62 115 0 11 0 46 43 1 81 75 3 62 107 14 1 11 1 4 43 4 6 11 34 7 43 135 5 75 236 3 107 337 0 63 140 0 12 0 51 44 1 85 76 3 70 108 14 8 12 1 5 44 47 12 37 9 44 138 6 76 239 4 108 340 2 64 170 0 13 0 55 45 1 89 ZU 3 87 109 15 5 13 1 6 45 48 13 41 0 45 141 8 77 242 6 109 343 3 65 230 0 14 0 59 46 1 94 78 4 04 110 16 2 14 1 7 46 49 14 44 2 46 144 9 78 245 7 110 346 5 66 340 0 15 0 63 47 1 98 79 421 111 16 8 15 18 47 5 0 15 473 47 148 1 79 248 9 111 349 6 67 680 0 16 0 67 48 2 02 80 4 37 112 17 5 16 1 9 48 5 5 16 50 5 48 151 2 80 252 0 112 352 8 17 0 72 49 2 06 81 4 54 113 18 2 17 2 0 49 6 0 17 53 6 49 1544 81 255 113 355 9 18 0 76 50 2 10 82 471 114 19 5 18 2 1 50 6 5 18 56 8 50 157 5 82 258 3 114 359 1 1
112. Ana Sopran 5 003 o we BrightTenor Soft Alto 005 010 Jazz Sax Tenor Sax pLue WANAGER 3 Select the desired function 4 Execute the selected function The operations for each function corresponding to step 4 are covered in the following 2 select this to call up the Plug in Manager display explanations Quick Guide E Load Plug in Custom Step 3 on page 42 The explanations here apply to step 4 above The three types of parameters explained in the chart above can all be loaded together Use the instructions here for loading in step 3 of the Quick Guide on page 42 Select this to LORD PLUG IN CUSTOM VOICE display the property of the pu gt INDIVIDUAL PAGE CONTROL TEM DEVICE FD LORD PLUG IN CUSTOM VOICE Select the file to be Loaded PROPERTY A Press NEXT to continue DEVICE V DIRECTORY CONTENTS selected file ml ml ko old Ful 150UL CsVce xvc DIRECTORY 7 CONTENT 16091 CSUCe Xvc Press NEXT to continue PAGE CONTROL If an optional SCSI device is connected Select the file to be loaded or the optional internal hard disk is See 151 for details on directory file GQ installed select the appropriate device selection See page 150 for details Reference v9 65 Select the destination memory Individual Plug in Voices
113. Bulk Dump 43H OnH 4CH aa bb hh mm I dd dd F7H 11110000 FO Exclusive status 01000011 43 YAMAHA ID 0000nnnn On Device Number n always O when transmit n 0 F when recieve 01001100 4C Model ID Byte Count MSB Obbbbbbb bb Byte Count LSB Ohhhhhhh hh Address High Ommmmmmm mm Address Mid 01111111 ll Address Low Oddddddd dd Data Oddddddd dd Data 0 cc Checksum 11110111 F7 of Exclusive Appendix Anhang Annexe 909 607 MIDI Data Format MIDI Datenformat Format de donn es MIDI Parameter Request Dump Request 43H 3nH 4CH hh mm 11 F7H 11110000 Exclusive status 01111111 ll Address Low 11110111 F7 End of Exclusive 43H 2nH 4CH hh mm II F7H 11110000 Exclusive status 01000011 43 YAMAHA ID 0011nnnn Device Number n always O when transmit n 0 F when recieve 01001100 4C ModelID Ohhhhhhh hh Address High Ommmmmmm mm Address Mid 01111111 ll 11110111 F7 Address Low End of Exclusive 01000011 43 YAMAHA ID 0010nnnn 2n Device Number n always O when transmit n 0 F when recieve 01001100 4C Model ID Ohhhhhhh hh Address High Ommmmmmm mm Address Mid System Exclusive Messages Clavinova compliance MIDI Event Data Format Recognized Internal Clock FOH 43H 73H 01H 02H F7H 00000010 02 Internal Clock Substatus External Clock
114. C755 75 C7 9 au C7 11 811 C7 13 7 13 C CSC a 5 C79 7 59 13 7 1 C7 9 79 CM7aug M7aug 7aug 5 j HB c c C148 1 8 C145 1 5 Csus4 sus4 1 2 5 1 2 5 Ww se ek Reference Style Creator NTR Note Transposition Rule Two settings are available ROOT TRANS When the root note is transposed the pitch relationship between notes is maintained For example the notes C3 E3 and G3 in the key of C will become F3 A3 and C4 when transposed to F Use this setting for parts that contain melodic lines gt ROOT The note is kept as close as possible to the previous note range For exam ple the notes and in the key of will become and when transposed to F Use this setting for chordal parts gt 1 1 NTT Note Transposition Table This sets the note transposition table to be used for source pattern transposition Six table types are available 5 No transposition e Suitable for melody line transposition Use for melody parts such as PHRASE 1 and PHRASE 2 e Suitable for chord transposition Use for the CHORD 1 CHORD 2 parts when they contain piano or guita
115. D Decay eene he the 93 D fragment 75 IR 81 93 Delete nine 68 75 113 155 Demonstration playback 56 81 INS 150 Dimmer 15 Direct Access 48 Direct Access 49 Directory 78 151 DISK erschien eee 54 150 Disk Direct 25 Disk SCSI operations 150 Displ y iet ette 44 Display 45 DOC 7 171 35 147 DSP O EE 147 DSP 3 TE 146 147 DSP 4 35 146 147 DSP E 35 146 147 6 35 146 147 DSP I i iach 35 146 147 DSP 8 sse 146 147 DSP 9 ated 147 164 IR EE 131 E Easy Edit 93 130 131 Edit directory 156 Effect block 146 Effect depth ss 145 Effect 222 Effect signal flow 147 Effect type list esses 220 EG none auum HORN UR 93 Element 94 End Key ione 86 POU ss ect 89 E VE 22 160 147 Equal Temperament 158 Event Elter 122 125 Event List eere 120 125 44 loque ETE 89 F Fade in out 23 72 160 Fast Forward
116. DISK DIRECT function is available 1 Pattern Assembly Realtime Step Rec Event Edit Full Parameter Edit Style File Format INTRO x 3 FILL IN x 4 BREAK FILL x 1 MAIN x 4 ENDING x 3 FADE IN OUT TAP TEMPO Single Finger Multi Finger Fingered Fingered Pro On Bass On Bass Pro Full Keyboard 4 Style Fully programmable 616 Fully programmable 4Pads x 60 Banks 58 Multi Pad Bank 1 MIDI Control Bank 1 Scale Tune Bank Realtime Step Rec Event Edit Disk Direct Playback 16 RAM Recording Quick Multitrack Step Chord Step Rec Event Edit 300kbyte Approximately 38 000 notes max with Ultra Quick Start function Appendix Anhang Annexe 029 Registration Memeory Language Display Disk Floppy Disk Drive Built in Hard Disk Demonstations Connectors MIDI Foot Pedal SCSI VIDEO OUT PC KEYBOARD Console Lamp Socket Analog 512 5 languages Back Lit Graphic LCD 3 5 2HD 2DD Optional 18 songs MIDI IN OUT TO HOST FOOT SWITCH1 FOOT SWITCH2 FOOT VOLUME D sub Half Pitch 50pins Pin Type Mini DIN Type 2 PHONES LOOP SEND L L R R Specifications Technische Daten Sp cifications 8 Switches x 64 Banks Freeze function English German French Spanish Italian 240 x 320 Dots video out capability MIDI A can switch to TO HOST HOST SELECT SW Mac PC1 PC2 MIDI NTSC PAL Composite Signal PC AT Standard for gooseneck lamp LINE OUT MAIN L L R R SUB 1 2 3 4 AUX I
117. FOH 43H 73H 01H 03H F7H 00000011 03 External Clock Substatus Organ Flutes data 43H 73H 01H 06H OBH 00H 00H 01H 06H OnH BULK DATA sum F7H Bulk Dump 01H Model ID Clavinova common ID 06H Bulk ID OBH Bulk No Organ Flutes data Bulk Dump 00H 00H 01H 06H Data Length 16bytes 1st OnH n channel No BULK DATA Organ Flutes data 2nd Footage t 00 07H data 0 1 12 2 9 3 6 4 4 5 3rd 1 1 3 00 07H 5 3 6 1 5 7 O dB 4th 1 3 57 00 09H 5th 2 00 07 6th 2 2 3 00 07H 7th 4 00 07H 8th 5 1 3 00 07H 9th 18 00 07 10th 16 00 07H 11th Attack 27 00 07H 12th Attack 2 2 3 00 07H 13th Attack 41 00 07H 14th Settings Attack Length 00 07H 15th Response 00 07H 16th Attack Mode 00 01H OOH Each 01H First 17th Wave Variation 00 01H 00H Sine 01H Tone Wheel 18th Volume 00 07H 19th aux 4 00H 20th aux 5 00H 21th aux 6 00H 22th aux 7 00H sum Check Sum 0 sum BULK DATA DOC Multi Timbre OFF FOH 43H 73H 01H 13H F7H DOC Multi Timbre FOH 43H 73H 01H 14H F7H 00010011 13 DOC Multi Timbre OFF Substatus 00010100 14 DOC Multi Timbre ON Substatus When the DOC Multi Timbre ON is accepted the MIDI receive mode is set as listed below Channel No 1 10 Manual Part Melody Part 15 Rhythm 16 Control Including the System Exclusive messages MIDI FA Cancel FOH 43H 73H 01H 61H F7H x 01100001 61 _ MIDI FA Cancel Substatus MIDI FA Cancel Off FOH 43H 73
118. Loop Start and Loop End points is adjusted to fit the specified number of measures Specify the number of beats per measure This display can be used to tune the wave to fit a specified playback tempo In other words the wave is stretched tuned down or compressed tuned up so that it plays back over the specified number of measures at the specified time signature and tempo This capability is particularly useful when the sample is a phrase rather than a simple sound The wave will only play back at the specified tempo however when played at its original pitch usually the pitch played by the C3 key To ensure smooth looping adjust the Loop Start Stop point before using this function Reference 88 89 Waveform Edit Add Wave This function can be used to add a wave from a different waveform to the currently selected waveform When a waveform contains two or more waves the individual waves must be assigned to different areas of the keyboard the waves cannot be layered 35 WAVEFORM EDIT E3 HAVEFORH HumanVoice1_1 Ka 1 SELECT HAVEFORH 2 ADD HAVE 3 MOVE START MOTE VOLUME DELETE HAVE C2 CL co cl E Lyn SOURCE CUSTOM VOICE WAVE FORM The Start Note at right in the display can also be speci fied by pressing the appro priate key on the keyboard while holding this button 01 HumanVoicei 1 02 HumanVoice2 HUHRN2 HumanVoice3 Select the source wave to
119. MFC10 settings by following the on screen instructions Press the NEXT button to enable the selected Easy Setup template Disconnect the MIDI cable from the MIDI OUT B ter minal and connect it to the MFC10 Foot Controller F01 Assign various functions to the five Footswitches ZH HIZRRD Panel Controller Select the desired function for each panel controller Press NEXT to continue 00 3 5 5 FILL DOHN F02 FILL SELF F03 FILL BREAK Foa FILL UP Fos SYNC STOP F06 MAIN A A Select the desired function to be assigned to the selected Footswitch PAGE CONTROL em A Select the desired Footswitch number we Since all MFC10 settings data is stored to Flash ROM any data in the MFC10 settings location will be erased and replaced by your new settings This includes the factory pro grammed preset MFC10 settings If you ve deleted the factory set data you can use the Restore function page 154 to load a copy of it from the included disks page 6 M rw When setting up the MFC10 from the 9000Pro a MIDI cable must be connected from the MIDI OUT of the 9000Pro to the MIDI IN of the MFC10 However you should disconnect this cable when using the MFC10 since extraneous MIDI messages may be transmitted from the 9000Pro To exit from the play mode select the MIDI Template display page 174 and press the CANCEL LCD but
120. Mid Width 1 0 12 0 var ins1 4 block 10 120 14 LFO Phase Difference 180 180deg resolution 3deg 4 124 14 15 Input Mode mono stereo 0 1 15 Input Mode mono stereo 0 1 16 AUTO PAN variation insertion block 5 71 FLANGER 1 2 3 chorus variation insertion block MSB 67 Parameter Display Value See Table Control No Parameter Display Value See Table Control 1 LFO Frequency 0 00Hz 39 7Hz 0 127 table 1 e 1 LFO Frequency 0 00Hz 39 7Hz 0 127 table 1 2 L R Depth 0 127 0 127 2 LFO Depth 0 127 0 127 3 F R Depth 0 127 0 127 3 Feedback Level 63 63 1 127 4 PAN Direction L lt gt R L gt R L lt R Lturn Rturn L R 0 5 4 Delay Offset 0 0mS 50mS 0 127 table 2 5 5 6 EQ Low Frequency 32Hz 2 0kHz 4 40 table 3 6 EQ Low Frequency 32Hz 2 0kHz 4 40 table 3 7 EQLow Gain 12 12dB 52 76 7 EQ Low Gain 12 12dB 52 76 8 EQ High Frequency 500Hz 16 0kHz 28 58 table 3 8 EQ High Frequency 500 2 16 0 2 28 58 table 3 9 EQ High Gain 12 12dB 52 76 9 EQ High Gain 12 412dB 52 76 10 10 Dry Wet D63 gt W D W D W63 1 127 11 EQ Mid Frequency 100Hz 10 0kHz var ins1 4 block 14 54 table 3 11 EQ Mid Frequency 100Hz 10 0kHz var ins1 4 block 14 54 table 3 12 EQMid Gain 12 12dB var ins1 4 block 52 76 12 EQ Mid Gain 12 12dB var ins1 4 block 52 76 13 EQ Mid Width 1 0 12 0 var ins1 4 block 10 120 13 EQ Mid Width 1 0 12 0 var ins1 4 block 10 120 14 14 LFO Phase Difference 180 180deg resolution 3de
121. Open Bongo L Heel Stereo Bongo L Heel Stereo 47 B B 2 Brush Mid Tom L Stereo Mid Tom L Bongo L Slap Stereo Bongo L Slap Stereo 48 C 2 C 3 Brush Mid Tom H Stereo Mid Tom H Timbale L Open Stereo Timbale L Open Stereo 49 C 2 8 3 Brush Crash Cymbal 1 Stereo Crash Cymbal 1 50 D 2410 3 Brush High Tom Stereo High Tom 51 D 2108 3 Brush Ride Cymbal 1 Stereo Ride Cymbal 1 52 2 3 Chinese Cymbal Stereo Crash Cymbal 2 Flute Key Click Car Engine Ignition 53 2 3 Brush Ride Cymbal Cup Stereo Duhulla Dom Car Tires Squeal 54 FF 2 3 Tambourine Stereo Tambourine Car Passing Timbale H Open Stereo Timbale H Open Stereo 55 2 G 3 Splash Cymbal Stereo Duhulla Tak Car Crash 56 GH 2 08 3 Cowbell Stereo Cowbell Siren 57 2 A 3 Brush Crash Cymbal 2 Stereo Duhulla Sak Train 58 At 2 3 Claves Jet Plane 59 B 218 3 Brush Ride Cymbal 2 Stereo Doff Dom Starship 60 C 3 C 4 Bongo H Stereo Katem Dom Burst Cowbell Top Stereo Cowbell Top Stereo 61 08 3 C 4 Bongo L Srereo Katem Tak Roller Coaster 62 D 4 Conga Mute Stereo Katem Sak Submarine 63 D 3 D 4 Conga H Open Stereo Katem Tak 64 3 4 Conga L Stereo Doff Tak Guiro Short Stereo Guiro Short Stereo 65 F 3 4 Timbale H Stereo Tabla Dom Guiro Long Stereo Guiro Long Stereo 66 FR 3 1 4 Timbale L Stereo Tabla Tak1 67 G 3 G 4 Tabla Tik 68 Gt 3 Gt 4 Tabla Tak2 Shower Laugh Tambourine Stereo Tambourine Stereo 69 A 3 4 Cabasa Stereo Tabla Sak Thunder Scream 70
122. PARAMETER LIST on insertion 1 25 1 00 7F INSERTION EFFECT 16 Refer to the MIDI EFFECT PARAMETER LIST depends on insertion 1 TOTAL SIZE 6 30 2 00 7F MES RTION EFFECT n PARAMETER Refer to the EFFECT PARAMETER LIST depends on insertion 1 00 7F lee RTION EFFECT n PARAMETER Refer to the XG EFFECT PARAMETER LIST EES on insertion 1 32 2 00 7F INSE RTION EFFECT n PARAMETER2 Refer to the XG EFFECT PARAMETER LIST PUT on insertion 1 00 7F E RTION EFFECT n PARAMETER2 Refer to the XG EFFECT PARAMETER LIST on insertion 1 34 2 00 7F INSE RTION EFFECT n PARAMETERS Refer to the XG EFFECT PARAMETER LIST depends on insertion 1 00 7F RTION EFFECT n PARAMETERS Refer to the XG EFFECT PARAMETER LIST on insertion 1 36 2 00 7F INSE RTION EFFECT n PARAMETER4 Refer to the XG EFFECT PARAMETER LIST peer on insertion 1 00 7F RTION EFFECT PARAMETER4 Refer to the XG EFFECT PARAMETER LIST EES on insertion 1 38 2 00 7F INSERTION EFFECT n PARAMETERS Refer to the XG EFFECT PARAMETER LIST Ee on insertion 1 00 7F 12 RTION EFFECT n PARAMETERS Refer to the XG EFFECT PARAMETER LIST on insertion 1 3A 2 00 7F NSE RTION EFFECT n Refer to the XG EFFECT PARAMETER LIST SC on insertion 1 00 7F RTION EFFECT n PARAMETER6 Refer to the XG EFFECT PARAMETER LIST on insertion 1 3C 2 00 7F INSE RTION EFFECT n PARAMETER7 Refer to the XG EFF
123. Pad 0 67 91 372 ToHeaven 0 68 101 319 BowedPad 0 0 92 373 Night 0 70 101 320 Glacier 0 64 92 374 Glisten 0 71 101 Appendix Anhang Annexe 213 Voice List Stimmenliste Liste tles Category voice Name MSB amp LSB Program Category Voice Name MSB LSB Zoe Changez Change 375 BelChoir 0 96 101 429 ElecPerc 0 65 118 376 Echoes 0 0 102 430 RevCymbl 0 0 119 377 EchoPad2 0 8 102 431 FretNoiz 0 0 120 378 Echo Pan 0 14 102 432 BrthNoiz 0 0 121 379 EchoBell 0 64 102 433 Seashore 0 0 122 380 Big Pan 0 65 102 434 Tweet 0 0 123 381 SynPiano 0 66 102 435 Telphone 0 0 124 382 Creation 0 67 102 436 Helicptr 0 0 125 383 Stardust 0 68 102 437 Applause 0 0 126 384 Reso Pan 0 69 102 438 Gunshot 0 0 127 385 Sci Fi 0 0 103 439 CuttngNz 64 0 0 386 Starz 0 64 103 440 CttngNz2 64 0 1 387 Sitar 0 0 104 441 Str Slap 64 0 3 388 DetSitar 0 32 104 442 FI KClik 64 0 16 389 Sitar 2 0 35 104 443 Rain 64 0 32 390 Tambra 0 96 104 444 Thunder 64 0 33 391 Tamboura 0 97 104 445 Wind 64 0 34 392 Banjo 0 0 105 446 Stream 64 0 35 393 MuteBnjo 0 28 105 447 Bubble 64 0 36 394 Rabab 0 96 105 448 Feed 64 0 37 395 Gopichnt 0 97 105 449 Dog 64 0 48 396 Oud 0 98 105 450 Horse 64 0 49 397 Shamisen 0 0 106 451 Bird 2 64 0 50 398 Koto 0 0 107 452 Ghost 64 0 54 399 T Koto 0 96 107 453 M
124. RECORD 0 Bank LSB REC j PLAY PLAY GR GR PLAY MUTE MUTE MUTE MUTE MUTE MUTE RHY Le Bass 2 f puri f PHR2 Reference 001 1 000 e 5 BEAT J 851 139 Multi Pad Creator The 9000Pro has 58 recordable banks that you can use to store your own Multi Pad phrases These orig inal Multi Pads can be played and used in the same way as the presets Multi Pad data can also be saved to and loaded from disk Basic Procedure 2 Select MULTI PAD CREATOR 1 Press the DIGITAL RECORDING button DIGITRL REC HENU 7 SONG CREATOR DIGITAL STUDIO SOUND CREATOR SAMPLING CUSTOM VOICE PLUG IN VOICE E RECORDING D D SONG e STYLE 9 MULTI PAD MIXING CONSOLE EFFECTS FILTER EQ TUNING PART a TYLE CREATOR e sel MULTI PAD CREATOR Use the NEXT or BACK button KS CURRENT BANK Ke Deet 1 RECORDING CLEAR REPEAT CHORD HATCH Select this to name the Multi Pad Bank Select this to store the recorded pad data to Flash ROM See the CAU TION notes below Select this to call up the Step Recording display 02 User Pad Select this to engage the Record 03 User Pad standby mode synchronized standby 04 User Pad 4 Bank number 4 Record Edit Multi Pad data 5 Store the created pad to Flash ROM Se
125. Track1 16 Acmp Bass Part EQ Low x Acmp x Song Track Program Change x x x x x Acmp Chord 1 Part EQ Low x x Acmp x 1 foci mone Content x x xx x x Acmp Chord 2 Part EQ Low Pad Part EQ Low x lo le xx X Song Part Brightness Track1 16 x x x D D Acmp Phrase 1 Part EQ Low x x Acmp x Voice Acmp Phrase 2 Part EQ Low x olx x Part Select Left Right1 Right2 Right3 x x x D D Acmp Rhythm 1 Part EQ High x x Acmp x Upper Octave x x x Voice Acmp Rhythm 2 Part EQ High x x Acmp x Sustain SW R1 R2 R3 ON OFF x x D Voice Acmp Bass Part EQ High x x Acmp D Touch SW ON OFF Xx voice Acmp Chord 1 Part EQ High x Right 1 Part On Off Voice Acmp Chord 2 Part EQ High x x Acmp x Right 1 Voice Voice Acmp Pad Part EQ High x x Acmp x Right 1 Release Time Bn 48h x x x x x Voice x Acmp Phrase 1 Part EQ High x x Acmp D Right 1 Voice Octave o o o x x Voice Voice Acmp Phrase 2 Part EQ High x x Acmp x Right 1 Part Volume Voice Synchro Stop x x x x x Right 1 Part Panpot Voice Synchro Start ON o x Ixix x x x Right 1 Reverb Depth o
126. USED 45 1 NOT USED 46 1 NOT USED 47 1 NOT USED 48 1 NOT USED 49 1 NOT USED 4A 1 NOT USED 4B 1 NOT USED 4C 1 NOT USED 4D 1 NOT USED 4E 1 NOT USED 4F 1 NOT USED 50 1 NOT USED 51 1 NOT USED 52 1 NOT USED 53 1 NOT USED 54 1 NOT USED 55 1 NOT USED 56 1 NOT USED 57 1 NOT USED 58 1 NOT USED 59 1 00 5F AC1 CONTROLLER NUMBER x 10 5A 1 NOT USED 5B 1 NOT USED 5C 1 NOT USED 5D 1 NOT USED 5E 1 NOT USED 5F 1 NOT USED 60 1 00 5F AC2 CONTROLLER NUMBER x 11 615 TOTAL SIZE 31 Appendix Anhang Annexe MIDI Data Format MIDI Datenformat Format de donn es MIDI 11 00 64 00 01 A D SETUP x TOTAL SIZE 64 12 nn 10 1 00 08 OUTPUT SELECT x O stereo out 8 indiv1 2 0 28 2D 40 indiv1 41 indiv2 TOTAL SIZE 1 nn A D Part number 0 63 Table 3 10 MIDI PARAMETER CHANGE TABLE DRUM SETUP Address Size Data Parameter Recognized Description Default H H H 3n m 0 1 00 7F PITCH COARSE 64 63 40 3n 1 1 00 7F PITCH FINE 64 63 cent 40 3n m 2 1 00 LEVEL 0 127 depend on the note 3n m 3 1 00 7 ALTERNATE GROUP depend on the note 1 127 3n m 4 1 00 PAN depend on the note 1 L63 64 C center 127 863 3n m 5 1 00 7 REVERB SEND 0 12
127. VOICE em ef emet PRESET VOICE PIANO ORGAN cc c t ec eL ec ec E PIANO o p ce ce 623 em ec Preset Voices The Preset Voices are specially recorded and programmed voices exclusive to the 9000Pro Keyboard Percussion e XG Voices e Organ Flutes Voices Custom Voices Plug in Voices When one of the Drum Kit or SFX Kit voices in the PERCUS SION group is selected you can play 28 different drums and percussion instruments or SFX sound effects sounds on the keyboard The drum and percussion instruments played by the various keys are marked by symbols below the keys Some of the instruments in the different drum kit voices sound different even though they have the same name while others are essentially the same See page 200 for a complete listing of the Drum Kit and SFX Kit assignments Yamaha s XG format is a major new enhancement to the GM General MIDI System Level 1 format It provides a larger number of voices as well as greater expressive control and a wide range of effects XG also ensures continued compatibility with future instruments and soft ware Simultaneously hold down the desired VOICE button and press the XG button to call up the XG voice display of the corre sponding category See page 62 See page 92 This group of special voices is available when an optional
128. Yamaha Europa GmbH Siemensstrafe 22 34 25462 Rellingen FR of Germany Tel 04101 3030 AUSTRIA Yamaha Music Austria Schleiergasse 20 A 1100 Wien Austria Tel 01 60203900 THE NETHERLANDS Yamaha Music Nederland Kanaalweg 18G 3526KL Utrecht The Netherlands Tel 030 2828411 BELGIUM Yamaha Music Belgium Keiberg Imperiastraat 8 1930 Zaventem Belgium Tel 02 7258220 FRANCE Yamaha Musique France Division Claviers 70 77312 Marne la Vall e Cedex 2 France Tel 01 64 61 4000 PK 19 Die Einzelheiten zu Produkten sind bei Ihrer unten aufgef hrten Niederlassung und bei Yamaha Vertragshandlern in den jeweiligen Bestimmungslindern erh ltlich Para detalles sobre productos contacte su tienda Yamaha m s cercana el distribuidor autorizado que se lista debajo ITALY Yamaha Musica Italia S P A Home Keyboard Division Viale Italia 88 20020 Lainate Milano Italy Tel 02 935 771 SPAIN PORTUGAL Yamaha Hazen Electronica Musical S A Ctra de la Coruna km 17 200 28230 Las Rozas Madrid Spain Tel 91 201 0700 GREECE Philippe Nakas S A Navarinou Street 13 P Code 10680 Athens Greece Tel 01 364 7111 SWEDEN Yamaha Scandinavia AB J A Wettergrens Gata 1 Box 30053 S 400 43 G teborg Sweden Tel 031 89 34 00 DENMARK YS Copenhagen Liaison Office Generatorvej 8B DK 2730 Herlev Denmark Tel 44 92 49 00 FINLAND F Musiikki Oy Kluuvikatu 6 P O Box 260 SF 00101 Helsinki Finl
129. already recorded style data e Parameter Edit Determines various parameters of the Style File Format See below for details about Style File Format Bi Style File Format The Style File Format SFF combines all of Yamaha s auto accompaniment know how into a single uni fied format By using the Parameter Edit function you can take advantage of the power of the SFF for mat and freely create your own styles The chart below indicates the process by which the accompaniment is played back This does not apply to the rhythm track The source pattern in the chart is the original style data As explained on page 132 in style recording this source pattern is recorded As shown in the chart below the actual output of the accompaniment is determined by various parameter settings and chord changes playing chords in the auto accompaniment section of the keyboard entered to this source pattern Source Pattern Source chord root setting Recorded in Style Recording Source chord type setting Refer to page 135 3 lt Chord change Created by playing chords in the auto accompani ment section of the keyboard NTR Note Transposition Rule Refer to page 70 Note Transposition rule setting Se Edited in Parameter Edit NTT Note Transposition Table These parameters determine how the pitch of the d 1 Source pattern is converted when you play chords Note Transposition table settin
130. appears in the Screen pressing the EXIT button Saver or any other panel button Language ER FS UTILITY Keep in mind that some keys of the computer keyboard are not used for the 9000Pro and have no effect or function 111112 CIT CT RR RR LRNGURGE LRNGURGE ENGLISH 1 KEYBOARD 1 OWNER NAHE Press this button to enter LANGUAGE PC KEYBOARD the owner s your name DEUTSCH Type2 FRAN AIS ESPANOL Typea ITALIANO Types See page 45 for details Select the appropriate type for the computer key board that is to be connected to the 9000Pro See below for details Computer Keyboard Types for use with the 9000Pro 1 2 Esc Iesele NumLock Copien Seral Lock EXE pe pn fo ns Un ele 11212121 1 18 1112 13 415 36 SCREIERRRR lee 8 e F e Da SP gd E Fn on Alt ERI ctr D H Type 3 Type 4 rifrelra ra reels regm s E 81 re ro rope
131. automatically create appropriate accompaniment while you play just about anything anywhere on the keyboard using both hands You don t have to worry about specifying the accompaniment chords Although the Full Keyboard mode is designed to work with many songs some arrangements may not be suitable for use with this feature Try playing a few simple songs in the Full Keyboard mode to get a feel for its capabilities The 9000Pro recognizes chords you play in the Auto Accompaniment section of keyboard and produces appropriate chords even if auto accompaniment is off as long as the Left part is set to on Chords are recognized according to the Fingered mode even if the mode is actually set to another mode This setting is especially effective when used with the Vocal Harmony or the Harmony Echo Reference 89 69 Chord Types Recognized in the Fingered Mode Example for C chords Auto Accompaniment 9 Ce C6 9 CM7 CM7 9 CM7 11 C gt 5 CM7 gt 5 Csus4 Caug CM7aug Cm Cm 9 Cmg Cm m7 9 Cm7 11 CmM7 CmM7 9 Cm7 gt 5 CmM7 gt 5 Cdim Cdim7 C7 9 7 13 C7 9 C7 11
132. be used when editing the Board Custom Voices on a computer When editing the Board Custom Voices using a computer XGworks or XGworks lite and its Plug in Editor Software are needed When editing the Board Custom Voices place check marks next to all the event types MIDI Thru Filter in XGworks or XGworks lite Refertothe owner s manual of XGworks XGworks lite for details Reference Creating Plug in Custom Voices Voice Editing Board Voice selection The explanations here apply to step 7 on page 101 Cl note ih PLUG IN CUSTOM VOICE CREATOR Had Tube Select the desired VOICE SET STORE Select this to Keep in mind that some of your menu and edit the voice oan store the editing may have little to no parameters edited voice effect on the actual sound HSB 1033 LSB 000 parameters depending on the particular VOICE 000 Had Tube to Flash board and the particular ROM step parameter being edited 8 on page Can be used to com 101 pare the sound of the BANK HSB LSB VOICE NAHE originally selected voice with the changed voice 033 001 001 011 91 4 033 002 033 003 Select the Board Voice Before entering the Plug in Custom Voice Creator function you have already called up a specific voice for editing Selecting a Board voice here lets you determine the basic sound source letting you select a variation sou
133. by one octave 18 24 VOCAL HARMONY TALK Calling up the Talk Settings related to the microphone sound 80 DSP 8 Turning the DSP 8 effect the microphone sound on off 80 V H 9 Turning Vocal Harmony on or off 80 SELECT VOCAL HARMONY SELECT Selecting producing the Vocal Harmony effect 81 MIC SETUP 3 BAND EQ Adjusting the gain of each band for the microphone sound 82 NOISE GATE Gating the input when the input signal from the microphone falls be 82 low a specified level COMPRESSOR Holding down the output when the input signal from the microphone 82 exceeds a specified level VOCAL HARMONY Determining how the Vocal Harmony is controlled 82 MIC Determining how the microphone sound is controlled 83 Basic Operation Memory Structure The 9000Pro features three different memory provisions for storing your original data Flash ROM RAM and Disk Flash ROM The 9000Pro includes special Flash ROM memory Unlike conventional ROM Flash ROM can be overwritten allowing you to store your own original data The contents of Flash ROM are maintained even when the power is turned off RAM This is the conventional internal user memory of the 9000Pro For sampling purposes memory can be expanded to a max imum of 65 MB by installing SIMM modules Any edited data in RAM memory is lost when the power is turned off Always store any important data in RAM to Flash ROM or save the data to disk
134. cause feedback Adjust the microphone position and the INPUT VOLUME level or MASTER VOLUME control level if necessary so that feedback does not occur V J Using the LINE setting N CAUTION Normally since you will be using a microphone you may never need to use the Never use the MIC setting LINE setting However this may come in handy if you want to use a pre recorded sid eine eng player cassette deck etc source on CD or cassette tape with the vocal harmony feature For best results the Doing this could damage the source should be a single vocal only any other singers and instruments in the mix itsinput tune could produce unexpected or undesired results 1 Set the INPUT VOLUME control to MIN Ces Since the MIC LINE IN jack is highly sensitive it may pick up and pro duce noise when noth ing is connected To avoid this always set the INPUT VOLUME to minimum when noth ing is connected to the 2 Set the MIC LINE panel switch to LINE Connect the source to the MIC LINE IN jack 4 Adjust the INPUT VOLUME control MIC LINE IN jack Play the source at the highest expected volume and adjust the INPUT VOLUME control to get the optimum input level as in the Setting Up instructions above EE This turns Talk settings on or off 7 wort The Talk settings are effe
135. dienen nur der Information Yamaha Corp beh lt sich das Recht vor Produkte oder deren technische Daten jederzeit ohne vorherige Ank ndigung zu ver ndern oder zu modifizieren Da die techni schen Daten das Ger t selbst oder Sonderzubeh r nicht in jedem Land gleich sind setzen Sie sich im Zweifel bitte mit Ihrem Yamaha H ndler in Verbindung Les caract ristiques techniques et les descriptions du mode d emploi ne sont donn es que pour information Yamaha Corp se r serve le droit de changer ou modifier les produits et leurs caract ristiques techniques tout moment sans aucun avis Du fait que les caract risti ques techniques les quipements et les options peuvent diff rer d un pays l autre adressez vous au distributeur Yamaha le plus proche Appendix Anhang Annexe e FCC INFORMATION U S A 1 IMPORTANT NOTICE DO NOT MODIFY THIS UNIT This product when installed as indicated in the instructions con tained in this manual meets FCC requirements Modifications not expressly approved by Yamaha may void your authority granted by the FCC to use the product 2 IMPORTANT When connecting this product to accessories and or another product use only high quality shielded cables Cable s sup plied with this product MUST be used Follow all installation instruc tions Failure to follow instructions could void your FCC authorization to use this product in the USA 3 NOTE This product has been tested and found to c
136. different displays 2 Press the LCD button corresponding to the part you wish to turn on or off accompaniment parts are dis played other displays can RART OFF OFF OFF OFF be called up no matter how CA RHY2 BASS CHD1 CHD2 f PAD PHR2 many times the button is pressed Other displays can jak fo 4 a 4 fo be called up when Song Player 1 page 30 is set to on or when 08000000 Quick lt Guide 24 Qanmimmerni 3 Adjust the volume to set the optimum level balance between the accompaniment and your right hand performance 1 Press the MAIN MIXER button 2 Press the LCD button corresponding to the part of which the volume you wish to adjust MAIN MIXER 8888888 TA 4 Stop the accompaniment page 21 U 0 0 Disk Direct Function The 9000Pro can play back style files contained on the included floppy disk gt Insert the Disk Styles disk supplied with the 9000 into pee the disk drive 57 lee It may take a short while for the data on the disk to be read before you can go on to the next steps 2 Press the DISK DIRECT button STYLE DISK DIRECT 001 16Balad3 sty sty 1 002 16Balad4 sty Bolero sty gt Ci aBtuessty
137. each function corresponding to step 3 are covered in the following explanations The Function mode has the following display pages MASTER TUNE SCALE TUNE Master Tuning Scale Tuning 158 SPLIT POINT FINGERING Split Point Fingering settings 159 CONTROLLER Controller assignment Foot controller Keyboard Modulation Wheel function 159 REGISTRATION FREEZE VOICE SET Registration Freeze Group Voice Set settings 163 HARMONY ECHO Harmony Echo 5 164 VIDEO OUT Video monitor settinge esses 165 TALK SETTING Talk setting Vocal Harmony and the microphone sound Blue ET 165 UTILITY Utility settings AAA 166 Master Tuning Scale Tuning The explanations here apply to step 3 of the Basic Procedure above Master Tuning Scale Tuning F1 MASTER TUNE SCALE TUNE The current tuning of 0 F1 MASTER SCALE TUNE each note is shown in the HRSTER TUNE SCALE TUNE corresponding key EQUAL TEMPERAMENT SCALE HASTER TUNE SCALE TUNE Use this to tune the 5 9000 to oam HZ is the NEXT most commonly use requency This allows you to store four different Scale Tuning settings to Multi Pad bank 4 60 This convenient fea BACK ture lets you change Scale MASTER TUNE NEA ANNIS A Tuning settings while you RRRB
138. easy to understand display It provides comprehensive at a glance information on all current settings and gives you convenient intuitive control over the 9000Pro s functions LCD CONTRAST LCD buttons LCD buttons PAGE CONTROL BACK NEXT e CHB 8 5 OE 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 91 gU LCD buttons 554 Data dial LCD buttons The LCD A J buttons are used to select the corresponding menu In the example display shown above for example the LCD F button can be used to turn the R1 voice on The LCD 1 8 buttons are divided into eight sets up down buttons and are used to make selections or adjust settings up or down correspondingly for functions shown directly above them In the example display shown above for example the LCD 6 buttons can be used to adjust the volume of the R2 voice Data dial This is usually used to change the tempo of accompaniment song playback when the TEMPO lamp is lit However when certain functions for example Music Database selection Naming and Mixing Console adjusting are shown on the LCD display this dial is used to change the corresponding data values when the DATA ENTRY lamp is lit Depending on the selected display the lamps switch between each other automatically This cannot be changed manually Rotating the data dial to the right clockwise increases the value while rotating it t
139. expand or contract accordingly Reference e Custom Voice Creating pex The 9000Pro has a Custom Voice Creator feature that allows you to create your own voices Once you ve created a voice you can store it to a Custom voice location for future recall Basic Procedure The following voices cannot be edited via the Custom Voice Creator SOUND CREATOR HENU Organ Flutes Live Live FunkKt SOUND CREATOR Arabic Kit SAMPLING 1 ji S CUSTOM VOICE GE SFX SFX Kit2 DIGITAL SONG Plug in Voice 2 Select CUSTOM VOICE 1 Press the SOUND CREATOR button A zone mue DIGITAL STUDIO e STYLE e MULTI PAD MIXING CONSOLE EFFECTS FILTER EQ TUNING dms Drum or Percussion voices cannot be edited via Easy Edit Keep in mind that adjustments made to the parameters may not make much change in the actual sound depending on 4 Press this button the original settings of the CUSTOM VOICE CREATOR MENU C voice p 3 Select a Preset voice The Custom Voice Creating ORIGINAL VOICE mode makes it possible to cre Piano ate new voices by editing some parameters of the preset voices After selecting a voice press Sel ON d With the VOICE but tons the EXIT button to return Press EASY or FULL to continue back to this display 5 Edit the voice parameters
140. file i SR 8000 Wave file Select this and press the NEXT button to call up the display that imports the wave data sampled via the PSR 8000 Clearing Wave Data The explanations here apply to step 4 of the Basic Procedure on page 86 Py HAVE CLEAR d Press this button to switch between the currently selected wave and the cur rently selected panel voice REHAIN TIHE 3 35 FREE AREA 284K Select this to execute the Clear operation CUSTOM VOICE WAVE FORM HAVE VoiceO1 11141113 Voice02 HAVEOO2 Voice03 HRVEO03 Voiceoa a 4 Reference Editing Wave data The illustration below applies to step 4 of the Basic Procedure on page 86 1 Select a Custom Voice which con tains the wave s you wish to edit Select the Custom voice to edit Press NEXT to continue CUSTOH VOICE 01 HumanVoice1 02 HumanVoice2 PAGE CONTROL EDIT HENU 1 EDIT Wave Edit Resampling 3 Select the desired Waveform Wave and edit the desired parameters HAVE EDIT DISK SELECT HAVE RESAMPLING LOOP POINT NORMALIZE YOLUME TUNE HAVEFORH HAVE 29 EDIT 87 HAVEFORH Humanvoice Kal n 1 SELECT HAVEFORH ADD HAVE MOVE START VOLUME DELETE WAVE WAVEFORM This function exports the current w
141. for this is to assign a different voice to the Harmony part as shown in the example settings below Right 1 Plug in voice using the PLG150 VL board e g Tenor Sax e Right 2 9000Pro preset voice e g Miller Night Part R1 and R2 ON ASSIGN R2 This workaround lets you play the monophonic Plug in voice for the melody and use a different yet complementary sound for the Harmony part Main note you play The Right 1 voice sounds Harmony note s The Right 2 voice sounds Reference 901 Creating Plug in Custom Voices Using the Plug in voices in Song Creator See page 125 Differences between the PLG150 and PLG100 series Single Part Plug in Boards If you intend to use Single Part Plug in Boards Yamaha recommends that you use the PLG150 series boards exclusively For this reason the included floppy disk features voice data for PLG150 series Plug in Boards However you can use the PLG100 series if you keep in mind the following points and anomalies Poly Expansion page 69 If you have installed a PLG150 Board to SLOT 1 and a PLG100 Board to SLOT 2 or in other words installed a higher level board of the same type to SLOT 1 and have set POLY EXPAN SION to ON you may experience certain problems when playing the voices When you have installed a PLG150 DX to SLOT 1 and a PLG100 DX to SLOT 2 No problem should result
142. gt 2 Press the LCD button to call the Search display 3 Select a category and set the tempo range 4 Press the LCD I button to execute the Search operation Press this button to call up the Keyword dis play from which you can enter a keyword and search the Music Database 5 Select a Music Database see step 2 on page 26 and play along with the accompaniment playback Pen WIRT D Auto Accompaniment You can also create your own Music Database setups For details refer to page 76 Reference on page 163 REGISTRATION MEMORY buttons The Registration Memory gives you a convenient way to select the style voice and effect settings that will suit a particular type of music You can instantly change panel settings with the touch of a single button The Registration Memory provides up to 512 complete control panel setups 64 banks 8 setups each that can be recalled instantly during your performance For a list of Registration Memory setup parameters refer to page 214 Using the Preset Registration Memory gt Select a Registration Bank 01 through 03 The currently selected Registration Bank is indicated at the top right of the dis play REGISTRATION MEMORY REGIST BAN
143. in Board 65 SOEs an SG 42 69 ll 42 69 Slow Fast uses 35 60 160 GE 160 Song Creator 36 110 Song 30 78 Song recording 36 110 SOME 79 Sostenuto 160 Source Chord 127 135 Source 127 135 Specifications sess 246 Index Split point 18 20 57 70 159 Start eene 86 Start CL 89 110 116 122 140 143 engste 19 41 54 62 74 81 84 92 101 128 141 146 147 158 Style aiite 20 25 55 Style Assembly 129 Style File 6 7 25 127 171 Style list erit itti tens 212 Style Manager sess 55 74 erener 35 60 160 Sustain 161 EE 75 Synchronized start Sync Start 20 Synchronized stop Sync Stop 73 T Talk setting ses 80 165 Tap COUN iere rennes 166 Tap 23 72 Tempo tese ibn tes 44 72 Thru Port ns 173 TO HOST 13 169 173 Touch 10 35 60 162 Touch Im 164 Track 24 36 38 82 110 112 113 129 130 Re 175 Transmit clock 175 Transpose
144. instrument go about playing a note Acoustic guitar note production Digital instrument note production Sampling Note Sampling Note Tone Generator Electric circuit mm Wm Based on playing information from the keyboard a sampling note stored in the tone generator is played through the speakers Pluck a string and the body resonates the sound As shown in the illustration above in an electronic instrument the sampling note previously recorded note stored in the tone generator section electronic circuit is played based on informa tion received from the keyboard So then what is the information from the keyboard that becomes the basis for note production For example let s say you play quarter note using the grand piano sound on the 9000Pro board Unlike an acoustic instrument that puts out a resonated note the electronic instrument puts out information from the keyboard such as with what voice with which key about how strong when was it pressed and when was it released Then each piece of information is changed into a number value and sent to the tone generator Using these numbers as a basis the tone generator plays the stored sampling note Example of Keyboard Information Voice number with what voice 01 grand piano Note number with which key 60 C3 Note on when was it pressed an
145. is edited the corresponding EQ value is high lighted and the number of the edited band appears above the Q and FREQ controls The Q and FREQ controls can then be used to adjust the Q bandwidth and the FREQ center frequency of the selected band The higher the the narrower the bandwidth The available FREQ range is different for each band Gain lt FREQ OG Effect Signal Flow Chart gt OUT DRY LINE SUB Ft Reverb 1 R1 DSP 4 T 4 9 Sent DSP 1 Dry R2 DSP 5 Rev Send 5 Cho Send gt _ R3 DSP 6 o Pese P Chorus 2 Master EQ Dry LEFT DSP 7 Rev send DSP 2 Cho Send gt gt DSP 9 Dry 3 Band Noise Vocal P EQ Gate Compressor DSP 8 Harmony 6 Dry STYLE DSP 3 lt Rev Send Cho Send Connection is set to Insertion DSP Send I D DSP 3 e Connection is set to System Reference Mixing Console Line Out Settings This convenient feature allows you to send the output of a selected Part or Parts to the LINE OUT jacks For Drum Parts you can even select specific drum sounds to be output through these jacks LINE OUT L L R go um 5 o 2 SUB
146. is especially useful when playing the Organ Flutes voices which require many notes of polyphony See HINT on page 69 Please note that the voices of the Multi Part boards cannot be played from the 9000Pro s keyboard XG Plug in Board PLG100 XG This Plug in Board is a 16 part XG sound generator You can play back XG GM song files using the rich variety of sounds and effects on this board Reference Plug in Voices Plug in Manager This function lets you manage the Plug in Voice related parameters as disk files The following three types of parameters described in the illustration on page 64 are available Plug in Custom Voices These can be edited via the Plug in Custom Voice Creator func tion page 102 Native System Parameters These can be edited via the Native System Parameter Edit func tion page 105 Available parameters vary according to the in stalled board Board Custom Voices These can be edited via your computer See pages 100 and 106 for details Basic Procedure 1 Select a Plug in Voice C5 CEE cL eJ category 17 vill BOARD VOICE Ge AE p Sloti Flash 2 A 148 EN 001 006 M Gi VL Soprano Soprano Sax a nuem serre 002 007 1 EE WEE MEC Alto Sax D SAVE PLUG IN PLUG IN MANAGER 0s 008 Motion Sax
147. maximum attack level DECAY1 Set the rate of variation between the maximum attack level and the levels set by the DECAY2 AMP LEVEL DECAY1 and DECAY2 parameters and the final level respectively DECAY3 RELEASE Sets the rate of variation from the level at key release to level 0 when SUSTAIN is off SUSTAIN Sets the rate of variation from the level at key release to level 0 when SUSTAIN is on AMP LEVEL INITIAL Sets the initial level of the envelope DECAY1 Set the levels following the elapsed time of DECAY 1 and DECAY 2 respectively DECAY2 PITCH RATE and PITCH LEVEL Pitch EG settings The PITCH RATE parameters are time related they determine how long it takes for the sound s pitch to change from level to level as set in PITCH LEVEL The PITCH LEVEL parameters are pitch related they determine how much the sound devi ates from normal pitch over time as set in PITCH RATE PITCH RATE DECAY1 Set the rate of variation between the initial pitch envelope level and the levels set by DECAY2 the PITCH LEVEL DECAY1 DECAY2 and DECAY parameters respectively DECAYS3 RELEASE Sets the rate of variation from the level at key release to the level set by the PITCH LEVEL RELEASE parameter PITCH LEVEL INITIAL Sets the initial pitch of the envelope DECAY1 Set the amounts of pitch change following the elapsed time of DECAY 1 and DECAY DECAY2 2 respectively DECAYS3 RELEASE Sets the final pitch of the envelope the pitch g
148. mixing console which provides access to a wide range of controls for each main and accom paniment part can be selected by pressing the MIXING CONSOLE button A simpler mixing console is available via the MAIN MIXER and the PART ON OFF buttons described in Quick Guide on pages 24 and 31 DIGITAL STUDIO MAIN MIXER SOUND CREATOR SAMPLING CUSTOM VOICE PLUG IN VOICE Ee 5 2 SONG PART STYLE ON OFF MULTI PAD MIXING CONSOLE EFFECTS STUNING Cosi Refer to the Quick Guide on pages 24 and 31 Basic Procedure DIGITAL STUDIO Pressing the MIXING CONSOLE button alter nates among the displays as listed below SOUND CREATOR SAMPLING 9 CUSTOM VOICE PLUG IN VOICE All parts see below SONG STYLE e MULTI PAD MIXING CONSOLE CQ Accompaniment parts e TUNING e a Song tracks 1 8 1 EN NND Volume EQ see Part Settings page 145 Song tracks 9 16 Filter see Part Settings page 145 Effect Depth see Part Settings page 145 Effect Type see Effect Type Settings page 146 Tune see Part Settings page 145 Master EQ see Master Equalizer Settings page 147 Voice see Part Settings page 145 Line Out see Line Out Settings page 148 1 Press the MIXING CONSOLE button several times until the desired parts are displayed 2 Adju
149. new event Delete Deletes the event of the current location SPACE Same as the START STOP button on the panel Ctrl X Deletes all the selected events and copies them to the clipboard Ctrl C Copies all the selected events to the clipboard Ctrl V Pastes all the event data that is currently contained in the clipboard Ctrl Z Cancels the value entry ALT A Same as the LCD A button ALT B Same as the LCD B button ALT C Same as the LCD C button ALT D Same as the LCD D button ALT E Same as the LCD E button ALT F Same as the LCD F button ALT G Same as the LCD G button ALT H Same as the LCD H button ALT Same as the LCD I button ALT J Same as the LCD J button Basic Operation Display based Controls Direct Access By using the DIRECT ACCESS button you can instantly call up the desired display When you press the DIRECT ACCESS button an LCD message prompts you to press the appropriate button Press the button corresponding to the settings you want to display For this example the display for setting the Split Point page 159 is called up F2 SPLIT POINT FINGERING Split Point is valid when Left and or Auto Accompaniment is on ACCESS SEH The Fingering Hode determines how chords are recognized in Auto Accompaniment Die AUTO SPLIT POINT FINGERING y SINGLE FINGER MULTI FINGER F 2 G2 FINGERED PRO See next page for the Direct Access Chart Bas
150. of semitones above the lead vocal pitch Auto Lower Gender Threshold Gender change will occur when the harmony pitch reaches or exceeds the specified number of semitones below the lead vocal pitch Upper Gender Depth Lower Gender Depth Adjusts the degree of gender change applied to harmony notes higher than the Auto Upper Gender Threshold Adjusts the degree of gender change applied to harmony notes lower than the Auto Lower Gender Threshold Vibrato Depth Sets the depth of vibrato applied to the harmony sound Also affects the lead vocal sound if a Lead Gender Type is selected Vibrato Rate Sets the speed of the vibrato effect Vibrato Delay Specifies the length of the delay before the vibrato effect begins when a note is produced Harmony1 Volume Sets the volume of the first harmony note Harmony2 Volume Harmony3 Volume Sets the volume of the second harmony note Sets the volume of the third harmony note Harmony1 Pan Specifies the stereo pan position of the first harmony note When Random is selected the ste reo position of the sound will change randomly whenever the keyboard is played Harmony2 Pan Specifies the stereo pan position of the second harmony note When Random is selected the stereo position of the sound will change randomly whenever the keyboard is played Harmony3 Pan Specifies the stereo pan position of the third harmony note When Rand
151. on how hard the key is played Voice selecting control change bank select MSB LSB setting Volume panpot Mixing Console etc Message Name Note ON OFF Program Change Control Change System Messages This is data that is used in common by the entire MIDI system System messages include messages like System Exclusive Messages that transmit data unique to each instrument manufacturer and Realtime Messages that control the MIDI device 9000Pro Operation Panel Setting Effect type settings Mixing Console etc Message Name System Exclusive Message Realtime Messages Clock setting Start stop operation The messages transmitted received by the 9000Pro are shown in the MIDI Data Format and MIDI Implementation Chart on pages 228 and 244 MIDI and TO HOST Terminals In order to exchange MIDI data between multiple devices each device must be con nected by a cable There are two ways to connect from the MIDI terminals of the 9000Pro to the MIDI terminals of an external device using a MIDI cable or from the TO HOST port of the 9000Pro to the serial port of a personal computer using a special cable If you connect from the 9000Pro TO HOST terminal to a personal computer the 9000Pro will be used as a MIDI interface meaning that a dedicated MIDI interface is not necessary In the rear panel of the 9000Pro there are two kinds of terminals the MIDI terminals and the TO HOST termi
152. on off EN REVOICE Set the overall volume for optimum balance with other styles and the tempo Press NEXT to continue Keep mind that any track data which is set to off is not stored to Flash ROM TOTAL YOLUHE EN HAIN A Choose the voice for Chord1 Press NEXT to continue PART CATEGORY Reference EN HAIN A N EXT Set the volume for each part Press NEXT to continue H BACK ENT HAIN A Choose the part s you want to delete Press to continue on on om on oF G3 oer oer Gas Gus 39 nuvi nuv2 Bass co 2 pap J puni E pun2 BACK Store as a Flash style to Flash ROM by following the on screen instructions 821 129 Groove amp Dynamics Easy Edit Style Creator The Groove and Dynamics parameters give you a comprehensive variety of tools for changing the rhythmic feel of your original style The explanations here apply to step 5 of the Basic Procedure on page 128 Select the Style and the Section A GROOVESDVMRMICS Groove lets you change the feel of the rhythm e 9 8 beat to shuffle 16 beat to 8 beat etc Dynamics changes the accented beats 9 accenting the down beats or making reggae like accents Select a section or press ALL to select all Press NEXT to continue SECTION ALL ALL EXCEPT INTRO ENDING HAIN
153. quantized If a value less than 43 e Ae 100 is selected notes will be moved 3 BM av toward the specified quantization beats only by the specified amount Select the track to be quantized Select the Quantize size resolution See below for details About Quantize size Set the Quantize size to correspond to the smallest notes in the track you are working with For example if the data was recorded with both quarter notes and eighth notes use 1 8 for the quantize value If the quantize function is applied in this case with the value set to 1 4 the eighth notes would be moved on top of the quarter notes One measure of 8th notes before quantization Jib DU dD The three Quantize settings marked with asterisks are exceptionally convenient since After quantization they allow you to quantize two different note values at the J D J same time without compromis ing the quantization of either one For example if you have both straight 1 8 notes and 1 8 The quantize sizes are note triplets 5 recorded to the same track and you quan J 1 4 note J 1 8 note J 1 16 note 4 1 32 note tize to straight 1 8 notes J all notes in the track are quan tized to straight 1 8 notes S J Js 5 which completely eliminates 43 1 16 note 3 1 4 note triplet 3 1 8 note triplet 1 16 note triplet any triplet feel in the rhythm 1 8 note triplet However if you
154. raise it to the vertical position in the same way as the first SIMM m 6 Replace the SIMM cover and attach it to the 9000Pro with the six screws 7 Check that the installed SIMMs are functioning properly Set the 9000Pro right side up and connect the power cord to the rear panel AC INLET jack and an AC outlet Turn on the power go to the SAMPLING display page 41 and check that the REMAIN TIME value matches the amount of installed memory as fol lows 4 x 2 106 9s 8MB x 2 202 1s e 1OMB x 2 392 3s 32MB x 2 772 78 No SIMMS 11 8s These values apply when there is data in the wave memory N CAUTION Make sure that the entire length of the SIMM is evenly inserted Clamp SIMM cover Black screws Tw Although the wave memory of the 9000Pro can be expanded to 65 megabytes the maxi mum size of a single sample recording is 32 mega bytes 380 sec S Removing SIMMs SIMM modules can be removed after opening the clamps at both ends of the connector slot J 185 Reference Troubleshooting PROBLEM When using a mobile phone noise is produced POSSIBLE CAUSE SOLUTION Using a mobile phone in close proximity to the 9000Pro may produce in terference To prevent this turn off the mobile phone or use it further away from the 9000Pro No sound results The R1 R2 R3 L voice volume Main Mixer settings could be set too low Ma
155. random order SINGLE Only the selected song is played Press either the DEMO button or the EXIT button to exit from the demo mode and return to the normal play mode display when you ve finished playing the demo songs Reference vS 55 Voices The 9000Pro has a huge selection of various musical instrument voices which you can play Try out the different voices referring to the voice list at the end of this manual page 192 For basic information on selecting voices refer to page 16 in the Quick Guide Parts Right1 Right2 Right3 and Left The 9000Pro allows you to individually select and play up to four parts at the time in a number of ways A range of voices can be assigned to each part Keyboard Functions As explained above the keyboard of the 9000Pro can sound three different voices Here s a short summary of the various ways of playing voices abd eem m IT PARFON OFF Playing a Single Voice Playing Two Voices in a e dE LEET ITT BARTON OFF Playing Three Voices layer UPPER PART ON OFF Voice R1 R24 Split Point Playing Separate Voices Lest m
156. rhythm or accompaniment patterns of the other styles To call them up select Page 2 of the Ballroom category by pressing the P2 button Metronome This style plays back only a metronome click without any other rhythm parts Use this as you would a normal metronome practicing in time with the click You can adjust the tempo with the data dial Playing chords in the Auto Accompaniment section of the keyboard produces corresponding bass notes and chords just as in Bass Chord Hold below There are five dif ferent metronome settings each with a different time signature Bass Chord Hold Even with the auto accompaniment turned on this style does not play any rhythm parts but simply holds the bass note and chord that correspond to the chord you play in the Auto Accompaniment section of the keyboard this is convenient for practicing chords without hav ing to play along with a rhythm There are five different bass note chord settings each with different voices R amp B SoulShuffle Check out the dynamic sounds of the Live Standard drum kit especially in the Break fill pattern GospelBros Check out the different gospel grooves in the Main A D patterns Boogie 1 Start this out without the drums and bass then bring them in for a full tilt boogie band RockShuffle This heavy rock shuffle features the distortion effect on the guitar COUNTRY Country 2 4 This driving country pop style can be
157. right side TRANSPOSE ASSIGN This determines the function of the TRANSPOSE buttons page 61 CONTROLLER FOOT CONTROLLER PANEL CONTROLLER TRANSPOSE ER c TRRNSPOSE ASSIGN KEYBOARD SONG HASTER HARD Relatively strong after touch pres sure is needed to produce chang es NORMAL Produces a fairly standard after touch response SOFT Allows you to produce relatively large changes with very light after touch pressure When set to KEYBOARD default the buttons transpose only the keyboard sound When set to SONG the buttons transpose only the song playback When set to MASTER the buttons transpose the overall pitch of the 9000Pro Reference 09 161 The 9000Pro Functions Registration Freeze Group Voice Set Settings The explanations here apply to step 3 of the Basic Procedure on page 158 Registration You can enter descriptive names for each registration bank number via the Name func Quick Guide tion on page 28 REGISTRATION FREEZE VOICE SET REGISTRATION FREEZE VOICE SE el Bank mum EHE en ml IDEM Nane Press one of these buttons to change the name of the Bank or Registration Resist LEFT Rotorors R1 sweet For information about how to enter the one Lv vocat name refer to the Basic Operation page 46 BANK HUMBER Select a registration bank number you wi
158. sottinss are roody recorded to the various tracks as listed below Rehsersurre 5415120 939985 gt MANUAL ACCOMPANIMENT VOICE TRACK PART TRACK RIGHT 1 voice 1 RHYTHM 1 sub 9 RIGHT 2 voice 2 RHYTHM 2 main 10 W i RIGHT 3 voice 3 BASS 11 fo fo foy do fr fo LEFT voice 4 CHORD 1 12 2 E 8 MULTI 1 5 CHORD 2 13 0 tj HR A 0 9 0 MULTI PAD 2 6 PAD 14 MULTI PAD 3 7 PHRASE 1 15 MULTI PAD 4 8 PHRASE 2 16 Quick Guide 0 Press the NEXT button 7 Set up for recording Select the required voice s select a style if required Set up all parameters as desired for recording Turn the metronome on or off as required QO REALTIME TERM BER 01 RID F RIGHTZ PAGE CONTROL Live Strs G gt RIGHTS Cool Organ 1011 12 13 19 15 15 9 9 620055000 gt Press RUBATO start with SYNC START1 Upper keyboard to record in rubato Turn the metronome on or off as required 9 Start recording Recording starts as soon as you play a key on the keyboard 9 Stop recording When you finish playing press the START STOP button If you have set ACMP track to REC in step 5 above you can stop recording by pressing the ENDING button If you press the ENDING button record ing will stop automatically after the ending section has finished gt 0 Press the START STOP button to hear your newly recorded performa
159. source of more voices they are full featured tone generators in their own right and they let you not only upgrade the 9000Pro system by adding more polyphony for example but they also let enhance and edit the sounds with a variety of parameters Three types of boards are available Single Part Multi Part and Effect The Single Part and Multi Part boards can be used with the 9000Pro Please note however that Effect Plug in Boards e g PLG 100VH cannot be used with the 9000Pro Single Part Plug in Boards Single Part Plug in Boards let you add a completely different synthesizer or tone generator and play its voices by using a sin gle part of the 9000Pro Keep in mind that the Single Part boards can only be used for one part R1 R3 L Song Creator at a time see pages 42 and 125 Analog Physical Modeling Plug in Board PLG150 AN Using Analog Physical Modeling AN synthesis the very latest digital technology is used to accurately reproduce the sound of analog synthesizers Piano Plug in Board PLG150 PF Additional Plug in Boards will be available in the future A massive 16MB of waveform memory is dedicated to the reproduction of piano E wore sounds This board offers 136 stereo sounds including a number of acoustic and The Board Custom Voices electric pianos and up to 64 note polyphony RAM described on page 64 are not available in some Plug Advanced DX TX Plug in Boar
160. style data in the internal Flash ROM 75 SWAP STYLE IN FLASH ROM Swapping style data in the internal Flash ROM 75 RENAME STYLE IN FLASH ROM Renaming a style file in the internal Flash ROM 75 DEFRAGMENT FLASH ROM Defragmenting the internal Flash ROM 75 I VIII Selecting a style in the internal Flash ROM 55 DISK DIRECT Selecting and playng a style in a disk 25 7 ACCOMPANIMENT CONTROL INTRO Playing the Intro sections of the accompaniment 22 TAP TEMPO Tapping out the tempo of the accompaniment 23 72 ENDING Playing the Ending sections of the accompaniment 22 FADE IN OUT Producing smooth fade ins and fade outs when starting and stopping 23 72 the accompaniment song MAIN VARIATION Playing the Main sections of the accompaniment 22 FILL IN amp BREAK Playing the Fill in or Break sections 22 SYNC STOP Turning Sync Stop on or off 23 73 SYNC START Turning Sync Start on or off 20 START STOP Starting stopping the accompaniment 21 8 MENU DISK SCSI LOAD FROM DISK GROUP Loading specific type of data from a disk 152 INDIVIDUAL Loading an individual data from a disk 152 SAVE TO DISK Saving data to a disk 153 COPY FILE FD COPY FILE Copying the specified file on a disk onto another disk 154 COPY FD Copying the entire data on a floppy disk onto another disk 154 BACKUP RESTORE RESTORE Restoring the data in Flash ROM 154 BACKUP Backing up the data in Flash ROM 154 CONVERTER PSR 8000 Converting PSR 8000 format files to 9000Pro format files 155
161. switch sess 14 Pre 87 PRECAUTIONS 4 Preset style onte 55 74 150 152 PSR 8000 75 155 112 0 114 134 Quick 36 110 Quick Save 68 RAM BE 54 Random eene 56 E 176 Receive 175 Registration bank 28 29 163 Registration memory 28 8 39 Release esce tee reti Eee 93 Rename esee 75 Repeat d 56 77 142 p 112 Resampling cemere 88 RESONANCE ceret eterne 93 RESPONSE 10 35 60 63 eg e ds 54 154 Reverb 63 145 146 165 IEN 719 130 16 57 REDD 17 57 Ten GE 17 57 177 RIR 127 137 40 84 SAVE 54 55 68 75 113 153 Scale Tune 158 WS EE 13 54 150 Ned 27 79 CLIP 54 79 214 SIMM installation 185 SIMM 187 TT 56 151 Single Finger eee 70 Single Part Plug
162. the Basic Pro cedure on page 101 paying attention to the following points Instep 4 of Basic Procedure the following display appears on the 9000Pro s LCD NOTE you to SELECT PART must be off Press NEXT to continue MIDI H PLUG IN CUSTOH VOICE VOICE EDIT ON COMPUTER Using XGuorks with the Plug in module software bundled with the Plug in Board package provides acces to more Parameters for detailed editing Select 1 when XGuorks prompts The XGuorks HIDI thru setting As described in step 4 of Basic Procedure use the Bulk Send operation XGworks or XGworks lite to transfer the edited data from the computer to the board As described in step 5 of Basic Procedure execute the Board Custom Voice Backup operation 6 Execute the Store operation in the Native System Parameter display page 105 7 Save the edited voice to a disk via the Plug in Manager func tion page 68 8 Save the edited voice to the PC 105 Reference Creating Plug in Custom Voices Board Custom Voice Backup Any editing you do to the Board Custom Voices via computer connected to the 9000Pro is lost when you turn off the power of the 9000Pro If you want to keep your original voice data you can use the Board Custom Voice Backup function to back up the edited Board Custom Voices to Flash ROM The illustration below applies to step 5 of the Basic Procedur
163. the cursor upward downward Keep in mind that moving the cursor away from the just edited value automatically enters that value Instantly returns to the first beginning of the current recorded song i e the first beat of the first measure NEHSONG HID Reso 384 ppq Determines the method of event selec tion single or multiple Press this to cut all the selected events and copy them to the clipboard Press this to copy all the selected events to the clipboard Press this to paste all the event data that is currently contained in the clip board 001 1 000 DATA ENTRY Cares MEAS BEAT Reference Slt 119 Song Creator About Multiple Event Selection This convenient feature lets you select several events together making it possible to change the values of many different events at once or easily and quickly copy many events to another location Changing the values of multiple events In the example explanation below we ll increase the velocity of the selected note data by 20 2 8 8 Using the x button move the cursor to the first event at the top of Event List and select the velocity value Press the SEL button to enable multiple event selection Use the button to determine the range to be selected Each successive event that you scroll through in this way is selected Use the data dial to change the value All values for the sele
164. the way towards yourself minimizes the depth of the effect while rotating it away from yourself increases it With many of the Plug in Voices you can control various other parameters e g filter etc by moving the MODULATION WHEEL page 103 pw n order to avoid accidentally applying modulation set the depth to its minimum setting venu Reference Voices Voice Effects Quick Guide on page 35 The VOICE EFFECT buttons turn the corresponding effects on indicator lit or off indicator out VOICE EFFECT TOUCH SUSTAIN 29 A 1 7 SLOW HARMONY ECHO POLY Touch The keyboard of the 9000Pro is equipped with a touch response feature that lets you dynam ically and expressively control the level of the voices with your playing strength just as on an acoustic instrument Two types of keyboard touch affect this function Initial Touch and After Touch Initial Touch With this function the 9000Pro senses how strongly or softly you play the keys and uses that playing strength to affect the sound in various ways depending on the selected voice This allows you to play with greater expressiveness and add effects with your playing technique After Touch With this function the 9000Pro senses how much pressure you apply to the keys while playing and uses t
165. type of DSP effect to be applied to the microphone sound This sets the depth of the DSP effect applied to the microphone sound This turns the DSP effect applied to the microphone sound ON or OFF Reference The 9000Pro Functions Utility Settings The explanations here apply to step 3 of the Basic Procedure on page 158 Configuration e 1 2 F8 UTILITY CONFIGURATION LANGUAGE 1 HAVE DATA AUTO LOAD OFF 2 DISPLAY HIDI BANK amp PC OFF VOLUHE A POLY COUNTER 120 FD CACHE ON 4 PARAMETER LOCK TAP COUNT H SYSTEM INFORMATION Select this to display the system information of the 9000Pro HAVE DATA AUTO LOAD ON arsam This determines whether the MIDI bank select and program change numbers for each voice will be shown along with the voice number and name on the voice list display This determines whether all wave data that was in the wave RAM memory when the power was previ ously turned off will be automatically reloaded from disk when the 9000Pro power is turned on ER FS UTILITY CONFIGURATION LANGUAGE HAVE DATA AUTO L 2 METRONOME DA POLY COUNTER D CACHE ON Kv 4 PananeTeRLocR s This indicates the maximum number of notes currently being played This can be useful in checking whether the maximum polyphony has been exceeded in son
166. use the 1 8 note 1 8 note triplet setting both the straight and trip A 1 8note A 16note let notes will be quantized cor 1 8 note triplet 1 16 note triplet rectly We Reference ei 113 Song Creator Track Mixing This function allows data from two tracks be mixed and the results placed in a dif E ferent track or data to be copied from one track to another All data other than the mixed note data is derived from the 52 MULTI 01 2501 SOUNGEN eae ES J TRACK N RECORD SET UP N SAVE DELETE E Note KL CUANTIZE Press this to execute the Track The Part Assign parameters of Mix operation the Plug in Voice are not cop After execution the this button changes to an UNDO button which can be used to undo the SOURCE 1 SOURCE 2 WOESTINATION copy mix operation if the results are not satisfactory the UNDO button will only remain System Exclusive XG param active until the next operation is eters to the corresponding performed Part number in the Event List display page 120 after exe cuting the Track Mix operation ied to the destination part even if the Track Mix operation is executed Therefore set the Part Assign parameter in the Specify the tracks to be mixed Select the track into which the For details about the Part results will be placed Assign parameters refer to the Owner s Manual of your P
167. using the 9000Pro in situa To avoid possible damage to the instrument follow these tions of low available light To turn on the lamp use the switch dimmer control at the precautions left end of the rear panel as viewed from the keyboard side Only use lamps that conform to the specifications listed at left Do not attempt to insert any thing other than a proper lamp to the Lamp terminals Do not short circuit the ter minals Do not apply electrical volt age power to the Lamp ter minals X J N Either or both terminals can be Use this to turn the lamp on used letting you connect up to and off and control the two lamps brightness WARNING Make sure the gooseneck of 0 10VDC 7 the lamp is 12 inches or shorter Goosenecks of Pin 1 2 No connection longer lengths may be unsta Pin 3 4 0 10V DC ble The connected lamp becomes very hot after 1 5 being on for a while Make Only use lamps conforming to the following specifications Sure latina lame Lamp 12V 5W before trying to touch it Connector 4 XLR gt wake sure that the POWER switch is off gt 2 Connect a lamp to one of the terminals on the rear panel Firmly push the lamp connector into the socket until it locks 3 Turn the power by pressing the POWER switch wm 4 The light bulb will bu
168. when using the installed voices in both boards however if you try to play voices that do not exist on the PLG100 DX SLOT2 the sound may drop out period ically Make sure to use only those voices that are common to the two boards When you have installed a PLG150 VL to SLOT 1 and a PLG100 VL to SLOT 2 If the Breath Mode of the PLG150 VL Native Part parameters a parameter that does not exist on the PLG100 VL is set to a value other than System the volume and timbre of the played voice changes every other note Make sure to set the Breath Mode to System in this case Data compatibility The Board Custom Voices are not available in PLG100 series boards As a result data related problems will occur when loading the voice data from disk to Flash ROM with the Plug in Man ager function When you install the PLG100 series voice data with a PLG150 Board installed The Plug in Voice using the Board Custom Voice may not sound appropriately if the Board Custom Voice has been edited and Board Custom Backup has been executed This is because the PLG100 series voice data does not contain the Board Custom Voice data When you install the PLG150 series voice data with a PLG100 Board installed The Board Custom Voice data loaded from disk is not used Therefore voices using this data may sound different than expected or than originally programmed PLG100 DX board is installed and you select a voice based on a voice that d
169. x D D D Ins4 DSP7 On Off Effects Compressor SW x x x x x x Ins4 DSP7 Insertion Type Effects x Compressor TH x x x x x x Ins4 DSP7 Effect Parameter x x x Compressor RAT x x x D D D Ins4 DSP7 Fast Slow Effects Compressor OUT x x x x x x Ins4 DSP7 Dry Wet Effects Mic Mute x x D D D Ins4 DSP7 Fast Slow Variation Effect Parameter Value Xxx ppm x x Vocal Harmony Mute Song Track x x D Mic Setti etting Ins5 DSP8 On Off x Mic Setting Mic ocal Harmony Trac x x x Mic Setting Ins5 DSP8 Insertion Type x x x Mic Mi ic Vocal Harmony BAL x x x Mic Setting Ins5 DSP8 Effect Parameter x x x D D Mi ic Vocal Harmony Part x x Setting Ins5 DSP8 Dry Wet Mic Depth x x jojo x Mic Vocal Harmony MODE x x x Mic Setting Sampling DSP1 On Off x x x x x x Mic Vocal Harmony Chord Detect x x D Mic Sampling DSP1 Insertion Type x x x ojo x x x d Setting Sampling DSP1 Effect Parameter x x x x x Vocal Harmony On Off x Mic SC ing DSP1 Sampling DS ast Slow x x x D x x Talk On Off x s
170. 0 0 97 283 Dr Lead 0 41 81 337 Prologue 0 27 97 284 VeloLead 0 45 81 338 Ancestrl 0 64 97 285 Seq Ana 0 96 81 339 Crystal 0 0 98 286 CaliopLd 0 0 82 340 SynDrCmp 0 12 98 287 Pure Pad 0 65 82 341 Popcorn 0 14 98 288 Chiff Ld 0 0 83 342 TinyBell 0 18 98 289 Rubby 0 64 83 343 RndGlock 0 35 98 290 CharanLd 0 0 84 344 GlockChi 0 40 98 291 DistLead 0 64 84 345 ClearBel 0 41 98 292 WireLead 0 65 84 346 ChorBell 0 42 98 293 Voice Ld 0 0 85 347 SynMalet 0 64 98 294 SynthAah 0 24 85 348 SftCryst 0 65 98 295 VoxLead 0 64 85 349 LoudGlok 0 66 98 296 Fifth Ld 0 0 86 350 XmasBell 0 67 98 297 Big Five 0 35 86 351 VibeBell 0 68 98 298 Bass amp Ld 0 0 87 352 DigiBell 0 69 98 299 Big amp Low 0 16 87 353 AirBells 0 70 98 300 Fat amp Prky 0 64 87 354 BellHarp 0 71 98 301 SoftWurl 0 65 87 355 Gamelmba 0 72 98 302 NewAgePd 0 0 88 356 Atmosphr 0 0 99 303 Fantasy2 0 64 88 357 WarmAtms 0 18 99 304 Warm Pad 0 0 89 358 HollwRIs 0 19 99 305 ThickPad 0 16 89 359 NylonEP 0 40 99 306 Soft Pad 0 17 89 360 NylnHarp 0 64 99 307 SinePad 0 18 89 361 Harp Vox 0 65 99 308 Horn Pad 0 64 89 362 AtmosPad 0 66 99 309 RotarStr 0 65 89 363 Planet 0 67 99 310 PolySyPd 0 0 90 364 Bright 0 0 100 311 PolyPd80 0 64 90 365 FantaBel 0 64 100 312 ClickPad 0 65 90 366 Smokey 0 96 100 313 Ana Pad 0 66 90 367 Goblins 0 0 101 314 SquarPad 0 67 90 368 GobSyn 0 64 101 315 ChoirPad 0 0 91 369 50sSciFi 0 65 101 316 Heaven2 0 64 91 370 Ring Pad 0 66 101 317 Itopia 0 66 91 371 Ritual 0 67 101 318 CC
171. 0 16 8 9 WHITE ROOM MSB 16 10 Dry Wet D63 gt W D W D W63 1 127 e TUNNEL MSB _ 17 11 MSB 18 12 BASEMENT reverb variation Insertion1 4 block MSB 19 13 EQ Low Frequency 32Hz 2 0kHz 4 40 table 3 Parameter Display Value See Table Control 14 EQ Low Gain 12 412dB 52 76 1 Reverb Time 0 3 30 0s 0 69 table 4 15 EQ High Frequency 500 2 16 0 2 28 58 table 3 2 Diffusion 0 10 0 10 16 EQ High Gain 12 412dB 52 76 3 Initial Delay 0 1mS 99 3mS 0 63 table 5 4 HPF Cutoff Thru 8 0kHz 0 52 table 3 DELAY L R variation insertion block MSB 06 5 LPF Cutoff 1 0k Thru 34 60 table 3 No Parameter Display Value See Table Control 6 Width 0 5 10 2m 0 37 table 11 Loh Delay 0 1 1 48605 variation block 1 14860 7 Heigt 0 5 20 2m 0 73 tablet 0 1 1 48608 Insertion block 1 14860 8 Depth 0 5 30 2m 0 104 tablet 2 Rch Delay 0 1 1 4860s variation block 1 14860 9 Wall Vary 0 30 0 30 0 1 1 4860s Insertion block 1 14860 10 DryWet D63 gt W D W D lt W63 1 127 3 Feedback Delay 1 0 1 1 4860s variation block 1 14860 11 Rev Delay 0 1mS 99 3mS 0 63 table 5 0 1 1 4860s Insertion block 1 14860 12 Density 04 0 4 4 Feedback Delay 2 0 1 1 4860s variation block 1 14860 13 Er Rev Balance E63 gt R E R E lt R63 1 127 0 1 1 4860s Insertion block 1 14860 14 High Damp 0 1 1 0 1 10 5 Feedback Level 63 63 1 127 15 Feedback Level 63 63 1 127 6 High Damp 0 1 1 0 1 10 16 i KARAOKE1 2 3
172. 0 GM on Sys Ex 1 2 000 1 Initial Setup Events 114 479 2 1 000 Main A Corresponds to 2 bars Main Pattern MAIN A 3141479 up to 255 bars 4111000 Fill ln AA Corresponds to 1 bar Fill In Pattern FILL IN A 4 4 479 5111000 Intro Corresponds to 2 bars Intro Pattern INTRO 614479 up to 255 bars 711000 Ending A Corresponds to 2 bars Intro Pattern ENDING 814479 up to 255 bars 911000 Main B Corresponds to 2 bars Intro Pattern MAIN 104479 up to 255 bars 14111000 Fill In BA Corresponds to 1 bar Fill In Pattern BREAK 1114479 12111000 Fill Corresponds to 1 bar Fill In Pattern FILL IN B 12 4 479 1311000 IntroB Corresponds to 2 bars Intro Pattern INTRO 14141479 up to 255 bars 15 1 000 Ending Corresponds to e 2 bars Intro Pattern ENDING II 1614479 up to 255 bars 5 17111000 Main Corresponds to 2 bars Main Pattern MAIN C 8 1814479 up to 255 bars 8 1911000 Fill In CC Corresponds to 1 bar Fill In Pattern FILL IN C 19141479 20111000 Intro C Corresponds to d 2 bars Intro Pattern INTRO III 2114 479 up to 255 bars 22 1 000 Ending Corresponds to 2 bars Intro Pattern ENDING III 23 4 479 up to 255 bars 24 1 000 Main D Corresponds to 2 bars Main Pattern MAIN D 25141479 up to 255 bars 26 1 000 Fill In DD Corresponds to 1 bar Fill In Pattern FILL IN D 26 4 479 91 137 A template which is handy for c
173. 00 0000 1100 1111 denotes the Program Change Message for each channel 1 16 240 FOH 1111 0000 denotes the start of a Sys tem Exclusive Message 247 F7H 1111 0111 denotes the end of a System Exclusive Message aaH hexidecimal Oaaaaaaa binary denotes the data address The address contains High Mid and Low bbH Obbbbbbb denotes the byte count ccH Occccccc denotes the check sum ddH Oddddddd denotes the data value Appendix Anhang Annexe 209 603 Channel Mode Realtime Messages Kanal Modus Realtime Meldungen Messages canal de mode temps reel available Status byte 1st Data byte 2nd Data byte Recognized MIDI Events Status Data HEX Parameter Data Parameter XG Key R2 R3 Left Acmp board Key Off 8nH n channel no kk Key no 0 127 vv Velocity 0 127 o 9nH kk Key no 0 127 Key e W 127 0 Control BnH 0 00H Bank Select MSB 0 00H Normal Change 64 40H SFX voice 126 SFX kit 127 Drum o o 32 20H Bank Select LSB 0 0 XG voice 112 70H Panel voice 1 01H Modulation 0 127 7FH 5 05 Portament Time 0 127 7FH 6 O6H Data Entry MSB 0 127 7FH 38 26H Data Entry LSB 0 127 7
174. 00 1110 46 2 0010 1110 78 4 0100 1110 110 6 0110 1110 15 0 0000 1111 47 2 0010 1111 79 AF 0100 1111 111 6F 0110 1111 16 10 0001 0000 48 30 0011 0000 80 50 0101 0000 112 70 0111 0000 17 1l 0001 0001 49 31 0011 0001 81 51 0101 0001 113 71 0111 0001 18 12 0001 0010 50 2 0011 0010 82 52 0101 0010 114 72 0111 0010 19 13 0001 0011 51 33 0011 0011 83 53 0101 0011 115 73 0111 0011 20 14 0001 0100 52 34 0011 0100 84 54 0101 0100 116 74 0111 0100 21 15 0001 0101 53 35 0011 0101 85 55 0101 0101 117 75 0111 0101 22 16 0001 0110 54 36 0011 0110 86 56 0101 0110 118 76 0111 0110 23 17 0001 0111 55 37 0011 0111 87 57 0101 0111 119 77 0111 0111 24 18 0001 1000 56 38 0011 1000 88 58 0101 1000 120 78 0111 1000 25 19 0001 1001 57 39 0011 1001 89 59 0101 1001 121 79 0111 1001 26 1 0001 1010 58 0011 1010 90 5 0101 1010 122 7A 0111 1010 27 1B 0001 1011 59 3B 0011 1011 91 5B 0101 1011 123 7B 0111 1011 28 1c 0001 1100 60 3c 0011 1100 92 5 0101 1100 124 7 0111 1100 29 1 0001 1101 61 3D 0011 1101 93 5D 0101 1101 125 7D 0111 1101 30 1E 0001 1110 62 3E 0011 1110 94 5E 0101 1110 126 7E 0111 1110 31 1 0001 1111 63 3F 0011 1111 95 5 0101 1111 127 TE 0111 1111 Except the table above for example 144 159 decimal 9nH 1001 0000 1001 1111 binary denotes the Note On Message for each channel 1 16 176 191 BnH 1011 0000 1011 1111 denotes the Control Change Message for each channel 1 16 192 207 CnH 11
175. 00 chora START STOP button to hear the Auto 002 4 000 Chord T EYITESCTT ES Accompaniment performance of your newly 4 003 1 000 sect i recorded data 005 1 000 End 00 000 5 4 HEAS EBERT CLK Reference Song Creator END MARK is shown in the display indicating the end of the song data The End Mark position for Chord Step is automatically determined according to the section that is input at the end of the song Intro The End Mark is automatically recorded to a point following the Intro data however many measures it is from the position of the last input to the end of the Intro data Main The End Mark is automatically recorded two measures following the position of the last input s FI ies The End Mark is automatically recorded one measure following the posi tion of the last input Ending The End Mark is automatically recorded to a point following the Ending data however many measures it is from the position of the last input to the end of the Ending data The End Mark can be freely set to any position desired if the automatically assigned position doesn t suit you The functions of each menu item in the display are explained below Instantly returns to the beginning of the current recorded song i e the first beat of the first measure Moves the cursor upward downward asa Reso 2 STEP REC 001 1 000 Sty 01
176. 00010100 14 20 7sus4 00000011 03 3 Maj7 11 00010101 15 21 705 00000100 04 4 Maj 9 00010110 16 22 7 9 00000101 05 5 Maj7 9 00010111 17 23 7 11 00000110 06 6 Maj6 9 00011000 18 24 7 13 00000111 07 7 aug 00011001 19 25 7 b9 00001000 08 8 min 00011010 1A 26 7 b13 00001001 09 9 00011011 1 27 7 9 00001010 OA 10 min7 00011100 1 28 Maj7aug 00001011 OB 11 min7b5 00011101 1D 29 7aug 00001100 0 12 min 9 00011110 1E 30 1 8 00001101 OD 13 min7 9 00011111 1F 31 1 5 00001110 OE 14 min7 11 00100000 20 32 sus4 00001111 OF 15 minMaj7 00100001 21 33 14245 00010000 10 16 minMaj7 9 00100010 22 34 cc 00010001 11 17 dim bn On Bass Chord Same as Chord root 127 No bass chord bt Bass Chord Same as Chord type 127 No bass chord 11111110 F7 End of Exclusive Appendix Anhang Annexe MIDI Data Format MIDI Datenformat Format de donn es MIDI Type2 tt 03 Receive only 11110000 FO Exclusive status 01000011 43 YAMAHA ID 01111110 7E 00000011 03 type 2 tt Oddddddd dd notet Oddddddd dd 2 Oddddddd dd note3 Oddddddd dd note10 11111110 7 End of Exclusive System Exclusive Messages Universal System Exclusive MIDI Event Data Format Recognized MIDI Master Volume 7FH 7FH 04H 01H 11 mm F7H 11110000 FO Exclusive status 01111111 Universal Real Time 01111111 ID of target device 00000100 04 Sub ID 1 Device Contr
177. 010 Seq Click H 25 CH 0 C Brush Tap Brush Tap Stereo Brush Tap Stereo Brush Tap Stereo Brush Tap Stereo 26 D Brush Swirl Brush Swirl Stereo Brush Swirl Stereo Brush Swirl Stereo Brush Swirl Stereo 27 D D Brush Slap Brush Slap Stereo Brush Slap Stereo Brush Slap Stereo Brush Slap Stereo 28 E 0 E Brush Tap Swirl Brush Tap Swirl Stereo Brush Tap Swirl Stereo Brush Tap Swirl Stereo Brush Tap Swirl Stereo 29 0 F Snare Roll Snare Roll Stereo Snare Roll Stereo Snare Roll Stereo Snare Roll Stereo 30 FR FR Castanet 31 G Snare Soft Snare Funk L Stereo Brush Slap 2 Stereo Snare L Stereo Snare L Stereo 32 G G Sticks 33 A Kick Soft Kick Soft Stereo Kick Soft Stereo Kick Soft Stereo Kick Soft Stereo 34 0 Open Rim Shot Open Rim Shot Stereo Open Rim Shot Stereo Open Rim Shot Stereo Open Rim Shot Stereo 35 018 Kick Std Stereo Kick Std Stereo Kick Light Stereo Kick Std Stereo 36 C 2 Kick Funk Stereo Kick Funk Stereo Kick Std Stereo Kick Funk Stereo 37 CH CH 2 Side Stick Side Stick Stereo Side Stick Stereo Side Stick Stereo Side Stick Stereo 38 D D 2 Snare Snare Funk M Stereo Snare Brush M Stereo Snare M Stereo Snare Funk M Stereo 39 D D 2 Hand Clap Hand Clap Stereo Hand Clap Stereo 40 E E 2 Snare Tight Snare Funk H Stereo Snare Brush H Stereo Snare H Stereo Snare Funk H Stereo 41 2 Floor Tom L Floor Tom L Stereo Brush Floor Tom L Stereo Floor Tom L Stereo Floor Tom L Stereo 42 F FR 2 1 Hi Hat
178. 011 43 YAMAHAID 01111110 7E 00000000 00 05555555 Ss Switch No 00H 01H INTRO II 02H 03H INTRO III 04H 07H 08H MAIN A 09H MAIN B OAH MAIN OBH OFH MAIN D 10H FILL IN A 11H FILL IN B 12H FILL IN C 13H 17H FILLIN D 18H BREAK FILL A 19H BREAK FILL B 1AH BREAK FILL C 1BH 1FH BREAK FILL D 20H 21H ENDING II 22H 23H ENDING III 24H 27H ENDING Oddddddd dd Swith On Off 00H Off 7FH On 11111110 F7 End of Exclusive Tempo Control 43H 7EH 01H t4 t3 t2 t1 F7H 11110000 Exclusive status 01000011 43 YAMAHA ID 01111110 7E Style 00000001 01 Ottttttt 14 tempo4 Ottttttt t3 tempo3 Ottttttt t2 tempo2 Ott tttbt t Tempo 11111110 F7 End of Exclusive Chord Control FOH 43H 7EH tt dd F7H tt 02 11110000 FO Exclusive status 01000011 43 YAMAHA ID 01111110 7E Style 00000010 02 type 1 tt Oddddddd dd chord root cr Oddddddd dd chord type ct Oddddddd dd bass note bn Oddddddd dd bass type bt cr Chord Root Offfnnnn fff b or nnnn note root 0000nnnn On bbb O ff0000 reserved 0001nnnn in bb Offf0001 x1 C 0010nnnn 2n b offf0010 x2 D 0011nnnn natural Offf0011 x3 E 0100nnnn 4n O0fff0100x4 0101nnnn 5n THE Offf 0101 x5 G 0110nnnn 6n Offf0110x6 Offf0111 x7 ct Chord 0 34 127 00000000 00 0 Maj 00010010 12 18 dim7 00000001 01 1 00010011 13 19 7th 00000010 02 2 Maj7
179. 1 Appendix Anhang Annexe 207 Plug in Voice List Plug In Stimmenliste Liste des voix plug in PLG150 PF Plug in Voice List Category voice Name MSB amp LSB Program Category Voice Name MSB LSB Podr Changez Change 1 Piano 1 10 Hnkytnk3 80 e 1 GndPnoSt 80 0 0 VI E Piano 2 2 Dbl Pno 80 82 0 1 80 0 4 3 Montuno 80 83 0 2 Deodar 80 64 4 4 GrndDyno 80 84 0 3 70 s EP 80 65 4 5 David 80 85 0 4 80 s EP 80 66 4 6 RhodyGnd 80 86 0 5 Crisp EP 80 67 4 7 GrandDX 80 88 0 6 Sweetnes 80 68 4 8 GrandDX2 80 89 0 7 Freeway 80 69 4 9 Bob 80 90 0 8 Trem 70 80 70 4 10 PianoStr 80 91 0 9 Remark 80 71 4 Il Piano 2 10 Mid 70 s 80 73 4 1 GndPnoMn 80 64 0 VII E Piano 3 2 FingGrnd 80 80 0 1 Celest80 80 74 4 3 BrghtGnd 80 65 0 2 At Once 80 75 4 4 60 sGrnd 80 66 0 3 TremDyno 80 76 4 5 RchGndSt 80 67 0 4 TremWurl 80 77 4 6 60 sJazz 80 69 0 5 Phase 70 80 78 4 7 PowerGnd 80 72 0 6 DlydDyno 80 79 4 8 MildGrnd 80 73 0 7 FingDyno 80 80 4 9 ChorusMn 80 75 0 8 Dyno 81 80 82 4 10 AmbiGrnd 80 79 0 9 Tonight 80 83 4 Piano 3 10 Dyno 83 80 84 4 1 PnoStPad 80 92 0 VIII E Piano 4 2 SynStrPf 80 93 0 1 Choir EP 80 87 4 3 PianoPad 80 94 0 2 Paddy EP 80 88 4 4 OctPf Pd 80 95 0 3 VcePd EP 80 89 4 5 Pf Choir 80 96 0 4 60 s EP 80 91 4 6 Mod
180. 1 000 Note C3 59 0000 306 HEAS EBERT CLK a STEP REC 001 1 000 Note c3 59 0001 O75 001 1 192 Note 67 0000 306 HEAS BERT f CLK ara 384 ppq 001 1 000 Note C3 59 0001 228 001 1 192 Note 67 0001 O75 001 2 000 Note G3 90 0000 306 001 2 192 fe 5 BEAT STEP REC 001 1 000 Note c3 59 0003 227 001 1 192 Note 62 0003 074 001 000 Note G3 80 0002 305 HEAS E BEAT CLK 001 End 32 001 2 182 Note 63 0002 152 HRH P Reference mmm D Select this resolution mmm mmm Press and hold C3 Press and hold C3 and E3 Press this while holding C3 and E3 Press and hold C3 G3 Press this while holding C3 E3 and G3 Press and hold C3 E3 G3 and C4 Press this while holding C3 E3 G3 and C4 3 Press this while holding C3 G3 C4 and release the four keys d 3 Press this again while holding C3 Press the x button to move the cursor to KR the beginning of the song and press the START STOP button hear your newly recorded notes 117 Song Creator The functions of each menu item i
181. 1 4 Vocal Harmony MIDI 9 Accompaniment Style RHYTHM1 Sub 10 Accompaniment Style RHYTHM2 Main 11 Accompaniment Style BASS 12 Accompaniment Style CHORD1 13 Accompaniment Style CHORD2 14 Accompaniment Style PAD 15 Accompaniment Style PHRASE1 16 Accompaniment Style PHRASE2 Multi Track Recording Quick Recording e Multi Track Recording In Multi Track Recording you determine the track assignments as shown above before record ing Several tracks can be recorded simultaneously In addition to being able to record to empty tracks you can also re record tracks that already contain recorded data Quick Recording In Quick Recording you can quickly record without having to worry about the track assignments above Quick Recording automatically makes track assignments according to the simple rules below When MANUAL tracks are set to REC your keyboard performances VOICE R2 L and Multi Pads playback are recorded to tracks 1 8 as listed below When tracks are set to REC the auto accompaniment parts are recorded to tracks 9 16 as listed below Track Part Track Part 1 Right1 9 Accompaniment Style RHYTHM1 2 Right2 10 Accompaniment Style RHYTHM2 3 Right3 11 Accompaniment Style BASS 4 Left 12 Accompaniment Style CHORD1 5 Multi Pad 1 13 Accompaniment Style CHORD2 6 Multi Pad 2 14 Accompaniment St
182. 19 table 8 1 Delay Time 0 0mS 50mS 0 127 table 2 2 Release 10 680ms 0 15 table 9 2 Output Phase normal invers 0 1 Threshold 72 30dB 55 97 3 4 Output Level 0 127 0 127 4 5 5 6 6 EO Low Frequency 32Hz 2 0kHz 4 40 table 3 7 7 EQ Low Gain 12 4 12dB 52 76 8 8 EQ High Frequency 500 2 16 0 2 28 58 table 3 9 9 EQ High Gain 12 12dB 52 76 10 10 Dry Wet D63 gt W D W D lt W63 1 127 e 11 11 12 12 13 13 14 14 15 15 16 16 VOICE CANCEL variation Insertion1 4 block MSB 85 TALKING MODULATION variation Insertion1 4 block MSB 93 No Parameter Display Value See Table Control Parameter Display Value See Table Control 1 1 Vowel a i U e 0 0 4 e 2 2 Move speed 1 62 1 62 3 3 Drive 0 127 0 127 4 4 Output Level 0 127 0 127 5 5 6 6 7 7 8 8 9 9 10 10 11 Low Adjust 0 26 0 26 11 12 High Adjust 0 26 0 26 12 2WAY ROTARY SPEAKER variation Insertion1 4 block MSB 86 LSB 20 LO FI variation Insertion1 4 block MSB 94 No Parameter Display Value See Table Control No Parameter Display Value See Table Control 1 Rotor Speed 0 0Hz 39 7Hz 0 127 table 1 1 Sampling Freq Control 44 1kHz 345Hz 0 127 table 13 2 Drive Low 0 127 0 127 2 Word Length 1 127 1 127 3 Drive High 0 127 0 127 3 Output 6 12dB 0 18 4 Low High L63 gt H L H L lt H63 1 127
183. 2 9 Down Under 36 1 80 4 36 1 85 10 36 0 111 5 AN Snare 36 2 93 11 Water Pad 36 1 54 6 MufflKik 36 1 91 12 Vangelizm 36 1 52 7 Euro kik 36 1 92 13 P 5 Saw 36 0 80 8 AN HiHat 36 1 93 14 Kelp 36 1 44 9 Mechanics 36 1 104 15 Magic 36 1 41 10 Seismic 36 1 116 16 PWM Sweep 36 0 22 11 X Bells 36 2 94 17 Multi Saw 36 2 66 12 XmodBell 36 2 95 18 So Lina 36 0 19 13 PitchMan 36 0 86 19 Hi Wedge 36 1 18 14 Metal Ld 36 0 96 20 Bonn 36 2 67 15 EthnoTom 36 1 36 Vill 16 AN Toms 36 1 87 1 PWM Strings 36 0 115 17 Rimshot 36 1 89 2 Funky 36 2 68 18 XstikSnr 36 1 90 3 Insomnia 36 2 69 19 Cyberclock 36 1 106 4 Pro Attack 36 1 20 20 Fhomhair 36 0 89 5 Popcorn 36 0 73 XI 6 Snowball 36 2 70 1 Lunar X41 36 1 102 7 Woob 36 1 83 2 Quarks 36 1 109 8 MiniTech 36 2 71 3 ULTSound 36 2 96 9 Cavesyn 36 2 72 4 Invade 36 0 31 10 Cracker 36 2 73 5 PlyChord 36 1 100 11 MgSoloLd 36 2 74 6 Poptart 36 2 97 12 Behind 36 2 75 7 Jah 36 2 98 13 Rydeen 36 2 76 8 FreeEdge 36 0 32 14 Knives 36 2 77 9 Fumble 36 0 30 15 Mg Wood 36 2 78 10 WelcomBk 36 2 99 16 Monty 36 2 79 11 RadioNz 36 1 96 17 Q Lead 36 2 80 12 FM Waves 36 1 103 18 5th Ring 36 1 15 13 MgVoice 36 1 8 19 FootBase 36 2 81 14 ResoBell 36 2 100 20 10thTone 36 0 54 15 Microdot 36 1 73 IX 16 Syncrome 36 1 75 1 Mr Hook 36 2 82 17 RhthmCty 36 1 76 2 Hypertune 36 2 83 18 SyncSitr 36 1 78 3 Pastel 36 0 93 19 Dragnfly 36 1 79 4 Abacab 36 0 102 20 Indosync 36 1 81 5 Laos 36 0 23 58
184. 24 37 9 56 88 2 88 138 6 120 189 0 1 1 5 24 1 76 56 774 0 88 496 0 120 364 0 25 25 57 5 7 89 8 9 121 40 6 25 39 5 57 89 8 89 140 2 121 190 6 2 2 0 25 1 70K 57 760 0 89 490 0 121 361 0 26 2 6 58 5 8 90 9 0 122 42 2 26 41 0 58 91 4 90 141 8 122 192 1 3 3 0 26 1 63K 58 747 0 90 485 0 122 359 0 27 27 59 5 9 91 9 1 123 43 7 27 42 6 59 93 0 91 143 3 123 193 7 4 5 0 27 1 58K 59 735 0 91 479 0 123 356 0 28 2 8 60 6 0 92 9 2 124 45 3 28 44 2 60 94 5 92 144 9 124 195 3 5 7 0 28 1 52K 60 723 0 92 474 0 124 353 0 29 2 9 61 6 1 93 9 3 125 46 9 29 45 7 61 96 1 93 146 5 125 196 9 6 10 0 29 1 47K 61 711 0 93 469 0 125 350 0 30 3 0 62 6 2 94 9 41 126 48 4 30 47 3 62 97 7 94 148 1 126 198 4 K 20 0 30 142 62 700 0 94 464 0 126 347 0 31 3 1 63 6 3 95 9 5 127 50 0 31 48 9 63 99 3 95 149 6 127 200 0 31 1 38K 63 689 0 95 459 0 127 345 0 Table 3 Table 6 Table 11 Table 14 EQ Frequency Room Size Reverb Width Depth Height Tempo Delay Data Value Data Value Data Value Data Value Data Value Data Value Data Value Data Value Data Value Data Value Data Value Data Value Data Value 0 THRU 0 32 800 0 0 1 32 51 64 10 1 96 15 1 0 0 5 32 8 8 64 17 6 96 27 5 0 64th 8 32 4thX19 64 4thX51 1 22 33 900 1 0 3 33 5 3 65 10 3 97 15 3 1 0 8 33 9 1 65 17 9 97 27 8 1 64th 33 4thX20 65 4thX52 2 25 34 1 0k 2 0 4 34 5 4 66 10 4 98 15 5 2 1 0
185. 3 3 Initial Delay 0 1mS 99 3mS 0 63 table 5 Zi ert gmg ewe EA Geer 4 HPF Cutoff Thru 8 0kHz 0 52 table 3 9 5 LPF Cutoff 1 0k Thru 34 60 table 3 10 Dry Wet D63 W D W D lt W63 1 127 e 6 11 Liveness 0 10 0 10 H 12 Density 0 3 0 3 9 13 High Damp 0 1 1 0 1 10 10 Dry Wet D63 gt W D W D W63 1 127 e 15 11 Rev Delay 0 1mS 99 3mS 0 63 table 5 18 12 Density insertion 1 4 block Ee GATE REVERB MSB 10 t5 einen Baga S dee 1322 REVERSE GATE variation Insertion1 4 block MSB 11 14 High Damp 01 10 1410 No Parameter Display Value See Table Control 15 Feedback Level 63 463 1 127 1 Type TypeA TypeB 01 16 2 Room Size 0 1 7 0 0 44 table 6 3 Diffusion 0 10 0 10 DELAY L C R variation insertion block MSB 05 gmi Delay EENG e tablets No Parameter Display Value See Table Control 6 HPF Cutoff Thru 8 0kHz 0 52 table 3 1 Lch Delay 0 1 1 4860s variation block 1 14860 7 LPF Cutoff 1 Ok Thru 34 60 table 3 0 1 1 4860s Insertion block 1 14860 8 2 Rch Delay 0 1 1 4860s variation block 1 14860 9 0 1 1 4860s Insertion block 1 14860 3 Cch Delay 0 1 1 4860s 1 14860 10 Dry Wet D63 gt W DEW 15157 0 1 1 4860s Insertion block 1 14860 4 Feedback Delay 0 1 1 4860s variation block 1 14860 p 010 d 0 1 1 4860s Insertion block 1 14860 18 High Damp 04 10 1 10 5 Feedback Level 63 63 1 127 14 Te 6 Cch Level 0 127 0 127 15 7 High Damp 0 1 1 0 1 1
186. 31 G 0198 Brush Slap 2 Stereo Conga H Mute Conga L Open Stereo Conga L Open Stereo 32 G 0 G Conga H Open Conga L Mute Stereo Conga L Mute Stereo 33 A 0 Kick Soft Stereo Conga L Conga L Slap Open Stereo Conga Slap Open Stereo 34 0 Open Rim Shot Stereo Zagrouda H Conga L Slap Stereo Conga L Slap Stereo 35 B 018 Kick Std Stereo Zagrouda L Conga L Slide Stereo Conga L Slide Stereo 36 C 2 Kick Funk Stereo Kick Soft Cutting Noise Phone Call Bongo H Open 1 Finger Stereo Bongo H Open 1 finger Stereo 37 CH 08 2 Side Stick Stereo Side Stick Cutting Noise 2 Door Squeak Bongo H Open 3 Finger Stereo Bongo H Open 3 finger Stereo 38 D D 2 Snare Brush M Stereo Snare Soft Door Slam Bongo H Rim Stereo Bongo H Rim Stereo 39 D D 2 Hand Clap Stereo Arabic Hand Clap String Slap Scratch Cut Bongo H Tip Stereo Bongo H Tip Stereo 40 2 Snare Brush Stereo Snare Scratch H 3 Bongo H Heel Stereo Bongo H Heel Stereo 41 F F 2 Brush Floor Tom L Stereo Floor L Wind Chime Bongo H Slap Stereo Bongo H Slap Stereo 42 FR FR 2 1 Hi Hat Closed Stereo Hi Hat Closed Telephone Ring 2 Bongo L Open 1 Finger Stereo Bongo L Open 1 finger Stereo 43 G G 2 Brush Floor Tom H Stereo Floor Tom H Bongo L Open 3 Finger Stereo Bongo L Open 3 finger Stereo 44 G G 2 1 Hi Hat Pedal Stereo Hi Hat Pedal Bongo L Rim Stereo Bongo L Rim Stereo 45 A A 2 Brush Low Tom Stereo Low Tom Bongo L Tip Stereo Bongo L Tip Stereo 46 2 1 Hi Hat Open Stereo Hi Hat
187. 4 07 Compressor Distortion Delay1 65 65 ERI 09 00 129 129 CmpDstDly2 96 00 Compressor Distortion Delay2 66 66 ERE 81 130 130 CmpODDiy1 96 17 67 67 GateReverb 10 00 Compressor Overdrive Delay1 68 68 ReversGate 11 00 131 131 CmpODDIy2 96 01 69 69 WhiteRoom 16 00 Compressor Overdrive Delay2 70 70 Tunnel 17 00 132 132 Dst Delay1 Distortion Delay1 95 16 71 71 Canyon 18 00 133 133 Dst Delay2 Distortion Delay2 95 00 72 72 Basement 19 00 134 134 OD Delay1 Overdrive Delay1 95 17 73 73 40 Karaoke1 20 00 135 135 OD Delay2 Overdrive Delay2 95 01 74 74 41 Karaoke2 20 01 136 136 Dst RotSP 69 01 75 75 42 Karaoke3 20 02 Distortion Rotary Speaker 2 43 Choruss 16 Ka id Rotary Speaker a 7 77 44 Chorus se 138 138 Amp RotSP 69 03 78 78 45 Chorus5 65 02 Amp Simulator Rotary Speaker LEN MEL 200 139 139 75 83 00 80 BO AF 82 29 140 140 76 84 00 141 141 77 76 16 a _ FB Chorus SE 142 142 78 EQTel 76 17 8 83 Bienen 09 143 143 79 3BandEQ 76 00 84 84 GM Chorus2 04 144 144 80 2BandEQ 77 00 85 85 QM Chorus3 83 08 145 145 81 HmEnhance2 81 00 86 86 Chorus4 65 06 Harmonic Enhancer2 87 87 49 Celeste 66 00 146 146 VoicCancel Voice Cancel 85 00 88 88 50 Celeste2 66 02 147 147 Am
188. 4 ChurOrg2 0 35 19 138 Fretles2 0 32 35 85 NotreDam 0 40 19 139 Fretles3 0 33 35 86 OrgFlute 0 64 19 140 Fretles4 0 34 35 87 TrmOrgFI 0 65 19 141 SynFretl 0 96 35 88 ReedOrgn 0 0 20 142 Smooth 0 97 35 89 Puff Org 0 40 20 143 SlapBas1 0 0 36 90 Acordion 0 0 21 144 ResoSlap 0 27 36 91 Accordlt 0 32 21 145 PunchThm 0 32 36 92 Harmnica 0 0 22 146 SlapBas2 0 0 37 93 Harmo 2 0 32 22 147 VeloSlap 0 43 37 94 TangoAcd 0 0 23 148 SynBass1 0 0 38 95 TngoAcd2 0 64 23 149 SynBa1Dk 0 18 38 96 NylonGtr 0 0 24 150 FastResB 0 20 38 97 NylonGt2 0 16 24 151 AcidBass 0 24 38 98 NylonGt3 0 25 24 152 Bass 0 35 38 99 VelGtHrm 0 43 24 153 TeknoBa 0 40 38 100 Ukulele 0 96 24 154 Oscar 0 64 38 101 SteelGtr 0 0 25 155 SqrBass 0 65 38 102 SteelGt2 0 16 25 156 RubberBa 0 66 38 103 12StrGtr 0 35 25 157 Hammer 0 96 38 104 8 51 0 40 25 158 SynBass2 0 0 39 Appendix Anhang Annexe 024 Voice List Stimmenliste Liste tles Category voice Name MSB amp LSB Category Voice MSB LSB Zoe Change Change 159 MelloSB1 0 6 39 213 Trumpet 0 0 56 160 Seq Bass 0 12 39 214 Trumpet2 0 16 56 161 ClkSynBa 0 18 39 215 BriteTrp 0 17 56 162 SynBa2Dk 0 19 39 216 WarmTrp 0 32 56 163 SmthBa 2 0 32 39 217 Trombone 0 0 57 164 ModulrBa 0 40 39 218 Trmbone2 0 18 57 165 DX Bass 0 41 39
189. 4444 44 Velocity settings The following parameters are available Vel When this is selected the strength at which you play the keyboard deter mines the recorded velocity values STE eere Eie The velocity of the entered note is set to 127 The velocity of the entered note is set 111 eee The velocity of the entered note is set to 95 EE The velocity of the entered note is set to 79 The velocity of the entered note is set to 63 DE The velocity of the entered note is set to 47 The velocity of the entered note is set to 33 S DD iens The velocity of the entered note is set to 15 Gate time settings The following parameters are available e Normal i 80 e Tenuto Rn 100 e 1402 Staccatissimo 20 e When this is selected you can specify the Gate time as a percentage manually Reference Song Creator E Entering other events Event List In addition to Note on off the following events can be recorded in the Event List display Conductor Track Tempo Time Signature End Mark System Exclusive XG parameters System Exclusive others Meta Event These are displayed only and cannot be edited Tracks 1 through 16 Note on off Messages which are generated when the keyboard is played Each mess
190. 5 F 6 91 G 5 6 6 924 577 Keyboard Drum Assignments Tastatur Drum Belegung Affectation des percussions clavier Bank Select MSB 0 127 127 126 126 126 126 126 Bank Select LSB 0 127 0 0 0 0 0 0 Program Change 1 128 86 36 1 2 41 44 Nate Nois eg ol P Kee Arabic Kit SFX Kit 1 SFX Kit 2 Live AfroCuban Kit Live PopLatin Kit 13 CH CK 0 3 14 1 0 3 15 1 0 0 16 1 0 17 F 1 0 4 18 FR 1 F 0 4 Hand Clap Stereo 19 1 0 20 G 1 Gf 0 21 A 1 0 22 1 8 0 Conga Tip Stereo Conga H Tip Stereo 23 B 1 0 Conga Heel Stereo Conga H Heel Stereo 24 0 C Nakarazan Dom Conga H Open Stereo Conga H Open Stereo 25 C C Brush Tap Stereo Cabasa Conga H Mute Stereo Conga H Mute Stereo 26 D 010 Brush Swirl Stereo Nakarazan Edge Conga H Slap Open Stereo Conga Slap Open Stereo 27 D D Brush Slap Stereo Hager Dom Conga H Slap Stereo Conga H Slap Stereo 28 E 0 E Brush Swirl Stereo Hager Edge Conga H Slap Mute Stereo Conga H Slap Mute Stereo 29 0 F Snare Roll Stereo Bongo H Conga L Tip Stereo Conga L Tip Stereo 30 FH FH Bongo L Conga L Heel Stereo Conga L Heel Stereo
191. 5 No Data et You can select the desired location in Flash ROM as the destination See CAUTION on page 151 If an optional SCSI device is connected or the optional internal hard disk is installed select the appropriate device See page 150 for details Reference See page 151 for details on directory file selection 21 73 Auto Accompaniment Save Style from Flash ROM This allows you to save style data from Flash ROM to disk SAVE STYLE FROM FLASH gt SAVE STYLE FROH FLASH The file name is automatically assigned as Style name STv Press NEXT or BACK When set to with OTS you DEVICE FD can save the selected style file with its One Touch Set Select the style to be saved Press NEXT to continue CATEGORY Flash 1 STYLE State 1 SINGLE with 015 ting setups FLASH ROM STYLE Tevice IME DIRECTORY CONTENTS Flash 1 1 No file Flash 2 Style_2 Flash 3 style_3 E Flash 4 Style_a Flash 5 Style 5 PAGE CONTROL ER S 4 av BACK NEXT See page 151 See page 151 for details on If an optional SCSI device is connected or directory file selection the optional internal hard disk is installed select the appropriate device See page 150 for details Copy Style in Flash ROM This allows you to copy style data to a different category nu
192. 522 315 gt 6 gt Ins1 DSP4 Dry Wet o o Effects Voice x Sampling DSP3 Dry Wet x x D D D EECH Fast Slow Effect Parameter x xlx x x x Microphone Ins2 DSP5 On Off o o Effects Voice x Mic Volume xX xX x x x Setting Ins2 DSP5 Insertion Type Effects Voice x 1 Mic Mic Panpot x x x Mic Setting Ins2 DSP5 Effect Parameter x x x x x D Mic Mic Reverb Depth x x x Mic Ins2 DSP5 Fast Slow Effects Voice x B Setting Ins2 DSP5 Dry Wet Effects Voice x Mic Chorus Depth x x x Mic Setting Ins2 DSP5 low Variation Eff ow Variation Effect y y x x x Mic EQ LOW Freq x x D D D Ins3 DSP6 On Off Effects Voice x Mic EQ LOW Gain 1010 Ins3 DSP6 Insertion Type Effects Voice x Mic EQ MID Freq x x Jojo x x x Ins3 DSP6 Effect Parameter x x x x x Mic EQ MID Gain x xX jojo x x x Ins3 DSP6 Fast Slow Effects Voice x Mic EQ HIGH Freq x Ins3 DSP6 Dry Wet o Effects Voice x Mic EQ HIGH Gain x x x Ins3 DSP6 Fast Slow Variation Effect Noise Gate SW x x x x x x Parameter Value bell ka ke Noise Gate TH x x
193. 6 Les voix figurant dans la liste suivante sont cr es en chargeant les donn es de la dis quette Plug in Custom Voice Disk Disquette des voix plug in personnalis es sur le 9000Pro via la fonction Plug in Manager Gestionnaire plug in page 66 150 Plug in Voice List Category Voice Name MSB amp LSB Pegan Category Voice Name MSB LSB Change Change 1 Brass 9 Recorder 33 1 105 1 VL Trumpet 33 1 4 10 Island Pipe 33 1 102 2 VL Trombone 33 1 7 V Pipe 2 3 VL JzTrpt 33 1 20 1 VL Clarinet 33 1 98 4 MuteTrumpet 33 1 24 2 Piccolo 33 1 43 5 VL Trumpy 33 0 86 3 Clariphone 33 0 91 6 VL Brass 33 1 26 4 Clariophon 33 1 100 7 VL Horn 33 1 27 5 Alt Kwek 33 0 117 8 Trumpet 2 33 1 16 6 Whystler 33 0 12 9 FlugelHorn 33 1 17 7 Flurmod 33 1 61 10 Tuba 33 1 31 8 Lite Pipe 33 1 99 Il Saxophone 1 9 Ocarina 33 1 109 1 VL Soprano 81 112 64 10 Resoflute 33 0 93 2 VLIAItoSax 81 112 65 11 Bass Clari 33 0 122 3 Motion Sax 81 115 66 12 Binaphon 33 0 109 4 BrightTenor 33 1 86 VI Reed 5 Jazz Sax 81 114 66 1 VL Oboe 33 1 89 6 Soprano Sax 81 113 64 2 VL EnglHorn 33 1 95 7 Alto Sax 81 114 65 3 VL Bassoon 33 1 97 8 Ana Sopran 33 1 69 4 Triple Reed 33 1 94 9 Soft Alto 81 113 65 5 Oboette 33 0 127 10 Tenor Sax 81 116 66 6 Baroquen 33 1 63 Ill Saxophone 2 7 Bassoon 33 1 97 1 Old
194. 61 145 175 Troubleshooting 188 TEE 145 158 U Ultra Quick Start 79 Utility i o oec beers 166 V Velocity sess 168 169 176 Mibrato 62 63 81 93 Video out 13 165 Vocal harmony 6 32 80 Vocal harmony mode 83 Vocal harmony 33 81 83 Voice effects 35 60 HSCs iini tte 192 VOICE Seti iei p cd ERES 163 Volume 14 24 63 83 93 130 145 41 84 85 87 152 Waveform s e 85 91 95 Ka FE 6 171 XO EE 6 171 XGwork 64 100 106 XGworks esee 64 100 106 Appendix Anhang Annexe Voice List Stimmenliste Liste des voix Category voice Name MSB LSB rorem Category Voice Name MSB L ps Change Change Piano 23 ChapelOrgn3 0 115 19 1 Live Grand 0 113 0 24 TheatreOrg1 0 114 16 2 Grand Piano 0 112 0 25 TheatreOrg2 0 114 17 3 BrightPiano 0 112 1 26 Pipe Organ 0 112 19 4 Harpsichord 0 112 6 27 Reed Organ 0 112 20 5 GrandHarpsi 0 113 6 Accordion 6 Honky Tonk 0 112 3 1 Musette 0 112 21 7 Rock Piano 0 114 2 2 Tutti Accrd 0 113 21 8 Midi Grand 0 112 2 3 Small Accrd 0 115
195. 69 202 Ch Aahs2 0 16 52 256 Bassoon 0 0 70 203 MelChoir 0 32 52 257 Clarinet 0 0 71 204 ChoirStr 0 40 52 258 Piccolo 0 0 72 205 VoiceOoh 0 0 53 259 Flute 0 0 73 206 SynVoice 0 0 54 260 Recorder 0 0 74 207 SynVox2 0 40 54 261 PanFlute 0 0 75 208 Choral 0 41 54 262 Bottle 0 0 76 209 AnaVoice 0 64 54 263 Shakhchi 0 0 77 210 Orch Hit 0 0 55 264 Whistle 0 0 78 211 OrchHit2 0 35 55 265 Ocarina 0 0 79 212 Impact 0 64 55 266 SquareLd 0 0 80 571 Appendix Anhang Annexe Voice List Stimmentiste Liste les voix Category voice Name MsB 1588 Category Voice MSB LSB Sie Changez Change 267 Square 2 0 6 80 321 GlassPad 0 65 92 268 LMSquare 0 8 80 322 MetalPad 0 0 93 269 Hollow 0 18 80 323 Tine Pad 0 64 93 270 Shmoog 0 19 80 324 Pan Pad 0 65 93 271 Mellow 0 64 80 325 Halo Pad 0 0 94 272 SoloSine 0 65 80 326 SweepPad 0 0 95 273 SineLead 0 66 80 327 Shwimmer 0 20 95 274 Saw Lead 0 0 81 328 Converge 0 27 95 275 Saw 2 0 6 81 329 PolarPad 0 64 95 276 ThickSaw 0 8 81 330 Celstial 0 66 95 277 DynaSaw 0 18 81 331 Rain 0 0 96 278 DigiSaw 0 19 81 332 ClaviPad 0 45 96 279 Big Lead 0 20 81 333 HrmoRain 0 64 96 280 HeavySyn 0 24 81 334 AfrcnWnd 0 65 96 281 WaspySyn 0 25 81 335 Caribean 0 66 96 282 PulseSaw 0 40 81 336 SoundTrk
196. 7 depend on the note 3n 6 1 00 CHORUS SEND 0 127 depend on the note 3n m 7 1 00 7F VARIATION SEND 0 127 7F 3n m 8 1 00 01 KEY ASSIGN O SINGLE 0 1 MULTI m 9 1 00 01 Rev NOTE OFF OFF ON depend on the note 3n 1 00 01 NOTE OFF ON 1 OB 1 00 FILTER CUTOFF FREQUENCY 64 63 40 3n 0 1 00 FILTER RESONANCE 64 63 40 3n OD 1 00 EG ATTACK 64 63 40 3n 1 00 EG DECAY1 64 63 40 3n OF 1 00 EG DECAY2 64 63 40 TOTAL SIZE 10 lt Table 3 10 2 gt XG ADDITIONAL PARAMETER CHANGE TABLE DRUM SETUP Address Size Data Parameter Recognized Description Default H H H 3n 20 1 00 7F EQ BASS x 40 21 1 00 7F EQ TREBLE x 40 22 1 NOT USED x 40 23 1 NOT USED x 40 24 1 04 28 EQ BASS frequency x 0c 25 1 1C 3A EQ TREBLE frequency x 36 26 1 NOT USED x 22 27 1 NOT USED x 2 28 1 USED x 7 29 1 NOT USED x 7 2A 1 NOT USED x 7 2 1 USED x 7 2 1 NOT USED x 0 2D 1 NOT USED x 0 TOTAL SIZE 40 1 00 08 OUTPUT SELECT x O stereo out 8 indiv1 2 0 28 20 40 indivt 41 indiv2 TOTAL SIZE 1 n Drum Setup Number 0 1 rr note number ODH 5BH If XG SYSTEM ON and or GM On message is received all Drum Setup Parameter will be reset to default values According to the Drum Setup Reset message individual Drum Setup Parameters can be reset to de
197. 73 1 00 EQ TREBLE 64 63 12 12 dB 40 TOTAL SIZE 04 lt Table 3 8 3 gt XG ADDITIONAL PARAMETER CHANGE TABLE MULTI PART Address Size Data Parameter Recognized Description Default H H H value H 8 gt 9 2 x 08 nn 74 1 NOT USED 40 75 1 NOT USED I 40 76 1 04 28 EQ BASS frequency 32 2 0k Hz oc 77 1 1C 3A EQ TREBLE frequency 500 16 0 36 78 1 NOT USED X X X X X x x 22 79 1 NOT USED 2 7A 1 NOT USED x x 7 7 1 NOT USED 7 7 1 NOT USED I 7 7D 1 NOT USED X X X X X x x 7 7E 1 NOT USED 0 7F 1 NOT USED x x 0 TOTAL SIZE DC DA nn 10 1 00 08 OUTPUT SELECT x x x x x x x O stereo out 8 indiv1 2 0 28 2D 40 indiv1 41 indiv2 TOTAL SIZE 1 nn PartNumber If there is a Drum Voice assigned to the Part the following parameters are ineffective BANK SELECT LSB PORTAMENTO SOFT PEDAL MONO POLY SCALE TUNING POLY AFTER TOUCH PITCH EG Appendix Anhang Annexe 719 MIDI Data Format MIDI Datenformat Format de donn es MIDI Table 3 9 gt MIDI PARAMETER CHANGE TABLE A D PART
198. 76 9 Dist EQ Mid Gain 12 4 12dB 52 76 10 10 Dry Wet D63 gt W D W D lt W63 1 127 e 11 Crossover Frequency 100 10 0kHz 14 54 11 12 Mic L R Angle 0 180deg 0 60 12 13 13 14 Drive 0 127 14 15 LPF Cuttoff 1kHz Thru 34 60 15 16 Output Level 0 127 16 AMP SIM 2WAY ROTARY SP variation Insertion1 4 block MSB 86 LSB 3 COMP DIST DELAY variation Insertion1 4 block No Parameter Display Value See Table Control COMP OVERDRIVE DELAY variation Insertion1 4 block MSB 96 1 Rotor Speed 0 0 39 7Hz 0 127 e No Parameter Display Value See Table Control 2 Drive Low 0 127 0 127 1 Delay Time 0 1 1 4860s 1 14860 3 Drive High 0 127 0 127 2 Delay Feedback Level 63 63 1 127 4 Low High Balance L63 gt H L H L lt H 63 1 127 Delay Mix 0 127 0 127 5 4 Dist Drive 0 127 0 127 6 EQ Low Frequency 32 2 0kHz 4 40 5 Dist Output Level 0 127 0 127 7 EQ Low Gain 12 1208 52 76 6 Dist EQ Low Gain 12 12dB 52 76 8 EQ High Frequency 500 16 0kHz 28 58 7 Dist EQ Mid Gain 12 12dB 52 76 9 EQ High Gain 12 1208 52 76 8 10 9 10 Dry Wet D63 gt W D W D lt W63 1 127 e 11 Crossover Frequency 100 10 0kHz 14 54 12 Mic L R Angle 0 180deg 0 60 11 Comp Attack 1ms 40ms 0 19 table 8 13 AMP Type Off Stack Combo Tube AMPSIM only 0 3 12 Comp Release 10ms 680ms 0 15 table 9 14 Drive 0 127 13 Comp Threshold 48dB 6dB 79 121 15 LPF Cuttoff 1kHz Thru 34 60 14 Comp Ratio 1 0 20 0 0 7 table 10
199. 9 0 80 51 2 15 83 4 88 115 20 9 19 2 2 51 7 0 19 59 9 51 160 7 83 261 5 115 362 2 20 0 84 52 2 19 84 5 05 116 22 2 20 2 3 52 7 5 20 63 1 52 163 8 84 264 6 116 365 4 21 0 88 53 2 23 85 5 22 117 23 6 21 2 4 53 8 0 21 66 2 53 167 0 85 267 7 117 368 5 22 0 93 54 2 27 86 5 38 118 24 9 22 2 5 54 8 5 22 69 4 54 170 1 86 270 9 118 371 7 23 0 97 55 2 31 87 5 55 119 26 2 23 2 6 55 9 0 23 72 5 55 173 3 87 274 0 119 374 8 24 1 01 56 2 36 88 5 72 120 27 6 24 2 7 56 9 5 24 75 7 56 176 4 88 277 2 120 378 0 25 1 05 57 2 40 89 6 06 121 28 9 25 2 8 57 10 0 25 78 8 57 179 6 89 280 3 121 381 1 26 1 09 58 2 44 90 6 39 122 30 3 26 2 9 58 11 0 26 82 0 58 182 7 90 283 5 122 384 3 27 1 14 59 2 48 91 6 73 123 31 6 27 3 0 59 12 0 27 85 1 59 185 9 91 286 6 123 387 4 28 1 18 60 2 52 92 7 07 124 33 0 28 3 1 60 13 0 28 88 3 60 189 0 92 289 8 124 390 6 29 1 22 61 2 57 93 7 40 125 34 3 29 3 2 61 14 0 29 91 4 61 192 2 93 292 9 125 393 7 30 1 26 62 2 61 94 7 74 126 37 0 30 3 3 62 15 0 30 94 6 62 195 3 94 296 1 126 396 9 31 1 30 63 2 65 95 8 08 127 39 7 31 34 63 16 0 31 97 7 63 198 5 95 299 2 127 400 0 Table 2 Table 5 Table 8 Table 9 Table 13 Modulation Delay Offset Delay Time 200 0ms Compressor Compressor Sampling Freq Control Data Data Value Data Value Data Value Data Value Data Value Data Value Data Value Attack Time Release Time Data Valu
200. 9 5 6k 17 2 8 49 7 8 81 12 8 113 17 8 17 4 9 49 13 4 81 22 7 17 4thX4 49 4thX36 18 160 50 6 3 18 29 50 7 9 82 12 9 114 18 0 18 5 2 50 13 7 82 23 0 18 4thX5 50 4thX37 19 180 51 7 0k 19 3 1 51 8 1 83 13 1 115 18 1 19 5 4 51 14 0 83 23 3 19 4thX6 51 4thX38 20 200 52 8 0k 20 32 52 82 84 13 3 116 18 3 20 5 7 52 14 2 84 23 6 20 4thX7 52 4thX39 21 225 53 9 0 21 3 4 53 8 4 85 13 4 117 18 4 21 5 9 53 14 5 85 23 9 21 4thX8 53 4thX40 22 250 54 10 0k 22 3 5 54 8 6 86 13 6 118 18 6 22 6 2 54 14 8 86 24 2 22 4thX9 54 4thX41 23 280 55 11 0k 23 3 7 55 8 7 87 13 7 119 18 7 23 6 5 55 15 1 87 24 5 23 4thX10 55 4thX42 24 315 56 12 0k 24 3 9 56 8 9 88 13 9 120 18 9 24 6 7 56 15 4 88 24 9 24 AthX11 56 4thX43 25 355 57 14 0k 25 4 0 57 9 0 89 14 0 121 19 1 25 7 0 57 15 6 89 25 2 25 4thX12 57 4thX44 26 400 58 16 0k 26 4 2 58 9 2 90 14 2 122 19 2 26 7 2 58 15 9 90 25 5 26 4thX13 58 4thX45 27 450 59 18 0k er 4 3 59 9 3 91 14 4 123 19 4 27 7 5 59 16 2 91 25 8 27 AthX14 59 4thX46 28 500 60 THRU 20 0k 28 45 60 9 5 92 14 5 124 19 5 28 7 8 60 16 5 92 26 1 28 4thX15 60 4thX47 29 560 29 4 6 61 9 7 93 147 125 197 29 8 0 61 16 8 93 265 29 4thX16 61 4thX48 30 630 30 4 8 62 9 8 94 14 8 126 19 8 30 8 3 62 17 1 94 26 8 30 4thx17 62 4thX49 31 700 31 5 0 63 10 0 95 15 0 127 20 0 31 8 6 63 17 3 95 27 1 31 4thx18 63 4thX50 Appendix Anhang Annexe
201. A 3 Crash Cymbal 2 Crash Cymbal 2 Stereo Brush Crash Cymbal 2 Stereo Crash Cymbal 2 Stereo Crash Cymbal 2 Stereo 58 At 2 3 Vibraslap 59 B 2 3 Ride Cymbal 2 Ride Cymbal 2 Stereo Brush Ride Cymbal 2 Stereo Ride Cymbal 2 Stereo Ride Cymbal 2 Stereo 60 1 4 Bongo H Stereo Bongo H Stereo 61 08 3 C 4 Bongo L Bongo L Srereo Bongo L Srereo 62 D 310 4 Conga H Mute Conga H Mute Stereo Conga H Mute Stereo 63 DE 3 D 4 Conga H Open Conga H Open Stereo Conga H Open Stereo 64 E 3 4 Conga L Stereo Conga L Stereo 65 3 4 Timbale H Stereo Timbale H Stereo 66 FR 3 1 4 Timbale L Stereo Timbale L Stereo 67 G 3 G 4 68 Gt 3 GH 4 69 A 3 A 4 Cabasa Stereo Cabasa Stereo 70 At 3 AR 4 Maracas Stereo Maracas Stereo 71 B 3 B 4 Samba Whistle 72 C 4 C 510 Samba Whistle L 73 CH 4 C 5 Guiro Short Guiro Short Stereo Guiro Short Stereo 74 D 4 D 5 Guiro Long Guiro Long Stereo Guiro Long Stereo 75 D 4 D 5 Claves 76 E 4 E 5 Wood Block 77 F 4 F 5 Wood Block L 78 FR 4 FR 5 Cuica Mute Cuica Mute Stereo Cuica Mute Stereo 79 G 4 G 5 Cuica Open Cuica Open Stereo Cuica Open Stereo 80 GH 4 08 5 2 Triangle Mute Stereo Triangle Mute Stereo 81 A 4 A 5 2 Triangle Open Stereo Triangle Open Stereo 82 At 4 AR 5 Shaker Stereo Shaker Stereo 83 B 4 5 84 C 5 C 6 Bell Tree Wind Chime Stereo Wind Chime Stereo 85 8 5 C 6 86 D 50 6 87 D 5 D 6 88 5 6 89 5 6 90 FR
202. AD M PAD BANK 1 60 Selecting a Multi Pad Bank 34 77 BANK VIEW REPEAT Turning Repeat on or off 77 CHORD MATCH Turning Chord Match on or off 77 STOP Stopping the Multi Pad playback 34 1 4 Playing the Multi Pads 34 12 Data dial Changing the tempo of accompaniment song playback 44 72 e Basic Operation 08 51 Function Tree Button Controller LCD title Function See pages 13 DEMO DEMO 9000Pro DEMO Demo song selection playback 56 14 VOICE EFFECT TOUCH Turning Touch response on or off 35 60 SUSTAIN Turning Sustain on or off 35 60 DSP 4 7 Turning DSP effects on or off 35 60 SLOW FAST Setting the DSP effect variations of the selected voice part to the 35 60 SLOW or FAST Turning Harmony Echo on or off 35 60 POLY MONO Setting the selected voice part to Poly or Mono 35 60 15 MUSIC DATABASE MUSIC DATABASE MUSIC DATABASE Selecting searching creating a Music Database 26 76 16 ONE TOUCH SETTING 1 2 3 4 Recalling various panel settings that match the selected style 24 73 17 REGISTRATION MEMORY 1 8 Recalling various panel settings FREEZE REGIST BANK 1 64 Turning the Freeze function on or off Selecting a Registration Bank 28 18 MEMORY MEMORY Memorizing
203. AIN VARIATION D button FILL DOWN Same as the FILL IN amp BREAK lt button FILL SELF Same as the FILL IN amp BREAK C5 button FILL BREAK Same as the FILL IN amp BREAK button FILL UP Same as the FILL IN amp BREAK button ENDING 1 Same as the ENDING rit 1 button ENDING 2 Same as the ENDING it II button ENDING 3 Same as the ENDING rit III button FADE IN OUT Same as the FADE IN OUT button FING ON BASS The footswitch alternately switches between the Fingered and On Bass modes page 70 BASS HOLD While the pedal is pressed the Auto Accompaniment bass note will be held even if the chord is changed This function does not work in the Full Keyboard mode PERCUSSION Footswitch plays a percussion instrument selected by the ASSIGN LCD buttons the latter appears when the Percussion type is selected Reference 891 159 The 9000Pro Functions SYNCHRO START Same as the SYNCHRO START button R1 ON OFF Same as the R1 button R2 ON OFF Same as the R2 button R3 ON OFF Same as the R3 button LEFT ON OFF Same as the L button OTS Recalls next higher One Touch Setting OTS Recalls next lower One Touch Setting SOFT does not affect the voice using the PLG150 100 DX board GLIDE does not affect the voice using the Plug in Board Sustain Mode In the DEFAULT setting when you press the footswitch for sustain the note
204. ANSION SLOT 1 SLOT 2 Set Auto Load to ON or OFF See the illustration on Eo SONG TG You can store the settings in this display to Flash ROM by using this button This function is for Multi Part Plug in Boards e g PLG150 XG and lets you select the tone genera tor for XG disk song playback When SLOT 1 or SLOT 2 is selected the installed Plug in Board is used as the tone gener ator for the XG disk song playback When INTERNAL is selected the 9000Pro inter nal tone generator is used See the HINT below for information on how to use this function effectively page 64 This parameter is available when the same or same type of Plug in Boards e g the PLG100 DX and the PLG150 DX are installed in the two slots When the appropriate boards are installed and this is set to on the two boards effectively func tion as one and are assigned to a single part R1 R2 R3 or L effec tively doubling the total polyphony When this is set to ON you can select the Plug in voice only via the SLOT1 button Please note that the SLOT2 button cannot be used If you have installed a PLG150 Board to SLOT 1 and a PLG100 Board to SLOT 2 or in other words installed a higher level board of the same type to SLOT 1 and have set POLY EXPAN SION to ON you may expe rience certain problems when playing the voices See page 109 2 Using the SONG TG Tone Generator Functio
205. ATOR BRASS 1 BORRD VOICE PRH VOICE SET _ STORE When editing VL plug in voice 497 PLUG IN CUSTOM VOICE CREATOR TenrSax VOICE SET STORE Carrier3 Carriers Carrier amp Hodulator1i COMPARE noautator2 Hodulator3 Hodulatora Modulators Hodulator FeedBack Select the desired parameter PARAMETER VALUE 00 1 00 400 00 Eok 00 Specify the value 1 2 3 Bnz CC No 0ff Bnzctrippt 00 No zoff Grictrippt 00 Thr CC No zoff Thpctrippt 00 Hrm CC No zoff COMPARE 00 Dmp CC No zoff Dmpctrippt 00 Abs CC No off AbsCtrippt 00 For details about Native Part Parameters refer to the Owner s Manual of your Plug in Board VOICE SET See page 163 for details about the Voice Set function You can specify the Voice Set data to the Plug in Custom Voice 4 7 PLUG IN CUSTOM VOICE CREATOR 6 BOARD VOICE EL EG VIB 2 3 REVERB DEPTH DSP DEPTH OFF DSP Stage2 SET CHORUS DEPTH PANEL 505181 SLOW FAST SLOH FREQ 32Hz GAIN 12dB Reference OOHZ GAIN 12dB ____05 ___ DEPTHSUSTAIN 201 103 Creating Plug in Custom Voices Native System Parameter Editing The word nativ
206. BACK NEXT SET uP MUSIC DATABASE STYLE REGISTRATION ors MULTI PAD Press NEXT to continue Execute the Backup opera tion by following HULT SET UP STYLE OTS REGIST PAD the on screen instructions OFF OFF 143 or OFF OFF Select a file to be restored to Flash ROM and Set the data type to ON or OFF execute the Restore operation by following Data types set to ON are backed up the on screen instructions Reference 291 153 Disk SCSI Operations Converting files This function is useful for when you CONVERTER want to use PSR 8000 data contained 7 N CAUTION on a floppy disk with the 9000Pro or Eg 5 Please note that the HD FD for when you wish to install a hard disk cannot be used again in the previously installed to a PSR 8000 to SMF SONG NRME PSR 8000 after usina PSR 8000 HD FD function The following data created via the PSR 8000 is available Pes aid eg TEE Custom Style renamed as displayed in the PSR 8000 4 Song After rena ane comet Chord Step Waveform name meta event This function changes the sequence track name of the Meta Event of the Standard MIDI file to the song name of the 9000Pro Save the SMF files before using this function as required These functions allow you to assign a name to the file and to delete any unnecessary files The explanations here apply to step 3 of the Basic Pro
207. Be careful when using this operation since it automatically deletes all data on the disk The explanations here apply to step 3 of the Basic Procedure on page 150 Select the device to be formatted E PROPERTY d Mopp Press NEXT to continue DEVICE FDD PAGE CONTROL Execute the Format operation by following the on screen instructions Reference Select this to display the properties of the selected disk This allows you to assign a password for future formatting operations on the 9000Pro Once a password is assigned no device can be formatted without first specifying the password This ensures that no one else intentionally or inad vertently will be able to format the device Pressing this button calls up the Name Entry display page 46 from which you can enter the password A maximum of 8 characters can be entered for the name and both capital and lowercase letters can be used CAUTION erases all data on the disk so be sure that the disk you re formatting does not C contain important data Formatting a disk completely 3 Hard disk drives of amaximum 8 GB capacity can be format ted however the maximum partition size is 2 GB For example an 8 GB hard disk drive would have to be format ted into four separate 2 GB partitions Hard disk drives of a capacity greater than 8 GB can be installed however the 9000Pro is
208. CAT parameter flag FOH 43H 73H 01H 11H OnH 54H dd F7H 0000nnnn Sequencer Track No 01010100 54 MWCAT parameter flag Oddddddd dd Value ignored Appendix Anhang Annexe 809 609 MIDI Data Format MIDI Datenformat Format de donn es MIDI MIDI Parameter Change Table Anderungstabelle der MIDI Parameter Tableau des changements de parametres MIDI Table 3 1 gt MIDI PARAMETER CHANGE TABLE SYSTEM Address Size Data Parameter Recognized Description Default H H H value H 4 0000 MASTER TUNE 102 4 102 3 cent 00 04 00 00 1 O7FF 1st bit3 O bit15 12 2 2nd bit3 0bit1 1 8 3 3rd bit3 0bit7 4 4th bit3 0 bit3 0 4 1 00 7F MASTER VOLUME 0 127 7F 5 1 MASTER ATTENUATOR x 6 1 28 58 TRANSPOSE 24 24 semitones 40 7D n DRUM SETUP RESET n Drum setup number 7E 0 XG SYSTEM ON 00 XG sytem 0 ALL PARAMETER RESET 00 ON TOTAL SIZE 7 lt Table 3 2 gt MIDI PARAMETER CHANGE TABLE System information Address Size Data Parameter Recognized Description Default H H H 1 0 0 20 7F Model Name x 32 127 ASCII DD 20 7F 1 0 0 OF 1 0 0 TOTAL SIZE 10 Transmitte
209. CD Tr ni Cc SS BSS WEE 1 p PART SELECT a O VEN Mmm REGISTRATION e LJ 51 2 m B E 7 z Liquid Crystal Display LCD and Related Buttons Controls page 44 Large multi function LCD display panel with display based buttons plus comprehensive display prompts and messages makes operation easy and intuitive Related Buttons Controls LCD A J buttons LCD 1 8 buttons DIRECT ACCESS button MAIN MIXER button PART ON OFF button EXIT button PAGE CONTROL buttons LCD CONTRAST control D ta eae eege dE 44 DEMO button 56 VOICE EFFECT buttons 35 60 MUSIC DATABASE button 26 76 ONE TOUCH SETTING button 24 73 REGISTRATION MEMORY buttons 28 The illustrations and LCD screens as shown in this owner s manual are for instructional purposes only and may be different from your instrument B MEMORY button VOICE buttons PLUG IN VOICE 42 58 PART SELECT buttons e 57 PART ON OFF buttons ee 17 18 57 UPPER OCTAVE buttons e 18 VOCAL HARMONY 32 80 hear Panel amp Connections N CAUTION e Make sure that the POWER switch is the OFF exten
210. Chorus Depth x x MultiPad x Parameter Lock x x x x x x Registration Memory Auto Exit Time x x x x x x Registration Bank x x x x x x Screen Saver Time Registration Bank Name x x x x x x Language x xX xX ojo Registration Name x x x x x x PC Keyboard x x x Voice Set Assign Right1 x x x 010 x x x VIDEO OUT Voice Set Assign Right2 D D x ojo x x x NTSC PAL x x x x Voice Set Assign Right3 x D x x x D Background Color x D x jojo x x x Voice Set Assign Left x x x ojo x x x Foreground Color x x x x x x Freeze On Off x x x D D D Size Large Small x x x 010 D D D Freeze Group Setting x x Other Settings MIDI Master Tune x x D D D MIDI Local Control x x x 1010 D D D Metronome On Off Play x x 010 D D D MIDI Clock Internal External A B x ojo x x Metronome On Off Rec x x x 1010 D x x MIDI Transmit Ch 1 32 settings x x x 010 x x x Metronome Volume x x 1010 D D D MIDI Receive Ch 1 32 settings x x x 010 x x Password x x x o x x x MIDI Thru Port x x x 010 Line Out Part x x D D Line Out MIDI Template No x x x 010 x x x Owner Name x x x 1010 x x x Appendix Anhang Annexe Effect Type List Effektartliste Liste des types d effet Reverb Type Typ Widerhall Type Re
211. Closed Hi Hat Closed Stereo Hi Hat Closed Stereo Hi Hat Closed Stereo Hi Hat Closed Stereo 43 G G 2 Floor Tom H Floor Tom H Stereo Brush Floor Tom H Stereo Floor Tom H Stereo Floor Tom H Stereo 44 Gi Gt 2 1 Hi Hat Pedal Hi Hat Pedal Stereo Hi Hat Pedal Stereo Hi Hat Pedal Stereo Hi Hat Pedal Stereo 45 A A 2 Low Tom Low Tom Stereo Brush Low Tom Stereo Low Tom Stereo Low Tom Stereo 46 At 2 1 Hi Hat Open Hi Hat Open Stereo Hi Hat Open Stereo Hi Hat Open Stereo Hi Hat Open Stereo 47 B B 2 Mid Tom L Mid Tom L Stereo Brush Mid Tom L Stereo Mid Tom L Stereo Mid Tom L Stereo 48 C 2 C 3 Mid Tom H Mid Tom H Stereo Brush Mid Tom H Stereo Mid Tom H Stereo Mid Tom H Stereo 49 082108 3 Crash Cymbal 1 Crash Cymbal 1 Stereo Brush Crash Cymbal 1 Stereo Crash Cymbal 1 Stereo Crash Cymbal 1 Stereo 50 D 210 3 High Tom High Tom Stereo Brush High Tom Stereo High Tom Stereo High Tom Stereo 51 D 2 D 3 Ride Cymbal 1 Ride Cymbal 1 Stereo Brush Ride Cymbal 1 Stereo Ride Cymbal 1 Stereo Ride Cymbal 1 Stereo 52 2 E 3 Chinese Cymbal Chinese Cymbal Stereo Chinese Cymbal Stereo Chinese Cymbal Stereo Chinese Cymbal Stereo 53 2 3 Ride Cymbal Cup Ride Cymbal Cup Stereo Brush Ride Cymbal Cup Stereo Ride Cymbal Cup Stereo Ride Cymbal Cup Stereo 54 FF 2 3 Tambourine Tambourine Stereo Tambourine Stereo 55 2 3 Splash Cymbal Splash Cymbal Stereo Splash Cymbal Stereo Splash Cymbal Stereo Splash Cymbal Stereo 56 GH 2 08 3 Cowbell Cowbell Stereo Cowbell Stereo 57 A 2
212. Controller x EQ Low EQ1 y x Master Foot Sw1 Percussion Note x x D Controller x Foot Sw1 Percussion Velocity x x x Controller x EQ Low Mid EQ2 Q x x x Master Foot Sw2 Type o Controller x EQ Mid EQ3 Q x x x x MET Foot Sw2 Part Assign x x x Controller Appendix Anhang Annexe 269 593 Parameter Chart Parameter Tabelle Tahleau tles param tres x x 2l 8 2 8 a 8 o 8 5 58 o 2 5 5 o e ra ols 5 9 ole A m o 8 8 8 5 E 81818 C io goieoi 8 5 5 8 8 9 2 9 S 0 gt o 2 o gt Foot Sw2 Percussion Kit x x Controller x MIDI Transmit Clock x x 010 D D D Foot Sw2 Percussion Note x x Controller x MIDI Receive transpose x x x 010 D D D Foot Sw2 Percussion Velocity D x x Controller x MIDI Sys Ex Transmit D x jojo x x x Modulation Wheel Assign x x x Controller x MIDI Sys Ex Receive x x x jojo x x Initial Touch Sw x x D Controller x MIDI Chord Sys Ex Transmit x x x 010 D D D Initial Touch Sensitivity x x
213. E A A START END Example WAVE E i A A START END 4 WAVE Lach A A A i i START LOOP LOOP Start point Loop Start Loop End START END point point B D D C D HAVE EDIT HAVE 2 68 HAVEFORH HumanVoice1 1 2 RESRMPLING LOOP POINT K NORMALIZE S INI oc GIN ZERO SELECT ADDRESS LEVEL The LEVEL indicators the right of each address Loop ON show the signal level at the current address REVERSE END 00109200 the longer the bar the higher the signal level 1 This makes it easier to locate zero level points ENT UA for noise free trimming and looping Press this to actually edit the selected wave See above When the ONE SHOT or REVERSE is selected select either the Start or End address of the wave When the LOOP is selected select the Start i Loop Start or Loop End address of the wave Press this to automatically remove all data prior to the specified Start point and When this is turned ON the LOOP ADDRESS after the End or Loop End LCD buttons will automatically only select point of your sample points in the wave corresponding to or adja See the illustration below cent to zero level points Sample Extract Start point Loop Start Loop End Start point Loop Start Loop End point point point Normalize This function increas
214. E 68 Arabic tuning 158 Assignable Control 103 tutte 63 93 Auto accompaniment 20 70 Auto Exit 167 Auto Load 64 69 100 166 Auto Trigger Level 84 AUX IN LOOP RETURN jacks 12 B Backup seno ee 55 154 Bank sese 28 34 T7 141 Bank View 28 77 Basic 44 Basic Procedure 62 66 74 81 82 86 92 101 111 128 141 144 150 158 174 Bass Chord Hold 21 Bass Hold nee 160 Beat 45 Board Custom Voice 64 100 Board Custom Voice Backup 64 100 108 Board Preset Voice 64 100 Board Voice 43 64 100 102 Break 22 Brightness cce 145 CALC ROLY 26 56 74 Check Disk ueniens 157 Chord Detect 177 Chord Match 77 142 Chord note 142 Chord Step 122 81 83 146 a 87 142 Glock niai nie tenerent 175 Complete Save 68 Compressor eren 82 147 Computer connections 172 Configuration esses 166 Convert 155 COPY 75 142 154 Custom voice 92 Custom voice creator 92
215. ECT PARAMETER LIST on insertion 1 00 7F ee RTION EFFECT 7 Refer to the XG EFFECT PARAMETER LIST Ee on insertion 1 3E 2 00 7F INSE RTION EFFECT n PARAMETER8 Refer to the XG EFFECT PARAMETER LIST E on insertion 1 00 7F INSE RTION EFFECT n PARAMETER8 Refer to the XG EFFECT PARAMETER LIST on insertion 1 40 2 00 7F INSE RTION EFFECT n PARAMETERS Refer to the XG EFFECT PARAMETER LIST SC on insertion 1 00 7F E RTION EFFECT n 9 Refer to the XG EFFECT PARAMETER LIST SE on insertion 1 42 2 00 7F INSE RTION EFFECT n PARAMETER10 Refer to the XG EFFECT PARAMETER LIST on insertion 1 00 7F SU RTION EFFECT n PARAMETER10 Refer to the XG EFFECT PARAMETER LIST ee on insertion 1 TOTAL SIZE 14 On insertion effect number Note For effect types that do not require MSB the Parameters for Address 02 0B will be received and the Parameters for Address 30 42 will not be received For effect types that require MSB the Parameters for Address 30 42 will be received and the Parameters for Address 02 0B will not be received When Bulk Dumps that include Effect Type data are transmitted the Parameters for Address 02 0B will always be transmitted But effects that require MSB when the bulk dump is received the Parameters for Address 02 0B will not be received The following four effect types require MSB DelayLCR DelayLR Echo CrossDelay Dist Delay Comp Dist Delay Wah Dist Delay VDistortion
216. ECT PARAMETER LIST depends on insertion 1 ype 25 1 00 7F INSERTION EFFECT PARAMETER16 Refer to the EFFECT PARAMETER LIST depends on insertion 1 ype TOTAL SIZE 6 HARMONY CHANNEL and MELODY CHANNEL About these settings the last message is effective When the Melody channel is 3 and a message that set the Harmony Channel to 3 is received the Melody channel is set to OFF and the Harmony channel is set to 3 lt Table 3 7 gt MIDI PARAMETER CHANGE TABLE DISPLAY DATA Address Size Data Parameter Recognized Description Default 6 0 of 20 DISPLAY LETTER x 1F TOTAL SIZE 20 7 wh 0 30 DISPLAY BITMAP DataO x 2 Data47 TOTAL SIZE 30 lt Table 3 8 gt MIDI PARAMETER CHANGE TABLE MULTI PART Address Size Data Parameter Recognized Description Default H value H 8 5 aloj e 2 1 5 6 x D lt x 8 n 0 1 00 20 ELEMENT RESERVE x x x x x 0 32 part10 0 other 2 nn 1 1 00 BANK SELECT MSB x 0 127 part10 7F other 0 2 1 00 BANK SELECT LSB 0 127 0 nn 3 1 00 7F PROGRAM NUMBER x o 1 128 0 4 1 00 Rev CHANNEL x x x x x X 1 16 0FF Part No OF 7F nn 5 1 00 01 MONO POLY MODE x 0 MONO 1 1 POLY Appendix Anhang Annexe 219 613 MIDI Data Format MIDI Datenformat Format de
217. ECT PARAMETER LIST depends on reverb type 11 1 00 7F REVERB PARAMETER 12 Refer the MIDI EFFECT PARAMETER LIST depends on reverb type 12 1 00 7F REVERB PARAMETER 13 Refer the MIDI EFFECT PARAMETER LIST depends on reverb type 13 1 00 7F REVERB PARAMETER 14 Refer the MIDI EFFECT PARAMETER LIST depends on reverb type 14 1 00 7F REVERB PARAMETER 15 Refer the MIDI EFFECT PARAMETER LIST depends on reverb type 15 1 00 7F REVERB PARAMETER 16 Refer the MIDI EFFECT PARAMETER LIST depends on reverb type TOTAL SIZE 6 2 1 20 2 00 7F CHORUS TYPE MSB Refer the MIDI EFFECT 41 CHORUS1 00 7F CHORUS TYPE LSB 00 basic type 00 22 1 00 7F CHORUS PARAMETER 1 Refer the MIDI EFFECT PARAMETER LIST depends on chorus Type 23 1 00 7F CHORUS PARAMETER 2 Refer the MIDI EFFECT PARAMETER LIST depends on chorus Type 24 1 00 7F CHORUS PARAMETER 3 Refer the MIDI EFFECT PARAMETER LIST depends on chorus Type 25 1 00 7F CHORUS PARAMETER 4 Refer the MIDI EFFECT PARAMETER LIST depends on chorus Type 26 1 00 7F CHORUS PARAMETER 5 Refer the MIDI EFFECT PARAMETER LIST depends on chorus Type 27 1 00 7F CHORUS PARAMETER 6 Refer the MIDI EFFECT PARAMETER LIST depends chorus 28 1 00 7F CHORUS PARAMETER 7 Refer the MIDI EFFECT PARAMETER LIST depends on chorus 29 1 00 7F CHORUS PARAMETER 8 Refer the MIDI EFFECT
218. ENT FROM FLASH ROH FLASH ROH y 003 008 di m A gt Cha Cha Cha D ER Quickstep Pasodoble 1 P 005 010 Tango Jive STYLEMAHAGER Ci YLE IN FLASH ROM DELETE STYLE IN FLASH ROM SHAP STYLE IN FLASH ROM 1 Select a style 3 select the desired function 4 Execute the selected function The operations for each function corresponding to step 4 are covered in the following expla nations category 2 select this to call up the Style Manager display Load Style into Flash ROM This allows you to load style data from disk to Flash ROM Select this to display the property of the selected file Choose one of the three methods for selecting files see page 151 LOAD STYLE INTO FLASH Select the file to be Loaded Press NEXT to continue DEVICE FD DIRECTORY FILE 8BTSTD STY Select this to listen to the selected style file When set to with OTS you can LOAD STYLE INTO FLASH Select the Location for Loading If two or more files are selected the first file is loaded to this location and the rest are Loaded consecutively Press NEXT BACK load the selected style file with its One Touch Setting setups FLASH ROM STYLE CATEGORY STVLE _ Efsststo sty Flash 1 FUSION3 STY Flash 2 No Data FUSIONBD STY Flash 3 No Data PAGE CONTROL Flash 4 No Data Flash
219. Echo effect This effect adds a variety of harmony notes to your playing in the right hand section as well as adding tremolo or other effects 1 Turn Harmony Echo on gt 2 Turn Auto Accompaniment on page 20 and turn RIGHT 1 3 Play a chord with your left hand and play some notes in the right hand range of the keyboard Split Point A Ny Auto Accompaniment section The 9000Pro has various Harmony Echo types The Harmony Echo type may change according to the selected RIGHT 1 voice Try out some of the voices below Try out Harmony Echo with some of the voices below Category Voice Harmony Echo Type Category Voice Harmony Echo Type PIANO Grand Piano Standard Trio GUITAR PedalSteel Country Duet ACCORDION _ Tutti Accrd Country Trio BRASS MoonLight Full Chord STRINGS Live Strs Block PERCUSSION Vibraphone Trill ChamberSirs 4 way Open GUITAR Mandolin Tremolo GUITAR Lead Guitar Rock Duet w touch Sen STRINGS Harp Strum Reference on page 110 DIGITAL RECORDING button The powerful and easy to use Song Creator feature lets you record your own keyboard performances to disk With multiple tracks for recording comprehensive editing features plus the use of the auto accom paniment and the Multi Pads yo
220. Exclusive messages Reference MIDI Functions On the 9000Pro 16 channels of MIDI data can be transmitted received over a single MIDI cable or over a serial cable using the TO HOST terminal Since the 9000Pro features two independent MIDI ports A and B a total of 32 MIDI channels can be used simultaneously For example several tracks can be transmitted simultaneously including the auto accompaniment data as shown below When recording performance data using the Auto Accompaniment on an external sequencer 9000Pro part MIDI cable or serial cable External sequencer wer Voice Channel 1 Track 1 Although the 9000Pro can 2 receive MIDI data over 32 Voice R3 Channel 3 Track 3 channels simultaneously as a Voice L Channel 4 Track 4 multi timbral sound source Multi Pad 1 Channel 5 Track 5 tone generator it actually Multi Pad 2 Channel 6 Track 6 responds to only 28 channels Multi Pad 3 Channel 7 Track 7 simultaneously This is Multi Pad 4 Channel 8 Track 8 because the MIDI Receive Mode for the MIDI B port page Auto Accompaniment Rhythm 1 sub Channel 9 Track 9 176 cannot be set to XG GM Auto Accompani
221. FADE IN OUT x x x D D D Acmp Chord 2 Part Reverb Depth x x Acmp D FILL In amp Break Mode x x x x Acmp Pad Part Reverb Depth x x Acmp D Tap Tempo x x x x x x Acmp Phrase 1 Part Reverb Depth D x Acmp D Tap Count Note D Acmp D Acmp Phrase 2 Part Reverb Depth x Tap Count Velocity Acmp x Acmp Rhythm 1 Part Chorus Depth x x Acmp Acmp Main Volume x oO x Acmp x Acmp Rhythm 2 Part Chorus Depth x x Acmp Main EQ Low x x x Acmp x Acmp Bass Part Chorus Depth x x Acmp D Acmp Main EQ High x Acmp x Acmp Chord 1 Part Chorus Depth x x Acmp D Acmp Main Panpot x x Acmp Chord 2 Part Chorus Depth x x Acmp Main Reverb Depth x x x Acmp x Acmp Pad Part Chorus Depth x x Acmp D Acmp Main Chorus Depth D Acmp x Acmp Phrase 1 Part Chorus Depth x x Acmp D Acmp Main DSP Depth x x x Acmp x Acmp Phrase 2 Part Chorus Depth x D Acmp x Acmp Rhythm 1 Part Track On Off x x Acmp x Acmp Rhythm 1 Part Variation DSP3 xlolo xlix x Acmp x Acmp Rhythm 2 Part Track On Off x xix x Acmp x Depth Acmp Bass Part Track On Off x
222. FAST or change the tempo Editing some of the effect parameters may produce a small amount of noise D 441 145 Mixing Console Master Equalizer Settings Usually an equalizer is used to correct the sound output from amps or speakers to match the special character of the room The sound is divided into several frequency bands allowing you to correct the sound by raising or lowering the level for each band The equalizer allows you to adjust the tone or timbre of the sound to match the performance space or to compensate for certain acoustic characteristics in your room For example you can cut some of the low range frequencies when playing in large spaces where the sound is too boomy or boost the high frequencies in rooms and close spaces where the sound is relatively dead and free of echoes The 9000Pro possesses a high grade five band digital equalizer function With this function a final effect tone con trol can be added to the output of your instrument MIXING CONSOLE LEG 14 Ei 16 An edited PRESET or USER curve can be stored to USER 1 An edited PRESET or USER curve can be stored to USER 2 Adjusts the overall gain of all EQ bands simultaneously The PRESET and USER curves can be edited as required via the corresponding LCD buttons EQ1 through EQ5 Each of the 5 bands be boosted values or cut values by up to 12 Whenever an EQ band
223. FH POLY 0 x D x D CnH pp Voice number 0 127 5 Arter Touch 2 o o AnH kk x x x x X abend EnH LS Byte dd MS Byte 0 0 RealTime F8H MIDI Clock Message FAH Start o o o o o o FBH Continue x x x D D D D FCH Stop o FEH Active Sens System Reset D D D D D x x Appendix Anhang Annexe e MIDI Data Format MIDI Datenformat Format te donn es MIDI lt Table 1 1 1 gt NRPN available NRPN DATA ENTRY Recognized Parameter MSB LSB MSB LSB XG GM Keyboard R1 R2 R3 Left Acmp 01H 08H mmH Vibrato Rate o x 01H 09H mmH Vibrato Depth o x o 01H OAH mmH Vibrato Delay x x x x x 01H 20H mmH Filter Cutoff Frequency o x D x x x o 01H 21H mmH Filter Resonance x x x x 01H 24H mmH HPF Cutoff Frequency x x D x x D x 01H 30H mmH EQ BASS D 01H 31H mmH EQ TREBLE D 01H 34H mmH EQ BASS Frequency x x x x D 01H 35H mmH EQ TREBLE Frequency x x x x D 01H 63H mmH EG Attack Time D 01H 64H mmH EG Decay Time D 01H 66H mmH EG Release x x x x x 14H rrH mmH Drum F
224. FH i 07H Main Volume 0 127 7FH o 10 0 127 7FH 11 OBH Expression 0 127 7FH o o 64 40H Sustain Damper 0 127 7FH o D 65 41H Portament 0 127 7FH x 66 42H Sostenuto 0 127 7FH D 67 43H Soft Pedal 0 127 D The NRPN A 47H Harmonic Content 0 127 7FH also contains 72 48H Release Time ns parame 73 49H Attack Time 0 127 7 o o o o 74 4 Brightness 0s127 84 54H Portamento Control 0 127 7FH 91 5BH Tm 0 127 7FH a 5 93 EE 0 127 7FH B o 94 Warton eae T 0 127 7FH 96 60 Increment 0 127 7FH 97 61H Decrement 0 127 7 9 2 ee Ba 98 62H NRPN LSB 0 127 7FH x 5 1 2 99 63H NRPN MSB 0 127 7FH 100 64H RPN LSB 0 127 7FH 9 5 101 65 5 0 127 7 Mode BnH 120 78H All sound off 0 121 79 Reset all controller 0 x x 122 7AH Local control dd Te Off x x x 123 7BH All note off 0 o o o 124 7 OMNI OFF 0 125 7DH OMNI ON 0 126 7 MONO 0 16 10H x x x 127 7
225. H PANEL SUSTAIN DSP Stage2 SLOW FAST SLOH E LOH FREQ 110Hz GAIN OdB HIGH FREQ 4 5 2 GAIN 048 COMPARE REVERB cHORUS DSP DEPTH DEPTH DEPTH SUSTAIN Custom Voice Creating Reference e Creating Plug in Custom Voices Just as with the preset voices you can use the voices of the Plug in Board as basic material for crafting your own original Plug in voices Once you ve created a voice you can store it to a Plug in Custom voice location for future recall Guidelines Memory Structure of the Plug in Voices The illustration below is basically same as the one on page 64 The illustration on page 64 describes the relationship between each menu of the Plug in Manager function and the voice data on the Flash ROM board The illustration below however shows the relationship betweeen each menu of the Plug in Custom Voice Creator function explained in this chapter and the voice data on the Flash ROM board Disk Save Functions in the Plug in Custom Voice Creator Plug in Manager page 66 9000Pro Load E T SLOT 2 Plug in Board Board Preset Voice Plug in Custom Voice ROM Board Custom Voice Board Custom Voice RAM Native System Native System P
226. H 01H 62H F7H x 01100010 62 MIDI FA Cancel Off Substatus System Exclusive Messages Special Operators MIDI Event Data Format Recognized Volume amp Expression amp Pan Realtime control off Voice Reserve FOH 43H 73H 01H 11H OnH 45H dd F7H 0000nnnn On Channel 01000101 45 Volume amp Expression Control No Oddddddd dd Value Available only for the specified channel 00H Realtime On Realtime Off 0 Appendix Anhang Annexe MIDI Data Format MIDI Datenformat Format de donn es MIDI System Exclusive Messages Special Operators Vocal Harmony Additional Parameters MIDI Event Data Format Recognized Vocal Harmony FOH 43H 73H 01H 11H OOH 50H OOH ss F7H Pitch to Note ON OFF 00000000 00 Channel No always 00 01010000 50 Vocal Harmony Additional Parameter Control No 00000000 00 Pitch to Note Parameter Osssssss Ss Pitch To Note Switch 00H Off 01H On Vocal Harmony FOH 43H 73H 01H 11H 00H 50H 01H ss F7H Pitch to Note Part 00000000 00 Channel No always 00 01010000 50 Vocal Harmony Additional Parameter Control No 00000001 01 Pitch to Note Part Parameter No Osssssss Ss Pitch To Note Part No 00H RIGHT1 01H RIGHT2 02H LEFT 03H LEAD 04H UPPER Vocal Harmony 43H 73H 01H 11H 00H 50H 10H ss F7H Vocoder Part 00000000 00 Channel No always 00 Harmony Part Panel 01010000 50
227. Heart Beat 001 000 Sect D 001 1 000 Chord C Ce 001 1 000 Tempo 1 3 000 Chord D oj2 1 000 sect F E Fillinc 1 02 1 000 Chord E m7 4 po2 3 000 chora D 02 4 000 Chord G 7 03 1 000 Chord C 4 0 000 05 1 000 End 00 000 MEAS BEAT f CLK 2 2 This shows the current position at which you enter the chord Clock 384 clocks per 1 4 note selectable 000 or 192 Beat 1 4 for 4 4 time Measure number E Entering other events Event List In addition to the Chord Section the following events can be recorded in the Event List display All menu items in the display are the same as in Step Recording page 120 Tempo Accompaniment Volume Accompaniment Part Volume Accompaniment Part on off Style number Section Chord NEHSONG HID STEP REC Reso 2 EVENT LIST WRIST S RIS Sty P1 01 Heart Beat Sect H Hain D Chord C 148 Chord 001 3 000 DATA ENTRY 5 BEAT Reference Press this to actually delete the event at the current cursor position The size of the current recording step This determines to what position the pointer will advance after a chord has been entered 221 Song Creator Event Filter This function lets you select the event types that appear on the editing displays To select an eve
228. IC are playing simply by F pressing the appropriate e Multi Pad Im JESS Preset factory set data is listed in the chart below 440 01 74 Tune the overall pitch of the 9000Pro from 414 6 466 8 Hz referenced to A3 440 Hz is standard concert pitch Fine tune the selected note in 1 cent steps Coarse tune the selected key in 10 cent steps When the ARABIC scale is selected you can select the note and tune it The tuning range is from 64 through 0 to 63 Each increment equals one DET ETF FR G Gt a at Padi RASD Up 0 50 0 0 010 01 0 50 cent one cent is one hundredth of a semitone Pad2 RASD Down 50 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Pads BAYATI T6210 10 10 0 Select either the normal equal temperament Pad4 Equal Tem scale an arabic scale in which each note perament can be tuned over a 127 cent range Reference 991 The 9000Pro Functions Split Point Chord Fingering The explanations here apply to step 3 of the Basic Procedure on page 158 HU F2 SPLIT POINT FINGERING You can set the Split Split Point is valid when Left Point by pressing the and or Auto Accompaniment is desired key while hold The Fingering Hode determines hou ing this button chords are recognized in Auto Accompa
229. IDI systems Basic Procedure MENU HEN FUNCION Preset MIDI templates Factory Set CH Q All Parts Transmits all parts including R1 R2 and Left KBD amp ACMP Transmits Upper and Lower key board performance data rather than that of the individual parts R1 R2 R3 and Left Master KBD1 The 9000Pro functions as a master keyboard for controlling external tone generators or other devices Master KBD2 The 9000Pro functions as a master keyboard which does not transmit af tertouch data Clock Ext A MIDI IN A port receives MIDI clock data allowing you to synchronize the 9000Pro with an external MIDI de 2 Select the desired template 1 Press the MIDI button 101 MIDI l AllParts MIDI Accord MIDI Pedali fos vice MIDI Pedal2 MIDI Accord1 An ideal setup for controlling the key board and accompaniment by a MIDI accordion MIDI Accord2 The chord and bass buttons on a MIDI accordion are used to control the accompaniment as well as play the chord and bass parts MIDI Pedal1 A MIDI pedal keyboard connected to the MIDI IN B port controls the bass note of the accompaniment 3 Select this to call up 3 Select this to call up the SETUP display the MFC10 display MIDI Pedal2 A MIDI pedal keyboard connected to the MIDI IN B port plays the bass part MIDI OFF No MIDI signals are sent or received
230. Jui HOST SELECT TO HOST VIDEO OUT NTSC PAL The MIC LINE jacks can be used with either 1 4 phone plugs or XLR connectors however they are special differential input connectors For phone plugs the tip and ring of the plug correspond to and respectively Because of this arrangement connecting a stereo signal such as from a CD player with a stereo phone jack to the 9000Pro results in the left and right signals cancelling each other out To properly connect a CD player or other stereo source make sure to use a mono input either left or right or a mix of the stereo signal pages 32 80 Rear Panel amp Connections An optional lamp can be con nected to the 9000Pro This is especially conve nient when using the 9000Pro in situations of low available light See page 15 for details An optional Yamaha FC7 Foot Controller connected to this jack can be used to con trol volume and a range of other impor tant functions Refer to page 159 Computer with music software Refer to page 172 One or two optional Yamaha FC5 foot switches connected to these jacks can be used to control sustain and a range of other important functions Refer to page 160 D E SS The sophisticated MIDI func tions give you powerful tools to expand your music performance and creation possibilities Refer to page 168
231. K 1 64 IBID 2 Press of the REGISTRATION MEMORY buttons 1 through 8 Registration Name entered via the Registration Name function display described on page 163 If any change is made to a setting memorized by the Registration Memory feature a pencil icon appears indicating that one or more settings have been edited Indicates the Regis tration Bank Number Current selected REGISTRATION MEMORY Registration Bank 64 BIN fam The Freeze function If you press the FREEZE button so that its lamp lights selecting a different registra 3 06 C3 tion setup will not change the settings specified in the Registration Freeze Group Set E C ting function display page 163 gege Bank View If you press the REGIST BANK buttons simultaneously you can view the Reg _ istration Bank list on the LCD display Cs Ei G Quick Guide Registering the Panel Settings You can also create your own Registration Memory setups gt Set up the panel controls as required 2 Select a Registration Bank 04 through 64 Avoid selecting one of the Registration Banks 01 through 03 even though they can be selected since you may inadvertently delete some important data See the note below REGISTRATION MEMORY FREEZE REGIST BANK 1 64
232. KEYBOARD hana Set the level at which touch OFF response is turned off EAE Yj aw aw J avw avi av Turn initial touch response control for the corresponding parts ON or OFF as required Select the desired sensitivity curve listed at right AFTER TOUCH HARD 2 Requires the keys to be played very hard to produce maximum loudness HARD 1 Requires the keys to be played quite hard to produce maximum loudness NORMAL Produces a fairly standard key board response SOFT 1 Although this is not as sensitive as the SOFT 2 setting this al lows you to produce loud volume with relatively light playing strength SOFT 2 Allows maximum loudness to be produced with very light playing strength With this function the 9000 senses how much pressure you apply to the keys while ing and uses that pressure to affect the sound in various ways depending on the selected voice This allows you to play with greater expressiveness and add effects with your playing technique lt 2 CONTROLLER FOOT CONTROLLER PANEL CONTROLLER 1 Indicates current sensitivity setting HARD ON ON Torr OFF OFF OFF SOFT av Taw av av Turn aftertouch for the corresponding parts ON or OFF as required Select the desired sensitivity curve listed at the
233. LIMIT are not available for the Drum Kits Ns 2 Example for VELOCITY LIMIT 127 No sound is produced HIGH LOW No sound is produced Reference Custom Voice Creating e E2 EG An acronym for Envelope Generator a block that modifies the level of the tone genera tor from the moment that a note is played until the sound decays to silence The Ampli tude EG controls the volume level the Pitch EG controls the pitch and the Filter EG controls the filter cutoff frequency INITIAL LEVEL CUSTOM VOICE CREATOR Grand Piano VOICE SET STORE CLEAR IC PITCH RATE LEVEL 2 3 a 5 FILTER Indicates the EG settings as a 2 6 diagram Resets the currently selected EG parameters to their most basic settings DECAY2 RATE DECAY3 RATE RELEASE RATE SUSTAIN RATE 13431 LAVOAG KEY ON gt TIME KEY OFF 73431 i Higher rate values produce faster variation AMP RATE and AMP LEVEL Amplitude EG settings The AMP RATE parameters are time related they determine how long it takes for the sound volume to change from level to level as set in AMP LEVEL The AMP LEVEL parameters are volume related they determine how loud or soft the volume changes are over time as set in AMP RATE AMP RATE ATTACK Sets the rate of variation from key on to the
234. Low Frequency 32 2 0kHz 4 40 6 7 EQ Low Gain 12 1208 52 76 7 EQ Mid Frequency 100Hz 10 0kHz 14 54 table 3 8 EQ High Frequency 500 16 0kHz 28 58 8 EQ Mid Gain 12 12dB 52 76 9 EQ High Gain 12 1208 52 76 9 EQ Mid Width 1 0 12 0 10 120 10 Dry Wet D63 gt W D W D lt W 63 1 127 10 Dry Wet D63 gt W D W D lt W63 1 127 11 11 Edge Clip Curve 0 127 0 127 mild sharp 12 12 13 13 14 Drive 0 127 0 127 14 15 LPF Cuttoff 1kHz Thru 34 60 15 16 Output Level 0 127 0 127 16 AMP SIM ROTARY SPEAKER variation Insertion1 4 block MSB 69 LSB 3 COMP DIST variation Insertion1 4 block MSB 73 LSB 1 16 No Parameter Display Value See Table Control No Parameter Display Value See Table Control 1 LFO Frequenct 0 0 39 7Hz 0 127 g 1 Drive 0 127 0 127 g 2 LFO Depth 0 127 0 127 2 EQ Low Frequency 32Hz 2 0kHz 4 40 table 3 3 AMP Type Off Stack Combo Tube 0 3 3 EQLow Gain 12 12dB 52 76 4 4 LPF Cutoff 1 0k Thru 34 60 table 3 5 5 Output Level 0 127 0 127 6 EQ Low Frequency 32 2 0kHz 4 40 6 7 EQ Low Gain 12 1208 52 76 7 EQ Mid Frequency 100Hz 10 0kHz 14 54 table 3 8 EQ High Frequency 500 16 0kHz 28 58 8 EQ Mid Gain 12 12dB 52 76 9 EQ High Gain 12 1208 52 76 9 EQ Mid Width 1 0 12 0 10 120 10 Dry Wet D63 gt W D W D lt W 63 1 127 10 Dry Wet D63 gt W D W D lt W63 1 127 11 11 Edge Clip Curve 0 127 0 127 mild sharp 12 12 Attack 1ms 40ms 0 19 table 8 13 13 Release 10ms 680
235. MONY ECHO Harmony Echo settings 164 VIDEO OUT Setting the display characteristics that are output to a television or 165 video monitor connected to the VIDEO OUT jack TALK SETTING Setting various parameters which affect the microphone sound 165 when the TALK button is on UTILITY CONFIGURATION Setting various parameters 166 TIME Setting parameters related to time 167 LANGUAGE Selecting the language of the display messages 45 MIDI Selecting a MIDI template 174 MFC10 EASY SETUP Selecting a template of the MFC10 settings 178 FULL SETUP Creating and storing a template of the MFC10 settings 179 SETUP SYSTEM MIDI system related parameter settings 175 TRANSMIT MIDI transmit channel settings 175 RECEIVE MIDI receive channel settings 176 ROOT MIDI chord root settings 177 CHORD DETECT MIDI chord detect settings 177 STORE Storing MIDI settings as a template 177 9 TRANSPOSE Transposing up or down the pitch 61 10 DIGITAL STUDIO SOUND CREATOR SAMPLING Sampling sounds via a microphone or line source 40 84 RECORDING Recording a new sample 40 86 TRIGGER LEVEL Setting the Trigger level for starting sampling 84 PRE EFFECT Setting up a maximum of three DSP effects to be applied to the 87 source sound STORE Storing the sampled data as Custom voice 41 FILE IMPORT Importing Wave files from disk 87 STORE Storing the sampled data as Custom voice 41 EDIT Editing a recorded imported sample 88 WAVE CLEAR Cl
236. Mmh 0 117 52 12 Robolead 0 124 81 12 Gothic Vox 0 113 53 13 Fargo 0 119 81 13 Huh Choir 0 119 52 14 Portatone 0 112 84 14 Bell Heaven 0 119 88 15 Blaster 0 114 81 Appendix Anhang Annexe 895 Voice List Stimmenliste Liste tles Category voice Name MsB 1588 Category Voice Name MSB LSB pean Change Change 16 Big Lead 0 113 81 36 StyleLvFunk 127 0 124 17 Warp 0 117 81 37 StyLvStd P 127 0 125 18 Adrenaline 0 113 84 38 StyLvFunk P 127 0 126 19 Synchronize 0 112 96 XG 20 Tiny Lead 0 118 80 1 GrandPno 0 0 0 21 Stardust 0 112 98 2 GrndPnoK 0 1 0 22 Aero Lead 0 112 83 3 MelloGrP 0 18 0 23 Mini Lead 0 114 80 4 PianoStr 0 40 0 24 Synth Flute 0 119 80 5 Dream 0 41 0 25 Sub Aqua 0 118 81 6 BritePno 0 0 1 26 Impact 0 113 87 7 BritPnoK 0 1 1 27 Sun Bell 0 113 98 8 E Grand 0 0 2 28 Under Heim 0 112 87 9 ElGrPnoK 0 1 2 29 Rhythmatic 0 113 96 10 Det CP80 0 32 2 30 Hi Bias 0 116 80 11 ElGrPno1 0 40 2 31 Vinylead 0 115 80 12 ElGrPno2 0 41 2 32 Skyline 0 115 84 13 HnkyTonk 0 0 3 33 Clockwork 0 114 96 14 HnkyTnkK 0 1 3 Percussion 15 E Piano1 0 0 4 1 Vibraphone 0 112 11 16 El Pno1K 0 1 4 2 Jazz Vibes 0 113 11 17 MelloEP1 0 18 4 3 Marimba 0 112 12 18 Chor EP1 0 32 4 4 Xylophone 0 112 13 19 0 40 4 5 Steel Drums 0 112 114 20 VX 0 45 4 6 Celesta
237. MuteClav 83 99 7 3 FustBass 83 67 33 9 BritClv1 83 75 7 4 DX SyBa3 35 1 34 10 Revinett 83 67 7 5 PickPluk 83 64 34 11 DX Clv 1 83 70 7 6 ChifBass 83 65 34 12 HARPSIC1 35 0 18 7 Bass 83 Br 34 13 HyperSqr 35 1 89 8 FrtlsBa3 83 65 35 14 Xanu 35 1 113 9 DX SyBa5 35 1 36 15 MM Prety 83 66 88 10 DX SyBa6 35 1 37 16 Gior Pad 83 66 93 11 DX Bass3 83 66 39 17 LUTE 35 0 58 12 After 88 83 67 32 18 HARP 2 35 0 61 13 BASS 4 35 0 63 19 DX Harp1 35 1 94 14 Cutmandu 35 1 35 20 OrchHarp 83 65 46 15 BASS 3 35 0 62 Ill 16 FrtlsBa5 83 67 35 1 2 35 0 8 17 DX SyBa9 83 96 38 2 DXCP 70 35 1 16 18 MM Fall 67 0 88 3 Digi Pno 83 66 0 19 MM SDr 1 35 1 119 4 5th 1 83 66 1 20 DX MtSnr 83 96 118 5 TOY PIAN 35 0 39 VI 6 Glocken1 83 0 9 1 DX Str 8 35 1 75 7 DX Vibe1 35 1 23 2 SolinePf 35 1 83 8 MARIMBA 35 0 21 3 BellStr2 83 97 100 9 DX Xylo2 83 64 13 4 WarmStr1 83 0 49 10 TUB BELL 35 0 25 5 Soft Bow 83 74 50 11 DX Bel 1 83 64 14 6 DX AnSt3 83 65 51 12 DX BigBn 67 0 69 7 Aftrnoon 83 73 51 13 MelwMrmb 83 103 12 8 Str amp Brs 35 1 85 14 Vibetron 83 70 11 9 SyBr 83 69 90 15 Glocken4 83 66 9 10 ORCHESTR 35 0 6 e Appendix Anhang Annexe 789 Plug in Voice List Plug In Stimmenliste Liste des voix plug in Category voice Name MSB amp LSB Prog
238. N LOOP RETURN L L R R TRIM VOL MIC LINE IN XLR PHONE Plug Compatible LEVEL MIC1 MIC2 LINE INPUT VOLUME Indicator Power Consumption 47W 120V 47W 220 240V 621 Weight 20 5Kg 45lbs 3oz Dimensions WxHxD 1269 x 407 5 x 140mm without Music Stand Supplied Accessories Music Stand AC Power Cord AC Plug Adaptor Floppy Disk Owner s Manual Optional Accessories Foot Switch Foot Volume Headphones Mic Keyboard Stand Hard Disk SIMM SCSI Device PC Keyboard CRT Display Gooseneck Lamp 49 15 16 x 16 1 16 x 5 1 2 ck QJ E LIE ck FC5 FC7 HPE 150 160 MZ106s LG 100 2 5inch IDE 4M 8M 16M 32MByte SCSI 2 PC AT Standard NTSC or PAL 4 Pin XLR Connector Supports ISO9660 Level except Multi Session Disk Format Audio CD Format is not supported in applicable areas only Disk Styles Factory Data Backup Disk Plug in Custom Voice Disk Dynamic Microphone IMP 2500 Height 12 5mm max 8GByte max 72pin SIMM 16bit BUS JEDEC Hard Disk CD ROM ZIP MO Jaz lomega 8GByte max per device DC 12V 5W max Specifications and descriptions in this owner s manual are for information purposes only Yamaha Corp reserves the right to change or mod ify products or specifications at any time without prior notice Since specifications equipment or options may not be the same in every locale please check with your Yamaha dealer Die technischen Daten und Beschreibungen in dieser Bedienungsanleitung
239. NTROE zu files as indicated by CITY SOURCE their extension dis Deck BACK NEXT DEVICE FD DIRECTORY POPS DIRECTORY EE played in the FILE FILE 1 5 LE 8Beati STY DESTINATION MODE SINGLENALL 1 column DEVICE FD DIRECTORY ROCK Listen Execute the Copy operation by following the 4 Press NEXT to continue E He _ CONTENTS DEVICE DIRECTORY CONTENTS m d ER 1 5 8Beat2 STY PAGE CONTROL S sBeat3 sty on screen instructions BACK NEXT See page 151 Use these buttons Use these buttons For details about selecting Another FD is indicated at the bottom of the Device column files see page 151 Select Another FD if you wish to copy to another floppy disk Backing Up Restoring the Data in Flash ROM Any data that was pre recorded in Flash ROM will be erased and replaced by the new settings This means that preset setups factory settings will also be erased It is there fore a good idea to save them to disk via the Backup function before recording or creat ing your own original data so that you can keep them indefinitely The explanations here apply to step 3 of the Basic Procedure on page 150 Select the desired menu Select the data type to be backed up FREE 777056 BACK UP RESTORE 0 5 BACK UP PAGE CONTROL USER DATA BACK UP
240. NY DSP 8 145 16 Effect Parameter settings VOICE EFFECT SLOW FAST 145 17 Tune Settings Portamento Time VOICE EFFECT POLY MONO 144 18 Tune Settings Pitch Bend Range PITCH BEND wheel 144 19 Tune Settings Octave UPPER OCTAVE 144 20 Tune Settings Tuning PART ON OFF R1 144 21 Tune Settings Tuning PART ON OFF R2 144 22 Tune Settings Tuning PART ON OFF R3 144 23 Tune Settings Tuning PART ON OFF L 144 24 Tune Settings Transpose TRANSPOSE 144 25 Master EQ settings MIXING CONSOLE 147 26 Master EQ settings MAIN MIXER 147 27 Master EQ settings INTRO I 147 28 Voice selection PART ON OFF 144 29 Voice selection VOICE PIANO PERCUSSION 144 30 Voice selection INTRO II 144 31 Line Out settings INTRO III 148 32 Function Master Tuning SOUND CREATOR 158 33 Scale Tuning MULTI PAD STOP 158 34 Split Point Fingering mode settings AUTO ACCOMPANIMENT 159 35 Split Point Fingering mode settings LEFT HOLD 159 36 Foot Controller Volume settings FOOT VOLUME 159 37 Footswitch 1 function assignment FOOTSWITCH 1 160 38 Footswitch 2 function assignment FOOTSWITCH 2 160 39 Modulation wheel settings MODULATION wheel 161 40 Initial Touch setting VOICE EFFECT TOUCH 162 41 After Touch setting VOICE EFFECT SUSTAIN 162 42 Transpose Assign TRANSPOSE 162 43 Registration settings REGISTRATION MEMORY 1 8 163 44 Registration settings REGIST BANK 163 45 Registration Memory FreezeGroupSetting FREEZE 163
241. OCTAVE button allows RIGHT1 RIGHT2 and RIGHT3 parts to be simultaneously transposed up or down by one octave More detailed octave related settings for each part can be GIT made by using the Mixing Con RESET sole function page 145 Organ Flutes The 9000Pro uses advanced digital modeling technology to recreate the legendary sound of vintage organs Just as on a traditional organ you can create your own sound by increasing and decreasing the levels of the flute footages gt Press the ORGAN FLUTES button CHOIR amp PAD PERCUSSION ep ee SYNTHESIZER pum 2 Use the LCD 1 8 buttons to adjust the footage settings R1 ORGAN FLUTES The footage settings determine the basic sound of the organ flutes The term footage is a reference to the sound generation of traditional pipe organs in which the sound is produced by pipes of different lengths in feet Use button 1 to adjust the 16 or 8 footage You can select the desired footage 16 or 8 with the E LCD button n 3 Store the Organ Flutes settings Refer to page 62 The Organ Flutes settings above are stored to Flash ROM For details about Flash ROM refer to Memory Structure on page 54 Try out the preset Organ Flutes voices The 9000Pro provides 10 pre programmed Organ Flutes voices
242. OFT DELAY variation Insertion1 4 block MSB 98 LSB 3 1 Overdrive 0 100 0 100 No Parameter Display Value See Table Control 2 Device Transister Vintage Tube 0 4 1 Overdrive 0 100 0 100 Dist Dist2 Fuzz 2 Device Transister Vintage Tube 0 4 3 Speaker Flat Stack Combo Twin 0 5 Dist1 Dist2 Fuzz Radio Megaphone 3 Speaker Flat Stack Combo Twin 0 5 4 Presence 0 20 0 20 Radio Megaphone 5 Output Level 0 100 0 100 4 0 20 0 20 6 Delay Time 64th 3 4thx6 0 19 table 14 5 Output Level 0 100 0 100 7 Delay Feedback Level 63 63 1 127 6 Delay Time L 0 1ms 1 4860s 1 14860 8 UR Diffusion 1 63ms 64 0ms 127 63ms 1 127 7 Delay Time R 0 1ms 1 4860s 1 14860 9 Lag 1 63ms 64 0ms 127 63ms 1 127 8 Delay Feedback Time 0 1ms 1 4860s 1 14860 10 Dry Wet Balance D63 gt W D W D lt W63 1 127 9 Delay Feedback Level 63 63 1 127 10 Dry Wet Balance D63 gt W D W D lt W63 1 127 e 11 Delay Mix 0 127 0 127 12 11 Delay Mix 0 127 0 127 13 12 14 13 15 14 16 15 16 NO EFFECT reverb chorus variation block MSB 0 No Parameter Display Value See Table Control DUAL ROTOR 1 2 v Insertion1 4 block MSB 99 1 No Parameter Display Value See Table Control 2 1 Rotor Speed Slow 0 0 2 65Hz 0 63 table 1 3 2 Horn Speed Slow 0 0 2 65Hz 0 63 table 1 4 3 Rotor Speed Fast 2 69 39 7Hz 64 127 table 1 5 4 Horn Speed Fast 2 69 39 7Hz 64 127 table 1 6 5 Slow Fast Time of R 0 127 0 127 7
243. OUT MIDI Events Status byte 1st Data byte 2nd Data byte Transmit Remarks Status Data HEX Parameter Data HEX Parameter RealTime Message FEH Active Sens Transmits every 200msec SYSTEM EXCLUSIVE MFC10 Bulk Dump Transmits after checking the MESSAGE connection with the MFC10 and changing the MFC10 s channel number Other x exouuy Bueuuy xipueddy IO saauuop ap 16003 60140 U9 8 G IN AEW EIEO IGN MIDIHmplementation Chart MIDI Implementierungstalelle YAMAHA Professional Workstation Date 9 SEP 1999 Model 9000Pro MIDI Implementation Chart Version 1 0 Transmitted Recognized Remarks Function Basic Channel Default essages Altered ck ck ck ck ck KKK 0 127 4 ue voice KKKKKKKKKKKKKK 0 5 a 9nH v 1 127 o 9nH v 1 127 E 9nH v 0 05 32 Select fp 6 38 64 67 Control 71 74 T2813 Change 84 93 94 96 91 98 99 100 101 Data Entry Sound Controller Sound Controller Portamento Cntrl Effect Depth Data Inc Dec NRPN LSB 5 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Oo SN Ox X OOoOooo CO00000000 0 0 127 System Real Tin 11 Sound OFF Reset All Cntrls Local ON OFF All Notes OFF Mes Active Sense sages Reset
244. Orangethorpe Ave Buena Park CA90620 The above statements apply ONLY to those products distributed by Yamaha Corporation of America or its subsidiaries This applies only to products distributed by YAMAHA CORPORATION OF AMERICA class B The serial number of this product may be found on the rear of the unit You should note this serial number in the space provided below and retain this manual as a permanent record of your purchase to aid identification in the event of theft Model No Serial No rear IMPORTANT NOTICE FOR THE UNITED KINGDOM Connecting the Plug and Cord WARNING THIS APPARATUS MUST BE EARTHED IMPORTANT The wires in this mains lead are coloured in accor dance with the following code GREEN AND YELLOW EARTH BLUE NEUTRAL BROWN LIVE As the colours of the wires in the mains lead of this apparatus may not correspond with the coloured markings identifying the terminals in your plug proceed as follows The wire which is coloured GREEN and YELLOW must be con nected to the terminal in the plug which is marked by the letter E or by the safety earth symbol or colored GREEN or GREEN and YEL LOW The wire which is coloured BLUE must be connected to the terminal which is marked with the letter N or coloured BLACK The wire which is coloured BROWN must be connected to the ter minal which is marked with the letter L or coloured RED 3 wires This applies only to products dist
245. PARAMETER LIST depends on chorus Type 2A 1 00 7F CHORUS PARAMETER 9 Refer the MIDI EFFECT PARAMETER LIST depends on chorus 2B 1 00 7F CHORUS PARAMETER 10 Refer the MIDI EFFECT PARAMETER LIST depends on chorus Type 2 1 00 7F CHORUS RETURN oof B 00B 6dB 0 64 127 40 2D 1 01 7F CHORUS PAN L63 C R63 1 64 127 40 2E 1 00 7F SEND CHORUS TO REVERB oof B 00B 6dB 0 64 127 00 TOTAL SIZE OF 2 1 30 1 00 7F CHORUS PARAMETER 11 Refer the MIDI EFFECT PARAMETER LIST depends on chorus Type 31 1 00 7F CHORUS PARAMETER 12 Refer the MIDI EFFECT PARAMETER LIST depends on chorus Type 32 1 00 7F CHORUS PARAMETER 13 Refer the MIDI EFFECT PARAMETER LIST depends on chorus 33 1 00 7F CHORUS PARAMETER 14 Refer the MIDI EFFECT PARAMETER LIST depends on chorus 34 1 00 7F CHORUS PARAMETER 15 Refer the MIDI EFFECT PARAMETER LIST depends on chorus Type 35 1 00 7F CHORUS PARAMETER 16 Refer the MIDI EFFECT PARAMETER LIST depends on chorus Type TOTAL SIZE 6 Appendix Anhang Annexe MIDI Data Format MIDI Datenformat Format de donn es MIDI lt Table 3 4 gt DI PARAMETER CHANGE TABLE MASTER EQ 2 1 40 2 00 7 VARIA
246. Pd Pf 80 97 0 5 Trump 80 92 4 7 SitaryPf 80 99 0 6 DonnyWrl 80 93 4 8 StGndPSt 80 100 0 7 WurliAmp 80 94 4 9 StRichSt 80 102 0 8 Dg 80 95 4 10 StTghtSt 80 104 0 IX E Piano 5 IV Piano 4 1 FullTine 80 0 5 1 BrghtPno 80 0 1 2 DX EP2 80 64 5 2 Digital 80 64 1 3 DX 1990 80 66 5 3 ChorDigi 80 65 1 4 Milw DX 80 67 5 4 DigiGrnd 80 67 1 5 ChrsTine 80 68 5 5 Grnd wDX 80 68 1 6 Chrs EP2 80 69 5 6 ChoDigiP 80 69 1 7 Chrs1980 80 70 5 7 GlassPno 80 70 1 8 Chrs1990 80 71 5 8 DigiTine 80 71 1 9 DarkDXEP 80 72 5 9 SawDigi1 80 72 1 10 FTBallad 80 73 5 10 SawDigi2 80 73 1 X E Piano 6 V E Piano 1 1 Sym EP2 80 74 5 1 80 0 2 2 Chrs1982 80 75 5 2 CP Symph 80 64 2 3 90Ballad 80 76 5 3 Trem CP 80 65 2 4 816 80 77 5 4 BrightCP 80 66 2 5 DXEP Pad 80 78 5 5 Digi CP1 80 67 2 6 DXSynStr 80 79 5 6 Jino 80 68 2 7 DXEP Cho 80 80 5 7 Digi CP2 80 69 2 8 Balmy DX 80 81 5 8 Petit CP 80 70 2 9 GlassyEP 80 82 5 9 Hnkytnk2 80 64 3 10 Chrs FMP 80 84 5 208 Appendix Anhang Annexe 289 583 Plug in Voice List Plug In Stimmenliste Liste des voix plug in Category Voice Name MSB LSB Program Change XI Harpsi amp Clavi 1 Harpsi 1 80 0 6 2 Harpsi 2 80 64 6 3 RichHpsi 80 67 6 4 Clav 1 80 0 7 5 Clav 2 80 64 7 6 MuteClav 80 65 7 7 Phs Clav 80 66 7 8 PhsClav2 80 67 7 9 Wah Clav 80 68 7 10 DigiClav 80 69 7 11 Ch DgClv 80 70 7 12 PhsDgClv 80 71 7 Appendix Anhang Annexe Pl
247. Plug in Board is installed See page 64 for details e Reference Using the optional Plug in Board s ET wc The Transpose Tune Sustain Left Hold and Modulation functions do not affect the Drum Kit or SFX Kit voices D 95 57 Voices Maximum Polyphony The 9000Pro features maximum polyphony of 126 notes Since Auto Accompaniment uses a number of the available notes the full 126 notes will not be available on the key board when Auto Accompaniment is used The same applies to the Voice R2 Voice R3 Voice L Multi Pad and Song functions When the maximum polyphony is exceeded notes are played using last note priority If a Plug in Board has been installed the polyphony of the installed board accordingly increases the available polyphony for the entire 9000Pro 9000 Pro Plug in Board Plug in Board e g PLG150 PF e g PLG100 XG 126 note maximum 64 note maximum 32 note maximum polyphony polyphony polyphony PITCH BEND Wheel amp MODULATION Wheel Use the 9000Pro PITCH BEND wheel to bend notes up roll the wheel away from you or down roll the wheel toward you while playing the keyboard The PITCH BEND wheel is self centering and will automatically return to normal pitch when released enc NOTE The maximum pitch bend range can be changed page 145 The Modulation function applies a vibrato effect to notes played on the keyboard Moving the MODULATION wheel all
248. ROLLER NUMBER x x x x D 10 nn 5A 1 AC1 PITCH CONTROL 40 58 1 AC1 FILTER CONTROL x 40 nn 5C 1 AC1 AMPLITUDE CONTROL X X 40 nn 5D 1 AC1 LFO PMOD DEPTH X X X X X x x 0 nn 5E 1 AC1 LFO FMOD DEPTH X X X X X x x 0 nn 1 1 LFO AMOD DEPTH x x x x x x x 0 nn 60 1 2 CONTROLLER NUMBER x x x x x x 11 nn 61 1 AC2 PITCH CONTROL X X 40 nn 62 1 AC2 FILTER CONTROL X X X X X xXx x 40 nn 63 1 AC2 AMPLITUDE CONTROL x x x x x 40 nn 64 1 AC2 LFO PMOD DEPTH x x 0 65 1 AC2 LFO FMOD DEPTH D x x x x x x 0 nn 66 1 AC2 LFO AMOD DEPTH x x 0 67 1 PORTAMENTO SWITCH x OFF ON 0 nn 68 1 PORTAMENTO TIME X 0 127 0 nn 69 1 PITCH EG INITIAL LEVEL x x x x x x x 40 nn 6A 1 PITCH EG ATTACK TIME x x x x x x x 40 nn 6B 1 PITCH EG RELEASE LEVEL x x x x x x x 40 nn 6C 1 PITCH EG RELEASE TIME x x x x x x x 40 nn 6D 1 VELOCITY LIMIT LOW x x x x x x 1 nn 6E 1 VELOCITY LIMIT HIGH D x x x x x x 7F TOTAL SIZE 3F lt Table 3 8 2 gt Address Size Data Parameter Recognized Description Default H H H value H 512 5 5 x 08 nn 70 1 NOT USED x x 71 1 NOT USED 40 72 1 00 EQ BASS 64 63 12 12 dB 40
249. SMF SONG Converting the sequence track name of the Meta Event in the SMF to the file 155 name EDIT FILE RENAME Naming a file in a disk 155 DELETE Deleting a file in a disk 155 EDIT DIRECTORY RENAME DIRECTORY Naming a directory in a disk 156 DELETE DIRECTORY Deleting a directory in a disk 156 CREATE DIRECTORY Creating a directory in a disk 156 FORMAT Formatting a disk 156 CHECK DISK Checking a disk 157 e Basic Operation 8v 49 Function Tree Button Controller LCD title Function See pages 8 MENU FUNCTION MASTER TUNE SCALE TUNE MASTER TUNE Setting the overall pitch of the 9000Pro 158 SCALE TUNE Tuning each individual note of the octave 158 SPLIT POINT FINGERING SPLIT POINT Setting the point on the keyboard that separates the left hand 159 right hand section FINGERING Selecting the way in which chords are played with your left hand 159 CONTROLLER FOOT CONTROLLER Selecting the foot controller page 13 function 159 PANEL CONTROLLER Selecting the panel controller e g Pitch Bend Wheel function 161 REGISTRATION FREEZE VOICE SET REGISTRATION Naming each Registration setup bank 163 FREEZE Specifying which settings are affected by the Freeze function page 163 28 VOICE SET Determining whether the preset settings will or will not be recalled 163 when a new voice is selected HAR
250. STORE Storing Plug in Custom voice data 101 NATIVE SYSTEM PARAMETER EDIT Editing various system parameters which are native to the installed 105 Plug in Board VOICE EDIT ON COMPUTER Editing various parameters on a computer connected to the 106 9000Pro Voice editing is done with special Plug in software from the XGworks or XGworks lite program BOARD CUSTOM VOICE BACKUP Backing up the edited Board Custom Voice data from the installed 108 Board to Flash ROM DIGITAL RECORDING SONG CREATOR QUICK RECORD Recording a song quickly without having to make detailed settings 36 CHORD STEP Recording accompaniment data with the Step Recording method 122 similar to writing out the chords in a chord chart MULTI TRACK RECORD Recording sixteen song tracks independently 38 TRACK Setting the Record method 38 RECORD Starting stopping recording 39 EDIT Editing a recorded song e g Quantize Note Shift 114 SETUP Editing Setup data e g Mixing Console parameters 115 SAVE DELETE Saving the recorded song to a disk Deleting a song in a disk 39 STEP REC Recording a song with the Step Recording method similar to writing 116 out the notes in music notation STYLE CREATOR EASY EDIT Re creating a style 129 STYLE ASSEMBLY Re creating a specific track of an already created style 129 REVOICE Changing various parameters 130 GROOVE amp DYNAMICS Altering the timing for each section velocity of notes for each track 131 FULL EDIT Creati
251. T Pressing the footswitch subtly reduces the volume and slightly changes the timbre of notes played The SOFT effect only applies to certain voices PIANO for example GLIDE When the pedal is pressed the pitch drops a semitone and then glides smoothly back to normal pitch when the pedal is released PORTAMENTO The portamento effect a smooth slide between notes can be produced while the pedal is pressed Porta mento is produced when notes are played legato style i e a note is played while the preceding note is still held The portamento time can be set via the Mixing Console display page 145 DSP SLOW FAST Same as the DSP SLOW FAST button HARMONY ECHO Harmony occurs only while pedal is pressed VOCAL HARMONY Same as the V H 9 button REGIST Recall next highest increment registration 1 1 is selected after 64 8 REGIST Recall next lowest decrement registration 64 8 is selected after 1 1 START STOP Same as the START STOP button TAP TEMPO Same as the TAP TEMPO button SYNCHRO STOP Same as the SYNC STOP button INTRO 1 Same as the INTRO button INTRO 2 Same as the INTRO II button INTRO 3 Same as the INTRO III button MAIN A Same as the MAIN VARIATION A button MAIN B Same as the MAIN VARIATION button MAIN C Same as the MAIN VARIATION C button MAIN D Same the M
252. TE MUTE corresponding parts The data is actually C PRHY2 Bass 1 2 deleted when this button is released 1 Set one of Rhythm parts to REC 2 Press the START STOP button to start recording The selected section of the current style will begin playing only the metro KR nome will sound if the rhythm parts have been cleared The style will loop a 3 Press the START STOP button again to stop recording play continuously to allow convenient recording and overdubbing Since the rhythm pattern plays back repeatedly you can record by overdub bing listening to the pattern and playing the desired keys Look at the icons printed under the keys indicating the percussion sounds that are assigned to each key Reference D I Style Recording Bass Chord Tracks Pad Phrase Recording of the bass phrase pad and chord tracks is unlike recording of the rhythm drum parts in that you have to clear the track data of the original style before record ing 7 STYLE CREATOR FULL EDIT MEASURE 1 SECTION HAIN A PATTERN LENGTH 4 2 TEMPO 148 BEAT 4 4 COPY 1 When this button is pressed DELETE will appear for parts which contain data PART RECORD DELETE DELETE DELETE DELETE E 2 ERU Set the desired part to DELETE while MUTE MUTE MUTE holding this button to delete all data in the c
253. TION TYPE MSB Refer the MIDI EFFECT 05 DELAY L C R 00 7F VARIATION TYPE LSB 00 basic type 00 42 2 00 7F VARIATION PARAMETER 1 MSB Refer to the MIDI EFFECT PARAMETER LIST depends on variation type 00 7 VARIATION PARAMETER 1 LSB Refer to the MIDI EFFECT PARAMETER LIST depends on variation type 44 2 00 7 VARIATION PARAMETER 2 MSB Refer the MIDI EFFECT PARAMETER LIST depends on variation type 00 7 VARIATION PARAMETER 2 LSB Refer to the MIDI EFFECT PARAMETER LIST depends on variation type 46 2 00 7 VARIATION PARAMETER 3 MSB Refer to the MIDI EFFECT PARAMETER LIST depends on variation type 00 7F VARIATION PARAMETER 3 LSB Refer to the MIDI EFFECT PARAMETER LIST depends on variation type 48 2 00 7F VARIATION PARAMETER 4 MSB Refer to the MIDI EFFECT PARAMETER LIST depends on variation type 00 7 VARIATION PARAMETER 4 LSB Refer to the MIDI EFFECT PARAMETER LIST depends on variation type 4A 2 00 7 VARIATION PARAMETER 5 MSB Refer the MIDI EFFECT PARAMETER LIST depends on variation type 00 7F VARIATION PARAMETER 5 LSB Refer to the MIDI EFFECT PARAMETER LIST depends on variation type 4 2 00 7 VARIATION PARAMETER 6 MSB Refer to the MIDI EFFECT PARAMETER LIST depends on variation type 00 7F VARIATION PARAMETER 6 LSB Refer to the MIDI EFFECT PARAMETER LIST depends on variation type 4E 2 00 7F VARIATION PARAMETER 7 MSB Refer to the MIDI EFFECT PARAMETER LIST depe
254. Tenor 81 119 66 8 Ali Baba 33 0 111 2 Air Sax 33 1 9 9 Noboe 33 1 91 3 Glass Alto 33 1 75 10 Persinet 33 0 112 4 Voxo Saxo 81 113 67 VII Guitar 5 Bari Sax 81 112 67 1 VL Span Gtr 33 0 71 6 Mizu Horn 33 1 113 2 VL JGuitar 33 0 78 7 Funny Sax 33 0 114 3 GuitarChuck 33 0 80 8 SopranoPipe 81 114 64 4 Smooth Gtr 33 0 76 9 Floboe 33 1 1 5 Jazz Guitar 33 0 72 10 SylophonX 33 1 115 6 FunkyGuitar 33 0 77 IV Pipe 1 7 Guitar Hero 33 0 3 1 Jazz Flute 33 1 48 8 ChaosGuitar 33 0 11 2 Pan Pipe 33 1 55 9 Synpick 33 0 96 3 BambooFlute 33 1 57 10 VL Slapper 33 0 9 4 Shakuha 33 0 126 VIII Ethnnic amp Str 5 Pico Pipe 33 0 113 1 Stone Henge 33 0 4 6 Snake Flute 33 1 12 2 Sitar 33 0 58 7 Duality 33 0 116 3 Rock Harp 33 1 121 8 Flauto 33 1 46 4 Akko Harp 33 1 59 e Appendix Anhang Annexe 8 6 579 Plug in Voice List Plug In Stimmenliste Liste des voix plug in Category Voice Name MSB LSB Pronrem Change 5 Plucked 33 0 74 6 VL Shaku 33 1 54 7 ElectrumX 33 0 120 8 Violon 33 1 37 9 Yam Gam 33 0 60 10 Edgeophon 33 0 121 11 Akkophon 33 1 59 12 Squeeze 33 1 117 13 Parlophon 33 0 88 14 Softblow 33 0 118 15 NuViolin 33 1 32 IX Synthesizer 1 Chamlion 33 51 2 Choronic 33 90 3 Fat Mini 33 87 4 Wynth 33 14 5 SynTouch 33 89 6 Talk Box 33 84 7 Brassyn 33 105 8 Maysbe 33 112 9 Resogrowl 33 94 Ojolojoj ojojoloj o
255. Tom Rock 1 Tom Electro 1 42 F FR 2 1 Hi Hat Closed Hi Hat Closed 2 43 G G 2 Floor Tom H Hybrid Tom 2 Tom Room 2 Tom Rock 2 Tom Electro 2 44 Gt G 2 1 Hi Hat Pedal Hi Hat Pedal 2 45 A A 2 Low Tom Hybrid Tom 3 Tom Room 3 Tom Rock 3 Tom Electro 3 46 2 1 Hi Hat Open Hi Hat Open 2 47 B B 2 Mid Tom L Hybrid Tom 4 Tom Room 4 Tom Rock 4 Tom Electro 4 48 2 3 Mid Tom H Hybrid Tom 5 Tom Room 5 Tom Rock 5 Tom Electro 5 49 CH 2 Ct 3 Crash Cymbal 1 50 D 210 3 High Tom Hybrid Tom 6 Tom Room 6 Tom Rock 6 Tom Electro 6 51 2108 3 Ride Cymbal 1 52 2 3 Chinese Cymbal 53 F 2 3 Ride Cymbal Cup 54 FR 2 FR 3 Tambourine Tambourine Light 55 G 2 G 3 Splash Cymbal 56 GH 2 Gt 3 Cowbell 57 2 A 3 Crash Cymbal 2 58 2 3 Vibraslap 59 B 218 3 Ride Cymbal 2 60 1 4 61 CH 3 Ct 4 Bongo L 62 D 4 Conga H Mute 63 D 3 D 4 Conga H Open 64 3 4 65 3 4 66 3 FR 4 67 G 4 68 Gt 3 Gt 4 69 A 3 A 4 70 3 At 4 71 B 3 B 4 Samba Whistle H 72 C 4 C 5 Samba Whistle L 73 CH 4 C 5 Guiro Short 74 D 410 5 Guiro Long 75 D 4 D 5 76 E 4 E 5 77 F 4 F 5 78 FR 4 FR 5 Cuica Mute Scratch H 2 79 G 4 G 5 Cuica Open Scratch L 2 80 GH 4 GH 5 2 81 A 4 5 2 82 At 4 A 5 83 B 4 B 5 84 C 5 6 Bell Tree 85 CR 5 6 86 D 5 6 87 D 5 0 6 88 5 6 89 F 5 6 90 FH 5 F 6 91 G 5 8 6 1 Key Keys marked
256. UG IN VOICE mm xS Board Preset Voice Plug in Custom Voice i gt ROM a Board C Voi Board Custom Voice oar ustom Voice 1 RAM kkkk Native System __ FEK e Parameter RAM Plug in Custom connected to the Voice Load 9000Pro running age 66 XGworks or XGworks pag lite and the appropriate Plug in software for voice editing Bulk Send System Parameter Load page 66 Plug in Custom Voice Creator page 100 Save page 68 NRI Board Custom Calling up the Board voices directly from the Plug in Board Voice Load page 66 Selecting a Plug in Voice calls up the corresponding parameters such as effect settings etc from 9000Pro Flash ROM and the corresponding Board Voice from the Plug in Board Auto Loaded when turning the power ON Auto Load can be All of the parameter settings for one board servis setting page 69 can be saved to a single file which can Board Custom Voice Backup then be loaded to the 9000Pro in the Plug in Custom Voice Creator function page 108 Reference 29 63 Plug in Voices Board Custom Voices As mentioned above the Board voices are the internal voices of the Plug in Board and provide t
257. VARIATION PARAMETER 11 Refer to the MIDI EFFECT PARAMETER LIST depends on variation type 71 1 00 7F VARIATION PARAMETER 12 Refer to the MIDI EFFECT PARAMETER LIST depends on variation type 72 1 00 7 VARIATION PARAMETER 13 Refer the MIDI EFFECT PARAMETER LIST depends variation type 73 1 00 7F VARIATION PARAMETER 14 Refer to the MIDI EFFECT PARAMETER LIST depends on variation type 74 1 00 7F VARIATION PARAMETER 15 Refer to the MIDI EFFECT PARAMETER LIST depends on variation type 75 1 00 7F VARIATION PARAMETER 16 Refer the MIDI EFFECT PARAMETER LIST depends on variation type TOTAL SIZE 6 type Address Size Data Parameter Recognized Description Default H H H value H 2 40 0 1 00 04 EQ type O FLAT 0 1 22 2 3 ROCK 4 CLASSIC 1 1 34 4C EQ 12 12 dB 40 2 1 04 28 EQ frequency1 32 2000 Hz 0C 3 1 01 78 0 1 12 0 7 4 1 00 01 EQ shape1 00 shelving 01 peaking 0 5 1 34 4C EQ gain2 12 12 dB 40 6 1 36 EQ frequency2 100 10 0 kHz 1C 7 1 01 78 EQ 02 0 1 12 0 7 8 1 not used x 9 1 34 4C EQ gain3 12 12 dB 40 0A 1 36 EQ frequency3 100 10 0 kHz 22 0B 1 01 78 EQ Q3 0 1 12 0 7 DC 1 not used x DD 1 34 4C EQ gain4 12 12 dB 40
258. Vocal Harmony Additional Parameter Control No 00010000 10 Vocoder Part Parameter No 05885855 ss Harmony Part 00H Off 01H Upper 02H Lower Vocal Harmony 43H 73H 01H 11H 00H 50H 11H ss F7H x Additional Reverb Depth 00000000 00 Channel No always 00 01010000 50 Vocal Harmony Additional Parameter Control No 00010001 11 Voval Harmony Additional Reverb Depth Parameter No Osssssss 55 Value 0 7FH Vocal Harmony 43H 73H 01H 11H 00H 50H 12H ss F7H x Additional Chorus Depth 00000000 00 Channel No always 00 01010000 50 Vocal Harmony Additional Parameter Control No 00010010 12 Voval Harmony Additional Chorus Depth Parameter No Osssssss ss Value 0 7FH Vocal Harmony FOH 43H 73H 01H 11H 00H 50H 13H ss F7H x Panel Variation LED On Off 00000000 00 Channel No always 00 01010000 50 Vocal Harmony Additional Parameter Control No 00010011 13 Voval Harmony Panel Variation LED On Off Parameter No Osssssss ss Switch On Off 00H Variation LED Off Variotion LED On System Exclusive Messages the other MIDI Event Data Format Recognized MIDI Master Tuning 43H 1nH 27H 00H 00H mm 11 cc F7H 11110000 FO Exclusive status 01000011 43 0001nnnn 1n n always O when transmit n 0 F when receive 00100111 27 00110000 30 subID 00000000 00 00000000 00 Ommmmmmm mm Master Tune MSB 01111111 ll Master Tune LSB 0 cc ignored 11110111 F7 End of Exclusive MW
259. Voice x Left Chorus Depth o Effects x Right 2 Part On Off x Voice x Left Poly Mono ON OFF Voice Right 2 Voice D Voice x Left Portamento Poly Mono x x D Acmp x Right 2 Release Time Bn 48h x x x Voice x x Left Tuning x Right 2 Voice Octave Voice Voice D Left Pitch Bend Range x Acmp x Right 2 Part Volume x Voice x Left Portamento Time Voice x Right 2 Part Panpot x Voice D Left Harmonic Content Voice Right 2 Reverb Depth o o Effects Voice x Left Brightness o o Voice Acmp x Right 2 Chorus Depth o o o Effects Voice x Left EQ Low EQ Acmp x Right 2 Poly Mono ON OFF o o Voice Voice x Left EQ High x x EQ Acmp D Right 2 Portamento Poly Mono x Voice x Left Hold x Acmp x Right 2 Tuning Voice x Organ Flutes Right 2 Pitch Bend Range oO X Voice x R1 OrganFlute Panel Organ No o Right 2 Portamento Time o Voice Voice x R2 OrganFlute Panel Organ No Voice x Right 2 Harmonic Content o o Voice Voice x OrganFlute Panel Organ No Voice x Right 2 B
260. Wave files in standard WAV or AIFF format produced using other equipment can also be used by the 9000Pro Setting up Use the same operation as in Vocal Harmony on pages 32 and 80 The notes and cautions contained on page 80 in Vocal Harmony also apply to Sam pling Guidelines for Sampling What is sampling Technically sampling is making a digital recording of a sound The sound could be your voice or an acoustic instrument taken from a microphone or a recorded sound from a CD or cassette player Once it is recorded the resulting sample can be played at various pitches from a keyboard Sampling Disk AIFF 8 a Sa oo SCSI device connected mo to the 9000Pro N OP save Internal Memory RAM Can be expanded by installing optional SIMM Wave data memory modules page 185 Save the Custom Voice with the sample wave data via the Disk Save Wave Edit function page 153 SS Waveform Edit Ne 3 See next page Store as a Custom Voice to Flash ROM page 92 E note The 9000Pro records at a sam ple rate of 44 1 kHz Play Although the wave memory of ECEMCOE EUE Ez zx the 9000Pro can be expanded to 65 megabytes page 185 the maximum size of a single sample recording is 32 mega bytes V J Auto Trigger Level Actually the
261. a bass or low notes from a piccolo from being produced and have them shifted to an octave within the note range Example When low limit is C3 and high limit is D4 Root change CM C M Notes played E3 G3 C4 F3 G 3 C 4 F3 A3 C4 High Limit Low Limit RTR This sets how notes held through chord changes will be handled Six settings are available SOP aati The note is stopped and resumes sounding from the next note data Pitch Shift The pitch of the note will bend without attack to match the type of the new chord e Pitch Shift Root The pitch of the note will bend without attack to match the root of the new chord The note is retriggered with attack at a new pitch matching the new chord type e Retrigger Root The note is retriggered with attack at a new pitch matching the new chord root Reference 135 Style Creator Custom Style Recording via an External Sequence Recorder You can create custom styles for the 9000Pro using an external sequencer or personal computer with sequencing software instead of using the 9000Pro s STYLE CRE ATOR function Connections Connect the 9000Pro MIDI OUT to the sequencer MIDI IN and the sequencer MIDI OUT to the 9000Pro MIDI IN Creating the Data Record all sections and parts using a CM7 C major sev enth chord Record the parts on t
262. age includes a specific note number which corresponds to the key which is pressed plus a veloc ity value based on how hard the key is played e Control Controller settings such as volume pan edited via the Mix ing Console etc e Program Change Voice selecting e Pitch Bend Bends the pitch of notes up or down e Channel Aftertouch Applies aftertouch to all notes Polyphonic Aftertouch Applies aftertouch to a single note When this is set to on highlighted you can play only the current recorded track 5 wort To actually enter an edited value move the cursor away from the value or press the START STOP button to start playback Select the track to be edited Reso 384 ppq 2 074 1 Press this to add a new event to the x03 Event List oe Press this to actually delete the event at the current cursor position N If the value at the cursor has been changed pressing this restores the original value DATA BATRY Jav Adjust the event value finely Adjust the event value coarsely Moves the cursor leftward rightward Keep in mind that moving the cursor away from the just edited value automatically enters that value This shows the current position at which you edit the event Clock 384 clocks per 1 4 note Beat 1 4 for 4 4 time Measure number Moves
263. ail on page 106 are optional Use these operations if you wish to edit the Board Custom Voices and the Native System Parameters on which the Plug in Custom Voices are based 6 select a menu for editing the voice parameters via the panel operations 3 Select a menu for edit ing the Board Custom Voices on a computer if necessary PLUG IN CUSTOM VOICE CREATOR VOICE EDIT ON COMPUTER BOARD CUSTOM VOICE BACK UP M 1 NATIVE SvSTEH PARAMETER EDIT ORIGINAL VOICE Sloti Flash 1 Trumpet Select the desired Plug in Voice using the VOICE buttons 4 Edit the voice parame ters on a computer After completing edit ing use the Bulk Send operation to transfer the edited data from the computer to the board Select an original voice The Custom Voice Creating mode makes it possible to create new voices by editing some parameters of the Plug in Custom Voices After selecting a voice press the EXIT button to return back to this display 5 Execute the Board Cus tom Voice Backup oper ation 7 Edit the voice parameters via the panel operations 8 Store the edited voice to Flash ROM Editing operations corresponding to step 4 or 7 are covered in the following expla nations pw See page 172 for details about connecting puter Please note that the MIDI A terminal or the TO HOST terminal should
264. ains in any section the alert message will appear A new time signature can be selected after clearing all sections of the current selected style Tempo Set the default tempo for the new style e Part Copy Instead of starting with all the sections and or parts from the selected original style you can copy specific parts from other sections parts of the same style or from other styles as required Also in some cases it may not be possible to copy from other parts In such a case the EXECUTE LCD button will appear in gray and will not be available Style Recording Rhythm Tracks You can also delete certain percussion sounds while recording Only DRUM KIT SFX KIT and While holding this button press the key on BRUM KIT custom voices can the keyboard corresponding to the instru SECTION HAIN PATTERN LENGTH d ment you want to cancel seiected 10r the AES part 2 TEMPO 148 BEAT 4 4 All voices except the ORGAN 3 PRRT COPY FLUTE voice can be selected for the RHY1 part E When ts button pressed DELETE wil yav can ao start recordhg ty PART RECORD em h p DELETE hil pressing SYNC START button DELETE DELETE DELETE zong DELETE zo Son et the desired part to while and playina a kev on the key nrc holding this button to delete all data in the bos yinga ey y PLAY GR Ge 3 2 PLAY 1 HOTE MUTE HUTE HU
265. al dard MIDI format 0 that ER includes lyrics you can view i the lyrics in the display during playback See page 79 for details For appropriate song data the gt 9000Pro can display the lyrics 6 Turn individual tracks ON or OFF muted as required 1 Press the PART ON OFF button French Spanish and Italian 2 Press the LCD button corresponding to the part you wish to turn on or off 88888888 i 88888888 09001000 10001000 The SOLO mode lets you select a specific part for playback muting turn ing off all other parts If you wish to practice the melody part of the XG song on the 9000Pro key board set TR1 to MUTE 7 Adjust the volume as required 1 Press the MAIN MIXER button 2 Press the LCD button corresponding to the part of which the volume you wish to adjust MIXER ET wr The FADE IN OUT button page 72 can be used to pro duce smooth fade ins and START S fade outs when starting and stopping the song as well as the accompaniment Reference on page 80 VOCAL HARMONY buttons CAUTION Pickup of extraneous sounds from the microphone can cause distorted Vocal Harmony sound Separate the microphone from the Speakers as much as possible This extraordinarily powerful feature uses advanced voice processing technolo
266. ally gt e 4 Use the same operations as in Using Auto Accompani ment 5 press any of the INTRO buttons Gm PD INTRO TAP TEMPO 6 As soon as you play a chord with your left hand the auto accompaniment starts For this example play a C major chord as shown below Split Point A mam Auto Accompaniment section When the playback of the intro is finished it automatically leads into main sec tion 7 Press any of the accompaniment section buttons as desired 5 5 5 See the Accompaniment Structure Diagram on the next e 5 page N gt Press any of the ENDING buttons mm This switches to the ending section When the ending is finished the auto accompaniment automatically stops ENDING rit COD A lt gt Quick Guide Accompaniment Structure Diagram INTRO MAIN VARIATION via FILL INA via FILL INB Press the one of the ENDING buttons ENDING You can have the ending gradually slow down ritardando by pressing the same ENDING bution again while the ending is playing back You use one of the intro sections even in the middle of the song by pressing one of the INTRO buttons during the song If one of the FILL IN amp BREAK
267. and Tel 09 618511 NORWAY Norsk filial av Yamaha Scandinavia AB Grini Nzringspark 1 N 1345 ster s Norway Tel 67 16 77 70 ICELAND Skifan HF Skeifan 17 P O Box 8120 IS 128 Reykjavik Iceland Tel 525 5000 OTHER EUROPEAN COUNTRIES Yamaha Europa GmbH Siemensstrafe 22 34 25462 Rellingen of Germany Tel 04101 3030 AFRICA Yamaha Corporation International Marketing Division Nakazawa cho 10 1 Hamamatsu Japan 430 8650 Tel 053 460 2312 MIDDLE EAST TURKEY CYPRUS Yamaha Europa GmbH Siemensstrafe 22 34 25462 Rellingen ER of Germany Tel 04101 3030 OTHER COUNTRIES Yamaha Music Gulf FZE LB21 128 Jebel Ali Freezone P O Box 17328 Dubai U A E Tel 971 4 81 5868 ASIA HONG KONG Tom Lee Music Co Ltd 11 F Silvercord Tower 1 30 Canton Road Tsimshatsui Kowloon Hong Kong Tel 2737 7688 INDONESIA PT Yamaha Music Indonesia Distributor PT Nusantik Gedung Yamaha Music Center Jalan Jend Gatot Subroto Kav 4 Jakarta 12930 Indonesia Tel 21 520 2577 KOREA Cosmos Corporation 1461 9 Seocho Dong Seocho Gu Seoul Korea Tel 02 3486 0011 MALAYSIA Yamaha Music Malaysia Sdn Bhd Lot 8 Jalan Perbandaran 47301 Kelana Jaya Petaling Jaya Selangor Malaysia Tel 3 703 0900 PHILIPPINES Yupangco Music Corporation 339 Gil J Puyat Avenue P O Box 885 MCPO Makati Metro Manila Philippines Tel 819 7551 SINGAPORE Yamaha Music Asia Pte L
268. and playing back Doing so can damage the disk and possibly the disk drive Be sure to remove the floppy disk from the disk drive before turning off the power A floppy disk left in the drive for extended periods can easily pick up dust and dirt that can cause data read and write errors Cleaning the Disk Drive Read Write Head Clean the read write head regularly This instrument employs a precision magnetic read write head which after an extended period of use will pick up a layer of magnetic parti cles from the disks used that will eventually cause read and write errors To maintain the disk drive in optimum working order Yamaha recommends that you use a commercially available dry type head cleaning disk to clean the head about once a month Ask your Yamaha dealer about the availability of proper head cleaning disks Never insert anything but floppy disks into the disk drive Other objects may cause damage to the disk drive or floppy disks About the Floppy Disks To handle floppy disks with care Do not place heavy objects on a disk or bend or apply pressure to the disk in any way Always keep floppy disks in their protec tive cases when they are not in use Do not expose the disk to direct sunlight extremely high or low temperatures or excessive humidity dust or liquids Do not open the sliding shutter and touch the exposed surface of the floppy disk inside Do not expose the disk to magnetic field
269. ands EQ High Reference m m Quick Guide Plug in Voices on page 42 By installing an optional Plug in Board to the 9000Pro you can gain instant access to a whole new assort ment of amazing voices Instructions on selecting and playing the Plug in Voices are given in the Quick Guide on page 42 In the following section you ll learn more about how the Plug in Voices are used and managed and how they fit into the 9000Pro s system Guidelines Memory Structure of the Plug in Voices You learned about the Plug in Voices and Board Voices in the Quick Guide on page 43 In the illustration below we ll go into greater detail about how they are used This shows various aspects of the Plug in Manager function which is used to manage save load Plug in Voice data on disk The relationship between the devices Disk Flash ROM and Plug in Board may seem a little complex however the basic prin ciples are easy to grasp One important thing you should remember is that you can work with and manage the voice data from the 9000Pro itself or from a connected computer From the 9000Pro you can edit and manage the voice data in Flash ROM cre ated via the Plug in Custom Voice Creator page 100 From a computer you can create and edit voice data directly on the Board Also keep in mind that any data in RAM memory is not saved until you specifically save it to disk Go KEE Plug in Custom Voice Creator page 100 9000Pro PL
270. aou 64 0 55 400 Kanoon 0 97 107 454 Tel Dial 64 0 64 401 Kalimba 0 0 108 455 DoorSqek 64 0 65 402 Bagpipe 0 0 109 456 Door Slam 64 0 66 403 Fiddle 0 0 110 457 Scratch 64 0 67 404 Shanai 0 0 111 458 Scratch 2 64 0 68 405 Shanai2 0 64 111 459 WindChm 64 0 69 406 Pungi 0 96 111 460 Telphon2 64 0 70 407 Hichriki 0 97 111 461 CarEngin 64 0 80 408 TnkiBell 0 0 112 462 Car Stop 64 0 81 409 Bonang 0 96 112 463 Car Pass 64 0 82 410 Gender 0 97 112 464 CarCrash 64 0 83 411 Gamelan 0 98 112 465 Siren 64 0 84 412 S Gamlan 0 99 112 466 Train 64 0 85 413 Rama Cym 0 100 112 467 Jetplane 64 0 86 414 AsianBel 0 101 112 468 Starship 64 0 87 415 Agogo 0 0 113 469 Burst 64 0 88 416 SteelDrm 0 0 114 470 Coaster 64 0 89 417 GlasPerc 0 97 114 471 SbMarine 64 0 90 418 ThaiBell 0 98 114 472 Laughing 64 0 96 419 WoodBlok 0 0 115 473 Scream 64 0 97 420 Castanet 0 96 115 474 Punch 64 0 98 421 TaikoDrm 0 0 116 475 Heart 64 0 99 422 Gr Cassa 0 96 116 476 FootStep 64 0 100 423 MelodTom 0 0 117 477 MchinGun 64 0 112 424 Mel Tom2 0 64 117 478 LaserGun 64 0 113 425 Real Tom 0 65 117 479 Xplosion 64 0 114 426 Rock Tom 0 66 117 480 FireWork 64 0 115 427 Syn Drum 0 0 118 428 Ana Tom 0 64 118 573 Appendix Anhang Annexe Keyloard Drum Assignments Tastatur Drum Belegung
271. arameter Parameter Bulk Send ch Store PC connected to the z 9000Pro runnin Voice Edit Native System XGworks or v page 102 Parameter Edit lite and the appropriate page 105 Plug in software for voice editing Calling up the Board voices directly from the Plug in Board Voice Edit on Computer Selecting a Plug in Voice calls up the corresponding parameters such as effect page 106 settings etc from 9000Pro Flash ROM and the corresponding Board Voice from the Plug in Board Auto Loaded when turning the power ON Auto Load can be set via Plug in setting page 69 Board Custom Voice Backup page 108 Automatically loaded from Flash ROM to the Board RAM when turning the power ON After editing the Board Custom Voice and Native System Parameter you should execute the Bulk Send operation see above and the store operation page 101 Reference 86 99 Creating Plug in Custom Voices Basic Procedure 1 Press the SOUND CREATOR button 2 Select PLUG IN VOICE DIGITAL STUDIO SOUND CREATOR SAMPLING CUSTOM VOICE PLUG IN VOICE DIGITAL RECORDING SONG STYLE e MULTI PAD m CONSOLE EFFECTS FILTER EQ TUNING e PART 3 1 SOUND CREATOR CUSTOM VOICE rm re re M Steps 3 5 described in det
272. ary to enable the dot poioma Note Eo EE ted note selectors at the bot o 001 4 000 Note 82 0000 153 irm tom of the display Pressing Z a om 2 the button alternately switches 22 9 9 9 the note selectors among three basic note values nor mal dotted and triplet 3 8 Cea BERT x 2 4 2 4 Select this resolution Reso 384 Note 84 0001 Note 55 0000 Note 82 0000 Note A3 79 0000 9 Lei D Press this button repeatedly if necessary to re enable the normal note selectors ES 1 000 nEns Trk STEP REC 001 1 000 Note 8a 0001 383 S0 001 3 192 Note E3 55 0000 153 10 001 4 000 Note 82 0000 153 Mrm 001 4 192 Not 79 0000 153 002 1 000 Note 82 6002 Se Press the x button to move the cursor to lees 000 Note 07 the beginning of the song and press the 002 4 302 End T START STOP button to hear your newly t recorded notes 3 T E g n m HEAS EBERT CLK 115 Reference Song Creator e Example 3 Trk 2 m ES t Lio Trk 2 e STEP REC 000 1 000 End 000 HEAS E BEAT CLK 2 2 4 Kbd vel Hrm 80 d STEP REC WSUS 000 1 000 End 001
273. at when it is prop erly installed and used in its normal and customary manner all foreseeable risks have been eliminated DO NOT modify this unit or commission others to do so unless specifically authorized by Yamaha Product performance and or safety standards may be diminished Claims filed under the expressed warranty may be denied if the unit is has been modified Implied warranties may also be affected SPECIFICATIONS SUBJECT TO CHANGE The information contained in this manual is believed to be cor rect at the time of printing However Yamaha reserves the right to change or modify any of the specifications without notice or obligation to update existing units 92 469 rear ENVIRONMENTAL ISSUES Yamaha strives to produce products that are both user safe and environmentally friendly We sincerely believe that our products and the pro duction methods used to produce them meet these goals In keeping with both the letter and the spirit of the law we want you to be aware of the following Battery Notice This product MAY contain a small non rechargable battery which if applicable is soldered in place The average life span of this type of battery is approx imately five years When replacement becomes necessary contact a qualified service representative to perform the replacement Warning Do not attempt to recharge disassemble or incin erate this type of battery Keep all batteries away from chil dren Dispose o
274. ata programmed to the Flash ROM at the corre sponding number locations The following data types are affected One Touch Setting Multi Pad Registration Memory Flash Style Music Database Setup If you ve deleted the factory set data you can use the Restore function page 154 to load a copy of it from the included disks K page 6 Basic Operation 2 29 53 About System Backup wn 5 Important information about the 9000Pro s current settings such as the selected Keep in mind the following points when style number the Split Point setting the fingering mode and MIDI related set tings can be retained in the Flash ROM To do this press the quarter note icon button a from the main display and follow the on screen instructions For a complete list of System Backup parameters refer to page 214 To return the System Backup parameters to the original factory settings simulta neously hold down the DEMO button and turn on the power e D System Backup LCD button D D E About the Style Data This diagram illustrates the relationship among the style data stored to different types of memory In addition to normal memory provisions the 9000Pro features special Flash ROM memory Unlike conventional ROM Flash ROM can be overwritten allowing you to store your own original data A number of pre programmed styles have been loaded to the Flash ROM these are referre
275. ations If you ve deleted the factory set data you can use the Restore func tion page 154 to load a copy of it from the included disks page 6 T wc Flash Style data can be loaded saved with or without its One Touch Setting setups styles with the Style Creator page 126 Use the Style Manager functions page 74 to backup and organize your original style data Playing the disk styles can be done in two ways 1 loading the style data to Flash ROM and playing it back as a Flash style or 2 playing it back directly from disk with the Disk Direct function page 25 About the Plug in Voice Data See page 64 Basic Operation B 7 m 2 2 ds Demonstration The 9000Pro has been programmed with a variety of demonstration songs that showcase the sophisticated capabilities of the instrument The songs can be played individually or all together in their normal sequence or random order DEMO F coo JE Select a song cate gory Cool organ coou Select a song category Use this button to start stop Select a song and press START playback Turn Repeat on or off RANDOM ic OFF SINGLE When set to ON REPEAT HODE Select a song or sequence of songs will be repeated until the STOP LCD button Select a play mode is pressed ALL All demo songs are played back in sequence RANDOM All demo songs are played back in
276. ave as a WAV file which can be loaded and used by other instruments or computers which can handle the WAV format 4 Store your settings as a Custom Voice to Flash ROM The 9000Pro originally records waves at 44 1 kHz WAV and AIFF files are also imported as 44 1 kHz waves The RESAMPLING function lets you reduce the sampling frequency of waves thus reducing the amount of memory they occupy Please note however that reduc ing the sampling frequency also reduces the sound quality Me HAVE EDIT WAVE 2 68 HRVEFORH HumanVoice1 1 1 SELECT HAVE 2 RESAMPLING 3 LooP POINT NORHRLIZE 5 VOLUHE TUNE Press this to hear how the resampled wave will sound before actually resampling the wave PRE LISTEN ORIGINAL SAMPLING FREQ 2 Reference Press this to actually resample the selected wave Semi RESRHPLING FREG 11 025 2 Select the desired resampling frequency Only resampling frequencies which are lower than the original sampling fre quency will be available EJ Resampling can cause the loop points see Loop Point below to shift resulting in unwanted noise If this hap pens use the Loop Point func tion to readjust the loop points 98 87 Loop Point This display determines how your sampled waves play back Your sampled waves can be played back in three different ways as follows WAV
277. avec de l encre d huile de soja M D G Pro Audio amp Digital Musical Instrument Division Yamaha Corporation 2000 Yamaha Corporation V619160 009POCP1 3 01A0 Printed in Japan
278. aying strength just as on an acous tic instrument EN 14 ACCOMPANIMENT CONTROL buttons 20 tee 14 MENU 150 158 174 EEN 59 TRANSPOSE buttons OL 59 DIGITAL STUDIO buttons 36 40 84 92 EE 30 78 100 110 126 141 20 MULTI PAD 34 77 141 Air vent Do not place objects on the instrument s air vent since this may prevent adequate ventilation of the internal components and possibly result in the instrument overheating Top Panel amp Connections POWER ON OFF e YAMAHA RIGHTS RI Galaxy EP ive Grand E Ges Re Live Strs c SIE 25 43 1 Orsan BF 2 62 SE HARMONV ECHO roue UNE Comatose VOCAL HARMONY J med f ORGAN TRUMPET SAXOPHONE CHOIR amp PAD PERCUSSION C Sea m 5o D SS BRASS FLUTE SYNTHESIZER CED
279. be added Wave Start Note Volume Delete Wave 35 HAVEFORH EDIT 3 HAVEFORH Humanvoice2_1 EDIT SELECT HAVEFORH 2 ADD HAVE 3 MOVE START HOTE VOLUME DELETE WAVE z The Start Note can also be DELETE changed by pressing the appropriate key on the key board while holding this button ef The same wave cannot be added for use in multiple key board ranges Press this to actually add the selected wave Specify the note from which the added wave will begin playing For example if you select C3 as the Start Note the original wave will play up to B2 and the added wave form will play from C3 up Deletes the selected wave from the waveform When a wave is deleted the range of the next lowest wave will expand to include the range originally covered by the deleted wave If the deleted wave is the lowest in the wave form i e its START NOTE is C 2 the range of the next highest wave will expand downward to include the range of the deleted wave The last wave in the waveform cannot be deleted Select a wave to be edited Adjusts the volume of the selected wave in relation to other waves in the waveform Move the start note of the selected wave see Add Wave above The Start Note of the lowest wave in the wave form i e the wave starting at C 2 cannot be changed When the Start Note of a wave is changed the range of the next lowest wave in the waveform will
280. beyond according to alphabet ical order are not shown Emm all 7 2 92 77 Disk Song Playback Other Functions Viewing the Lyrics and Fast Forward Reverse Select this to call up the Lyrics display Select this during play back to move rapidly for ward through the song This button lets you pause playback and then start again from the same point in the song Select this during play back to move rapidly back ward through the song Song Setup This function determines certain playback settings for song data other than note on off for example lyrics JJ SONG SETUP REG 01 1 Registration 1 790 14 EES 16 JJ SONG SETUP REG 01 1 Registration 1 790 14 EES 16 1 LYRICS SEARCH ON ULTRA QUICK START ON 1 LYRICS SEARCH ON ULTRA QUICK START ON 2 amp VOCAL HRRHONY SETUP DATA SAVE 2 amp VOCAL HRRHONY SETUP DATA SAVE 0008 ULTRA QUICK START The Vocal Harmony setup data SEARCH ON ON will be saved to the song file Hake sure that disk protection is off SEARCH OFF OFF and that the disk is write enabled NEVER DISPLAY When the Ultra Quick Start function here is set to ON the 9000Pro reads all initial non note data of the song at the highest Press this button to save the microphone When set to SEARCH ON the 9000Pro possible speed then automatically slows and Vocal Harmony reads the l
281. bience 88 00 89 89 51 Synphonic2 68 00 148 148 Lo Fi 94 00 90 90 52 EnsDetune Ensemble Detune 87 00 149 149 5 PitchChg2 Pitch Change2 80 00 91 91 53 DelayLCR2 05 00 150 150 PitchChg3 Pitch Change3 80 01 92 92 54 Flanger3 67 17 151 151 82 AutoWah2 78 00 93 93 55 67 01 152 152 AtWah Dst2 78 01 94 94 56 Fang5 Auto Wah Distortion2 95 95 GM Flanger 67 07 153 153 AtWah OD1 78 18 96 96 57 Phaser 72 00 Auto Wah Overdrive 5 97 97 Phasera 72 a n Auto Wah Overdrive2 Ss 16 S6 700 155 155 83 TouchWahi 82 00 99 99 58 RotarySpi 69 16 156 156 84 TouchWah2 82 08 100 100 59 RotarySp2 Rotary Speaker2 71 17 15 9f Crouch Wah 460012 82 01 101 101 60 RotarySp3 Rotary Speaker3 71 18 158 158 TcWah OD1 82 17 102 102 61 RotarySp4 70 17 Touch Wah Overdrive1 103 103 62 RotarySp5 66 18 159 159 TeWah OD2 82 02 104 104 63 RotarySp6 69 00 Touch Wah Overdrive2 105 105 64 Tremolo 70 16 160 160 WhDst Dly2 97 00 106 106 65 Tremolo2 71 19 Wah Distortion Delay2 107 107 66 Tremolo3 70 00 161 161 Wh OD TDly 102 01 108 108 67 AutoPant 71 16 Wah Overdrive Tempo Delay 109 109 68 AutoPan2 71 00 Woh Ove 28 110 110 69 GtTremolo2 Guitar Tremolo2 71 20 163 163 Wh OD Dly2 97 01 111 111 V_DistHard Distortion Hard 98 00 Wah Overdrive Delay2 112
282. bout the receive modes Select a Channel MIDI Receive Mode Turn reception of the specified data type on See below for details on the data types OFF No MIDI data is received XG GM This is the Multi Timbre mode in which the corresponding channel of the internal XG GM tone generator is directly controlled by the received MIDI data XG GM can only be used with chan nels 1 16 It cannot be used with channels 17 32 RIGHT 1 The RIGHT 1 part is controlled by the MIDI data received on the corresponding channel RIGHT 2 The RIGHT 2 part is controlled by the MIDI data received on the corresponding channel RIGHT 3 The RIGHT 3 part is controlled by the MIDI data received on the corresponding channel LEFT The LEFT part is controlled by the MIDI data received on the corresponding channel KEYBOARD MIDI note data received by the 9000Pro plays the corresponding notes in the same way as if they are played on the keyboard ACMP The received notes are used as the accompaniment RHYTHM 1 and RHYTHM 2 notes RHYTHM1 2 ACMP BASS The received notes are used as the accompaniment BASS notes ACMP The received notes are used as the accompaniment CHORD 1 and CHORD 2 notes CHORD1 2 ACMP PAD The received notes are used as the accompaniment PAD notes ACMP The received notes are used as the accompaniment PHRASE 1 and PHRASE 2 notes PHRASE1 2 7 Data types the MIDI TRANSMIT RECEIVE display No
283. button twice A CAUTION The following explanation applies to the Load operation of the Plug in Manager and the Style Manager function S When loading multiple files from disk to Flash ROM only the selected files will be loaded to the destination location in the Flash ROM see pages 78 and 87 Keep in mind that the files are loaded to consecutive locations starting from the specified destination Make sure that the consecutive locations contain no important data otherwise you may inadvertently overwrite files you wish to keep LOAD STYLE INTO FLASH Select the Location for Loading If two or more files are selected the first file is loaded to this location and the rest are loaded press NEXT BACK If you select this location as the destination in Flash ROM with selecting three files in disk for FLASH ROM STYLE CATEGORY STYLE example the three locations in Flash ROM are replaced starting Flash 3 No Data from this location Flash 4 NU Data Flash 5 No Data Flash 6 No Data 2 Selecting Directories Files Directories are like file folders that are used to organize the file data The instruc tions here show you how to navigate through directories and select the desired directo ries files POP UP POP UP You can go to the next Select the directory that contains the song Select the directory that contains the song files lowest level by press files DEVICE FD ing th
284. can The connection with the Plug in Board can be switched to the keyboard part by press be switched to the Song part by pressing ing the PART ON OFF button the Plug in LCD button LEFT HOLD LEFT RIGHT1 RIGHT2 RIGHT3 01 BS 01 UE Ces Ces ms me TRACK GNU SET up SLE PART REC REPLRCE Press NEXT when settings are ready Press START to begin Rehearsal recol ing MEL in PLAY PLAY t PEAY DUHR MUTE E HUTE E HUTE E HUTE B HUTE E HUTE When you use the Song Player to play back a song recorded with the Plug in voices If any one of the parts of the Plug in voice R1 R2 or L is set to ON the part the song responding to the Plug in voice will automatically be muted Therefore if you want to properly play back a song using Plug in voices make sure that the corresponding parts R1 R2 R3 or L are set to OFF before selecting the song The explanations above apply only to the Song Creator and Song Player functions They do not apply to the Style Creator and Multi Pad Creator since the Plug in voices cannot be used with those functions 2 Reference 123 Style Creator The 9000Pro lets you create original styles which can be used for auto accompaniment in the same way as the preset styles Guidelines for Style Creating When creating a song page 110 you rec
285. capable of format ting only up to a maximum 8 GB on the drive Em J Make sure to write down your password and keep in a separate secure location in case you forget it M Aes 791 155 Disk SCSI Operations Checking a Disk This function can be used to check an entire disk for damaged files and recover the files so that they can be properly read Keep in mind that depending on the extent of the damage some files may not be recoverable The explanations here apply to step 3 of the Basic Procedure on page 150 Select the device to be checked EI CHECK DISK PROPERTY gt 651 Press NEXT to continue DEVICE FDD PAGE CONTROL BACK NEXT Di Execute the Check operation by following the on screen instructions Reference The 9000Pro Tunctions The 9000Pro Function mode includes 8 groups of functions that access a number of parameters related to overall 9000Pro operation Basic Procedure FUNCTION MENU 5 MASTER TUNE veo ovr SCALE TUNE z MENU SPLIT POINT TALK SETTING FINGERING E DISK SCSI FUNCTION MIDI ub UTILITY 3 Set the parameters of the selected function 2 REGISTRATI ON FREEZE gaia VOICE SET HARHONY ECHO T 1 Press the FUNCTION button 2 Select the desired function The operations for
286. cedure on page 150 Select the desired menu EY EDIT FILE RENAME FILE DELETE FILE Select the file to be deleted Select the file to be named GY DELETE FILE 1365 EY RENAME FILE 1365 Select this to PROPERTY Ein DEVICE FD display the DEVICE FD Press this but DIRECTORY 1 e properties of DIRECTORY POPS ati 151 ton to change the selected MODE SINGLE MALL 1 the type of files file as indicated by Press NEXT to continue their extension Press NEXT to continue CONTENTS displayed in the DEVICE CONTENTS FILE column Is 8Beati STv sBeat2 sty gt sBeat3 sty 2 I SBeatisTv 8Beat2 STY Ei 8Beat3 STV See page 151 Execute the Delete operation by following Enter a name for the selected file the on screen instructions Refer to the Basic Operation on page 46 Reference Disk SCSI Operations Renaming deleting creating Directories The explanations here apply to step 3 of the Basic Procedure on page 150 Select the desired menu 25 EDIT DIRECTORY E RENAME DIRECTORY DELETE DIRECTORY CREATE DIRECTORY PAGE CONTROL Execute each operation by following the on screen instructions Formatting a Disk Setting up commercially available blank floppy disks for use with 9000Pro is called formatting This function is also useful for quickly deleting unnecessary files from an already formatted disk
287. character at the cursor position Aborts character entry Moves the cursor position in Enters the character selected by the LCD D and E buttons the NAME box Computer Keyboard Functions You can connect a computer keyboard PC compatible only to the 9000Pro for the fol lowing functions PC KEYBOARD Name Entry see above Selecting voices styles songs and Registration Memory settings see below Step Recording see below For details on using a computer keyboard with the 9000Pro see page 167 Please note that Macintosh computer keyboards and USB computer keyboards cannot be used with the 9000Pro o Basic Operation 45 Display hased Controls Selecting voices styles songs and Registration Memory settings First from the main display press any key on the computer keyboard Then select the desired category voice style song Registration Memory by repeatedly pressing any key on the computer keyboard with the exception of the DELETE key and the number keys The selected category is indicated in the display Then enter the desired number from the computer keyboard according to the rules below e LEE For the internal Preset Voices 2 digits for the voice category followed by 2 digits for the specific voice or 3 digits for XG voices then the ENTER key For Plug in Voices 2 digits 21 32 for Slot 1 41 52 for Slot 2 for the voice cate gory followed by 2 digits
288. cified per centage e Measure Copy This function allows data to be copied from one measure or group of measures to another location within the same part Use the TOP and LAST LCD buttons to specify the first and last measures in the region to be copied Use the DEST LCD button to specify the top of the measure to which the data is to be copied If the copy destination falls outside the number of measures actually in the part the corresponding source measures will not be copied e Measure Clear This function clears all data from the specified range of measures within the specified part Use the TOP and LAST LCD buttons to specify the first and last measures in the range to be cleared e Remove Control Event This function can be used to remove all occurrences of a specified type of con trol event from a specified part Use the EVENT LCD buttons to select the type of event to be removed Remove Duplicate Notes Removes all duplicate notes from a specified part Reference cel 133 Style Creator Parameter Edit PARA EDIT D i Select a part to be edited A ROO ORD Select the desired menu 3 NTR ROOT FIXED NTT BYPASS HIGH KEY F See below 5 _LOW C 2 HIGH G8 6 RTR PITCH SHIFT RECORD 00 1 D R 1 RHY 2 5 Dip Aw Ac Aw Source Root Source Chord
289. cmp x Chord 2 Part Voice Change x x Acmp x Acmp Rhythm 1 Part Panpot x x Acmp x Acmp Pad Part Voice Change Voice x x Acmp Rhythm 2 Part Panpot Phrase 1 Part Voice Change i x Bass Part Panpot x x x x Acmp x Voice Acmp Chord 1 Part Panpot x SC 2 Part Voice Change x x Acmp Chord 2 Part 1 P Chord 2 Part Panpot 9 Bemp A Acmp Rhythm 1 Part Harmonic Content x x Acmp x Appendix Anhang Annexe 889 589 Tableau des parametres a Ze ezl g s 8 8 8 8 5 58 o 2 i 5 5 5 o 868 5 8 1 5 2 s 2 8 8 9S0 3 8 2135155155 8 8 S 2 S 0 gt gt gt Ii Acmp Rhythm 2 Part Harmonic Content x Song Name x x X x x x Acmp Bass Part Harmonic Content x x Acmp x Song Pause Rew FF x x x x x Acmp Chord 1 Part Harmonic Content x x Acmp x Song Volume
290. cted Reso 384 ppq 001 1 000 Note c3 84 0000 001 2 000 Note 03 82 0000 204 001 3 000 Note E3 79 0000 307 mo m mom 002 2 000 Note CE 67 0000 002 3 000 Note B3 0000 c 8 003 1 000 f BEAT 3 Press the START STOP button to hear your newly recorded notes 21 TAS Reference Song Creator e Example 2 IKbd o fo Hrm d x 4 t 3 cea BERT d 2 2 3 Press this while holding F Select this resolution ra ME WII III Trk STEP 001 1 000 Note F3 84 0001 383 001 2 383 End 1 72 9 2 1 1 Dei v D m m mm i V BEAT CLI d 2 2 18 Select this resolution ONG HID D Press this button repeatedly if STEP REC Se DE necess
291. cted events are changed simultaneously To actually enter the changes press the SEL button again to return to single event selection NEHSONG HID Reso 384 ppo Reso 384 ppq EVENT List GC EMME 000 DATA ENTRY MEAS f BEAT 001 1 000 DATA ENTRY f BEAT Le 3 ov r Copying and pasting multiple events In the example explanation below well copy the events of the second measure in song data and paste them to the third measure 000 e 9 e 9 e 9 oe Use the or buttons to move the cursor to the beginning of the second measure Press the SEL button to enable multiple event selection Use the button to determine the range to be selected For this example scroll to the last event in the measure so that all events in measure 2 are selected Press the COPY button Press the SEL button to change to single event selection Set the destination the top of measure 3 in this case by using the MEAS BEAT and CLK buttons Press the PASTE button NEHSONG HID Reso 38d ppq NEHSONG HID Reso 384 ppq Note 1 0000 Note 0000 Note 0000 TE Note cal 0000 000 DATA ENTRY MEAS BEAT 002 000 DRTR ENTRV HEAS BEAT The d
292. ctive when using the microphone for If you experience distorted or out of tune TALK speech or rapping as opposed to singing sound from the Vocal Harmony feature Refer to page 165 your vocal microphone may be picking up DSP 8 extraneous sounds other than your voice the Auto Accompaniment sound from due The 9000Pro has a DSP effect DSP 8 especially for the micro the 9000Pro for example In particular phone sound and this button turns the DSP 8 effect on off The bass sounds can cause mistracking of the MS DSP 8 type can be set from the Mixing Console display page 146 Vocal Harmony feature The solution to SELECT this problem is to ensure that as little This turns the Vocal Harmony effect on or off extraneous sound as possible is picked up CH Mic SETUP by your vocal microphone Sing as closely to the microphone pos sible Use a uni directional microphone Turn down the MASTER VOLUME ACMP volume or SONG volume control _ d P e Reference 82 Vocal Harmony Selecting Producing the Vocal Harmony effect Basic Procedure 79 VOCAL HARMONY Vocal Harmony Select 1 8 002 01 E5501 Vocal Harmony TALK 001 006 M CountryQuar Std Duet 002 s M ClsdMenQuar MenChoir DSP 8 003 008 MixAcapQuar ClosedChoir 4 Store your settings 9 WomenChoir Girl Duet
293. cts the attack portion of the sound producing a longer or shorter decay immediately after the initial attack The longer the graphic bar the longer the decay Response The Response control affects both the attack and sustain portion of the sound increas ing or decreasing the response time of the initial swell and release based on the FOOTAGE controls The higher the value the slower the swell and release Reverb Depth Chorus Depth For details about the digital effects see page 145 DSP on off DSP Depth Vibrato Speed Determines the speed of the vibrato effect controlled by the Vibrato On Off and Vibrato Depth above DSP Type Determines the DSP effect type to be applied to the Organ Flutes voice Normally this will be one of the six available Rotary Speaker effects If any other type of effect is se lected the Rotary SP Speed LCD button in the main ORGAN VOICE editing display will not control rotary speaker speed Instead it will have the same effect as the VOICE EFFECT SLOW FAST button Slow Fast Slow Fast Determines whether the DSP variation Slow Fast will be set to Slow or Fast when the Organ Flutes voice is selected when the Voice Set function is ON page 163 Value Sets the DSP variation Slow Fast parameter value e g LFO Freq for a Rotary Speaker effect when the DSP variation Fast is turned on EQ Low The EQ parameters determine the Frequency and Gain of the Low and High EQ b
294. d Tap4times m TAP we SP SE When a 3 beat style is selected tap 3 times TAP ae TAP Mm Reference 02 71 Auto Accompaniment Synchro Stop When the Synchro Stop function is engaged accompaniment playback will stop com pw Synchro Stop cannot be set to on when the fingering mode is set to Full Keyboard or the auto accompaniment on the panel is set to off pletely when all keys in the auto accompaniment section of the keyboard are released Accompaniment playback will start again as soon as a chord is played The BEAT indi cators will flash while the accompaniment is stopped For basic information on playing the auto accompaniment refer to page 20 in the Quick Guide gt 1 turn auto ACCOMPANIMENT on gt 2 turn SYNC STOP on awa SYNC START is automatically set to on when SYNC STOP is turned on gt 3 As soon as you play chord with your left hand the auto accompaniment starts un your left hand from the keys section 4 The auto accompaniment stops when you release mW 5 Playing a chord with your left hand automatically vy restarts the auto accompaniment 6 Stop the auto accompaniment One Touch Setting For basic information on using the One Touch Setting feature refer to page 24 in the Quick Guide This section covers how to create y
295. d The explanations here apply to step 3 of the Basic Procedure on page 158 k F6 VIDEO OUT Select the desired video standard NTSC or PRL Set the size and colors as desired NTSC PAL eR You can set the back ground to one of four colors The characters displayed on the video screen can be set to any of a variety of colors Set this to SMALL if the contents of the LCD do not fit in the monitor screen Set this to correspond to the standard NTSC or PAL used by your video equipment The default setting is PAL If the standard used by your television or video monitor is not PAL for example NTSC is generally used in North America change the setting to NTSC This setting is retained in memory as part of the System Backup parameters See pages 55 and 214 wm j Occasionally some flashing parallel lines may appear in the television or video monitor This does not indicate that the television or video monitor is malfunctioning you may be able to remedy the situation by adjusting the Character Color or Background Color parame ters For optimum results also try adjusting the color settings on NTSC PAL the TV monitor itself VIDEO OUT D Avoid looking at the television or video monitor for prolonged periods of time since doing so could damage your eyesight Take frequent breaks and or focus your eyes on distant objects to avoid eyestrain Television E Kee
296. d SUB4 output the Part in mono to the corre Sets the output configuration for the selected drum When set to MAIN the part is output with effects through the MAIN LINE OUT jacks 2 The sound is also output through the PHONES jack as well as the MAIN jacks When set to one of the SUB settings the Part is output through the SUB LINE OUT jacks In this case only Insertion effects DSP4 8 and DSP3 when this is set to Inser tion from the effect parameter display can be applied System effects DSP1 2 and DSP3 when this is set to System from the effect parameter display and MASTER EQ When using one of the SUB Line Out settings make sure that you ve connected cables to the appropriate SUB LINE OUT jacks on the rear panel If cables are only connected to the MAIN jacks the sound of the Part will be output through the MAIN jacks even if one of the SUB Line Out settings is Parts output through the SUB LINE OUT jacks cannot be heard through the PHONES 9 Example 1 Live Performance In this example you can send the metronome click to the drummer in your band and keep everything in sync Line Out Settings Part Right1 2 3 Left MAIN Settings Mic SUB1 Multi Pad 1 2 3 4 MAIN Auto Accompaiment MAIN Rhythm1 Rhythm2 Bass Chord1 Chord2 Pad Phrase1 Phrase2 Metronome SUB2 Song MAIN Song Tr1 16 Drum All instruments 508384 Settings
297. d PLG100 DX PLG150 DX in Boards eg PLG150 PF The sounds of the DX7 are available on this Plug in Board Unlike PCM based tone PLG100 VL PLG100 DX generators this board uses the powerful FM Synthesis system the same as found on DX series synthesizers for extraordinarily versatile and dynamic sound shap ing potential Sounds are compatible with those of the DX7 and the board can even Included with each Plug in receive DX7 data via MIDI bulk dump Board is a floppy disk featuring special demo songs You can Virtual Acoustic Plug in Board PLG100 VL PLG150 VL play these demo songs on the With Virtual Acoustic VA synthesis the sounds of real instruments are modeled 9000Pro XG Plug in System simulated in real time giving a degree of realism that cannot be achieved using format only using the Song conventional PCM based synthesis techniques When playing these sounds usin ayer mear 1 H playing 9 Owner s Manual of your partic an optional MIDI Wind Controller WX5 you can even capture some of the physical ular Plug in Board for details feel of woodwind instruments on the demo songs 2 Multi Part Plug in Board Multi Part Plug in Boards let you expand the voice polyphony of the 9000Pro by giving you a full 16 independent instrumental parts This type of board allows you to use the maximum polyphony of the 9000Pro for your keyboard performance For example this
298. d after one of the TRANSPOSE buttons has been pressed Song The TRANSPOSE buttons affect only the song playback Master The TRANSPOSE buttons affect the overall pitch of the 9000Pro Normal pitch transpose value of 0 can be recalled at any time by pressing both the 4 and gt buttons simultaneously The transposition can be adjusted from the Mixing Console display page 145 Octave Change Refer to the Quick Guide on page 18 UPPER OCTAVE ER ea Si preset YJ Voices Reference Organ Flutes Quick Guide on page 19 In addition to the many organ voices in the ORGAN voice category the 9000Pro has an ORGAN FLUTES voice which can be assigned to the currenty selected part and edited by pressing the VOICE ORGAN FLUTES button Basic Procedure cc amp PAD 1 1 Press the ORGAN FLUTES button Adjust the parameters 148 01 ESSE Select this to call up the display of the Volume Attack settings Use button 1 to adjust the 16 or 8 footage You can select the desired footage 16 or 8 with the E LCD button R1 ORGAN FLUTES USER 126 7 790 14 16 001 006 User Organ User Organ You can select the number to call up Di your original settings User Organ User Organ 003 008 User Organ User Organ 004 008 User Organ User Organ 005 010 User Orsan
299. d Timing expressed numerically quarter note note off when was it released Velocity about how strong 120 strong MIDI is an acronym that stands for Musical Instrument Digital Interface which allows electronic musical instruments to communicate with each other by sending and receiving compatible Note Control Change Program Change and various other types of MIDI data or messages The 9000Pro can control a MIDI device by transmitting note related data and various types of con troller data The 9000Pro can be controlled by the incoming MIDI messages which automatically determine tone generator mode select MIDI channels voices and effects change parameter values and of course play the voices specified for the various parts MIDI messages can be divided into two groups Channel messages and System messages Below is an explanation of the various types of MIDI messages which the 9000Pro can receive transmit Reference 991 167 Channel Messages The 9000Pro is an electronic instrument that can handle 32 channels This is usually expressed as it can play 32 instruments at the same time Channel messages transmit infor mation such as Note ON OFF Program Change for each of the 32 channels 9000Pro Operation Panel Setting Messages which are generated when the keyboard is played Each mes sage includes a specific note number which corresponds to the key which is pressed plus a velocity value based
300. d by Dump Request Not Received lt Table 3 3 gt MIDI PARAMETER CHANGE TABLE EFFECT 1 ae W Data Parameter Recognized Description Default 2 1 0 2 00 7F REVERB TYPE MSB Refer the MIDI EFFECT 01 HALL1 00 7F REVERB TYPE LSB 00 basic type 00 2 1 00 7F REVERB PARAMETER 1 Refer the MIDI EFFECT PARAMETER LIST depends on reverb type 3 1 00 7F REVERB PARAMETER 2 Refer the MIDI EFFECT PARAMETER LIST depends on reverb type 4 1 00 7F REVERB PARAMETER 3 Refer the MIDI EFFECT PARAMETER LIST depends on reverb type 5 1 00 7F REVERB PARAMETER 4 Refer the MIDI EFFECT PARAMETER LIST depends on reverb type 6 1 00 7F REVERB PARAMETER 5 Refer the MIDI EFFECT PARAMETER LIST depends on reverb type 7 1 00 7F REVERB PARAMETER 6 Refer the MIDI EFFECT PARAMETER LIST depends on reverb type 8 1 00 7F REVERB PARAMETER 7 Refer the MIDI EFFECT PARAMETER LIST depends on reverb type 9 1 00 7F REVERB PARAMETER 8 Refer the MIDI EFFECT PARAMETER LIST depends on reverb type 0A 1 00 7F REVERB PARAMETER 9 Refer the MIDI EFFECT PARAMETER LIST depends on reverb type 0B 1 00 7F REVERB PARAMETER 10 Refer the MIDI EFFECT PARAMETER LIST depends on reverb type DC 1 00 7F REVERB RETURN oof B 00B 60B 0 64 127 40 DD 1 01 7F REVERB PAN L63 C R63 1 64 127 40 TOTAL SIZE 2 1 10 1 00 7F REVERB PARAMETER 11 Refer the MIDI EFF
301. d everything at once but it is there for you to refer to when you need information about a certain feature or function This section provides detailed instructions for installing each of the 9000Pro s supported options SIMM Hard disk unit and Plug in Boards This contains various important lists such as the Voice List Preset Style List Effect List MIDI Data Format and MIDI Implementation Chart TER Eder page 188 If the 9000Pro does not function as expected or you have some problem with the sound or operation consult this section before calling your Yamaha dealer or service center Most common problems and their solutions are covered here in a very simple and easy to understand way This section alphabetically lists virtually all topics features functions and operations with their respective page numbers letting you quickly and easily find the information you need DOC The DOC voice allocation format provides data playback compatibility with a wide range of Yamaha instruments and MIDI devices including the Clavinova series Style File Format The Style File Format SFF is Yamaha s original style file format which uses a unique conversion system to pro vide high quality automatic accompaniment based on a wide range of chord types The 9000Pro uses the SFF internally reads optional SFF style disks and creates SFF styles using the Style Creator function GI Plug for XG This system offers powerful e
302. d instructions that accompany the accessory product 1 0 The power supply cord plug should be disconnected from the outlet when electronic products are to be left unused for extended periods of time Cords should also be disconnected when there is a high probability of lightning and or electrical storm activ ity 1 1 e Care should be taken that objects do not fall and liquids are not spilled into the enclosure through any openings that may exist 12 Electrical electronic products should be serviced by a qual ified service person when a The power supply cord has been damaged or b Objects have fallen been inserted or liquids have been spilled into the enclosure through openings or c The product has been exposed to rain or d The product does not operate exhibits a marked change in performance or e The product has been dropped or the enclosure of the product has been damaged 13 This product either alone or in combination with an ampli fier and headphones or speaker s may be capable of producing sound levels that could cause permanent hearing loss DO NOT operate for a long period of time at a high volume level or at a level that is uncomfortable If you experience any hearing loss or ringing in the ears you should consult an audiologist IMPORTANT The louder the sound the shorter the time period before damage occurs 14 Some Yamaha products may have benches and or acces sory mounting fixtures that are either s
303. d section based on a central velocity value of 64 Val ues higher than 10096 expand the dynamic range and values lower than 10096 compress the dynamic range Boost Cut Boosts or cuts all velocity values in the selected section part Values above 100 boost the overall velocity and values be low 100 reduce the overall velocity Reference Style Creator Style Recording Full Edit This section explains how to record all parts by playing the keyboard The explanations here apply to step 5 of the Basic Procedure on page 128 Basic Setting for Recording Select the desired menu SECTION HAIN A 1 SECTION HAIN A PATTERN LENGTH 4 PATTERN LENGTH 4 2 148 BEAT 474 2 TEMPO 148 BEAT 4 4 PART COPY PART COPY PATTERN SECTION LENGTH E RS 1 We 5 REC HAIN PLAY PLAY GR PLAYE PLAY EET MUTE MUTE MHUTE MUTE MUTE HUTE ss D 2 Select the section you want to program Pattern Length Select the desired number of measures 1 32 for the selected section except for FILL IN sections which are fixed at 1 measure e Select a different time signature 2 4 3 4 4 4 or 5 4 Please note that the time signature can only be changed if all sections of the current style have been cleared If any data rem
304. d to below as Flash styles Accompaniment playback See page 20 P t Styl Flash Styl Disk Styl reset Style ash Style Save isk Style P Style Manager Store See page 74 Style Creator See page 126 Preset styles are stored to conventional ROM These are permanent and cannot be overwritten However you can use these as a basis for creating your own original using the memory devices Memory Structure Song files can be played back without loading the data to Flash ROM or inter nal memory RAM Style files can be played back from Flash ROM after loading the data from disk to Flash ROM They can also be played directly from disk by using the Disk Direct function page 25 For saving loading any data other than style data between disk and Flash ROM use the Disk SCSI function page 150 Saving loading style data is done with the Style Manager functions page 74 One Touch Setting data can be saved loaded with the Flash style however it cannot be saved loaded separately by itself Music Database data can be loaded with the Disk Style data Actually the One Touch Setting data programmed with the Disk Style data is loaded as the Music Database The Music Database data cannot be saved loaded separately by itself E e Storing your original style data to Flash ROM erases the fac tory programmed Flash style data at the corresponding number loc
305. ded position before making any connections If you make connections while the POWER switch is on you risk damaging external equipment such as the amp or speakers An optional lamp can be connected to the 9000Pro The TRIM control allows the input sensitivity of the This is especially convenient when using the AUX IN L L R and LOOP RETURN jacks to be 9000Pro in situations of low available light adjusted for optimum level matching with the con See page 15 for details nected equipment LINE OUT YAMAHA proressionat we Refer to page 14 Effector The LOOP SEND jacks deliver the output of the 9000Pro for connection to external signal processing devices such as dis tortion or filter effects The output from the signal processor can be returned to the AUX IN LOOP RETURN jacks letting you apply the desired effect s to the overall sound of the 9000Pro and return the processed sound back to the 9000Pro The LINE OUT jacks are used to send the 9000Pro output to a keyboard amplifier stereo sound sys tem mixing console or tape recorder If you are connecting the 9000Pro to a mono sound system use only the L L R jack When only this jack is con nected using a standard phone plug the left and right channels are combined and output through this jack allowing you have a mono mix of the 9000Pro s stereo sou
306. donn es MIDI nn 6 1 00 02 SAME NOTE NUMBER 0 SINGLE 1 KEY ON ASSIGN 1 MULTI 2 INST for DRUM 7 1 00 05 PART MODE x x x x x 0 00 Except 110 1 DRUM ROM 02 Part10 2 3 DRUMS1 04 05 L3 80 4 5 DRUM ROM 8 1 28 58 NOTE SHIFT x o 24 24 semitones 40 nn 9 2 00 FF DETUNE 12 8 12 7 Hz 08 00 1st bit3 0bit7 4 80 2nd bit3 0 bit3 0 nn 1 00 7F VOLUME 0 127 64 nn 0 1 00 VELOCITY SENSE DEPTH 0 127 40 nn OD 1 00 VELOCITY SENSE OFFSET 0 127 40 OE 1 00 PAN o O random 40 L63 C R63 1 64 127 OF 1 00 NOTE LIMIT LOW x 0 C 2 G8 0 nn 10 1 00 NOTE LIMIT HIGH x C 2 G8 7F nn 11 1 00 DRY LEVEL x 0 127 12 1 00 CHORUS SEND x 0 127 0 13 1 00 REVERB SEND 0 127 28 nn 14 1 00 VARIATION SEND x 0 0 127 0 15 1 00 VIBRATO RATE x 64 63 40 nn
307. e NOTE below Exi from the Digital Recording mode The operations for each function corresponding to step 4 are covered in the following explanations Select a Multi Pad 1 Select a Multi Pad EE wort A CAUTION Since newly created Multi Pad data is stored to Flash ROM any pre programmed data in the selected Multi Pad loca The recorded data of the tion will be erased and replaced by your new settings This includes all of the factory programmed Multi Pad banks Multi Pads is stored together If you ve deleted the factory set data you can use the Restore function page 154 to load a copy of it from the in a group of 58 banks in the included disks page 6 Flash ROM For this reason you should be careful when making edits and storing your edits since all 58 banks will be overwritten with the new data Multi Pad banks 60 banks in Flash ROM 58 banks can be replaced by the new created pad data M Aw Multi Pad banks 59 and 60 contain specially programmed presets for sending MIDI con For details about Flash ROM refer to Memory Structure on page 54 trol 2 page 29 and C J changing the Scale Tuning set tings page 158 respectively You cannot store your custom Multi Pad data to these banks Reference 01 Multi Pad Creator Multi Pad Recording The explanations here apply to step 4 of the Basic Procedure on page 141
308. e here describes the parameters that are exclusive to each of the Plug in Boards Because of this the editing screens displayed on the 9000Pro will differ depending on the particular Plug in Board being used For example when editing Plug in voices of the PLG150 VL parameter names such as WX Lip and Brth Curv Breath Curve which are unique to the VL tone generation system are dis played as shown below on the right The illustration below applies to step 7 of the Basic Procedure on page 101 You can store the settings in this display to Flash ROM by using this button PLUG IN CUSTOH VOICE SYSTEM PRH EDIT 7 PLUG IN CUSTOM VOICE SYSTEM EDIT Select the edit SLOT PARAHETER VALUE 51 0 1 6150 31 BrthHode BrthCtrl BrthCury PAGE CONTROL GIT PLUG IN CUSTOM VOICE MEMORY BACK m SLOT1 PLG150 YL SLOT2 PLG150 AN Press NEXT to continue Select the desired Board This lets you change the volume out put from the Plug in Board and adjust When the same or same type the relative balance among the of Plug in Boards e g the 9000Pro preset voices and the Plug PLG100 DX and the PLG150 in voices DX have been installed in the Please note the following points two slots only SLOT 1 is avail The volume balance of the song able using the Plug in voices is changed by adjusting this value When the same or same type of
309. e Data Value Data Value Data Value 0 00 32 32 64 64 96 96 0 01 32 505 64 1008 96 1512 Data Value Data Value 0 441K 32 64 6780 96 455 0 1 0 1 33 3 3 65 6 5 97 9 7 1 17 33 52 0 65 102 4 97 152 8 0 1 0 10 1 22 1K 33 1 30 65 668 0 97 450 0 2 0 2 34 3 4 66 6 6 98 9 8 2 32 34 53 6 66 104 0 98 1544 1 2 1 15 2 14 7K 34 1 26K 66 658 0 98 445 0 3 0 3 35 35 67 6 7 99 9 9 3 4 8 35 55 2 67 105 6 99 155 9 2 3 2 25 3 11 0K 35 1 23 67 649 0 99 441 0 4 0 4 36 3 6 68 6 8 100 10 0 4 64 36 56 8 68 107 1 100 157 5 3 4 3 35 4 88K 36 1 19K 68 639 0 100 437 0 B 0 5 Erd 3 7 69 6 9 101 11 1 5 8 0 37 58 3 69 108 7 101 159 1 4 5 4 45 5 74K 37 1 16K 69 630 0 101 432 0 6 0 6 38 3 8 70 7 0 102 12 2 6 9 5 38 59 9 70 110 3 102 160 6 5 6 5 55 6 6 3K 38 1 13 70 621 0 102 428 0 7 0 7 39 3 9 71 7 1 103 13 3 T 11 1 39 61 5 71 111 9 103 162 2 6 7 8 65 7 55K 39 1 10K 71 613 0 103 424 0 8 0 8 40 4 0 72 7 2 104 14 4 8 12 7 40 63 1 72 113 4 104 163 8 7 8 7 75 8 49K 40 1 08K 72 604 0 104 420 0 9 0 9 41 4 1 73 73 105 15 5 9 14 8 41 64 6 73 115 0 105 165 4 8 9 8 85 9 45K 41 1 05K 73 596 0 105 416 0 10 1 0 42 4 2 74 7 4 106 474 10 15 8 42 66 2 74 116 6 106 166 9 9 10 9 100 10 4 0K 42 1 03 74 588 0 106 412 0 m 11 43 43 75 75 107 186 11 174 43 678 75 118 2 107 168 5 10 12 115 11 37K 43 1 00K 75 580 0 107 408 0 12 1 2 44 44 76 7 6 108 20
310. e IN LCD button DEVICE FD DIRECTORY DIRECTORY CLA FILE Classici while the cursor is FILE located at the folder Press NEXT to continue icon Ld Press NEXT to continue DEVICE CONTENTS DEVICE CONTENTS ro Classico2 ClassicOla a Classico3 fa ClassicO1b You can return to E3 Ollente mid 029_walk nid the next highest level by pressing the IN LCD button while the cursor is located at KI Reference Disk SCSI Operations Loading Data from a Disk to Flash ROM This operation lets you load the specified file from a floppy disk an optional hard disk or an optional SCSI device to Flash ROM The explanations here apply to step 3 of the Basic Procedure on page 150 Select a source file in the disk N CAUTION LOAD FROH DISK 1903 When data is loaded from Select this to display floppy disk to the 9000Pro the property of the the data already in the mem pIrEcTory 71111110 selected file ory of the instrument will be FILE UF_00O1 usr replaced by the data on the disk Save important data to a disk file before doing the an optional hard Load operation disk has been installed or an optional SCSI device has been connected the appropriate device must be selected here For details on directory file selection see page 151 PAGE CONTROL NEXT Select a Load method
311. e 93 Full WEE 94 Contents Creating Plug in Custom Voices 100 MIDI Functions nere 168 Voice Editing S 102 System Settings 175 Native System Parameter Editing 105 Transmit Gettinge 175 Voice Editing on a 106 Receive Settings 176 Board Custom Voice 108 E eio tet ore terga eta 177 Song Creator E 110 Chord Detect 177 Track Setting for Recording Storing the MIDI Settings 177 Multi Track Recording 112 Settings sss 178 Track Setting for Recording Installing Optional Hardware 180 Quick Recording 113 Optional Plug in Board Installation 181 Song Edit Functions Multi Track Recording 114 Optional Hard Disk Installation 184 Song Setup Multi Track Recording 115 Optional SIMM Installation 185 Step Recording Multi Track Recording 116 Troubleshooting 188 Chord Step Quick Recording 122 Index oen reni nn rne 190 Style Creator
312. e accus tomed to playing the keyboard part in C To match up the keys set the Master Transpose to 0 the Keyboard Transpose to 2 and the Song Transpose to 3 This brings the keyboard part up and the song data down to your comfortable singing key Reference Mixing Console Effect Type Settings With the digital effects built into the 9000Pro you can add ambiance and depth to your music in a variety of ways such as adding reverb that makes you sound like you are playing in a concert hall for a full rich sound MIXING CONSOLE 405 3 TYPE Select the desired block Effect Block EFFECTBLOCK TYPE Halli 1 CHORUS 2 Chorus1 Phaser 54 1 Flanger1 Flanger2 105 LEFT TYPE Stage1 Assigns a specific effect to the currently selected Effect Block Note that the con tents of the Type List may be different according to the selected Effect Block MIXING CONSOLE Select this to call up the dis play for parameter settings Note that the contents of the Parameter display may be different according to the selected Effect Type desired parameter group The lower parameter group is available when the SLOW FAST button is turned on The 9000Pro has 9 independent digital signal processing DSP blocks for effects plus the Vocal Harmony processor Each DSP block applies to a specific part or portion of the 9000P
313. e at Multi Pad Bank number the currently set tempo eA Galaxy EP _ a Sen STOP M PAD BANK 1 60 or four Multi Pads at the same time BANK VIEW Pressing the pad during its playback will stop playing and begin playing from the again 2 sone nz 2 Press any of the Multi Pads Ei wore STOP M PAD BANK 1 60 e Th t t f Mi lti The corresponding phrase in this case for Pad 4 starts p ee playing back in its entirety as soon as the pad is pressed 2222 back once and stop when they The Multi Pad function provides two different ways to ee stop in the middle of the phrase press the STOP button To stop all pads press and release the STOP button Ge GE To stop specific pads simultaneously hold down the Bank 01 58 Phrases Bank 59 MIDI messages STOP button and press the pad or pads you wish to E stop page 158 gt Turn AUTO ACCOMPANIMENT on page 20 2 Play a chord with your left hand and press any of the Multi 5 The Chord Match on off status depends on the selected Multi Split Point Pad Bank o EH Auto Accompaniment section moro In this example the phrase for Pad 1 will be transposed into F major before playi
314. e on page 101 BOARD CUSTOH VOICE BACK UP Some Plug in Boards eg the PLG100 DX and the PLG100 VL do not support this func tion even though the Board Custom Voices are available Board Custom Voice data is in volatile memory and will be Lost when the Power is turned off The BACKUP function saves a copy of the data to the internal flash memory which is retained when the power is of f Select the backup slot then press EXECUTE ee Press this to execute the Backup operation CUSTOM VOICE MEMORY EXECUTE b Select the desired board Troubleshooting when using the Plug in Boards General information on how to use the Plug in Voices is given on pages 42 43 64 69 and 100 108 This section explains some important details concerning the Plug in Boards that are not covered in these pages E Using the VL Plug in voices with Harmony function page 164 If you are using one of the VL Plug in Boards or a monophonic Plug in voice the Harmony effect cannot be used as normal It is because this type of voice cannot be played polyphoni cally For example when the Plug in voice using the PLG150 VL board is selected as the Right 1 voice and Harmony Assign is set to R1 the following problem happens Main note you play This note does not sound Harmony note s Only this note or one of these notes sounds with the Right 1 voice An alternate solution
315. e x 1 Sampling DSP1 Dry Wet x x x x x D D D Mi Vocal Harmony Type x x 1010 x Mic ting Sampling DSP2 On Off x x x D D D Vocal Harmony Effect Parameter x x Mic Sampling DSP2 Insertion Type x x Jojo x x x Harmony Volume1 2 Setting Sampling DSP2 Effect parameter x x x x x Vocal Harmony Effect Parameter X x x Mic Harmony Panpot1 2 Setting Sampling DSP2 Fast Slow x x x x x D Vocal Harmony Effect Parameter x x x x x Mic Sampling DSP2 Dry Wet x x x x D Harmony Detune 1 2 Setting Vocal Harmony Effect Parameter Mic Sampling DSP3 On Off x x x D D D Harmony Pitch To Note x X xX Setting Sampling DSP3 Insertion Type x x x 010 x x x Vocal Harmony Effect Parameter Mic Harmony Pitch To Note Part X exc aes ae gx x x Setting Sampling DSP3 Effect Parameter x x x x x D D D Mic Vocal Harmony Gender Type x x D D 5 Sampling DSP3 Fast Slow x x x x x g Setting Appendix Anhang Annexe Parameter Chart Parameter Tabelle Tahleau des param tres a x x 2 8 8 3 8 8 8 3 5 5 58 2 5 5 5 38 8 ra 2 s o ZS 8185 4812 s
316. earing Wave data 87 CUSTOM VOICE EASY EDIT EDIT Editing various parameters related to tone generation e g Filter EG 93 STORE CLEAR Naming Storing Clearing Custom voice data 92 FULL EDIT VOICE Editing various parameters e g Initial Touch Curve Scale Curve 94 E1 WAVEFORM Editing various parameters related to Waveform 95 EZ EG Editing various parameters related to EG Envelope Generator 96 E3 FILTER Editing various parameters related to Filter 97 e E amp LFO Editing various parameters related to LFO 98 VOICE SET Editing various parameters related to Voice Set 99 STORE CLEAR Naming Storing Clearing Custom voice data 92 Basic Operation Function Tree Button Controller LCD title Function See pages 10 DIGITAL STUDIO SOUND CREATOR PLUG IN VOICE VOICE EDIT BOARD VOICE Selecting a Board Voice on which the Plug in Custom Voice editing is based 102 ET EG VIB Editing various parameters related to tone generation e g Filter EG 103 E2 CTRL Editing various parameters related to tone generation e g Initial 103 Touch Sensitivity etc NATIVE PRM Editing various parameters which are native to the installed Plug in Board 104 VOICE SET Editing various part parameters related to Voice Set 104
317. ecautions should always be followed These precautions include but are not limited to the following 1 e Read all Safety Instructions Installation Instructions Spe cial Message Section items and any Assembly Instructions found in this manual BEFORE making any connections including con nection to the main supply 2 Do not attempt to service this product beyond that described in the user maintenance instructions All other servicing should be referred to qualified service personnel 3 Main Power Supply Verification Yamaha products are manufactured specifically for the supply voltage in the area where they are to be sold If you should move or if any doubt exists about the supply voltage in your area please contact your dealer for sup ply voltage verification and if applicable instructions The required supply voltage is printed on the name plate For name plate location please refer to the graphic found in the Special Mes sage Section of this manual 4 DANGER Grounding Instructions This product must be grounded and therefore has been equipped with a three pin attach ment plug If this product should malfunction the ground pin pro vides a path of low resistance for electrical current reducing the risk of electrical shock If your wall socket will not accommodate this type plug contact an electrician to have the outlet replaced in accordance with local electrical codes Do NOT modify the plug or change the plug to a diffe
318. ed Analog 3 Hi Hat Pedal Stereo 45 A A 2 Tom Analog 3 Tom Analog 3 Tom Brush 3 Low Tom Stereo 46 2 1 Hi Hat Open Analog Hi Hat Open 3 Hi Hat Open Stereo 47 B B 2 Tom Analog 4 Tom Analog 4 Tom Brush 4 Mid Tom L Stereo 48 2 3 Tom Analog 5 Tom Analog 5 Tom Brush 5 Mid Tom H Stereo 49 CH 2 C 3 Crash Analog Crash Analog Hand Cymbal Crash Cymbal 1 Stereo 50 D 210 3 Tom Analog 6 Tom Analog 6 Tom Brush 6 High Tom Stereo 51 D 2108 3 Hand Cymbal Short Ride Cymbal 1 Stereo 52 2 3 Chinese Cymbal Stereo 53 F 2 3 Ride Cymbal Cup Stereo 54 FR 2 FR 3 55 2 G Splash Cymbal Stereo 56 GH 2 Gt 3 Cowbell Analog Cowbell Analog 57 A 2 A 3 Hand Cymbal 2 Crash Cymbal 2 Stereo 58 2 3 59 B 2 3 Hand Cymbal 2 Short Ride Cymbal 2 Stereo 60 C 3 C 4 61 08 3 CH 4 62 D 310 4 Conga Analog H Conga Analog H 63 D 3 D 4 Conga Analog M Conga Analog M 64 3 4 Conga Analog L Conga Analog L 65 F 3 4 66 FR 3 FR 4 67 G 3 G 4 68 Gt 3 GH 4 69 A 4 70 At 3 AR 4 Maracas 2 Maracas 2 71 B 3 B 4 72 C 4 C 5 73 CH 4 C 5 74 D 410 5 75 D 4 D 5 Claves 2 Claves 2 76 E 4 E 5 77 F 4 F 5 78 FR 4 FR 5 Scratch H 2 Scratch H 2 79 G 4 G 5 Scratch L 2 Scratch L 2 80 G 4 G 5 2 81 A 4 A 5 2 82 At 4 A 5 83 B 4 B 5 84 C 5 C 6 85 8 5 C 6 866 D 5 6 87 D 5 0 6 88 5 6 89 F 5 6 90 Fe 5 F 6 91 G 5 8 6 1 Note coup e les notes ma
319. ed menu e Internal hard disk drive optional installed See page 184 for details on hard disk installation Select this to display the property of the selected file The operations for each function corresponding to step 3 are covered in the following explanations The Disk mode has the following display pages LOAD FROM DISK Loading data from a disk to Flash ROM 152 SAVE TO DISK Saving data from Flash ROM to 153 COPY FILE FD Copying files amp copying floppy 154 BACK UP RESTORE Backing up restoring the data in Flash ROM 154 CONVERTER Converting PSR 8000 format files to 9000Pro format files 155 EDIT FILE Renaming deleting disk files sese 155 EDIT DIRECTORY Renaming deleting creating directories 156 FORMAT Formatting a dek 156 CHECK DISK Checking a disk tie cheers 157 Before going on to the explanations of the above functions make sure to read through the instructions on Basic Operation and Selecting Directories Files below The follow ing explanations apply to the Plug in Manager function page 66 Style Manager func tion page 74 Disk Song file selection page 78 and other disk related functions as well as the Disk SCSI functions described in this chapter R
320. eference 125 891 149 Disk SCSI Operations Basic Operation Directory File Selection wore J Selecting files rer The 9000Pro provides three ways to select files SINGLE MULTI and ALL names can be displayed If the When set to SINGLE you can select only one file number of files or directories e When set to ALL you can select all files Giles IME 291 STAN e When set to MULTI you can select files listed consecutively For more information about MULTI see the example Style Manager below d 7 Select SINGLE EI LOAD STYLE INTO FLASH ROH EI LOAD STYLE INTO FLASH ROH Bef Select the file to be loaded PROPERTY gt Select the file to be loaded PROPERTY gt Before using Press NEXT to conti Press NEXT to continue H D MULTI you Il have to DEVICE FDO o DEVICE FD n DIRECTORY listen DIRECTORY 7 specify the first file FILE SBTSTO STY LISTER using SINGLE FUSION3 STY FUSIONBD STY JUNGLE STY ORCH_BLD STY E3 RSHFFLE3 STV ORCH_BLD STY E3 RSHFFLE3 STV 4 Select the last file in the group All files between this 2 Select a file For MULTI this will be the first and the file selected in step 2 will be selected file in the group of files to be selected To cancel Multi file selection select SINGLE by pressing the C
321. en play a key on the left side of the split point to start the accompaniment and recording at the same time Press the SYNC START button to enable synchronized standby 1 Play a key on the right side of the split point to start recording 2 Play a key on the left side of the split point to start the accompaniment gt 9 Stop recording di n When you finish playing press the START STOP button If you have set the accompaniment tracks to REC in step 5 above you can stop recording by pressing the ENDING button If you press the ENDING button recording will stop automatically after the ending section has finished gt 0 Press the START STOP button to hear your newly recorded performance Repeat step 5 9 as needed gt 1 Save the recorded data to the disk Insert a blank recordable disk into the disk drive and follow the instructions in the illustration below PAGE CONTROL GIT K 29 MULTI MEAD 01 FES 01 SONG NAHE NEHSONG HID 2 DELETE DEVICE FD DEVICE DIRECTORY DIRECTORY Ko d Press this button to execute the save oper CONTENTS ation No file gmj Pressing the REHEARSAL LCD button before recording lets you practice the part to be recorded This is particularly convenient for mastering parts for punch in recording before you actually record them Turn the m
322. ency 0 00Hz 39 7Hz 0 127 table 1 g 1 LFO Frequency 0 00Hz 39 7Hz 0 127 table 1 2 LFO Depth 0 127 0 127 2 LFO Depth 0 127 0 127 3 3 Phase Shift Offset 0 127 0 127 4 4 Feedback Level 63 63 1 127 5 5 6 EQ Low Frequency 32Hz 2 0kHz 4 40 table 3 6 EQ Low Frequency 32Hz 2 0kHz 4 40 table 3 7 EQ Low Gain 12 412dB 52 76 7 EQ Low Gain 12 412dB 52 76 8 EQ High Frequency 500Hz 16 0kHz 28 58 table 3 8 EQ High Frequency 500Hz 16 0kHz 28 58 table 3 9 EQ High Gain 12 412dB 52 76 9 EQ High Gain 12 12dB 52 76 10 Dry Wet D63 gt W D W D lt W63 1 127 10 Dry Wet D63 gt W D W D lt W63 1 127 H 11 EQ Mid Frequency 100Hz 10 0kHz var ins1 4 block 14 54 table 3 11 Stage 3 4 5 6 4 6 12 EQ Mid Gain 12 12dB var ins1 4 block 52 76 12 13 EQ Mid Width 1 0 12 0 var ins1 4 block 10 120 13 LFO Phase Difference 180deg 180deg resolution 3deg 4 124 14 14 15 15 16 16 DISTORTION ROTARY SPEAKER variation Insertion1 4 block MSB 69 LSB DISTORTION MSB 73 LSB 0 OVERDRIVE ROTARY SPEAKER variation Insertion1 4 block MSB 69 LSB OVERDRIVE variation insertion block MSB 74 No Parameter Display Value See Table Control Parameter Display Value See Table Control 1 LFO Frequenct 0 0 39 7Hz 0 127 g 1 Drive 0 127 0 127 g 2 LFO Depth 0 127 0 127 2 EQ Low Frequency 32Hz 2 0kHz 4 40 table 3 3 3 EQ Low Gain 12 4 12dB 52 76 4 4 LPF Cutoff 1 0k Thru 34 60 table 3 5 5 Output Level 0 127 0 127 6 EQ
323. ency Offset 0 127 0 127 e 4 EQ High Gain 12 412dB 52 76 3 Resonance 1 0 12 0 10 120 5 4 6 5 7 6 EQ Low Frequency 32Hz 2 0kHz 4 40 table 3 8 7 EQ Low Gain 12 12dB 52 76 9 8 EQ High Frequency 500 2 16 0 2 28 58 table 3 10 9 EQ High Gain 12 12dB 52 76 10 Dry Wet D63 gt W D W D lt W63 1 127 11 12 11 Drive 0 127 var ins1 4 block 0 127 13 14 15 16 AUTO WAH vai insertion block MSB 78 LSB 0 16 No Parameter Display Value See Table Control TOUCH WAH 2 variation insertion block MSB 82 LSB 8 1 LFO Frequency 0 00Hz 39 7Hz 0 127 table 1 TOUCH WAH ODRV variation Insertion1 4 block MSB 82 LSB 2 17 18 19 2 LFO Depth 0 127 0 127 No Parameter Display Value Table Control 3 Cutoff Frequency Offset 0 127 0 127 e 1 Sensitive 0 127 0 127 4 Resonance 1 0 12 0 10 120 2 Cutoff Frequency Offset 0 127 0 127 5 3 Resonance 1 0 12 0 10 120 6 EQ Low Frequency 32Hz 2 0kHz 4 40 table 3 4 7 EQ Low Gain 12 412dB 52 76 5 8 EQ High Frequency 500Hz 16 0kHz 28 58 table 3 6 EQ Low Frequency 32Hz 2 0kHz 4 40 table 3 9 EQ High Gain 12 1298 52 76 7 EQ Low Gain 12 120B 52 76 10 Dry Wet D63 gt W D W D lt W63 1 127 8 EQ High Frequency 500Hz 16 0kHz 28 58 table 3 9 EQHigh Gain 12 12dB 52 76 11 Drive 0 127 var ins1 4 block 0 127 10 Dry Wet D63 gt W D W D lt W63 1 127 12 13 11 Drive 0 127 var ins1 4 block 0 127 14 12 EQ Low Gain distortion 12 12dB var i
324. ends on insertion 1 7 1 00 7F INSERTION EFFECT n PARAMETER6 Refer the MIDI EFFECT PARAMETER LIST SC on insertion 1 8 1 00 7F INSERTION EFFECT n PARAMETER7 Refer the MIDI EFFECT PARAMETER LIST on insertion 1 9 1 00 7 INSERTION EFFECT n 8 Refer to the MIDI EFFECT PARAMETER LIST pum on insertion 1 0A 1 00 7F INSERTION EFFECT n PARAMETERS Refer to the MIDI EFFECT PARAMETER LIST on insertion 1 1 00 7F INSERTION EFFECT PARAMETER10 Refer the MIDI EFFECT PARAMETER LIST on insertion 1 0C 1 00 7F INSERTION EFFECT n PART Part1 16 0 15 SC AD1 64 OFF 16 63 65 127 00 1 00 7F MW INSERTION CONTROL DEPTH 64 63 40 1 00 7 BEND INSERTION CONTROL DEPTH 64 63 40 OF 1 00 7F CAT INSERTION CONTROL DEPTH 64 63 40 10 1 00 7F AC1 INSERTION CONTROL DEPTH x 64 63 40 11 1 00 7F AC2 INSERTION CONTROL DEPTH x 64 63 40 TOTAL SIZE 12 20 1 00 7F INSERTION EFFECT 11 Refer the MIDI EFFECT PARAMETER LIST depends on insertion 1 21 1 00 7F INSERTION EFFECT n PARAMETER12 Refer the MIDI EFFECT PARAMETER LIST Stee on insertion 1 22 1 00 7F INSERTION EFFECT PARAMETER13 Refer to the MIDI EFFECT PARAMETER LIST Se on insertion 1 23 1 00 7F INSERTION EFFECT n PARAMETER14 Refer the MIDI EFFECT PARAMETER LIST on insertion 1 24 1 00 7F INSERTION EFFECT 15 Refer to the MIDI EFFECT
325. er than the basic ones The explanations here apply to step 5 of the Basic Procedure on page 128 B Setup Select the desired menu Voice STYLE CREATOR FULL EDIT MEASURE 1 ES set up We 9 2 COPY The another parameters can be editted by Mixing Console PART RECORD PART CATEGORY RHY 1 CHD 2 RHY 2 ron Li 1 Bass pun 1 Std Kiti CHD 1 PHR 2 Std Kit2 v D This function can be used to change the voices assigned to any of the current style s parts While the SETUP display is selected all other available parameters can be modified as required via the MIXING CONSOLE displays Setup Copy Instead of starting with all the sections and or parts from the selected original style you can copy specific parts from other sections parts of the same style or from other styles as required Edit Select the desired menu STYLE CREATOR FULL EDIT MEASURE 1 STORE CLEAR EDIT CLEAR 2 VELOCITY CHANGE Di 1 3 COPY 4 HEASURE CLEAR 5 REMOVE CONTROL EVENT REMOVE DUPLICATE NOTES PART SIZE STRENGTH RHY 1 CHD 2 amara 2 B3 taoa 2 45 43 3 si jf av Quantize Refer to page 114 e Velocity Change Boosts or cuts the velocity of all notes in the specified part by the spe
326. er you want to lock or unlock Reference SELECT This function can be used to lock the specified parameters so that they can only be changed via the direct panel controls i e not via the Registration Memory One Touch Setting Music Database MIDI sequence data etc Lock mark or unlock un mark the selected parameter 79 The 9000Pro Functions Time ea FS UTILITY CONFIGURATION LANGUAGE AUTO EXIT TIHE SCREEN SAVER TIHE The displays from which voices and styles are selected automatically change back to the previously selected display after a short time AUTO EXIT Poona when this is not set to The Auto Exit Time parameter determines the time that the Voice List or Style List displays remain before returning to the previous dis When this is set to NEVER the selected menu displays remain indefinitely until changed manually When set to a value other than NEVER the displays change according the interval selected Screen Saver Time determines how much time elapses before the Screen Saver func tion is turned on The Screen Saver can play When this is set to NEVER cels the current display and scrolls through the Voice List or Style List displays the 9000Pro s specifications To return to remain indefinitely You can manu the original display press the CLOSE ally return to the previous display by LCD button which
327. es the overall level of the selected wave to ensure that it uses the full range of digital values Press the EXECUTE LCD button to normalize the selected wave No change will occur if the selected wave already uses the full range of digital values Volume Tune HAVE EDIT HAVE 2 68 HAVEFORH HumanVoice1 1 1 SELECT HAVE 2 RESAMPLING 3 POINT 4 NORMALIZE TEMPO TUNE When this is turned OFF the pitch of wave VOLUME POARSE FIME FIXED PITCH playback will be correspond to keyboard pitch When ON the playback pitch will remain the same corresponding to the pitch of the C3 key regardless of which key is pressed Set the volume of the selected wave This can be used to tune the selected wave COARSE tunes in semitone increments over a 68 63 range and FINE tunes 1 cent increments over a 50 50 range Me HAVE EDIT HRVE 2 68 ll 1 SELECT HAVE Press this to actually set the 2 RESAMPLING wave tempo and return to 3 000 POINT the parameter display 5 OLUME TUNE UNIT JESIRED TEMPO i Kack bars Press this to cancel the operation and return to the parameter display Specify the tempo at which wort the wave should play When a LOOP is selected the Specify the number of measures the entire loop is tuned but the wave should play over portion of the loop between the
328. ese MIDI messages are out put via the MIDI OUT B termi nal and are unaffected by the MIDI Transmit settings page 175 Bank 60 factory preset of the Multi Pads can be used to call up various settings of the Scale Tuning feature page 158 This lets you change the tuning of the individual notes by simply pressing the appro priate Multi Pad Reference Quick Guide on page 30 Disk Song Playback The 9000Pro Song mode allows song data to be played back from a floppy disk an optional hard disk or an optional SCSI device This section explains some important functions of song playback that are not covered in the Quick Guide For basic information on playing songs refer to page 30 in the Quick Guide Selecting a Song The 9000Pro allows you to play back songs from disk as described in the operation steps below Keep in mind that steps 2 and 3 are identical to the other disk file selec tion operations for the instrument SONG SELECT Drop REG 001 006 M Olarabe2 mid O6praul6 mid 002 007 gt M O2sheher mid 07saraba mid 003 E 7 O3puck mid O8dancin mid Od4etud15 mid 09vals12 mid 1 Insert the floppy disk containing the files shown below into the floppy disk drive and press the SONG button 005 8 010 A 4 O5syiphe mid 10paspie mid
329. et 0 113 71 30 Neo WarmPad 0 115 89 10 Sax Section 0 116 66 31 Atmosphere 0 112 99 11 WoodwindEns 0 113 66 32 Xenon Pad 0 112 91 12 Alto Sax 0 112 65 33 Skydiver 0 112 101 13 Tenor Sax 0 112 66 34 Far East 0 112 97 14 BaritoneSax 0 112 67 35 Template 0 114 95 15 Rock Bari 0 113 67 36 Equinox 0 112 94 16 Oboe 0 112 68 37 Glass Pad 0 114 93 17 EnglishHorn 0 112 69 38 Fantasia 0 112 88 18 Bassoon 0 112 70 39 DX Pad 0 112 92 19 Clarinet 0 112 71 40 Symbiont 0 113 88 Flute 41 Stargate 0 114 88 1 Sweet Flute 0 114 73 42 Area 51 0 112 89 2 Sweet Pan 0 113 75 43 Dark Moon 0 113 89 3 Class Flute 0 115 73 44 lonosphere 0 115 94 4 Pan Flute 0 113 73 45 Golden Age 0 115 88 5 Flute 0 112 73 46 Solaris 0 114 94 6 Piccolo 0 112 72 47 Time Travel 0 116 88 7 EthnicFlute 0 112 75 48 Millenium 0 117 88 8 Shakuhachi 0 112 77 49 Transform 0 113 95 9 Whistle 0 112 78 50 Dunes 0 114 89 10 Recorder 0 112 74 51 Pro Heaven 0 122 88 11 Ocarina 0 112 79 52 Sunbeam 0 123 88 12 Bagpipe 0 112 109 Synthesizer Choir amp Pad 1 Oxygen 0 122 81 il Live Gospel 0 116 52 2 Matrix 0 123 81 2 Live Humm 0 118 52 3 Wire Lead 0 120 81 3 Hah Choir 0 114 52 4 Hip Lead 0 113 80 4 SweetHeaven 0 118 88 5 Hop Lead 0 117 80 5 DreamHeaven 0 121 88 6 Square Lead 0 112 80 6 Live Vocal 0 114 53 7 Saw Lead 0 112 81 7 Bah Choir 0 121 53 8 Fire Wire 0 116 81 8 Live Doo 0 117 53 9 Analogon 0 115 81 9 Live Bah 0 118 53 10 Funky Lead 0 121 81 10 Live Dao 0 119 53 11 Paraglide 0 114 84 11 Live
330. etronome on or off as required le If one of the TR11 16 is set to REC in step 5 you can start recording your keyboard per formance first and then start recording the Auto Accompani ment or rhythm To do this 1 Press the RUBATO LCD button 2 Play a key on the right side of the split point to start recording your keyboard performance 3 Play a chord on the left side of the split point to start recording the Auto Accom paniment with your key board performance Using Registration Memory page 28 One Touch Setting page 24 and Music Data base page 26 can make your recording sessions much more efficient since various settings such as voices etc can be recalled by a single button press CAUTION S While the file is being saved never eject the floppy disk or turn the power off CAUTION Please note that the recorded data will be lost if exiting from the Record mode without saving the data to disk Sampling _ u This function lets you record your own sounds via a microphone Reference on page 84 Once it is recorded the resulting sample can be played at various pitches from a keyboard Recording a Sample 1 4 Use the same operation as in Setting up page 32 5 Press the SOUND CREATOR button 0 Select SAMPLING gt 7 Select RECORDING
331. f the board First board 7 N B wy Orange or yellow Yellow or orange Colored side of cable faces inward p 1 0 Attach the Plug in board Hard disk cover to the 9000Pro 5 5777 E Black screws Bring the cover back around as shown so that the board fits in properly 11 Check that the installed Plug in board is functioning properly Turn on the power Amessage appears indicating that the installed Plug in Board is being initialized The main display then appears indicating that the board has been successfully installed If an error message appears the 9000Pro freezes after while indicating that the installation was not successful If this happens turn off the power and carefully go through the installation proce dure again If you cannot select a Plug in Voice even though no error message appears the board has proba bly not been connected If this happens turn off the power and make sure that the Plug in Board is securely connected Reference Installing Optional Hardware Optional Hard Disk Installation The hard disk used must be a 2 5 inch IDE compatible however not all such drives may be installable CAUTION When inserting hard disk unit and connecting cables make sure that you check that they are inserted and connected properly Improperly inserted hard disk unit and cables may cause faulty contacts and an electri cal short circuit
332. f used batteries promptly and as regulated by applicable laws Note In some areas the servicer is required by law to return the defective parts However you do have the option of having the servicer dispose of these parts for you Disposal Notice Should this product become damaged beyond repair or for some reason its useful life is consid ered to be at an end please observe all local state and fed eral regulations that relate to the disposal of products that contain lead batteries plastics etc NOTICE Service charges incurred due to lack of knowl edge relating to how a function or effect works when the unit is operating as designed are not covered by the manu facturer s warranty and are therefore the owners responsi bility Please study this manual carefully and consult your dealer before requesting service NAME PLATE LOCATION The graphic below indicates the location of the name plate The model number serial number power requirements etc are located on this plate You should record the model number serial number and the date of purchase in the spaces provided below and retain this manual as a permanent record of your purchase Model Serial No Purchase Date IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS INFORMATION RELATING TO PERSONAL INJURY ELECTRICAL SHOCK AND FIRE HAZARD POSSIBILITIES HAS BEEN INCLUDED IN THIS LIST WARNING When using any electrical or electronic product basic pr
333. f you wish to adjust them from the PLG150 PF use the Native Part Parameter settings display Make the desired Right 1 voice Frequency Gain in the Plug in Custom Voice Creator function Effect Type and Depth and EQ settings from the Mixing Con sole then call up the Custom Volume EQ Voice display to store the set e Volume This lets you change the volume of each part and adjust the rela tive balance among all the parts together with the Custom Voice e Panpot Positions the sound of the specified voice or track from left to right parameters in the stereo sound field e Equalizer The EQ High and EQ Low controls function in the same way as the treble and bass controls on a sound system boosting or cutting wore J the high or low frequency ranges by the specified amount Certain voices may produce excessive noise depending on Filter the Harmonic Content and or Brightness settings of the Mixing Console Filter E we As indicated in the chart above in addition to the Master Trans pose setting there are two other transpose controls Keyboard Transpose and Song Trans pose These can be used to match both the song and your keyboard performance to a cer tain key For example let s say you wish to both play and sing along with a certain recorded song The song data is in F but you feel most comfortable sing ing in D and you ar
334. fact that normally the 9000Pro keyboard controls the internal tone generator allowing the internal voices to be played directly from the keyboard This condition is referred to as Local Con trol on since the internal tone generator is controlled locally by its own keyboard Local control can be turned off however so that the keyboard does not play the internal voices but the appropriate MIDI information is still transmitted via the MIDI OUT connector when notes are played on the keyboard At the same time the internal tone generator can respond to MIDI information received on channels set to the XG GM mode via the MIDI IN connector This means that while an external MIDI sequencer for example plays the 9000Pro internal voices an external tone generator can be played from the 9000Pro keyboard Clock Receive Transpose and Thru Port Clock Determines whether the 9000Pro is controlled by its own internal clock or a MIDI clock signal received from an external device INTERNAL is the normal Clock setting when the 9000Pro is being used alone If you are using the 9000Pro with an external sequencer MIDI computer or other MIDI device and you want the 9000Pro to be synchronized to the external device set this function to EXTERNAL In the latter case the external device must be connected to the 9000Pro MIDI IN connector and must be transmitting an appropriate MIDI clock signal Transmit Clock Turns MIDI clock transmission on or off W
335. fault H H H value H 8 5 0 e 2 4 565 x D x nn 30 1 Rcv PITCH BEND x x x x x x nn 31 1 CH AFTER TOUCH CAT x x x x x x 32 1 PROGRAM CHANGE 33 1 Rev CONTROL CHANGE x x x x x x x nn 34 1 Rev POLY AFTER TOUCH PAT x x x x x x nn 35 1 Rev NOTE MESSAGE x x x OFF ON 1 36 1 Rev RPN x x x x x x x nn 37 1 Rev NRPN x x x x x x x 38 1 Rev MODULATION x x x x x x x nn 39 1 VOLUME x x x x x x x nn 3A 1 Rcv PAN x x x x x x 2 3 38 1 EXPRESSION x RE nn 3C 1 Rev HOLD1 x x x x x x x nn 3D 1 Rcv PORTAMENTO 1 Rcv SOSTENUTO X X nn 1 Rcv SOFT PEDAL x nn 40 1 Rev BANK SELECT X X x nn 41 1 00 SCALE TUNING C 64 63 40 42 1 00 SCALE TUNING C x 64 63 40 nn 43 1 00 7 SCALE TUNING D x 64 63 40 nn 44 1 00 7F SCALE TUNING D x 64 63 40 nn 45 1 00 7 SCALE TUNING E x 64 63 40 nn 46 1 00 SCALE TUNING x 64 63 40 nn 47 1 00 SCALE TUNING ER x 64 63 40 nn 48 1 00 SCALE TUNING x
336. fault values According to the Program Change for Drum Kit Drum Setup Parameters can be reset to default values Table 3 11 MIDI Parameter Change table PLUGIN BOARD XG Address Size Data Parameter Recognized Description Default H H H 70 4 nn 1 00 Part Assign Part1 16 0FF 00 OF 7F TOTAL SIZE 1 71 t mm 1 00 OF Note Filter Parti 16 TOTAL SIZE 1 tt Board type 00 PLG100 VL 02 PLG100 DX nn Serial Number mm part number 00 OF These are recognized when the corresponding board is installed Appendix Anhang Annexe 919 617 Functions of the MIDI B Port when Connected to the MFC10 Funktionen des MIDI B Ports bei Verbindung mit dem MFC10 Fonctions du port MIDI B lors de la connexion au MFC10 The MIDI port can also be used for operation with the MIDI Foot Controller Table 1 gt MIDI B IN MIDI Events Status byte 1st Data byte 2nd Data byte MFC10 channel number Remarks Status Data HEX Parameter Data HEX Parameter When n matches the MFC10 s channel When n does not match the MFC10 s number channel number Key Off 8nH n channel no kk Key no 0 127 Velocity 0 127 Handled as a message for control by the Handled as a normal Channel Mode Re MFC10 altime message Key On 9nH kk Key no 0 127 Key On w 1 127 Handled message for control by the Handled
337. fect DSP Variation POLY MONO Vocal Harmony Harmony Echo Master EQ Part EQ Touch Response Tempo Transpose Tuning Octave Pitch Bend Modulation Left Hold Auto Accompaniment Preset Flash Disk Custom Style Format Control Fingering One Touch Setting Music Database Multi Pad Song Playback Track Recording RAM Capacity 76 Keys EO G6 Weighted with Touch Response Initial After 126 Notes max 848 342 Voices 480 XG Voices 24 Drum Kits 2 SFX Kits 32 User programmable 20 10 Preset 10 User 9 Footages with Modeling Technology 3 PART RIGHT1 RIGHT2 RIGHT3 1 PART 2 PLG100 DX PLG100 VL PLG150 AN PLG150 PF PLG150 DX PLG150 VL PLG100 XG Plug in Custom Voice Creator 16bit 44 1KHz AIFF WAV Resampling Loop Point Normalize Volume Tune 1MByte 11 8sec 9M 17M 33M 65MByte 106 9 202 1 392 3 772 7sec 380sec max When 2 SIMM modules 16MB or 32MB are installed 29 Preset 4 3 User 25 Preset 4 3 User 164 Preset for Style and Song 164 Preset 10 User x 4 Blocks for R1 R2 R8 LEFT Max 3 84 Preset 10 User for Mic Line In Slow Fast for R1 R2 R3 LEFT Yes 59 Preset 10 User 17 Preset 2 Preset 2 User 5 Band 29 Part 2 Band 29 Part R1 R2 LEFT ACMPx8 SONGx16 M PAD 5 Preset 32 280 24 0 24 414 6 440 466 8Hz 1 0 41 only for Upper Wheel Wheel Yes 3 notes polyphony 125 87 Up to 1 8MByte 120 style max 66 included in the accessory disk
338. ffect e AUTO Harmony notes are automatically assigned to the R1 R2 and R3 parts in that order or priority e MULTI Multi Assign automatically assigns the 1st 2nd and 3rd added harmony notes to separate parts voices For example if the R1 and R2 parts are turned on and the STANDARD DUET type is selected then the note you play on the keyboard will be played by the R1 voice and the added harmony note will be played by the R2 voice Reference E For all voices except Organ Flutes and Plug in voices if you change the chord in your left hand while holding down a note with your right hand the pitch of the harmony note s will bend without attack to match the newly played chord When using Organ Flutes or Plug in voices with your right hand the harmony note s is retriggered with a fresh attack at a new pitch matching the newly played chord The echo tremolo and trill effects set via the Harmony Echo function may not affect the Organ Flutes sound and the Plug in voice as expected 291 163 The 9000Pro Functions Video Monitor Settings The functions on this page let you set the display characteristics for the lyrics and chords page 79 that are output to a television or video monitor connected to the VIDEO OUT jack page 13 You can set the size and color of the displayed characters as well as the color of the display backgroun
339. g 4 124 15 15 16 16 PHASER 1 chorus variation insertion block MSB 72 LSB 0 16 17 18 SYMPHONIC chorus variation insertion block MSB 68 Parameter Display Value See Table Control No Parameter Display Value See Table Control 1 LFO Frequency 0 00Hz 39 7Hz 0 127 table 1 1 LFO Frequency 0 00Hz 39 7Hz 0 127 table 1 2 Depth 0 127 0 127 2 LFO Depth 0 127 0 127 Phase Shift Offset 0 127 0 127 3 Delay Offset 0 0mS 50mS 0 127 table 2 4 Feedback Level 63 63 1 127 4 5 5 6 EQ Low Frequency 32Hz 2 0kHz 4 40 table 3 6 EQ Low Frequency 32Hz 2 0kHz 4 40 table 3 7 EQ Low Gain 12 4 12dB 52 76 7 EQ Low Gain 12 412dB 52 76 8 EQ High Frequency 500Hz 16 0kHz 28 58 table 3 8 EQ High Frequency 500 2 16 0 2 28 58 table 3 9 EQ High Gain 12 12dB 52 76 9 EQ High Gain 12 412dB 52 76 10 Dry Wet D63 gt W D W D lt W63 1 127 10 Dry Wet D63 gt W D W D lt W63 1 127 e 11 Stage 4 5 6 chorus insertion5 block 4 6 11 EQ Mid Frequency 100Hz 10 0kHz var ins1 4 block 14 54 table 3 4 12 var ins1 4 block 4 12 12 EQ Mid Gain 12 12dB var ins1 4 block 52 76 12 Diffusion mono stereo 0 1 13 EQ Mid Width 1 0 12 0 var ins1 4 block 10 120 13 14 14 15 15 16 16 ROTARY SPEAKER variation insertion block MSB 69 LSB 0 16 PHASER 2 variation Insertion1 4 block MSB 72 LSB 8 Parameter Display Value See Table Control Parameter Display Value See Table Control 1 LFO Frequ
340. g in the auto accompaniment section of the key board Refer to 136 Other Settings Highest Key setting 9 Note range Low Limit High Limit settings Retrigger Rule RTR setting 3 Accompaniment Output Since newly created style data is stored to Flash ROM any pre programmed data the selected style location will be erased and replaced by your new settings This includes the factory programmed Flash style data Flash styles through VIII If you ve deleted the factory set data you can use the Restore function page 154 to load a copy of it from the included disks page 6 Preset Style Store Flash Style Em 2 yle Creator Can be replaced by the newly created data For details about Flash ROM refer to Memory Structure on page 54 M Reference e Style Creator Basic Procedure DIGITAL STUDIO SOUND CREATOR SAMPLING CUSTOM VOICE PLUG IN VOICE DIGITAL SONG e STYLE MULTI PAD MIXING CONSOLE EFFECTS FILTER EQ TUNING Kee CA 1 Press the DIGITAL RECORDING button Y DIGITRL REC HENU SONG CREATOR STYLE CREATOR 2 Select STYLE CREATOR HULTI PAD CREATOR 3 Select these to create a style by using the preset style data as a starting point 3 Select this to create a new st
341. g the 9000Pro MIDI terminals geg Using a MIDI interface device installed in the personal computer connect the MIDI When using the 9000Pro as 16 channel multi timbral sound terminals of the personal computer and the 9000Pro soupe male 1 For the connection cable use a special MIDI cable the other MIDI device to the MIDI A IN terminal not MIDI When the computer has a MIDI interface installed connect the MIDI OUT terminal of the per 8 sonal computer to the MIDI IN terminal of the 9000Pro You can connect a MIDI device Set the HOST SELECT switch to MIDI to the MIDI B IN terminal how ever in this case the 9000Pro cannot be used as a multi tim MIDI bral sound source since the Computer sequencer software MIDI Receive Mode for the sequencer soltWalr MIDI B port page 176 cannot be set to XG GM V J MIDI OUT MIDI IN Lo d cc 17 2 MIDI IN MIDI OUT 9000Pro When using a MIDI interface with a Macintosh series computer connect the RS 422 terminal of the computer modem or printer terminal to the MIDI interface then connect the MIDI OUT terminal on the MIDI interface to the MIDI IN terminal of the 9000Pro as shown in the diagram below Set the HOST SELECT switch on the 9000Pro to MIDI
342. g up the Board Custom Voice data from Save the Plug in board to Flash ROM and saves all the Plug in Custom Voice Native System parameters and the Board Custom Voice data in Flash ROM to a disk E Delete This allows you to delete Plug in Voice data in Flash ROM The explanations here apply to step 4 on page 66 N CAUTION You can clear all the Plug in Voice parameters in Flash ROM by using this button After executing this operation the voice of the selected slot cannot be used Turn the power OFF and then turn the power ON to use this board with default settings Di DELETE PLUG IN CUSTOH VOICE Select the voice to be deleted Choose of the three _0 6150 01 methods for selecting files Press NEXT o continue See page 151 for instruc MEMORY CATEGORY VOICE tions on selecting files BIEN vt Trumpet E zc Follow the on screen instructions Flashd HuteTPumpe Flash5 VL Trumpy PAGE CONTROL Flash Flash8 Trumpet 2 BACK 41 21 11 FlugelHorn Flash 10 Flash 11 Select the voice to be deleted Reference 99 Bi Plug in Setting This lets you set other useful settings for the Plug in Board The explanations here apply to step 4 on page 66 Plug in Voices zt PLUG IN SETTING SLOT 1 SLOT 2 BORRD NRHE PLG150 UL PLG150 RN RUTO LORD OFF POLY EXPANSION SONG TG AUTO LOAD POLY EXP
343. gs or styles The maximum value is 126 the 9000Pro s maximum polyphony Please note that the polyphony of the Plug in Voices is not counted _ HETRONOME PLAY V REC VOLUME 100 This sets the metronome on or off during song playback This sets the metronome on off during song recording This sets the volume of the 9000Pro metro nome sound for recording 4 5 ea FS UTILITY CONFIGURATION LANGUAGE POLY COUNTER CLEAR Press this to reset the Poly Counter to 0 FD CACHE Setting this to ON enables the 9000Pro to read data much faster from the floppy disk This is done by use of built in cache memory When a floppy disk is inserted and this is set to ON the 9000Pro automatically loads data to the cache memory even when you play the keyboard accompaniment Multi Pads etc All data is then read directly from the cache memory rather than the disk vastly speeding up the reading of floppy disk data This allows you to set the drum voice and the velocity which will 1 HAVE DATA AUTO LOAD OFF 2 DISPLAY HIDI BANK amp PC sound when the Tap function page OFF 72 is used 3 HETRONOHE VOLUHE DA POLY COUNTER O FD CACHE ON LOCK 5 TAP COUNT PARAMETER LOCK L REVERB RETURN LEVEL V HASTER EG C CHORUS RETURN LEVEL SETTING 05 RETURN LEVEL MI ase O LINE OUT O SPLIT POINT Select a paramet
344. gy to automatically pro duce vocal harmony based on a single lead vocal In addition to straightforward harmony the 9000Pro also lets you change the apparent gender of the harmony and or lead vocal sound For example if you are a male singer you can have the 9000Pro automatically generate a two part female backup A com prehensive set of parameters gives you exceptionally precise and flexible control over the vocal harmony sound Setting Up MIC LINE IN INI OVER SIGNAL 1 2 E 4 Set the INPUT VOLUME control to MIN Set the MIC LINE panel switch to MIC 1 or MIC 2 This is a gain control for the microphone input signal The MIC 1 set ting boosts the signal while the MIC 2 setting reduces it Connect a microphone to the MIC LINE IN jack of the 9000Pro The MIC LINE jack accepts either 1 4 phone plugs or XLR connectors Adjust the INPUT VOLUME control while singing into the microphone Use the SIGNAL and OVER indicators to determine the appropriate setting With the INPUT VOLUME control at the minimum sing or talk into the microphone at the highest expected volume Gradually bring the control up toward so that the SIGNAL indi cator is lit and the OVER indicator flashes occasionally Then reduce the INPUT VOLUME just enough to keep the OVER indi cator from flashing This should be the optimum level setting To hear the microphone input make sure to set the
345. h Setting One Touch Setting is a powerful and convenient feature that automatically calls up the most appro priate panel settings voice number etc for the currently selected style with the touch of a single button x 1 Select a style For example select SWING amp JAZZ category and try out BBand Ballad on P2 2 Press one of the ONE TOUCH SETTING buttons EES Auto Accompaniment and Sync Start will automatically be turned on rn In addition various panel settings such as voices effects etc that match the Gs 22 selected style can be instantly recalled with just a single button press see page 214 3 As soon as you play a chord with your left hand the auto Di WG accompaniment starts it 4 rain Play melodies with your right hand and play various chords isses with your left hand Section gt Try out other One Touch Setting setups You can also create your own One Touch Setting setups GQ For details refer to page 73 PROGRAMMABLE ONE TOUCH SETTING Track amp Volume Control gt Turn Auto Accompaniment on and start the accompaniment page 20 The mark below the PART ON OFF button indi 2 Turn individual tracks ON or OFF muted required cales repeatedly switches among 1 Press the PART ON OFF button various
346. h limit which when reached causes this type of pitch shift This is normal D The auto accompaniment chord does not change even when a different chord is played or the chord is not recognized Are you sure you re playing on the left hand section of the keyboard You may be using single finger type fingering in the fingered mode or vice versa Use the correct type of chord fingering for the selected auto accompaniment fingering mode D The displayed disk free area value does not coincide with the actual value The displayed value is an approximate value Disk save operations particularly when saving wave data to floppy disk take a long time This is normal It takes approximately 8 minutes to save 1 megabyte of data to a floppy disk Appropriate harmony notes are not produced by the Vocal Harmony feature Make sure you are using the appropriate method to specify the harmony notes for the current Vocal Harmony mode See page 83 The voice produces excessive noise Certain voices may produce noise depending on the Harmonic Content and or Brightness settings of the Mixing Console Filter This is unavoidable due to the sound generation and processing system of the 9000Pro To avoid noise change the above mentioned settings The sound is distorted or noisy The MASTER VOLUME control may be turned up too high This may be caused by the effects Try cancelling all unnecessary ef
347. hat pressure to affect the sound in var ious ways depending on the selected voice This allows you to play with greater expressiveness and add effects with your playing technique Sustain When this Sustain feature is ON all notes played on the keyboard other than the Left part have a longer sustain The Sustain level can be adjusted via the Custom Voice Creator function page 99 DSP 4 7 and Slow Fast With the digital effects built into the 9000Pro you can add ambiance and depth to your music in a variety of ways such as adding reverb that makes you sound like you are playing ina concert hall The DSP 4 7 buttons turn independent effects on or off for the Right 1 DSP4 Right 2 DSP5 Right 3 DSP6 and Left DSP7 parts The SLOW FAST button can switch between variations of the DSP effect For exam ple this lets you change the rotating speed slow fast of the rotary speaker effect Harmony Echo See pages 35 and 164 Poly Mono This determines whether the part s voice is played monophonically only one note at a time or polyphonically up to 126 notes at a time When this is set to the Portamento effect can be used depending on the selected voice by playing legato The degree of the Portamento effect applied differs depending on the voice The Portamento Time can be adjusted from the Mixing Console page 145 Reference For details about how to select For detail
348. he MFC10 play mode on off status is retained in Flash ROM and is maintained even when the power is turned off Reference 941 177 Bi Full Setup You can create your original settings and store them as a template MIDI Functions Follow the on screen instructions to call up the template display as shown below H MFC10 WIZARD Template Choice Select one of the templates in the list Press NEXT to continue SELECT Regist Control DSP Control Hulti Percussion Aw PAGE CONTROL BACK NEXT e Assign various functions to the five Foot Conirollers H MFC10 WIZARD Foot Controller Select the desired function for each foot controller PAGE CONTROL The foot controller on HFC 10 is called 1 INT The foot controller jacks on HFC10 are called 2 5 SACK NEXT Press NEXT to continue WECKER EN OFF RIGHT 1 EXT OFF RIGHT 1 4CEXT OFF RIGHT 1 SEXT OFF RIGHT 1 DEVICE 7 PART Select the desired function to be assigned to the selected Foot Con troller Select the desired Foot Controller BACK Select the destination template H 10 WIZARD Template Presevation You can store your setup as a template Select the location for storing and press NEXT You can name your template in the next page SELECT Regist Control DSP Control Hulti Percussion PAGE CONTROL LS Cen BACK NEXT Store the
349. he MIDI channels listed below using the 9000Pro s internal tone generator Optimum compati bility with other instruments which are both XG and SFF Style File Format compatible can be achieved by using only the XG voices Part MIDI Ch Rhythm1 9 Rhythm2 10 Bass 11 Chord1 12 Chord2 13 Pad 14 Phrase1 15 Phrase2 16 Record the sections in the order listed below with a Marker Meta event at the top of each section Enter the Marker Meta events exactly as shown including upper lower case characters and spaces Also include an SFF1 Marker Meta event Sint Marker Meta event and style name Meta event at 1 1 000 the top of the sequence track and the GM on Sys Ex message FO 7E 7F 09 01 F7 Timing in the chart is based on 480 clocks per quarter note 1 1 000 is clock 0 of the first beat of the first measure The data from 1111000 through 1 4 479 is the Initial Setup and 21000 through the end of Ending is the Source Pattern The timing of the Fill In AA and subsequent Marker Meta events will depend on the length of each section Reference Make sure that the sequencer ECHO function is ON and the 9000Pro LOCAL ON OFF page 175 is turned OFF Marker Timing Meta Contents Comments Event 1 1 000 SFF1 1111000 Style Name Sequence Track Meta Event 2 1111000 Sint no 1 1 00
350. he basic material for the Plug in voices as played from the 9000Pro Among the Board voices are a special set of voices Board Custom voices which can be edited from a computer connected to the 9000Pro Each Plug in Board comes with its own special editing soft ware to be used as a plug in with XGworks and the Board Custom voices are edited with this software However if you want to keep any edits that you make to the voices you must save the data to the 9000Pro with the Board Custom Voice Backup function since any data in the RAM memory on the board is lost as soon as the power is turned off Board Preset Voices These Board Voices are pre programmed to the Plug in Board and cannot be edited from a computer connected to the 9000Pro Plug in Custom Voices Before the Board voices can be selected and played from the 9000Pro they are converted to Plug in voices By using the Custom Voice Creator function you can edit the various parameters of the Plug in voices and create your own original voices About the Plug in Boards Plug in Boards give you an enormous amount of additional sonic flexibility and power When installed they work seamlessly and transparently within the system of the 9000Pro meaning that you can use their sounds and functions just as if they were built right into the 9000Pro at the factory The boards that are available for and can be installed to the 9000Pro are described below These boards are not simply a
351. he left side harmony notes to a single note melody of the keyboard from the split N played on the right side of the keyboard When MULTI ASSIGN is selected Multi Assign automatically assigns notes played simultaneously on the right hand section of the keyboard to separate parts voices The number of parts which can be assigned depends on the number of parts turned ON via the PART ON OFF buttons If three parts are turned on then up to three voices can be assigned if two parts are turned on then only two voices can be assigned For example if the R1 R2 and R3 parts are turned on and you play and hold three successive notes the first note will be played with the R1 voice the sec ond note with the R2 voice and the third note with the voice When ECHO is selected An echo effect is applied to the note played on the keyboard at the currently set tempo When TREMOLO is selected A tremolo effect is applied to the note played on the keyboard at the currently set tempo e When TRILL is selected Two notes held on the keyboard are played alternately at the currently set tempo About ASSIGN ST Harmony is only applied to the R1 part If R1 is OFF there will be mony effect Harmony is only applied to the R2 part If R2 is OFF there will be mony effect Harmony is only applied to the R3 part If R3 is OFF there will be no Har mony e
352. hen INDIVIDUAL is selected you can set the individual part voice to on or off 157 Reference The 9000Pro Functions Footswitch1 Footswitch2 This determines the functions of footswitches plugged into the rear panel FOOT PEDAL SWITCH 1 and FOOT PEDAL SWITCH 2 jacks and to which of the 9000Pro voices the foot switches will apply FOOT PEDAL SWITCH 1 SWITCH 2 VOLUME 2 CONTROLLER FOOT CONTROLLER PANEL CONTROLLER SONGRCHP Pan LEFT R1 R2 R3 v 2 1 SUSTAIN F 3 sH2 stowrast v v v v Ls TYPE When the Sustain Soste Select one of nuto Soft Glide Porta the footswitch 02 SOSTENUTO mento or DSP slow fast de ior erung selected you Sie set the corresponding parts SE Em v 3232 on or off as Functions controlled by the footswitch SUSTAIN Standard sustain footswitch operation When the footswitch is pressed notes played have a long sustain Releasing the footswitch immediately stops damps any sustained notes SOSTENUTO If you play a note or chord on the keyboard and press the footswitch while the note s are held those notes will be sustained as long as the footswitch is held as if the damper pedal had been pressed but all subse quently played notes will not be sustained This makes it possible to sustain a chord for example while other notes are played staccato SOF
353. hen set to OFF no MIDI clock or START STOP data is transmitted Receive Transpose When the RECEIVE TRANSPOSE parameter is set to OFF note data received by the 9000Pro is not transposed and when set to ON the received note data is transposed according to the current 9000Pro song transpose setting e Thru See page 173 Message Switch The SYS EX TRANSMIT parameter turns MIDI transmission of MIDI system exclusive message data on or off The SYS EX RECEIVE parameter turns MIDI reception of MIDI exclusive data generated by external equip ment on or off The CHORD SYS EX TRANSMIT parameter turns MIDI transmission of MIDI chord exclusive data chord detect root and type on or off The CHORD SYS EX RECEIVE parameter turns MIDI reception of MIDI chord exclusive data generated by external equipment on or off Transmit Settings This display page allows you to specify which 9000Pro voices and parts will be transmitted via which MIDI channels there are 32 MIDI channels and to specify which types of data will be transmitted for each channel The explanations here apply to step 5 of the Basic Procedure on page 174 The Tx MONITOR transmit monitor indicates when data is Channels 1 16 are handled being transmitted on any of the with the MIDI A terminals or 32 MIDI channels The dots cor the TO HOST terminal chan responding to each channel 1 nels 1 16 of a second MIDI 32 fash briefly Whenever any p
354. hm 1 style and take the chord pattern from the Pop Rock style combining Rhythm 2 2002 the various elements to create style Phrase 1 Bass Phrase 1 Phrase 2 Chord 1 d Phrase 2 aa Chord2 8Beat 2 Pad Rhythm 4 Phrase 1 Rhythm 2 Phrase 2 Bass Chord 1 Chord 2 Pad Store as Custom Style Phrase 1 to Flash ROM Phrase 2 Recording styles Full Edit page 132 When recording a song you record your keyboard performance to the 9000Pro as MIDI data Recording styles however is done in a different way Here are some of the aspects in which style recording differs from song recording Using Preset Styles As shown in the chart at right when you select the preset flash style that is the closest to the type of style you wish to create the preset style data will be copied to a special memory location for recording miu m NW Replacing Preset Style You create record your new original style by adding or deleting data from Wh SE 8Beat 1 the memory location All parts with the exception of the rhythm track of Rhythm 2 reset styles must be cleared before recording page 133 Bass ass Sape WWE WEN oes 2 Loop Recording Chord Pad Chord 2 Replacing Pad Auto accompaniment repeats the accompaniment patterns of several mea sures in a loop and style recording is also done using loops For example Phrase if you start recording with a two measure main section the
355. iagram below illustrates how the 9000Pro handles the copy paste operation Event data Clipboard y Event data at the new location Copy Copy Reference Song Creator The clipboard is a temporary holding place for the copied data as done in Steps 3 and 4 above Once the data is in the clipboard and as long as no other data has been copied there the data can be pasted to other locations as many times as desired Keep in mind that copying data automatically erases whatever data was originally in the clipboard The data at the original location in the song remains intact Event Filter This function lets you select the event types that appear on the editing displays To select an event for display place a checkmark in the box next to the event name To fil ter out an event type so that it does not appear on the list remove the checkmark so that the box is empty See below for details 89 PSR9000 Pro mid 89 PSR9000 Pro mid EVENT FILTER EVENT FILTER Enters checkmarks Select the event boxes to be into all boxes displayed Note Selects only note data Control Change 2 checkmarks for all Ripr ognan chaise other boxes are after Touch removed system Exclusive Message FO Event FF GM Reverses the check Time Signature mark settings for all Tempo boxes In other words this enters checkmarks to all boxes that were previou
356. ic Operation 9v 47 Direct Access Chart Display based Controls DIRECT ACCESS Number Function of the accessed LCD display Operation button listed below See pages 1 Mixing Console Volume EQ settings Main MAIN VARIATION A 144 2 Volume EQ settings Accompaniment MAIN VARIATION B 144 3 Volume EQ settings Song tracks 1 8 MAIN VARIATION C 144 4 Volume EQ settings Song tracks 9 16 MAIN VARIATION D 144 5 Filter settings Main FILL IN amp BREAK lt 144 6 Filter settings Accompaniment FILL IN amp BREAK C9 144 7 Filter settings Song tracks 1 8 FILL IN A BREAK gt 144 8 Filter settings Song tracks 9 16 FILL IN amp BREAK 4 144 9 Effect Depth settings Main VOCAL HARMONY MIC SETUP 144 10 Effect Depth settings Main ENDING I 144 11 Effect Depth settings Accompaniment ENDING II 144 12 Effect Depth settings Song tracks 1 8 ENDING III 144 13 Effect Depth settings Song tracks 9 16 FADE IN OUT 144 14 Effect Type settings VOICE EFFECT DSP 4 7 145 15 Effect Type settings Microphone Sound VOCAL HARMO
357. ill be cancelled The tempo of the song can be set as required via the Data dial and all other available parameters can Tempo can be editted by TEMPO dial However in the case of Volume be modified as required Mixing conse ne editted by and Tempo data any Volume and Tempo changes in the mid dle of the song are applied as an offset to the initial Setup via the MIXING CON SOLE displays DSP SETTING oc DSP 05 4 DSPS DSPE Press this to record the settings to the current song Assign the DSP effect ni n2 Data setting block 4 7 to any of the ep TRS d current songs tracks Lr ML LP ALLE M vie vider Reference Song Creator Step Recording Multi Track Recording The Step Recording feature makes it possible to record notes with absolutely precise timing The explanations here apply to step 5 on page 111 Entering the Note Event This section explains how to step record notes using three specific examples Example 1 MULTI 01 EES 01 Reso 384 ppq SONG NAHE NEHSONG HID REC HODE REPLACE Press NEXT when settings are ready PARTE press START to begin SEL Rehearsal recording R1 R1 R1 R1 wt MUTE MUTE E HUTE Ca MUTE 001 1 000 TR HEAS BEAT Make sure this is sele
358. ilter Cutoff Frequency x D x x D 15H rH mmH x 16H rH mmH Drum EG Attack Rate x x x 17H rH mmH Drum EG Decay Rate x x x x D 18H rH mmH Drum Pitch Coarse x x x D 19H rrH mmH Drum Pitch Fine D 1AH rrH mmH Drum Level D 1CH rrH mmH Drum Pan x 1DH rH mmH Drum Reverb Send Level x x x D 1EH rrH mmH Drum Chorus Send Level x x x D 1FH rrH mmH Drum Variation Send Level x x D NRPN MSB 14H 1FH for drums message is accepted as long as the Data Entry LSB Ignored lt Table 1 1 2 gt NRPN VocalHarmony is set with a drum voice NRPN DATA ENTRY Paramei r Recognized MSB LSB MSB LSB XG GM Keyboard R1 R2 Left Acmp 00H 00 mmH Harmony Mute x x x x x x 00H 01H Harmony Mode D D 00H 02H mmH Vocoder Mode Parameter o x x x x D D 00H 03H mmH Chromatic Mode Parameter x x x x D D 00H 04H mmH Detune Mode Parameter x x x x D D 00H 05H mmH Chordal Mode Parameter x x x x x x 01H 1AH mmH Detune Modulation x D D 02H 00H mmH Harmony Gender Type D D 02H 01H mmH Auto Upper Gender Threshold x D D D D D
359. ings Quick Guide on page 35 The explanations here apply to step 3 of the Basic Procedure on page 158 n 01 03 oa 05 11 12 OCTAVE STANDARD DUE a FULL CHORD ROCK DUET COUNTRY DUET 06 COUNTRY TRIO Le ene 02 BLOCK 08 4 HAY CLOSE1 09 4 HAY CLOSE2 10 4 HAY OPEN FS HARMONY ECHO Assign the Harmony effect to the various parts as listed below Determines the lowest velocity value at which the harmony note will sound The higher the value the harder the keyboard must be played to apply the Harmony effect HOT VOLUME SPEED ASSIGN ONLY 1 5 13 STRUM 14 ASSIGN 15 ECHO 16 TREMOLO 1 TRILL TYPE H When set to the Harmony effect is applied only to the note that belongs to a chord played on the left side of the keyboard from the split point This setting is not available when the Multi Assign Echo Tremolo or Select a Harmony type Trill type is selected See below for details Adjust the speed of the echo tremolo trill effect Set the volume of the Harmony effect are selected 15 through 17 About the Harmony types e When a Harmony type STANDARD DUET through STRUM is selected Split Point A point controls the harmony This parameter is active when any of the echo based effects from the split point This type automatically adds one or more A chord played on t
360. ions The operations for each function corresponding to step 4 are covered in the following Refer to Quick Guide on page 40 for details explanations Recording a Sample Quick Guide on page 40 Refer to page 40 for instructions on recording a sample The following display will be shown in step 9 on page 40 99 RECORDING Specify the key range You can also set the range by holding DIRECT START END and pressing the appropriate keys The pitch will not be changed if FIXED PITCH is Press NEXT to continue cs 4 DIRECT You can set the START END KEY by pressing the desired START KEY END KEY FIXED PITCH key while holding either of the LCD buttons 4v Jo v Set the key range to which the new sample will be assigned Set this parameter to ON if you want the sample to play back at the same pitch over the entire key range of the 9000Pro When FIXED PITCH above is set to OFF the new recorded sample will be assigned to C3 Notice that the pitch and speed of the sample follows the keyboard Playing keys lower than the original results in a lower pitch and slower speed playing higher keys results in higher pitch and faster speed L Eege Pitch speed of Pitch speed of sample goes down sample goes up START KEY Original key Reference END KEY
361. j oj ojoj j oj o o o ojojo 10 Obosyn 33 106 11 SilverSyn 33 102 12 AnaPercSyn 33 23 13 Babalog 33 25 14 Celloid 33 83 15 Klaqak 33 57 16 MWh Morph 33 70 17 BuzzWheel 33 15 18 Jason Mod 33 69 19 Square Lead 33 19 20 Phasepipe 33 12 X Bass 1 1 Finger Bass 33 0 26 2 Damp Bass 33 0 31 3 Acid Bass 33 0 42 4 Dirty Bass 33 0 53 5 Lead Bass 33 0 18 6 Parasynbass 33 0 52 7 Square Bass 33 0 43 8 SynkBass 33 0 55 9 Tek Bass 33 0 49 10 Tranz Bass 33 0 50 XI Bass 2 1 VL BamBass 33 0 54 2 Dance Bass 33 0 51 3 Fruit Bass 33 0 41 4 Box Bass 33 0 39 5 Birdland 33 0 29 6 Talk Bass 33 0 6 7 Bamboo Bass 33 0 54 8 Buzz Bass 33 0 37 9 Clav Bass 33 0 7 10 Dragon Bass 33 0 7 Appendix Anhang Annexe Plug in Voice List Plug In Stimmenliste Liste des voix plug in 150 Plug in Voice List Category voice Name MSB amp LSB Program Category Voice Name MSB LSB 1 16 2001 36 0 2 1 Killer 36 2 0 17 Ruff 36 0 4 2 RealMini 36 0 41 18 Grumpy 36 2 31 3 5th Pad 36 2 1 19 Cosmic 36 2 32 4 Lights 36 2 2 20 VA Pig 36 2 33 5 Metallic 36 2 3 IV 6 Hyperbolic 36 1 127 1 Dirty Saw 36 2 34 7 Cactus 36 2 4 2 OldOkt
362. ke sure the voice volumes are set at appropriate levels page 25 The Local Control function could be turned off Make sure Local Control is turned on page 175 The MASTER VOLUME controls or foot volume are turned all the way down Set the MASTER VOLUME controls and foot volume to a reasonable listening level Are the desired parts turned on PART ON OFF button page 57 A pair of headphones is plugged into the PHONES jack Unplug the headphones A plug is inserted in the LOOP SEND jacks Unplug the LOOP SEND jacks Is the Footswitch connected to the FOOT VOLUME connector The FADE IN OUT button is on and has reached the end of its duration muting the sound Press the FADE IN OUT button so that its indicator goes out Check whether the external speaker is connected properly Not all simultaneously played notes sound Auto Accompaniment seems to skip when the keyboard is played You are probably exceeding the maximum polyphony of the 9000Pro The 9000Pro can play up to 126 notes at the same time including voice R2 voice R3 voice L auto accompaniment song and multi pad notes When the maximum polyphony is exceeded the earliest played notes will stop sounding letting the latest played notes sound This is referred to as last note priority The accompaniment or song does not play back even when pressing the START STOP button The Multi Pads do not play back even when one
363. keys to the left of the split point Split Point A Auto Accompaniment section Vocal Harmony with Song Playback The 9000Pro can properly play back disk songs that contain Vocal Harmony data 1 4 Use the same operation as in Playback of Song Disks on page 30 5 Turn the Vocal Harmony effect on and select a Vocal Harmony type see above 6 Press the MIC SETUP button and set the Vocal Harmony track Press the or J button to select the bottom row of controls then set the VOCODER track to the appropriate setting For details on the appropriate track number or MIDI channel used for the Vocal Harmony effect refer to the documentation included with the disk software fo Ee 7 Start the song 9 Sing into the microphone during song playback 9 Stop the song Quick Guide Reference on page 77 The 9000Pro Multi Pads can be used to play a number of short pre recorded rhythmic and melodic sequences that can be used to add impact and variety to your keyboard performances Playing the Multi Pads gt Use the M PAD BANK buttons to select Multi Pad J Bank Simply tap any of the Multi Pads at any time to play back the corresponding phras
364. listic trombone with natural Kit coe vibrato Live Brush Ste led d layed ive Brus ereo sampled drums playe SweetMuteTp Jazzy muted trumpet with natu by brush Check out toms and ral vibrato cymbals SweetFlugel Soft breathy ugelhorn with Live Cuban Stereo sampled percussion natural vibrato Live PopLtn with various playing styles Playing Different Voices with the Left and Right Hands gt Press the PART ON OFF LEFT button to turn the LEFT part ON Automatically turned on PART SELECT em 22 LEFT HOLD LEFT RIGHT1 RIGHT2 RIGHT3 SS 5 GE LOWER ON OFF UPPER 2 Select a voice group For example select STRINGS 3 Select a voice For example select Symphon Str 4 Play the voices The notes you play with your left hand sound one voice while the notes you play with your right sound a different voice or voices m m ET wor WE y The point on the keyboard that separates voice LEFT and Split Point voice RIGHT1 3 is called the Y split point Refer to page 159 for instruc tions on setting the split point Voice L Voice R1 R2 R3 Lower Upper Voices RIGHT 1 3 are meant to be played with the right hand Voice LEFT is played with the left hand Adjusting the Octave setting The UPPER
365. low the instructions in the chart below m tinue o SCH rioter a 2 fE CP E C f Edit the wave U Select the memory location for storing VOICE SIZE PAGE CONTROL Select STORE Select a Custom voice Input a voice name number destination 2 Press the NEXT button to store the voice parameters for the recorded sample as Custom voice gt 4 Press the EXIT button several times to exit from the Sam pling mode gt 5 Select the Custom voice number above and play the voice from the keyboard gt 6 Save the recorded sample wave data to disk 1 Press the DISK SCSI button to up the Save display 2 Select SAVE TO DISK 3 Call up the Custom Voice display and select the number stored in step 13 4 Save the selected Custom Voice with the sample wave data to disk a Reference on page 64 Plug in Voice related buttons A Up to two boards can be installed to the bottom panel Installing an optional Plug in Board to the 9000Pro lets you greatly expand the sonic palette of the instru ment Once you ve installed an optional Plug in Board to the 9000Pro you have instant access to a whole new set of amazing dynamic voices in addition to the built in voices of the 9000Pro Playing a Plug in Voice gt
366. lug To simply copy from the SOURCE 1 track to the DESTINA in Board TION track select COPY via the SOURCE2 LCD buttons M 2 Note Shift This allows tracks which contain data to be individually transposed up or down by a maximum of two octaves in semitone increments 88 MULTI Ed 01 BGR 01 TRACK RECORD N SET UP SAVE DELETE 1 QUANTIZE 2 TRACK The 1 8 9 16 Press this to execute the Note LCD button can be Shift operation used to switch NOTE SHIFT After execution this button between tracks 1 through 8 and tracks 9 through 16 changes to an UNDO button which can be used to undo the Note Shift operation if the results are not satisfactory the UNDO button will only remain active Adjust any track while Set the desired amount of transposition for until the next operation is per holding this button to each track note shift controls will only formed set the note shift for all appear for tracks which contain data tracks simultaneously Song Setup Multi Track Recording This function lets you assign the DSP effect block 4 7 to any of the current song s tracks Other parameters can be modified up as required via the MIXING CONSOLE display page 144 E wore 80 MULTI 11580 01 SES 01 Only one of the Setup parame ters can be recorded to each lt RECORD EDIT SAVE DELETE track and any parameter changes made in the middle of the song w
367. ly excessive force to board areas and connectors on Plug in boards hard disk SIMMs Bending or tampering with boards and connectors may lead to electric shock fire or equipment failures CAUTION 7 Before handling the Plug in boards hard disk unit SIMMs you should briefly touch the metal surface to which the Plug in board hard disk or SIMM cover is attached or other such metallic area be careful of any sharp edges with your bare hand so as to drain off any static charge from your body Note that even a slight amount of electrostatic discharge may cause damage to these components It is recommended that you wear gloves to protect your hands from metallic projections on the Plug in boards Hard disk unit SIMMs and other components Touching leads or connectors with bare hands may cause finger cuts and may also result in poor electrical contact or electrostatic damage Handle the Plug in boards Hard disk unit SIMM with care Dropping or subjecting them to any kind of shock may cause damage or result in a malfunction Be careful of static electricity There are times when static electricity affects the IC chips on the Plug in board Before you lift the optional Plug in board to reduce the possibility of static electricity touch the metal parts other than the painted area or a ground wire on the devices that are grounded Do not touch the exposed metal parts in the circuit board Touching these parts may result in a fault
368. mber in Flash ROM Follow the on screen instructions E Delete Style in Flash ROM This allows you to delete style data in Flash ROM Follow the on screen instructions Swap Style in Flash ROM This allows you to exchange the data between files in different categories numbers Follow the on screen instructions Rename Style in Flash ROM This allows you to rename the style file name Follow the on screen instructions Name entry is described on page 46 Defragment Flash ROM If you ve used the Style Manager for a while and or have loaded and manipulated a number of styles the Flash ROM may have become fragmented meaning that nor mally contiguous files have been broken up into several fragments Defragmenting the Flash ROM increases the contiguous empty space on the disk allowing you to more effectively use the remaining memory capacity To defragment the Flash ROM follow the on screen instructions The 9000Pro can load files containing Registration Memory data created on the PSR 8000 without having to convert them However please note that the five Flash styles listed in the left column below should not be deleted or replaced with differ ent styles since they are used to substitute for the corresponding PSR 8000 styles listed in the right column 9000Pro Flash Style PSR 8000 Category Number Name Category Name II 4 Analog Ballad 16 beat Analog Pop 1 6 8
369. ment Rhythm 2 main Channel 10 Track 10 d 7 Auto Accompaniment Bass Channel 11 Track 11 Auto Accompaniment Chord 1 Channel 12 Track 12 Auto Accompaniment Chord 2 Channel 13 Track 13 Auto Accompaniment Pad Channel 14 Track 14 Auto Accompaniment Phrase 1 Channel 15 Track 15 Auto Accompaniment Phrase 2 Channel 16 Track 16 As you can see it is essential to determine which data is to be sent over which MIDI channel when transmitting MIDI data page 175 What You Can Do With MIDI Record performance data 1 16 channels using the 9000 Auto Accompaniment fea tures on a external sequencer such as a personal computer After recording you can then edit the data with the sequencer then play it again on the 9000Pro playback e 9000Pro t DERE 9000Pro Set MIDI transmit settings page 175 Set Receive mode for all channels to XG GM MIDI receive settings page 176 MIDI transmit MIDI OUT gt MIDI IN BDE MDIN 4 MIDI OUT MIDI receive playback MIDI transmit MDIOUT MIDI IN BR emm lt MIDI OUT MIDI receive playback HH HH 32000 00 000 0092 0090000000000000 QY700 Personal computer Sequencer software Control the 9000Pro from an optional Yamaha MIDI Foot Controller
370. ms 0 15 table 9 14 Drive 0 127 0 127 14 Threshold 48dB 6dB 79 121 15 LPF Cuttoff 1kHz Thru 34 60 15 Ratio 1 0 20 0 0 7 table 10 16 Output Level 0 127 0 127 16 Appendix Anhang Annexe Effect Parameter List Effektparameterliste Liste des parametres d effet de voix STEREO DISTORTION variation Insertion1 4 block STEREO OVER DRIVE variation Insertion1 4 block MSB 73 LSB 8 MSB 74 LSB 8 AUTO WAH DIST AUTO WHA ODRV variation Insertion1 4 block MSB 78 LSB 1 17 MSB 78 LSB 2 18 Appendix Anhang Annexe No Parameter Display Value See Table Control No Parameter Display Value See Table Control 1 Drive 0 127 0 127 g 1 LFO Frequency 0 00Hz 39 7Hz 0 127 table 1 2 EQ Low Frequency 32 2 0kHz 4 40 table 3 2 Depth 0 127 0 127 3 EQ Low Gain 12 1208 52 76 3 Cutoff Frequency Offset 0 127 0 127 4 LPF Cuttoff 1kHz Thru 34 60 4 Resonance 1 0 12 0 10 120 5 Output Level 0 127 5 6 6 EQ Low Frequency 32Hz 2 0kHz 4 40 table 3 7 EQ Mid Frequency 100 10 0kHz 14 54 table 3 7 EQ Low 12 4 12dB 52 76 8 EQ Mid Gain 12 1208 52 76 8 EQ High Frequency 500 2 16 0 2 28 58 table 3 9 EQ Mid Width 1 12 10 120 9 EQ High Gain 12 12dB 52 76 10 Dry Wet D63 gt W D W D W63 1 127 10 Dry Wet D63 gt W D W D lt W63 1 127 11 Edge
371. ms 52 67 table 12 14 Comp Ratio 1 0 20 0 0 7 15 16 V DISTORTION HARD variation Insertion1 4 block MSB 98 LSB 0 WAH DIST TEMPO DELAY variation Insertion1 4 block V DISTORTION SOFT vari Insertion1 4 block MSB 98 LSB 2 WAH OD TEMPO DELAY variation Insertion1 4 block MSB 102 No Parameter Display Value See Table Control Parameter Display Value See Table Control 1 Overdrive 0 100 0 100 1 Delay Time 64th 3 4thx6 0 19 table 14 2 Device Transister Vintage Tube 0 4 2 Delay Feedback Level 63 63 1 127 Dist1 Dist2 Fuzz 3 Delay Mix 0 127 0 127 3 Speaker Flat Stack Combo Twin 0 5 4 Dist Drive 0 127 0 127 Radio Megaphone 5 Dist Output Level 0 127 0 127 4 Presence 0 20 0 20 6 Dist EQ Low Gain 12 1208 52 76 5 Output Level 0 100 0 100 7 Dist EQ High Gain 12 1208 52 76 6 8 UR Diffusion 1 63ms 64 0ms 127 63ms 1 127 7 9 Lag 1 63ms 64 0ms 127 63ms 1 127 8 10 Dry Wet D63 gt W D W D lt W 63 1 127 e 9 10 Dry Wet Balance D63 gt W D W D lt W63 1 127 e 11 Wah Sensitive 0 127 0 127 12 Wah Cutoff Freq Offset 0 127 0 127 11 13 Wah Resonance 1 0 12 0 10 120 12 14 Wah Release 10 680mS 52 67 13 15 14 16 15 16 V DIST HARD TEMPO DELAY variation Insertion1 4 block V DIST SOFT TEMPO DELAY variation Insertion1 4 block MSB 103 V DISTORTION HARD DELAY variation Insertion1 4 block MSB 98 LSB 1 No Parameter Display Value See Table Control V DISTORTION S
372. n For example when set to SLOT 1 For example when set to INTERNAL If you are playing back XG song data with the 9000Pro you can use an XG Plug in Board installed to Slot 1 as a W dedicated tone generator freeing up we d the polyphony of the internal tone gen N erator to be used exclusively for your Ce keyboard performance This is espe Slot 1 cially convenient when playing an U a ea Organ Flutes voice which requires Slot 2 many notes of polyphony XG song playback 16 parts Port 0 Port 1 16 parts Port 2 Slot 2 16 parts In this setup you can play back up to 48 different parts from sequencing software on a computer using the three tone genera tors of the 9000Pro the internal tone generator and two installed XG Plug in Boards To play back the song with the settings above make the appropriate Thru Port settings page 173 to 1 8 or OFF so that the 9000Pro will properly recognize the MIDI Port data 2 67 Reference Auto Accompaniment W C page 2 The auto accompaniment feature puts a full backing band at your fingertips To use it all you have to do is play the chords with your left hand as
373. n optional SCSI device has been con nected you can also save the recorded song data to these in step 7 When selecting MULTI When selecting QUICK TRACK RECORD 5 Set up for the recording See page 112 e Select the desired MULTI ese 011 81 01 i menu by pressing the SONG NEHSONG HID ue SAVE DELETE NEXT BACK g CEE Select this to call up button REC HODE REPLACE the Step Recording Press NEXT when settings are ready display KE Press START to begin Select the part for the corresponding track Trame 20 PAGE CONTROL GIEN Set the desired track PLAY PLAY PERY t REC HUTE MUTE This screen appears only when select Multi Track Recording ing CURRENT SONG in step 3 RECORDING RECORD Quick Recording QO QUICK SONG NAHE 01S HRRS HID Select this to call up the Chord Step display REALTIME EC HE XE SONG NEHSONG HID Hake the HRNURL and ACHP track settings To delete the track hold down DEL gp and select Delete status above Rec Press NEXT when settings are ready Press START to begin Rehearsal recording MANUAL EELER 6 Record your performance or edit the selected song 4 RCHP PLAYBACK MEAS 22022182 7 Save the song to disk Reference Song Creator
374. n order to help prevent the loss of important data due to a malfunction or user operating error Do not expose the instrument to excessive dust or vibrations or extreme cold or heat such as in direct sunlight near a heater or in a car during the day to prevent the possibility of panel disfiguration or damage to the inter nal components Yamaha cannot be held responsible for damage caused by improper use or modifications to the instrument or data that is lost or destroyed Do not use the instrument near other electrical products such as televi sions radios or speakers since this might cause interference which can Always turn the power off when the instrument is not in use affect proper operation of the other products Do not place the instrument in an unstable position where it might acci dentally fall over P Using the Floppy Disk Drive FDD and Floppy Disks Be sure to handle floppy disks and treat the disk drive with care Follow the important precautions below Compatible Disk Type 3 5 2DD and 2HD type floppy disks can be used B Inserting Ejecting Floppy Disks To insert a floppy disk into the disk drive Hold the disk so that the label of the disk is facing upward and the sliding shutter is facing forward towards the disk slot Care fully insert the disk into the slot slowly pushing it all the way in until it clicks into place and the eject button pops ou
375. n the display are explained below When this is set to on highlighted you can play only the currently displayed track h m mel selina HEES This specifies the velocity for the next note to be NEHSONG HID Reso 384 entered See Velocity settings below Ee This sets the note length time that the note is actu KE ally sounded as a percentage of the step time See ote 67 0003 5 Gate time settings below Note G3 80 0002 Note ca 63 0002 Pressing the button alternately switches the note selectors at the bottom of the display among three basic note values normal dotted and triplet Press this to actually delete the event at the current cursor position The size of the current recording step time for the next note to be entered This determines to what posi M tion the pointer will advance after a This shows the current position at which you note has been entered enter the note Clock 384 clocks per 1 4 note Beat 1 4 for 4 4 time Measure number 002 1 192 B 5 BERT J Moves the cursor up down Instantly returns to the first beginning of the current recorded song i e the first beat of the first measure About Measure Beat Clock Measue 1 2 Beat 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 Clock 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 383 383 383 383 383 383 383 383 E144
376. nal HOST SELECT TO HOST 2 1 MIDI IN Receives MIDI data from another MIDI device MIDI OUT Transmits the 9000Pro s keyboard information as MIDI data to another MIDI device TO HOST Transmits and receives MIDI data to and from a personal computer The MIDI A terminals and the TO HOST terminal are mutually exclusive they cannot be used at the same time Use the HOST SELECT switch to change between the MIDI A terminals and the TO HOST terminal When the HOST SELECT switch is set to the MIDI A terminals receive trans mit MIDI data When the HOST SELECT switch is set to PC 1 or PC 2 the MIDI A terminals will not receive transmit data The MIDI B IN OUT terminals function regardless of the setting of the HOST SELECT switch MIDI Functions GT wc The performance data of all songs styles and Multi Pads is MIDI data E When using the TO HOST ter minal to connect to a personal computer using Windows 95 98 a Yamaha MIDI driver must be installed in the personal computer The included disk contains the Yamaha MIDI driver Special MIDI cables sold sep arately must be used for con necting to MIDI devices They can be bought at music stores etc Never use MIDI cables longer than about 15 meters Cables longer than this can pick up noise which can cause data errors D D Cl wl The MIDI B port ignores Sys tem
377. nce gt 1 Save the recorded data to the disk Insert a blank recordable disk into the disk drive and follow the instructions in the illustrations below PAGE CONTROL Rename Select the directory for saving the data BACK NEXT aqu he voice DEVICE FD DIRECTORY 7 550 PAGE CONTROL GIT gt Press NEXT BACK DEVICE CONTENTS ME E a agm If ACMP is set to REC in step 5 you can start recording your keyboard performance first and then start recording the Auto Accompaniment or rhythm To do this 1 Press the RUBATO LCD button 2 Play a key on the right side of the split point to start recording your keyboard performance 3 Play a chord on the left side of the split point to start recording the Auto Accom paniment with your key board performance Using Registration Memory page 28 One Touch Setting page 24 and Music Data base page 26 can make your recording sessions much more efficient since various settings such as voices etc can be recalled by a single button press CAUTION N While the file is being saved never eject the floppy disk or turn the power off CAUTION Please note that the recorded data will be lost if exiting from the Record mode without saving the data to disk E NEXT to continue Press CANCEL or BACK to cancel na
378. nd Refer to page 148 7 0 Since the 9000Pro has no built in speakers you need to monitor its sound output via external audio equip ment Alternatively you could use a pair of head phones You can connect a computer keyboard to the 9000Pro for inputting song and file names or Voice Style Song Regis tration Memory numbers This function is also very con venient in Step recording Please note that Macintosh computer keyboards cannot be used with the 9000Pro Refer to pages 46 167 computer keyboard can only be used if it has been con nected to the 9000Pro before turning the power on If you have connected a computer keyboard after turning the power on simply turn the power off and back on again 01 PHONES jack A standard pair of stereo headphones can be plugged in here for private practice or late night playing Use the MASTERVOLUME control to adjust the volume of the head phone sound 8 VOLUME JAL WORKSTATION sen no eg ECTRIQUE NE PAS OUVRIR OR ELECTRIC SHOCK JT 10 RAIN OR MOISTURE MIC LINE IN jack The 9000Pro includes a microphone line input jack which is compatible with virtually any standard microphone or line level source accepting either 1 4 phone plugs or XLR connectors The micro phone or line input can be used with the 9000Pro s vocal harmony function
379. nd for the voice Reference 001 101 Parameters The explanations here apply to step 7 on page 101 E1 EG VIB Creating Plug in Custom Voices The explanations of each parameter are same as Easy Editing in the Custom Voice Creating section on page 93 Ad PLUG IN CUSTOM VOICE CREATOR E 3 WOICE SET 611113 BOARD VOICE 4 ESER Hee SST RESONANCE Select the desired RELEASE menu COMPARE FILTER EG FREQ RESONANCE ATTACK DECAY RELEASE E2 CTRL Control PLUG IN CUSTOM VOICE CREATOR E VOICE SET _STORE BOARD VOICE 1 Select the desired menu HE 1 5 ASSIGNABLE CTIRL 1 a 1 1 COMPA E r INITIAL TOUCH SENS DEPTH OFFSET AC1 CTRL No Ctrl 68 Ctrl 63 Select this to go to the Store display step 8 on page 101 Select this to go to the Store dis play step 8 on page 101 These determine how the various controllers MODULATION Wheel keyboard After Touch Assignable Controller affect the sound You can set the amount of Filter and Amplitude change as well as the depth of LFO modulation of pitch Sets the depth and the offset of the Initial Touch Sensitivity PMOD filter FMOD and volume AMOD For more information on LFO see page 98 This determines which Control Change number will be used for Assignable Controller 1 This function is available only for Pl
380. nds on variation type 00 7 VARIATION PARAMETER 7 LSB Refer to the MIDI EFFECT PARAMETER LIST depends on variation type 50 2 00 7 VARIATION PARAMETER 8 MSB Refer to the MIDI EFFECT PARAMETER LIST depends on variation type 00 7 VARIATION PARAMETER 8 LSB Refer to the MIDI EFFECT PARAMETER LIST depends on variation type 52 2 00 7 VARIATION PARAMETER 9 MSB Refer to the MIDI EFFECT PARAMETER LIST depends on variation type 00 7 VARIATION PARAMETER 9 LSB Refer to the MIDI EFFECT PARAMETER LIST depends on variation type 54 2 00 7F VARIATION PARAMETER 10 MSB Refer to the MIDI EFFECT PARAMETER LIST depends on variation type 00 7 VARIATION PARAMETER 10 LSB Refer to the MIDI EFFECT PARAMETER LIST depends on variation type 56 1 00 7 VARIATION RETURN co B 00B 60B 0 64 127 40 57 1 01 7F VARIATION PAN L63 C R63 1 64 127 40 58 1 00 7 SEND VARIATION TO REVERB cod B 00B 60B 0 64 127 00 59 1 00 7 SEND VARIATION TO CHORUS co B 00B 60B 0 64 127 00 5A 1 00 01 VARIATION CONNECTION O INSERTION 1 SYSTEM 00 5B 1 00 7F VARIATION PART Part1 16 0 15 7F AD1 64 OFF 16 63 65 127 5 1 MW VARIATION CONTROL DEPTH 64 63 40 50 1 BEND VARIATION CONTROL DEPTH 64 63 40 5E 1 CAT VARIATION CONTROL DEPTH 64 63 40 5F 1 AC1 VARIATION CONTROL DEPTH x 64 63 40 60 1 AC2 VARIATION CONTROL DEPTH x 64 63 40 TOTAL SIZE 21 2 1 70 1 00 7
381. ne E Input a file name PAGE CONTROL The LCD display will prompt you to save the recorded data At the prompt select YES to save the recorded data gt 2 Press the EXIT button to exit from the Record mode DIGITAL RECORDING button Multi Track Recording gt Press the DIGITAL RECORDING button to engage the Record mode E 4 Select SONG CREATOR Select NEW SONG DIGITAL REC HENU E sons cnenron Set the track modes Select MULTI TRACK RECORD SONG CREATOR a M 25 current sone DIGITAL STUDIO SOUND CREATOR SAMPLING CUSTOM VOICE PLUG IN VOICE En STYLE pant 9 MULTI PAD MIXING CONSOLE EFFECTS FILTER EQ TUNING SONG CREATOR QUICK RECORD cy MULTI TRACK RECORD When set to REC your keyboard performance and Multi Pad playback can be recorded to the corresponding tracks When one of the TR11 16 is set to REC Auto Accompaniment is auto matically set to on and accompaniment playback can be recorded to the cor responding tracks as listed in the caption below Use this button to alter nately switch between the Part selecting and 98 MULTI SONG NEHSONG HID the Record selecting Use this button to alter nately switch between D
382. ng a style by recording notes 132 BASIC Selecting the section and track to be recorded setting the tempo 132 and the beat and so on SETUP Editing Setup data voice etc 134 EDIT Editing various parameters Quantize etc 134 STORE CLEAR Storing the created style data to Flash ROM or clearing the created style data 128 PARA EDIT Editing various parameters related to the Style File Format 135 STEP REC Recording a style with the Step Recording method similar to writing 140 out the notes in music notation NEW STYLE ASSEMBLY Creating a new style 129 MULTI PAD CREATOR RECORDING Multi Pad Recording 142 STEP REC Multi Pad Step Recording 143 CLEAR Clearing the recorded Multi Pad data 142 COPY Copying the recorded Multi Pad data 142 REPEAT Turning Repeat on or off 142 CHORD MATCH Turning Chord Match on or off 142 MIXING CONSOLE VOL EQ Adjusting the Volume Pan and EQ high low for each part 145 FILT Adjusting the Harmonic content and Brightness for each part 145 EFF DEPTH Adjusting the Effect Reverb Chorus and DSP depth for each part 145 EFF TYPE Setting the Effect type parameter for each block 146 TUNE Adjusting the pitch related parameters e g Pitch Bend range Por 145 tamento time for each part M EQ Adjusting the overall tone of the 9000Pro in five frequency bands 147 VOICE Changing the voice for each part 145 LINE OUT Changing the Line out setting to send the output of each part to the 148 LINE OUT jacks 11 MULTI P
383. ng back Try playing other chords and pressing the pads Keep in mind that you can also change chords while a pad is playing back Quick Guide Reference on page 60 VOICE EFFECT buttons The 9000Pro features a sophisticated multi processor effect system which can add extraordinary depth and expression to your sound Applying the Voice Effects Voice Effect Comments TOUCH This button turns the touch response of the keyboard on or off When OFF the same volume is produced no matter how strongly or softly you play the keyboard Eer SUSTAIN When this Sustain feature is ON all notes played on the keyboard other than the Left part have a longer sustain VOICE EFFECT TOUCH SUSTAIN DSP 4 7 This button turns independent effects on or off for the RIGHT 1 DSP4 RIGHT 2 DSP5 RIGHT 3 DSP6 and LEFT DSP7 parts SLOW FAST The SLOW FAST button can be used to switch between variations of the DSP effect For example this lets you change the rotating speed These buttons turn the slow fast of the rotary speaker effect B 2 or off for the part currently HARMONY ECHO See below selected via the PART POLY MONO This determines whether the Part s Voice is played monophonically only SELECT buttons one note at a time or polyphonically up to 126 notes at a time Try out the Harmony
384. nhancer1 38 38 PitchChg1 Pitch Change1 80 16 39 39 ClaviTcWah Clavi Touch Wah 82 18 40 40 EP TcWah EP Touch Wah 82 19 41 41 26 AutoWah1 78 16 42 42 TcWah Dst1 82 16 Touch Wah Distortion1 43 43 AtWah Dst1 78 17 Auto Wah Distortion1 44 44 WhDst TDly 102 00 Wah Distortion Tempo Delay 45 45 WhDst Dly1 97 16 Wah Distortion Delay1 46 46 27 Hall3 01 17 47 47 28 Hall4 01 18 48 48 29 Hall5 01 01 49 49 Hall 01 06 50 50 Hall L 01 07 51 51 30 Room3 02 18 52 52 31 Room4 02 19 53 53 32 Room5 02 00 54 54 33 02 01 55 55 34 Room7 02 02 56 56 Room 5 02 05 57 57 02 06 58 58 Room L 02 07 59 59 35 Stage3 03 00 60 60 36 Stage4 03 01 768 Effect Type List Effektartliste Liste des types d effet DSP3 5 4 7 DSP8 Effect Name Type Type DSP3 5 4 7 DSP8 Effect Name Type Type Panel Panel Panel MSB LSB Panel Panel Panel MSB LSB Order Order Order Order Order Order 61 61 37 Plate1 04 16 127 127 5 OD TDly 100 01 62 62 38 Plate 04 17 Overdrive Tempo Delay 63 63 39 Plate3 04 00 128 128 CmpDstDly1 96 16 64 64 R GM Plate 0
385. niment SPLIT POINT FINGERING V SINGLE FINGER HULTI FINGER F 2 G2 FINGERED FINGERED PRO The way in which chords are played or indicated with your left hand in the auto accompaniment section of the keyboard is referred to as fingering For details refer to page 70 The point on the keyboard that separates the auto accompaniment sec tion the left hand section voice L and the right hand section voice R1 R2 R3 of the keyboard is called the split point For details refer to page 57 Split Point dhl dt i Auto Accompaniment section or Voice L Controller Assignment The explanations here apply to step 3 of the Basic Procedure on page 158 Foot Controller Various functions can be assigned to the foot volume switch connected to the FOOT PEDAL jacks Foot Volume Controller Determines whether an optional YAMAHA FC7 Foot Controller plugged into the rear panel FOOT PEDAL VOLUME jack will control master volume or only the volume of specified parts and voices lt 2 CONTROLLER PANEL CONTROLLER FOOT CONTROLLER Fao P1 R2 pa 1 v Select MASTER for master volume control I or INDIVIDUAL for 8 individual part voice volume control SONG ACHP H PAD LEFT FOOT PEDAL SWITCH 1 SWITCH 2 VOLUME ei W
386. ns1 4 block 52 76 15 13 EQ Mid Gain distortion 12 12dB var ins1 4 block 52 76 16 14 LPF Cutoff 1 0kHz thru var ins1 4 block 34 60 table 3 15 Output Level 0 127 var ins1 4 block 0 127 16 Release 10 680mS var ins1 4 block 52 67 table 12 86S 599 Effect Parameter List Effektparameterliste Liste des param tres d effet devoix COMPRESSOR variation insertion block MSB 83 ENSEMBLE DETUNE chorus variation insertion block MSB 87 No Parameter Display Value See Table Control No Parameter Display Value See Table Control 1 Attack 1 40ms 0 19 table 8 1 50 50cent 14 114 2 Release 10 680ms 0 15 table 9 2 Lch Init Delay 0 0mS 50mS 0 127 table 2 3 Threshold 48 6dB 79 121 3 Rch Init Delay 0 0mS 50mS 0 127 table 2 4 Ratio 1 0 20 0 0 7 table 10 4 5 Output Level 0 127 0 127 5 6 6 7 v4 8 8 9 9 10 10 Dry Wet D63 gt W D W D lt W63 1 127 H 11 11 EQ Low Frequency 32Hz 2 0kHz variation insertion block 4 40 table 3 12 12 EQ Low Gain 12 12dB variation insertion block 52 76 13 13 EQ High Frequency 500Hz 16 0kHz variation insertion block 28 58 table 3 14 14 EQ High Gain 12 12dB variation insertion block 52 76 15 16 NOISE GATE variation insertion block MSB 84 AMBIENCE variation Insertion1 4 block MSB 88 No Parameter Display Value See Table Control No Parameter Display Value See Table Control 1 Attack 1 40ms 0
387. nt 14 114 4 Output Level 0 127 0 127 4 Fine2 50 50cent 14 114 5 5 Feedback Level 63 63 1 127 6 6 7 7 8 8 9 9 10 Dry Wet D63 gt W D W D W63 1 127 10 Dry Wet D63 gt W D W D lt W63 1 127 e 11 Edge 0 127 0 127 11 Pan1 L63 R63 1 127 12 12 Output Level 1 0 127 0 127 13 13 Pan2 L63 R63 1 127 14 14 Output Level 2 0 127 0 127 15 16 3BAND EQ MONO variation insertion block MSB 76 HARMONIC ENHANCER variation Insertion block MSB 81 No Parameter Display Value See Table Control Parameter Display Value See Table Control 1 EQ Low Gain 12 12dB 52 76 1 HPF Cutoff 500Hz 16 0kHz 28 58 2 EQ Mid Frequency 100Hz 10 0kHz 14 54 table 3 2 Drive 0 127 0 127 3 EQ Mid Gain 12 412dB 52 76 3 Mix Level 0 127 0 127 4 EQ Mid Width 1 0 12 0 10 120 4 5 EQ High Gain 12 412dB 52 76 5 6 EQ Low Frequency 50Hz 2 0kHz 8 40 table 3 6 7 EQ High Frequency 500 2 16 0 2 28 58 table 3 7 8 8 9 9 10 10 11 12 12 13 13 14 14 15 Input Mode mono stereo 0 1 15 16 16 2BAND EQ STEREO variation insertion block MSB 77 TOUCH WAH 1 variation insertion block MSB 82 LSB 0 No Parameter Display Value See Table Control TOUCH WAHADIST variation Insertion1 4 block MSB 82 LSB 1 16 1 EQ Low Frequency 32Hz 2 0kHz 4 40 table 3 No Parameter Display Value See Table Control 2 EQ Low Gain 12 412dB 52 76 1 Sensitive 0 127 0 127 3 EQ High Frequency 500Hz 16 0kHz 28 58 table 3 2 Cutoff Frequ
388. nt for display place a checkmark in the box next to the event name To fil ter out an event type so that it does not appear on the list remove the checkmark so that the box is empty 89 NEHSONG HID ES NOTE Select the event boxes to be Style Number Section Name displayed Chord Name and Tempo are on checked by default Section Name Chord Name i RCHP Part on ort Selects only chord data volume checkmarks for all other ACHP Part volume boxes are removed Tempo Using the Plug in voices in Song Creator Keep in mind that a single Plug in Board can only sound one part one Plug in voice at a time For this reason you may run into the following problems when using certain Song Creator functions with the Plug in voices When you stop recording step 9 on pages 37 and 39 with a Plug in voice For example when recording the R1 voice when that is assigned to a Plug in voice the R1 part button automatically turns off when the STOP button is pressed This happens in order that the you can hear the recorded song properly with the Plug in Voice step 10 on pages 37 and 39 When you stop recording the connection with the Plug in Board automatically switches to the Song Creator Song Creator Keyboard Song Creator Keyboard H r Plug in Board Plug in Board 22 The connection with the Plug in Board
389. nternal circuitry and may even pose a shock hazard Use only the AC power cord supplied with the 9000Pro If the supplied cord is lost or dam aged and needs to be replaced contact your Yamaha dealer The use of an inappropriate replace ment can pose a fire and shock hazard The type of AC power cord vided with the 9000Pro may be different depending on the country in which it is purchased a third prong may be provided for grounding purposes Improper connection of the grounding conductor can create the risk of electrical shock Do NOT modify the plug provided with the 9000Pro If the plug will not fit the outlet have a proper outlet installed by a qualified electrician Do not use a plug adapter which defeats the grounding conductor Audio equipment EX bd Ce ZA When turning off the power make sure that all level controls on those devices above are set to the minimum and simply reverse the above order 6 Turn up the volume of the external audio equipment as essary 7 After the main display appears play and adjust the volume Qo MIN MAX Make sure your 9000Pro is rated B 21 13 Starting Up Lamp The 9000Pro features two Lamp terminals at either end of the rear panel for connect WARNING ing an optional lamp This is especially convenient when
390. o o 8 cb faye 2213155515 92 5 5 9 ezoSmtuwu 2 9 S 0 gt gt 0 gt Ii Mic id Hi Master Vocal Harmony Pitch Correction x x x x x Setting EQ Mid High EQ4 Q x x x x x EQ Mic Master Vocal Harmony Harmony Part x x x 1x x D D Setting EQ High EQ5 Q x x D D EQ F7 Talk Setting EQ Edit EQ1 EQ5 x x x x MES Talk Volume x x x x x x EQ Edit Freq EQ1 EQ5 x x x MESSI Talk Total Volume Attenutop x x x 1010 D D D 1 Master Talk Vocal Harmony Type x x x x x x EQ Edit Q Gain EQ1 EQ5 x x pe x EQ Talk Vocal Harmony On Off x x x x x x Scale Tune Talk Panpot X X o x x x Scale Tuning C x x Scale x Talk Reverb Depth o x x x Scale Tuning C x x x Scale Talk Chorus Depth X x Scale Tuning 0 x x x Scale X Talk DSP Depth Xx px o x x x Scale Tuning D x x Scale x Talk DSP ON OFF x x x Scale Tuning E x x Scale x Harmony Echo Scale Tuning F x x x Scale x Harmony Echo On Off Scale Tuning F x x D Scale x Harmony Echo Type Harmony Scale Tuning G x x D Scale D Harmony Echo Volume Harmony Harmony x Scale Tuning G
391. o Depth Footage Can be set to any of three levels via the Vibrato Depth LCD button The button sequen tially selects a depth of 1 2 or S The footage settings determine the basic sound of the organ flutes The term footage is a reference to the sound generation of traditional pipe organs in which the sound is produced by pipes of different lengths in feet The longer the pipe the lower the pitch of the sound Hence the 16 setting determines the lowest pitched component of the voice while the 1 setting determines the highest pitched component The higher the value of the setting the greater the volume of the corresponding foot age Mixing various volumes of the footages lets you create your own distinctive organ sounds Volume Adjusts the overall volume of the Organ Flutes The longer the graphic bar the greater the volume Mode Attack The MODE control selects between two modes FIRST and EACH In the FIRST mode attack is applied only to the first notes played and held simultaneously while the first notes are held any subsequently played notes have no attack applied In the EACH mode attack is applied equally to all notes The ATTACK controls adjust the attack sound of the ORGAN FLUTE voice The 4 2 2 3 2 controls increase or reduce the amount of attack sound at the corresponding footages The longer the graphic bar the greater the attack sound Length The LENGTH control affe
392. o an extraordinarily wide range of sounds Plug in Voices and Board Voices PLUG IN VOICE m E amp SS S S o MI eX Use these buttons to call up the Plug in Voices The Plug in Voices area has 220 available spaces for voices Voices can be loaded from the included disk using the Plug in Manager or can be created via the Plug in Custom Voice creator function page 100 Use this button to call up the Board Voices This allows you to select any of the original voices on the Plug in Board Plug in Manager Save The included floppy disk features specially programmed data such as effect settings etc for using the Plug in Board Voices with the 9000Pro Before loading the disk data the Board Voices without any special processing or programming are divided into groups of ten and are selectable from the PLUG IN VOICE buttons I XI Once the data on the disk is loaded you have a new set of voices programmed specifically for optimum use with the 9000Pro For a list of the available Plug in Voices created with the data on the included floppy disk see page 204 See page 66 for details See pages 64 and 100 for details Quick Guide X 3 lt 9 9 EQ Display hased Controls As you ve seen in Quick Guide above the 9000Pro features an exceptionally large and
393. o features a high grade three band digital equalizer function for the microphone sound Adjusts the center frequency of the corresponding band o l e uiii Boosts values or cuts values the corresponding band by up to 12 dB Noise Gate This effect mutes the input signal when the input from the microphone falls below a specified level This effec tively cuts off extraneous noise allowing the desired signal vocal etc to pass SW is the abbreviation of Switch This turns Noise Gate on or off e TH is the abbreviation of Threshold This adjusts the input level at which the gate begins to open Compressor This effect holds down the output when the input signal from the microphone exceeds a specified level This is useful when recording a signal with widely varying dynamics It effectively compresses the signal making soft parts louder and loud parts softer SW is the abbreviation of Switch This turns Compressor on or off s Tb ciis TH is the abbreviation of Threshold This adjusts the input level at which compression begins to be applied is the abbreviation of Ratio This adjusts the compression ratio SOUS Adjusts the output level from the speaker Vocal Harmony The following parameters determines how the harmony is controlled e VOCODER Track The Vocal Harmony effect is controlled by the n
394. o the MIDI IN MIDI OUT III MIDI Data Format page 228 gg The explanations here apply to step 5 of the Basic Procedure on page 174 Easy Setup Follow the on screen instructions to call up the template display as shown below ZH MFC10 WIZARD 10 WIZARD i following settings will be applied Template Choice PAGE CONTROL 2 di Select one of the tenplates CITEN n EEGEN Se ees S Lc STRRT STOP VOLUME The template name indicates the FILL DOHN 2 2EXT 0FF MFC10 function to be selected FILL SELF FILL BREAK Press NEXT to continue FILL UP SEX iSUNE STOP HAIN A HAIN B HAIN D STRRT STOP FILL DOHN FILL SELF FILL BRERK SELECT Regist Control DSP Control Hulti Percussion Select a template NOTE When setting up the from the 9000Pro a MIDI cable Press the NEXT button to enable must be connected from the the selected Easy Setup template Disconnect the MIDI cable from the DU im GE to MIDI OUT B terminal and connect it 5 to the Foot Controller Howsven You shoula discon nect this cable when using the MFC10 since extraneous MIDI messages may be transmitted from the 9000Pro To exit from the MFC10 play mode select the MIDI Tem plate display page 174 and press the CANCEL LCD but ton T
395. o the left counter clockwise decreases it PAGE CONTROL buttons If you ve selected several different functions displays in succession you can retrace your steps and revisit each display by using the BACK and NEXT buttons Pressing NEXT button go to the next available page and pressing the BACK button return to the previous available page The LCD CONTRAST Control The 9000Pro display panel is a liquid crystal type which features an LCD CONTRAST trol Use the LCD CONTRAST control to set the display for optimum legibility EXIT button No matter where you are in the 9000Pro display hierarchy the EXIT button will return you to the next highest level or to the normal play mode display Since the 9000Pro has so many different displays you may occasionally find yourself con fused as to which operation s display is currently shown If this happens you can return to home base by pressing the EXIT button several times This returns the 9000Pro to the default display the same display that appears when the power is turned on MAIN MIXER button and PART ON OFF button Refer to pages 24 25 and 31 Basic Operation 43 BEAT indicators These indicators flash at the current tempo and indicate the current beat during accompaniment and song playback DIRECT ACCESS button See page 48 Display hased Controls 4 4 time 3 4 time 1st beat
396. oard Hard disk cover gt Turn over the Plug in board Hard disk cover This is the location for the Hard disk unit Plug in board stand Plug in board Hard disk cover If a Plug in Board or boards is installed make sure to disconnect the Plug in Board con nector s before continuing a 7 Hold the hard disk unit in place with your hand as shown below Make sure that the socket end of the unit faces toward you as shown Hard disk unit top side face up Turn over Align the holes in the cover with the holes on the hard disk The actual placement of the holes may differ depending on the particular hard disk Reference 281 183 Installing Optional Hardware 9 Attach the hard disk unit to the Plug in board Hard disk cover using the four screws removed in step 5 Silver screws Depending on the type of hard disk drive you plan to install select holes or holes to attach the hard disk drive Holes 0 are used in this illus tration You should tighten these two screws first 9 Turn the cover over again and attach the cable connector shown Undo the cable clip to the large cable and plug it into the hard disk socket Make sure that the pins do not bend nector is a missing pin Make sure to align the cable connector which has a corresponding missing hole Ris to the hard disk as shown The rightmost 4 pins are unused
397. oes exist on the PLG100 DX board no sound results The Breath Mode setting of the PLG150 VL Native Part parameters is ignored and the Breath Mode setting of the PLG100 VL Native System parameters is available Bi Setting the Unison Switch of the PLG150 AN board to Plug in Voices of the PLG150 AN for which Unison Switch of the Native System parameters has been set to on cannot be played polyphonically even if the 9000Pro s POLY MONO but ton is set to POLY Note that many of the Plug in Custom Voices in the included disk are delib erately set to Unison On to effectively recreate popular monophonic synthesizer sounds 107 Reference Quick Guide on page 40 With the powerful and easy to use song creating features you can record your own keyboard perfor mances to a floppy disk as a User song and create your own complete fully orchestrated compositions Each User song lets you record up to sixteen independent tracks These include not only the voices for the keyboard performance R1 R2 R3 L but also the auto accompaniment parts and Vocal Harmony effect Guidelines for Song Creating Song Tracks The tracks which can be recorded to the songs are organized as shown in the chart below Track Default Part Parts that can be set 1 Right1 2 Right1 3 Right1 4 Right1 5 Right1 6 7 8 Right1 Right1 Right1 VOICE R2 R3 L Accompaniment Style track Multi Pad
398. oes to this point at the RELEASE rate after the key is released e Reference v6 95 Custom Voice Creating FILTER RATE and FILTER LEVEL Filter EG settings The FILTER RATE parameters are time related they determine how long it takes for the sound s timbre to change from level to level as set in FILTER LEVEL The FILTER LEVEL parameters are filter related they determine how much the sound changes in timbre over time as set in FILTER RATE A setting of 0 is the default value FILTER RATE INITIAL Sets the length of time the initial filter envelope level will be maintained Higher values correspond to shorter time DECAY1 Set the rate of variation between the initial filter envelope level and the levels set by the DECAY2 FILTER LEVEL DECAY1 DECAY2 and DECAY3 parameters respectively DECAYS3 RELEASE Sets the rate of variation from the offset at key release to the offset set by the FILTER LEVEL RELEASE parameter when SUSTAIN is off SUSTAIN Sets the rate of variation from the offset at key release to the offset set by the FILTER LEVEL SUSTAIN parameter when SUSTAIN is on Sets the initial timbre of the envelope FILTER LEVEL INITIAL DECAY1 Set the amounts of timbre change following the elapsed time of DECAY 1 DECAY 2 DECAY2 and DECAY 3 respectively DECAY3 SUSTAIN When SUSTAIN is on this sets the final timbre of the envelope the filter setting chang es to this point at the RELEASE
399. of MIDI Thru Filter in XGworks or XGworks lite when editing the Board Custom Voices 3 necessary save any important voice data Board Custom Voice and Native System Parameter data in Flash ROM by using the Plug in Manager function page 68 Reference POL Creating Plug in Custom Voices 4 Load the appropriate files to both the 9000Pro and your com puter D When editing voices on an installed Plug in Board for the first time Make sure to load the appropriate files on the floppy disk included with the 9000Pro to the 9000Pro as follows For the PLG150 AN board only you ll need to also load the appropriate file below to your computer File name to be loaded to the 9000Pro to the PC PLG150 AN 150 CsVce xve 150AN CsVce ANS PLG150 PF 150PF CsVce xvc PLG150 DX 150DX CsVce xve PLG150 VL 150VL CsVce xvc When editing voices on an installed Plug in Board in subsequent editing sessions Before starting to make additional edits to a previously edited voice also make sure to load the same edited data the data that you saved in steps 7 and 8 to both the Flash ROM on the 9000Pro and the computer 5 Use the same operation as in Steps 1 5 of
400. of the MULTI PAD buttons is pressed The MIDI Clock may be set to EXTERNAL Make sure it is set to INTER NAL page 175 The auto accompaniment does not start even when Synchro Start is in standby condition and a key is pressed You may be trying to start accompaniment by playing a key in the right hand range of the keyboard To start the accompaniment with Synchro Start make sure to play a key in the left hand accompaniment range of the keyboard Certain notes sound at the wrong pitch Make sure that the scale tuning value for those notes is set to 0 page 158 Auto accompaniment chords are recognized regardless of the split point or where chords are played on the keyboard Check whether the fingering mode is set to Full Keyboard or not If the Full Keyboard fingering mode is selected chords are recognized over the entire range of the keyboard irrespective of the split point setting The Harmony function does not operate Harmony cannot be turned on when the Full Keyboard fingering mode is selected Select an appropriate fingering mode Reference 981 187 Troubleshooting PROBLEM MIDI data is not transmitted or received via the MIDI A termi nals even when MIDI cables are connected properly POSSIBLE CAUSE SOLUTION The MIDI terminals can only be used when the HOST SELECT switch is set to MIDI All other settings Mac 1 and PC 2 a
401. ol Message 00000001 01 Sub ID 2 Master Volume 01111111 ll Volume LSB Ommmmmmm mm Volume MSB 11110111 F7 End of Exclusive or FOH 7FH XN 04H 01H mm F7H 11110000 FO Exclusive status 01111111 7F Universal Real Time Oxxxnnnn WhenN is received N 0 F whichever is received 00000100 04 Sub ID 1 Device Control Message 00000001 01 Sub ID 2 Master Volume 01111111 ll Volume LSB Ommmmmmm mm Volume MSB 11110111 F7 End of Exclusive GM System On FOH 7EH 7FH 09H 01H F7H 11110000 FO Exclusive status 01111110 7E Universal Non Real Time 01111111 ID of target device 00001001 09 Sub ID 1 General MIDI Message 00000001 01 Sub ID 2 General MIDI On 11110111 F7 of Exclusive or 7EH XN 09H 01H F7H 11110000 FO Exclusive status 01111110 Universal Non Real Time Oxxxnnnn XN received N 0 F whichever is received 00001001 09 Sub ID 1 General MIDI Message 00000001 01 Sub ID 2 General MIDI On 11110111 F7 of Exclusive System Exclusive Messages XG standard MIDI Event Data Format Recognized XG Parameter Change FOH 43H 1nH 4CH hh mm II dd F7H 11110000 FO Exclusive status 01000011 43 YAMAHA ID 0001nnnn 1n Device Number n always O when transmit n 0 F when recieve 01001100 4C ModelID Ohhhhhhh hh Address High Ommmmmmm mm Address Mid 01111111 ll Address Low Oddddddd dd Data 11110111 F7 End of Exclusive
402. om is selected the ste reo position of the sound will change randomly whenever the keyboard is played Harmony1 Detune Detunes the first harmony note by the specified number of cents Harmony2 Detune Detunes the second harmony note by the specified number of cents Harmony3 Detune Detunes the third harmony note by the specified number of cents Pitch to Note When ON the lead vocal sound plays the 9000Pro tone generator system However dynamic changes in the vocal sound do not affect the volume of the tone generator Pitch to Note Part Determines which of the 9000Pro parts will be controlled by the lead vocal when the Pitch to Note parameter is ON Reference Vocal Changing the Vocal Harmony Microphone Settings Basic Procedure VOCAL HARMONY 9 SET UP Select the desired parameter Select the desired parameter SELECT S MIC SETUP 1 Press the VOCAL HARMONY 2 Edit the Vocal Harmony micro JeHorD OFF d oe TRI T xs nies 3 MIC SETUP button phone parameters 3 Band Equalizer Usually an equalizer is used to correct the sound output from amps or speakers to match the special character of the room The sound is divided into several frequency bands allowing you to correct the sound by raising or lowering the level for each band The 9000Pr
403. ome Song stereo Auto Accompaniment Multi Pad 1 2 3 4 Microphone sound LINE OUT mono mono Snare Drum stereo Other instruments Drum Reference Disk SCS_Operations The 9000Pro DISK SCSI button accesses a range of functions that are used for storage and retrieval of floppy disk data The 9000Pro can also be fitted with an optional internal hard disk or an optional con nected SCSI device for massive on line storage capacity Storage Devices Compatible with the 9000Pro e Floppy disk SCSI device optional connected Devices in this category include external hard disk drives Make sure to read the sec removable cartridges etc tion Using the Floppy Disk See page 13 for details on SCSI Drive FDD and Floppy device connection Disks on page 5 EI LORD PLUG IN CUSTOH VOICE Select the file to be loaded PROPERTY 1 Press NEXT to continue 4 DEVICE DIRECTORY CONTENTS If an optional SCSI device is con 2 1500 csuce xuc nected the optional internal hard m 150bF CSVce disk is installed the corresponding VEER device names appear in the LCD of the disk related function Basic Procedure DISK LOAD FROH DISK MENU DISK SCSI FUNCTION MIDI 1 Press the DISK SCSI button 2 Select the desir
404. ompani ment section and the right hand section of the keyboard is called the split point Refer to page 159 for instructions on setting the split point STYLE MANAGER gt 3 Turn Auto Accompaniment The specified left hand section of the keyboard becomes the Auto Accompa niment section and chords played in this section are automatically detected and used as a basis for fully automatic accompaniment with the selected style Split Point Auto Accompaniment section AUTO j2MPANIMENT Turn Sync Start on The beat lamp also flashes in time with the tempo This condition is called syn chronized start standby A Ke BEAT o e E E E SYNC STOP SYNC i f 20 ARES eee Kee elitr r1 gt As soon as you play a chord with your left hand the auto accompaniment starts For this example play a C major chord as shown below Split Point mmm m dl Auto Accompaniment section 6 Try playing other chords with your left hand For information how to enter chords see Chord Fingerings on page 70 p 7 Press the START STOP button again to stop the accompa niment Try out some of the other styles Category 8 BEAT Style Name Heart Beat Comment Standard 8 beat pop Enjoy the sound of the strumming guitars Spicy Beat
405. omply with the requirements listed in FCC Regulations Part 15 for Class digital devices Compliance with these requirements provides a reasonable level of assurance that your use of this product in a residential envi ronment will not result in harmful interference with other electronic devices This equipment generates uses radio frequencies and if not installed and used according to the instructions found in the users manual may cause interference harmful to the operation of other electronic devices Compliance with FCC regulations does not guarantee that interference will not occur in all installations If this product is found to be the source of interference which can be determined by turning the unit OFF and ON please try to elimi nate the problem by using one of the following measures Relocate either this product or the device that is being affected by the interference Utilize power outlets that are on different branch circuit breaker or fuse circuits or install AC line filter s In the case of radio or TV interference relocate reorient the antenna If the antenna lead in is 300 ohm ribbon lead change the lead in to co axial type cable If these corrective measures do not produce satisfactory results please contact the local retailer authorized to distribute this type of product If you can not locate the appropriate retailer please contact Yamaha Corporation of America Electronic Service Division 6600
406. ony effect See page 81 About the Effect Connections System and Insertion All the effect blocks are connected or routed in one of two ways System or Insertion System applies the selected effect to all parts while Insertion applies the selected effect to one specific part Reverb 1 and Chorus 2 are System effects and DSP 4 Vocal Harmony 9 are Insertion effects The DSP 3 effect on the other hand can be config ured for either System or Insertion routing This is done from the parameters of the individual effect type see above Reference Use these two LCD buttons to select the TYPE J PARAHETER VALUE Select this to store your settings by fol lowing the on screen instructions M You may find that when chang ing a drum sound of an auto accompaniment style and then restoring the original drum sound the actual sound espe cially the effect processing Reverb Chorus and DSP 3 sounds different than the origi nal To restore the original drum sound and its effect pro cessing select a different style then select the original style once again Some effect types e g Tem poDelay VDstH TDly etc are synchronized with the current tempo When any of these effect types is selected noise may result when simulta neously playing the keyboard and pressing the SLOW FAST button or changing the tempo To avoid this first stop playing the keyboard then press SLOW
407. or creating a style STYLE ASSEMBLY and set the Length Gin bars of the Pattern Generally this will be 2 bars or 4 bars Press NEXT to continue SECTION 1 HAIN B HAIN C 2 3 HAIN D Select a section to be created BACK Select the section you want to create PATTERN LENGTH PAGE CONTROL CIT Set the Pattern Length of the selected section NEXT Assign the pattern for each track Indicates the selected track STYLE ASSEMBLY memi ct a pattern for RHYTHH1 Using Category Style Section and Part you can access all of pre programmed patterns Press START to audition the pattern Play Type lets you 20D or mute the current pattern Press NEXT to continue CATEGORY STYLE 16 Beat 8Beat 1 DANCE 2 HAIN C SHINGSJRZZ sBeat 3 HAIN D SECTION Select a style section and part to be assembled BACK NEXT RHYTHM 2 CATEGORY STYLE RHY1 SOLO BASS CHDi HAIN B ANI 2 HAIN SHING2JAZZ 8Beat3 HAIN D 127 Select a play type Em The length in measures for all sections excepting Fill In and Break can be set from this dis play The Fill In and Break sec tions are limited to one measure e You can return to this display by pressing the BACK button and redo the settings d Keep mind that any track data for which the Play Type is set to MUTE i
408. ord your keyboard performance to the 9000Pro as MIDI data Creating of styles however is done in a different way The Style Creator provides two basic ways assembling and recording Assembling styles Page 129 Preset Style The Style Creator provides two basic ways to assemble styles 8Beat 1 Create your own 8 beat style Easy Edit Rhythm 1 Rhythm 1 This method lets you assemble styles based on the preset flash style that is 2 E SCH 2 most similar to the style you wish to create Chord i gt Chord 1 Store as Chord 2 Geng D o Siye Pad Pad Phrase 1 Phrase 1 Phrase 2 gt Phrase 2 l I New Style Assembly T The 9000Pro allows you to create composite styles by combining various 2 200 Rhythm 1 Rhythm 1 patterns from the internal Preset and Flash styles EE Groe For example in creating your own 8 beat style you could take the rhythm Bass Bass pattern from the 8 Beat 1 style use the bass pattern from the 8 Beat 2 Chord 1 Rhyt
409. orresponding parts The data is actually deleted when this button is released 3 Set the desired parts to REC 4 Start recording You can start recording with one of the following ways Press the START STOP button Press the SYNC START button to enable synchronized standby page 20 then play a key on the keyboard The recording repeats indefinitely until stopped in a loop Notes that you record will play back from the next repetition letting you record while hearing previously recorded material The ORGAN FLUTES voices and DRUM KIT voices cannot 5 be selected for these parts Stop recording ie Style Creator Observe the following rules when recording the MAIN and FILL sections Use only the CM7 scale tones when recording the BASS and PHRASE tracks i e C D E G A and B Useonly the chord tones when recording the CHORD and PAD tracks i e C E G and B C chord tone C S scale tones Any appropriate chord or chord progression can be used for the INTRO and ENDING sec tions The basic chord for the accompaniment is called the source chord The default source chord is set as CM7 but you can change it to whatever chord is easy for you to play For details see Style File Auto Accompaniment Format page 127 and Parameter Edit page 135 131 Reference Style Creator Style Editing Full Edit This section explains various parameters oth
410. ort or device are handled as data is transmitted on the chan channels 17 32 with the MIDI nel s B terminals 7 8 RIGHT 1 Turn transmission of the specified Select a data type on or off Channel cH Pec Cnc rem Rea See the next page for details on the data types Select a Part for the selected channel Reference MIDI Functions Receive Settings This display page allows you to specify the MIDI receive mode for each 9000Pro MIDI channels and to specify which types of data will be received via each channel The explanations here apply to step 5 of the Basic Procedure on page 174 MIDI STORE SAARELE pecerve 001 S 2 1 Rx HOHITOR The Rx MONITOR indicates when data is being received on any of the 32 MIDI channels The dots corresponding to each channel 1 32 flash briefly whenever any data is received Cie Channels 1 16 are handled with the MIDI A terminals or the TO HOST terminal chan nels 1 16 of a second MIDI port or device are handled as channels 17 32 with the MIDI B terminals on the channel s XG GH 18 XG GH S T K Nore Gur Guo f Pec Onc or off Select a Mode for the selected channel See below for details a
411. otes This parameter lets you deter mine which notes from the keyboard and or song data will control the harmony Data dial icon When set to MUTE the track selected below is muted turned off during keyboard performance or song playback Keyboard OFF Keyboard control over harmony is turned off UPPER Notes played to the right of the split point control the harmony LOWER Notes played to the left of the split point control the harmony Song from disk or external MIDI sequencer OFF Song data control over harmony is turned off TR1 TR16 When playing back a song from disk or external MIDI sequencer the note data recorded to the assigned song track controls the harmony Reference 08 Vocal Harmony Balance This lets you set the balance between the lead and Vocal Harmony Raising this value increases the volume of the Vocal Harmony and decreases that of the lead vocal If it is set to the maximum value of 127 you will hear only the Vocal Harmony from the exter nal speakers if it is set to 0 only the lead vocal will be heard e Mode All of the Vocal Harmony types fall into one of three modes which pro duce harmony in different ways The harmony effect is dependent on the selected Vocal Harmony Mode and Track and this parameter determines how the harmony is applied to your voice The three modes are described below VOCODER The harmony notes are determined by the no
412. otown 11 Dixieland 14 Metronome 4 4 7 Motown Soul 12 Ragtime 15 Metronome 6 8 8 Soul Beat 13 Big Band Ballad 16 Bass Chord Hold 1 9 Pop Shuffle 14 Shuffle 17 Bass Chord Hold 2 10 Twist 15 Piano Swing 18 Bass Chord Hold 3 VI COUNTRY R amp B 19 Bass Chord Hold 4 1 Bluegrass 2 1 Soul Shuffle 20 Bass Chord Hold 5 2 Carpenter 2 Soul 3 Country Two Step 3 Modern R amp B 4 Country 8 Beat 2 989 Multi Pad Bank List Multi Pad Bankliste Liste des banques multi pads Bank Number Bank Number Bank Name DJ Set 2 1 Live Tom Live Crash Live Kit 1 OrchestraHit Water SE Live Kit 2 Horror SE Live Kit 3 ArabicPerc 1 Night SE Day SE ArabicPerc 2 Car SE Live Perc 1 Live Perc 2 Big Bells Whistle Dance Kit MagicBell SE Scat 1 Swingy Live Brass 1 Live Brass 2 SynBrass Mallet Fills Piano Man Heaven Arp Piano Arp Harpeggio 1 Harpeggio 2 Arpeggio Crystal Arp Twinkle Arp Piano Gliss Xmas 1 Xmas 2 Attention 1 Attention 2 Fanfare 1 Fanfare 2 Classical Flamenco Gtr Salsa Piano Samba Show 1 Samba Show 2 TimbalesRoll Guitar Cut 1 Guitar Cut 2 GuitarRiff 1 GuitarRiff 2 Guitar Strum LiveDrumFill 48 Limbo Dancer DJ Set 1 587 MIDI Control Scale Tune Appendix Anhang Annexe e Parameter Chart Parameter Talielle
413. our own One Touch Setting setups 4 setups per style For a list of One Touch Setting setup parameters refer to page 214 gt Select style 2 Set the panel controls as required gt 3 Press the MEMORY button and press one of the ONE TOUCH SETTING buttons 1 through 4 MEMORY REGISTRATION e ee 0 n ONE TOUCH SETTING PROGRAMMABLE ONE TOUCH SETTING Reference Auto Accompaniment Style Manager The 9000Pro styles are divided into two groups Preset styles and Flash styles Flash styles pre recorded to Flash styles I through VIII can be replaced by the desired data with the Style Manager function Disk Styles Flash Styles Save in Flash ROM Load Style Manager pw Since all Flash style data is stored to Flash ROM any data in the selected Flash style location will be erased and replaced by your new settings This includes the factory programmed Flash style data Flash styles through VIII If you ve deleted the factory set data you can use the Restore function page 154 to load a copy of it from the included disks page 6 For details about Flash ROM refer to Memory Structure on page 54 Basic Procedure MEENE vi Walt b LOAD STYLE a RENAME STYLE 2 TO FLASH ROH IN FLASH STYLE MANAGER 002 002 4 91 Rumba SAVE STYLE a DEFRAGH
414. p mind that even after adjusting all settings as recom mended here the TV monitor you are using may not display the LCD contents as expected e g the LCD contents may not fit on the screen the char acters may not be completely clear or the colors may be wrong Talk Setting This function page includes a number of parameters which affect the microphone sound when the TALK button is on The explanations here apply to step 3 of the Basic Procedure on page 158 F TALK SETTING 1 REVERB DEPTH TOTAL VOLUME DSP Halla VOCAL HARMONY OFF CHORUS DEPTH _ REVERB CHORUS VOLUME PAN DEPTH DEPTH TOTAL VOLUME ATTENUATOR 8dB This determines the amount of attenuation to be applied to the overall sound not including the microphone input These set the reverb and chorus depth of the microphone sound This sets the stereo pan position of the microphone sound This determines the volume or level of your voice from the microphone F TALK SETTING REVERB DEPTH _ CHORUS DEPTH _ TOTAL VOLUME ATT DSP HIC Hall 1 VOCAL HARMONY OFF DSP HIC VOCRL HARHONY DEPTH TYPE TYPE 12 Hall2 VocoderxG Roomi SingBass KaraokPich This is the same parameter as the Vocal Harmony type described on page 81 When the TALK button is turned on the current type setting is recalled This turns Vocal Harmony ON or OFF This selects the
415. quency OK NRPN Drum Filter Resonance OK NRPN Drum EG Attack Time OK NRPN Drum EG Decay Time OK NRPN Drum Instrument Pitch Coarse OK NRPN Drum Instrument Pitch Fine OK NRPN Drum Instrument Level OK NRPN Drum Instrument Pan OK NRPN Drum Instrument Reverb Send Level OK NRPN Drum Instrument Chorus Send Level OK NRPN Drum Instrument Variation Send Level OK System Exclusive Event Initial Source Setup Pattern Sys Ex GM on OK Sys Ex XG on OK Sys Ex XG Parameter Change Effect1 OK Sys Ex XG Parameter Change Multi Part DRY LEVEL OK OK Sys Ex XG Parameter Change Drum Setup PITCH COARSE OK PITCH FINE OK LEVEL OK PAN OK REVERB SEND OK CHORUS SEND OK VARIATION SEND OK mE FILTER CUTOFF FREQUENCY OK FILTER RESONANCE OK EG ATTACK OK EG DECAY1 OK EG DECAY2 OK Event Initial Source Setup Pattern Note Off OK Note On OK Program Change OK OK Pitch Bend OK OK Control 0 Bank Select MSB OK OK Control 1 Modulation OK OK Control 6 Data Entry MSB OK Control 7 Master Volume OK OK Control 10 Pan OK OK Control 11 Expression OK OK Control 32 Bank Select LSB OK OK Control 38 Data Entry LSB OK Control 71 Harmonic Content OK OK Control 72 Release Time OK Control 73 Attack Time OK Control 74 Brightness OK OK Control 84 Portamento Control
416. r like chordal parts s BASS E Suitable for bass line transposition This table is basically similar to the MELODY table but recognizes on bass chords allowed in the FINGERED 2 fingering mode Use primarily for bass lines e MELODIC MINOR This table lowers the third scale degree by a semitone when changing from a major to a minor chord or raises the minor third scale degree a semitone when changing from a minor to a major chord Other notes are not changed e HARMONIC MINOR This table lowers the third and sixth scale degrees by a semitone when changing from a major to a minor chord or raises the minor third and flatted sixth scale degrees a semitone when changing from a minor to a major chord Other notes are not changed Highest Key This sets the highest key upper limit of the octaves of the note transposing for the Source Chord Root setting The notes designated higher than the highest key will actually be played back in the octave just below the highest key This setting is effective only when the NTR parameter above is set to ROOT TRANS Example When highest key is Root change CM C M Notes played C3 E3 G3 C 3 F3 G 3 F3 A3 C4 F 2 A 2 C 3 Reference vel Style Creator Note Limit This sets the note range low and high limits for the voices recorded on user style tracks By setting the note range you can prevent unrealistic notes such as high notes from
417. ram Category Voice Name MSB LSB Program Changez Change 11 GrngePad 83 0 94 6 VbrtClar 83 0 71 12 WarmStr4 83 68 51 7 DX Clar1 83 65 71 13 DX AnSt1 83 70 50 8 Oboe 1 83 0 68 14 DX Str10 83 66 49 9 Au Campo 83 0 84 15 SyBr Pd3 83 66 90 10 Bassoon 83 0 70 16 SyBr Pd2 83 65 90 11 DX Acrd4 35 1 61 17 DX Str 5 83 70 48 12 DX FIt 83 65 73 18 DX Str 3 83 68 48 13 DX Botle 83 64 76 19 Mid Str1 83 0 48 14 Whistle1 83 0 78 20 DX SySt7 35 1 86 15 1 83 0 79 Vil 16 CaliopL2 83 64 82 1 DX Trpt2 83 64 56 17 DrwOrg1 1 35 1 46 2 DX Trpt3 83 65 56 18 PufOrgn2 83 65 20 DX Trpt4 83 66 56 19 PIPES1 35 0 19 4 SlvTrmpt 83 67 56 20 DXChrch2 35 1 58 5 DX Trb 2 83 64 57 6 BRASS 1 35 0 0 1 E ORGAN1 35 0 16 7 BRASS 2 35 0 1 2 E ORGAN4 35 0 46 8 BRASS 3 35 0 2 3 JazOrg 1 83 67 16 9 DX BrSc2 35 1 65 4 DrwOrg 5 83 70 16 10 CS80 Br1 35 1 66 5 DrwOrg15 35 1 48 11 DX Tuba2 83 64 58 6 PrcOrg 4 35 1 51 12 AlpsHorn 83 68 60 7 RckOrg 4 83 66 18 13 DX Horn 83 0 60 8 RckOrg14 83 97 18 14 MelwHrn1 83 64 60 9 Whisper1 83 65 91 15 MletHorn 83 66 60 10 ArrowxMS 35 1 102 16 83 67 60 11 35 1 118 17 BrsLead1 83 0 83 12 Flxatone 35 1 124 18 BrsLead2 83 65 83 13 Laser 2 35 1 125 19 BrsLead3 83 66 83 14 DX Ring1 67 0 64 20 ChorsBrs 83 0 63 15 DX Echo1 83 102 102 Vill 16 83 0 113 1 Court 83 79 62 17 Block 83 0 115 2 DX BrSc1 83 0 61 18 Log Drum 83 96 115 3 DX SBr 2 35 1 68 19 SoftHead 83 64 116 4 DX SBr 3 83 67
418. rano Sax 002 VLIAItoSax Sax Motion Sax M 2 BrishtTenor Ana Sopran M Soft Alto 005 Jazz Sax For this example II is selected 6 Select a voice Sloti Flash 2 Mil vitosax fo10 M Tenor Sax PLUG IN MAHAGER PAE eae 006 M Soprano Sax Ate Sax S e Asingle Plug in Board can only sound one part one Plug in voice at a time This means that the playing methods described on page 17 turning parts R1 R3 on simulta neously and page 18 turning parts R and L on simulta neously cannot be used even if you select the same slot s Plug in Board voices for the R1 R8 and L parts 2 Cie Please note that even though Multi Part Plug in Board e g PLG100 XG can be used with the 9000Pro the voice list of the slot corresponding to the 003 Motion Sax Ana Sopran BrishtTenor Soft Alto i Jazz Sax 010 M Tenor Sax Multi Part board cannot dis played in the LCD See page 65 for details about the Multi Part Plug in Board PLUG IN MANAGER Press the corresponding buttons to select the various pages 7 Play the keyboard Up to a maximum of two Plug in Boards can be installed to the 9000Pro using both SLOT 1 and SLOT 2 giving you access t
419. rate after the key is released FILTER The 9000Pro features two independent filters For basic information about the filters see page 93 CUSTOM VOICE CREATOR Grand Piano Sets the amount of peak resonance applied to FILTER 1 Higher values produce more resonant emphasis The TYPE parameters specifies the touch sensitivity curve to be applied to the dynamic filters and the SENS parameters sets the sensitivity of the filters to touch control Higher values produce higher sensitivity RESONANCE TOUCH SENS H VE FILTER 1 FILTER 2 TYPE FREQ TYPE FREQ 1754 2047 Resets the currently selected EG parameters to their most basic settings Sets the cutoff frequency of Filter2 Selects the type of Filter2 Sets the cutoff frequency of Filter1 Selects the type of Filter1 Filter types LPF Low Pass Filter Level These frequencies are passed by the filter 7 Frequency Cutoff frequency BPF Band Pass Filter Level Cutoff range Range passed Cutoff range Frequency Center frequency HPF High Pass Filter Level Cutoff range Range passed Frequency Cutoff frequency BEF Band Elimination Filter Level Range passed Cutoff range Range passed Frequency Center frequency Reference Custom Voice Creating e E4 LFO An acronym for Low Frequency Oscillator a block that produces a low freq
420. rd Key Alternate Analog Kit Dance Kit Jazz Kit Brush Kit Symphony Kit Live Standard Kit Notes Note Note Off Group i 13 CH 1 C 0 3 14 D 1 0 3 15 D 1 0 0 16 E 1 0 17 F 1 0 4 18 FR 1 F 0 4 19 0 20 Gt 1 G o 21 A 1 0 22 1 0 23 1 0 24 010 25 C 0 C Brush Tap Stereo 26 D Brush Swirl Stereo 27 D D Brush Slap Stereo 28 E 0 E Reverse Cymbal Reverse Cymbal Brush Tap Swirl Stereo 29 0 F Snare Roll Stereo 30 FH 0 FR Hi Q2 HiQ2 31 G 0198 Snare Noisy 4 Snare Techno Snare Jazz H Brush Slap 2 Snare L Stereo 32 Gt 0 G 33 A D A Kick 3 Kick Techno Q Kick Soft 2 Kick Soft Stereo 34 0 Rim Gate Open Rim Shot Light Open Rim Shot Stereo 35 B 0 Kick Analog Short Kick Techno L Gran Cassa Kick Light Stereo 36 2 Kick Analog Kick Techno Kick Jazz Kick Jazz Gran Cassa Mute Kick Std Stereo 37 CH CH 2 Side Stick Analog Side Stick Analog Side Stick Light Side Stick Light Side Stick Stereo 38 D D 2 Snare Analog Snare Clap Snare Jazz L Brush Slap 3 Band Snare Snare M Stereo 39 D D 2 40 E E 2 Snare Analog 2 Snare Dry Snare Jazz M Brush Tap 2 Band Snare 2 Snare H Stereo 41 2 Tom Analog 1 Tom Analog 1 Tom Brush 1 Floor Tom L Stereo 42 FR FR 2 1 Hi Hat Closed Analog _ Hi Hat Closed 3 Hi Hat Closed Stereo 43 G G 2 Tom Analog 2 Tom Analog 2 Tom Brush 2 Floor Tom H Stereo 44 G G 2 1 Hi Hat Closed Analog 2 Hi Hat Clos
421. re for direct transmission reception with a computer If you experience distorted or out of tune sound from the Vo cal Harmony feature your vocal microphone may be picking up extraneous sounds other than your voice the Auto Ac companiment sound from the 9000Pro for example In par ticular bass sounds can cause mistracking of the Vocal Harmony feature The solution to this problem is to ensure that as little extraneous sound as possible is picked up by your vocal microphone Sing as closely to the microphone as possible Use a directional microphone Turn down the MASTER VOLUME ACMP volume or SONG volume control Separate the microphone from the external speakers as much as possi ble Cut the Low band via the 3 Band EQ function in the MIC SETUP display page 82 D When a voice is changed the previously selected effect is changed This is normal each voice has its own suitable preset values which are au tomatically recalled when the corresponding Voice Set parameters are turned on page 163 D There is a slight difference in sound quality between notes played on the keyboard Some voices have a looping sound Some noise or vibrato is noticeable at higher pitches de pending upon the voice D D D Some voices will jump an octave in pitch when played in the upper or lower registers This is normal and is a result of the 9000Pro s sampling system Some voices have a pitc
422. reGtr 0 115 25 12 Elec Organ 0 118 17 26 SmoothNylon 0 114 24 13 DrawbarOrg 0 115 16 27 Tremolo Gtr 0 113 27 14 Click Organ 0 112 17 28 HawaiianGtr 0 114 26 15 Stadium Org 0 118 16 29 Heavy Stack 0 114 30 16 Mellow Draw 0 115 17 30 BrightClean 0 116 27 17 Jazz Organ2 0 113 16 31 Wah Guitar 0 122 27 18 Bright Draw 0 116 16 32 Classic Gtr 0 112 24 19 60 s Organ 0 116 17 33 DX JazzGtr 0 117 26 20 Jazz Organ3 0 120 16 34 Distortion 0 112 30 21 ChapelOrgn1 0 113 19 35 Elec 12Str 0 119 27 22 ChapelOrgn2 0 114 19 36 FeedbackGtr 0 113 29 11 73 Appendix Anhang Annexe 998 567 Voice List Stimmenliste Liste tles voix Category voice Name MSB amp LSB Program Category Voice Name MSB LSB Change Change 37 Mandolin 0 114 25 28 Fiddle 0 112 110 38 CleanGuitar 0 112 27 29 Banjo 0 112 105 39 MutedGuitar 0 112 28 30 Sitar 0 112 104 40 Funk Guitar 0 113 28 31 Koto 0 112 107 41 Jazz Guitar 0 112 26 32 Shamisen 0 112 106 42 Overdrive 0 112 29 33 Soft Violin 0 113 40 43 Finger Bass 0 112 33 34 Orch Hit 0 112 55 44 UprightBass 0 113 32 Trumpet 45 Pick Bass 0 112 34 1 Sweet Trump 0 115 56 46 Jaco Bass 0 113 35 2 Sweet Tromb 0 117 57 47 Slap Bass 0 112 36 3 SoftTrumpet 0 114 56 48 Analog Bass 0 112 39 4 JazzTrumpet 0 116 56 49 DX FunkBass 0 113 37
423. reating style data is included on the supplied floppy disk TEM PLATE MID The Initial Setup area from 1 2 000 through 1141479 is used for voice and effect settings Do not include note event data The Main A data begins at 2 1 000 Any number of mea sures from 1 to 255 can be used All measures must have one of the following time signatures 2 4 3 4 4 4 or 5 4 Fill In AA begins from the top of the measure following the last measure of the Main A pattern In the chart this is 4 1 00 but this is only an example and the actual timing will depend on the length of Main A Please note that all Fill Ins can be only 1 measure in length refer to the Sec tion Length chart below Section Length Intro 255 measures max Main 255 measures max Fill In 1 measure Ending 255 measures max The following charts indicate the valid MIDI events for both the Initial Setup data and the Pattern data Make sure to NOT enter any events marked with a dash nor any events not listed here Channel Message Style Creator RPN amp NRPN Event Initial Source Setup Pattern RPN Pitch Bend Sensitivity OK RPN Fine Tuning OK RPN Null OK NRPN Vibrato Rate OK Vibrato Delay OK NRPN EG Decay Time OK NRPN Drum Filter Cutoff Fre
424. rent type 5 e WARNING Do not place this product or any other objects on the power cord or place it in a position where anyone could walk on trip over or roll anything over power or connecting cords of any kind The use of an extension cord is not recommended If you must use an extension cord the minimum wire size for a 25 cord or less is 18 AWG NOTE The smaller the AWG number the larger the current handling capacity For longer extension cords consult a local electrician 6 Ventilation Electronic products unless specifically designed for enclosed installations should be placed in locations that do not interfere with proper ventilation If instructions for enclosed installations are not provided it must be assumed that unobstructed ventilation is required 7 Temperature considerations Electronic products should be installed in locations that do not seriously contribute to their oper ating temperature Placement of this product close to heat sources such as radiators heat registers etc should be avoided 8 This product was NOT designed for use in wet damp loca tions and should not be used near water or exposed to rain Exam ples of wet damp locations are near a swimming pool spa tub sink or wet basement 9 This product should be used only with the components sup plied or a cart rack or stand that is recommended by the manufac turer If a cart rack or stand is used please observe all safety markings an
425. ributed by Yamaha Kemble Music U K Ltd 229 For details of products please contact your nearest Yamaha or the authorized distributor listed below Pour plus de d tails sur les produits veuillez vous adresser 4 Yamaha ou au distributeur le plus proche de vous figurant dans la liste suivante NORTH AMERICA CANADA Yamaha Canada Music Ltd 135 Milner Avenue Scarborough Ontario MIS 3RI Canada Tel 416 298 1311 U S A Yamaha Corporation of America 6600 Orangethorpe Ave Buena Park Calif 90620 U S A Tel 714 522 9011 CENTRAL amp SOUTH AMERICA MEXICO Yamaha de Mexico S A De C V Departamento de ventas Javier Rojo Gomez No 1149 Col Gpe Del Moral Deleg Iztapalapa 09300 Mexico D F Tel 686 00 33 BRAZIL Yamaha Musical do Brasil LTDA Av Rebou as 2636 S o Paulo Brasil Tel 011 853 1377 ARGENTINA Yamaha Music Argentina S A Viamonte 1145 Piso2 B 1053 Buenos Aires Argentina Tel 1 371 7021 PANAMA AND OTHER LATIN AMERICAN COUNTRIES CARIBBEAN COUNTRIES Yamaha de Panama S A Torre Banco General Piso 7 Urbanizaci n Marbella Calle 47 y Aquilino de la Guardia Ciudad de Panam Panam Tel 507 269 5311 EUROPE THE UNITED KINGDOM Yamaha Kemble Music U K Ltd Sherbourne Drive Tilbrook Milton Keynes MK7 8BL England Tel 01908 366700 IRELAND Danfay Ltd 61D Sallynoggin Road Dun Laoghaire Co Dublin Tel 01 2859177 GERMANY SWITZERLAND
426. rightness o o o Voice Voice x LEFT OrganFlute Panel Organ No o Right 2 EQ Low EQ Voice x Plug in Voice Right 2 EQ High xx Fa VOUS 2 R1 OrganFlute Panel Organ No D Voice x Right 3 LEAD Part On Off peps woe R2 OrganFlute Panel Organ No x x D Voice x Right 3 Voice s 9 x 5 R3 OrganFlute Panel Organ No x Voice X Right 3 Release Time En 481 ullo x X wore B S LEFT OrganFlute Panel Organ No D Acmp x Right 3 Voice Octave o Voice Voice D 9 Effect Right 3 Part Volume D Voice x Reverb Effect Type b Right 3 Part Panpot Voice x H Right 3 Reverb Depth o Effects Voice x Neverk Parameter SE SE 2 5 Reverb Right 3 Chorus Depth Effects Voice Reverb Return Level x x Acmp Return Level Right 3 Poly Mono ON OFF o o Voice Voice x Chorus Effect Type x x Acmp x Right 3 Portamento Poly Mono x Voice x Chorus Effect Parameter x x x D D D Right 3 Tuning x Voice x Chorus Right 3 Pitch Bend Range x Voice x Chorus Return Level xX xX x Acmp Right 3 Portamento Time Voice Voice D Variation DSP3 Type x x a
427. rn out over a long period of use When this Use the DIMMER control to turn the lamp on DIMMER anew one You can extend the life of the bulb by turning the DIMMER control down toward OFF MIN when using the lamp To disconnect the lamp First make sure the lamp is off the DIMMER is set to OFF then unplug the lamp while holding down the PUSH latch on the rear panel Quick Guide Reference on page 57 Voice related buttons Playing a Voice gt Press the R1 LCD button to turn the RIGHT1 part on 2 Select a voice group PIANO ORGAN GUITAR S cJ E PIANO ACCORDION STRINGS ce 5 For this example STRINGS is selected 3 Select a voice For this example Live Orch is selected 4 Play the voice e pw The voice selected here is called voice RIGHT 1 See page 57 for more informa tion on voice RIGHT1 R1 Strings 22 0112 01 001 006 M Live Strs Solo Violin 002 007 Live Arco Orch Brass 003 Live Orch Orch Flute 009 Symphon Str Orch FLBr 005 010 M OberStrings Orch Oboe R1 Strings
428. ro sound as listed below The DSP block numbers appear in several locations on the 9000Pro panel and in some of the display screen for easy reference e g REVERB 1 CHORUS 2 DSP 3 DSP 4 etc Parts to be applied Description Reverb 1 Overall Creates a reverb effect that makes you sound like you are playing in places like a concert hall or live in a club Chorus 2 Overall Adds a chorus effect that makes your playing sound as though multiple parts were being played together at the same time DSP 8 Auto Accompaniment In addition to the Reverb and Chorus types the 9000Pro Song has special DSP effects that include additional effects usually used for a specific part such as distortion and tremolo DSP 4 VOICE RIGHT1 This block which can be turned on or off by a panel but ton is applied to the RIGHT1 voice DSP 5 VOICE RIGHT2 This block which can be turned on or off by a panel but ton is applied to the RIGHT2 voice DSP 6 VOICE RIGHT3 This block which can be turned on or off by a panel but ton is applied to the RIGHTS voice DSP 7 VOICE LEFT This block which can be turned on or off by a panel but ton is applied to the LEFT voice DSP 8 Microphone Sound This block which can be turned on or off by a panel but ton is applied to the microphone sound Vocal Harmony 9 Vocal Harmony This block which can be turned on or off by a panel but ton is used for the Vocal Harm
429. rqu es sont inaudibles d s l instant elles sont rel ch es 2 Groupe alternatif jouer d un instrument dans un groupe num rot provoque la coupure im m diate du son de tout autre instrument du m me groupe de m me num ro 3 comme kit standard 4 aucun son 5 StyleLvStd MSB 127 LSB 0 PC 124 correspond au kit Live Standard 6 StyleLvFunk MSB 127 LSB 0 PC 125 correspond au kit Live Funk Appendix Anhang Annexe Keyboard Drum Assignments Tastatur Drum Belegung Affectation des percussions de clavier Appendix Anhang Annexe Bank Select MSB 0 127 127 127 127 127 Bank Select LSB 0 127 0 0 0 0 Program Change 1 128 82 125 83 84 126 85 127 MIDI ive ive Funk Notes Note Keyboard Ky ps Standard Kit 1 Live Funk Kit Live Brush Kit e para Funk Kit 13 C 1 CK 0 3 Surdo Mute 14 j D 0 3 Surdo Open 15 1 0 0 Hi Q 16 E 1 0 Whip Slap 17 1 0 4 Scratch H 18 FH 1 0 4 Scratch L 19 1 0 Finger Snap 20 GH 1 G 0 Click Noise 21 A 1 A 0 Metronome Click 22 1 8 0 Metronome Bell 23 B 1 0 Seq Click L 24
430. rter settings which appear when Beat is set to 12 are variations of the 16 setting Swing Produces a swing feel by shifting the timing of back beats as specified by the Beat parameter For example if the specified Beat value is 8th notes then the swing parameter will delay the 2nd 4th 6th and 8th beats of each measure to create a swing feel The A through E settings produce different degrees of swing feel with A being the most subtle and E being the stron gest Fine Selects a range of groove templates to be applied to the current section PUSH settings cause certain beats to be played early while HEAVY settings delay the timing of certain beats The number 2 3 4 or 5 determines which beats are to be affected All beats up to the specified beat but not including the first beat will be played early or delayed e g the 2nd and 3rd beats if 3 is selected In all cases A types produce minimum ef fect B types produce medium effect and C types produce the maximum effect Dynamics parameters Compression Accent Type Selects the type of accent template to be applied to the select ed section part Strength Determines how strongly the selected Accent Type will be applied Higher values produce a stronger effect Expand Expands or compresses the range of velocity values in the se lecte
431. s such as those pro duced by televisions speakers motors etc since magnetic fields can partially or completely erase data on the disk render ing it unreadable Never use a floppy disk with a deformed shutter or housing Do not attach anything other than the provided labels to a floppy disk Also make sure that labels are attached in the proper loca tion To protect your data write protect tab To prevent accidental erasure of important data slide the disk s write protect tab to the protect position tab open 9 Write protect tab ON Write protect tab OFF locked or write pro unlocked or write tected enabled Data backup For maximum data security Yamaha recommends that you keep two copies of important data on separate floppy disks This gives you a backup if one disk is lost or damaged Congratulations You are the proud owner of an extraordinary electronic keyboard The Yamaha 9000Pro combines advanced tone generation technology with state of the art digital electronics and features to give you stunning sound quality with maximum musical versatility The advanced Auto Accompaniment Vocal Har mony and Sampler features in particular are brilliant examples of how Yamaha technology can signifi cantly expand your musical horizons A large size graphic display and easy to use interface also greatly enhance the operability of this advanced instrument In addition
432. s 0 112 44 18 Ober Brass 0 113 63 20 MarcatoStrs 0 115 49 19 Trumpet Ens 0 122 61 21 Syn Strings 0 112 50 20 MellowHorns 0 119 61 22 PizzStrings 0 112 45 21 BigBandBrs 0 113 61 23 Viola 0 112 4 22 Pop Brass 0 118 61 24 Cello 0 112 42 23 Brass Hit 0 126 61 25 Contrabass 0 112 43 24 Step Brass 0 124 61 26 Harp 0 112 46 25 Analog Brs 0 112 63 27 Hackbrett 0 113 46 26 BallroomBrs 0 113 59 Appendix Anhang Annexe Voice List Stimmentiste Liste les voix Category voice Name MSB amp LSB Program Category Voice Name MSB LSB pean Change Change 27 Trb Section 0 113 57 15 Pan Heaven 0 120 88 28 Small Brass 0 117 61 16 DooBa Scats 0 115 53 29 Soft Analog 0 114 63 17 Daa Choir 0 120 53 30 FunkyAnalog 0 115 62 18 Doo Choir 0 122 53 31 TechnoBrass 0 114 62 19 Dooom Choir 0 120 52 32 Synth Brass 0 112 62 20 Live Dooom 0 116 53 Saxophone 21 Choir 0 112 52 1 Sweet Tenor 0 117 66 22 Air Choir 0 112 54 2 Sweet Alto 0 114 65 23 Vocal Ensbl 0 113 52 3 Sweet Sprno 0 113 64 24 Insomnia 0 113 94 4 Sweet Clari 0 114 71 25 Cyber Pad 0 113 99 5 Growl Sax 0 118 66 26 Vox Humana 0 112 53 6 BreathTenor 0 114 66 27 Voices 0 113 54 7 BreathyAlto 0 113 65 28 Uuh Choir 0 115 52 8 Soprano Sax 0 112 64 29 Wave 2001 0 112 95 9 MelClarin
433. s about how the effect ES DSP effect type or set related parameters refer to page 146 blocks are connected refer to the Effect Signal Flow Chart on page 147 88 59 Other Keyboard related Functions Left Hold LEFT HOLD This function causes the Left part voice to be held even when the keys are released Non decaying voices such as strings are held continuously while decay type voices such as piano decay more slowly as if the sustain pedal has been pressed This function is especially effective when used with the auto accompaniment For example if you play and release a chord in the Auto Accompaniment section of the keyboard with the Left part on and the Left voice set to Strings the strings part sustains adding a natural rich ness to the overall accompaniment sound Transpose TRANSPOSE C C JJ With this function you can transpose the pitch of the 9000Pro up or down over a range of 2 octaves in semitone steps Three transposing methods Keyboard Song and Master are available select the desired method in the Function display page 162 then use the TRANSPOSE buttons to change the value e Keyboard The TRANSPOSE buttons affect the pitch of the keyboard sound the accompaniment pitch and the pitch of the Multi Pads for which Chord Match has been set to on Note that the transposition is applied from the next note or accompaniment chord playe
434. s not stored to Flash ROM NEXT SOLO Mutes turns off all other tracks PLAY Turns the selected track on MUTE Mutes turns off the selected track BASS ect a pattern for BASS Using Category Style Section and Part you can access all CATEGORY STYLE CT 16 Beat DANCE 2 SHING2JAZZ 8 3 E PLAY HUTE RHY2 BASS CHD1 HAIN HAIN D Phrase2 lect a pattern for PHRSE2 Using Category Style Section and Pert CATEGORY STYLE HAIN Lr 3 HAIND BACK Store as a Flash style to Flash ROM by following the on screen instruc tions Reference Style Creator Revoice Easy Edit The Revoice parameters let you determine the basic volume tempo and Part on off settings for your original style The explanations here apply to step 5 of the Basic Procedure on page 128 Select the Style and the Section to be revoiced EN REVOICE Revoice lets you change the voice volume tempo etc of the style Select the section you want to change Or select RLL to revoice an entire section all at once Press NEXT to continue SECTION ALL ALL EXCEPT INTRO ENDING HAIN B Edit the Revoice parameters The 9000Pro Revoice function lets you change the following parameters for each track Total Volume Tempo Voice number Part Volume Part
435. s soon as the end of the phrase is reached A phrase can be stopped while it is playing by pressing the MULTI PAD STOP button Chord Match If a Multi Pad is played while Auto Accompaniment is playing and the Chord Match function for that pad is ON the phrase will be automatically re harmonized to match the accompaniment chords nore the included disks page 6 Since all Multi Pad data is stored to Flash ROM all of the factory programmed Multi Pad banks will be replaced by your new settings If you ve deleted the factory set data you can use the Restore function page 154 to load a copy of it from BANK 01 For details about Flash ROM refer to Memory Structure on page 54 Multi Pad banks 60 banks in Flash ROM All banks can be replaced by the new created pad data D D CAUTION The Repeat and Chord Match settings for the Multi Pads are stored together in a group of 58 banks For this rea son you should be careful when making edits and storing your edits since all 58 banks will be overwritten with the new data nore j k Bank 59 factory preset of the Multi Pads can be used to send various MIDI messages This convenient feature lets you control the following MIDI functions of an external device by simply pressing the appro priate Multi Pad 1 All Note Off Pad 2 Reset All Controllers Pad 3 Start FA Pad 4 Stop FC Th
436. s the MUSIC DATABASE button MUSIC DATABASE 0 gt 2 Select Music Database CATEGORY MUSIC DATA TENPO Love is Deep 98 Smooth Ballads Saxy Tenor e Gc Golden Band Swinging Sultan 152 Swing 8 Jazz Strait Guitar 152 Evergreen Proud of 156 Romantic Hood Loud Guitars 156 Easy Listening Rocking Brass 156 KEE Press this to actually call up the Heaven Strings _ 98 Music Database Harp Solo 1163 Hip Hop House White and Pale Latin Nights Soprano Shade C78 Select the desired Music Data CountrysHestern Procol Synth base Ballroom Gala I Do Everything Use button 4 5 to move the lt a PROG cursor to the desired location and You can use the Data n n n n n n fn press the OK LCD button to dial to select the desired Select the desired oe SES actually call up the Music Data Music Database Category H H 2 U H 0 H 1 p T location by using button 6 or 7 to call up the Music Database You need not press the OK LCD button For example try out Category Great Pop Songs and Music Database Called to say gt Play along with the accompaniment playback Wa f HT TTT Auto Accompaniment section Searching the Music Database gt Press the MUSIC DATABASE button MUSIC DATABASE
437. s the effect depth for the corresponding part See the next page for details about Effects e Tune Transpose e Tuning Pitch Bend Range e Portamento Time Voice This lets you change the Allows the pitch to be transposed up or down in semitone incre ments pages 61 and 162 Sets the pitch for the corresponding part Shifts the pitch of the specified part up or down by one or two octaves The value of this parameter is added to the value set via the UPPER OCTAVE button page 18 Sets the range of the PITCH BEND wheel for the corresponding part The range is from 0 to 12 with each step corresponding to one semitone Sets the portamento time for the corresponding part only when the part is set to page 60 The higher the value the longer the portamento time The portamento effect a smooth slide between notes is produced when the notes are played legato i e a note is held while the next note is played voice for each part Volume EQ Filter Effect Depth Tune Voice VOLUME PAN EQ EQ BRIGHT HARMONIC REVERB CHORUS DSP DSP DSP DSP DSP DSP TRANS TUNING OCTAVE PITCH PORTAMENTO VOICE POT LOW NESS CONTENT 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 POSE BEND TIME k k RANGE Master Overall Keyboard All Voices
438. s you play and release sustain and fade out normally In the HOLD setting when you hold down the footswitch for sustain the notes you play are held just as if you were actually holding them down with your hands even if you release the keys CONTROLLER FOOT CONTROLLER PANEL CONTROLLER SUSTAIN HODE DEFAULT HOLD E Panel Controller MODULATION WHEEL Determines to which of the 9000Pro voices the MODULATION wheel will apply 4 CONTROLLER FOOT CONTROLLER PANEL CONTROLLER LEFT R2 1 MODULATION HHEEL INITIAL TOUCH N AFTER TOUCH Tele Wh 4 TRANSPOSE ASSIGN KEYBOARD LEFT Rai R2 GE Turn Modulation wheel control ON 4 OFF c for the corresponding parts ON or OFF as required Law Law av Reference The 9000Pro Functions INITIAL TOUCH With this function the 9000Pro senses how strongly or softly you play the keys and uses that playing strength to affect the sound in various ways depending on the selected voice This allows you to play with greater expressiveness and add effects with your playing technique 2 CONTROLLER FOOT CONTROLLER PANEL CONTROLLER Indicates current sensitivity Ka 2 v setting 2 INITIAL TOUCI N AFTER TOUCH v Y a TRANSPOSE ASSIGN
439. sh to name Freeze Group You can specify which settings are affected by the Freeze function page 28 via this Quick Guide function on page 28 REGISTRATION FREEZE VOICE SET REGISTRATION FREEZE VOICE SET Hark the group s that you want to remain uncharged even when a Registration Memory is selected FREEZE GROUP SETTING D COHARHONY SONG The parameters included in each VOICE TEHPO TUNE TRANS CONTROLLER group are listed on page 214 O SCALE O MULTI PAD 1 GROUP SELECT Selects a setting you want to freeze or un freeze Set mark or remove un mark the selected setting Voice Set This function determines whether or not the preset Voice Effect EQ and Harmony type settings assigned to each preset voice are recalled when a new voice is selected REGISTRATION FREEZE VOICE SET NOTE REGISTRATION __FREEZE amp The VOICE DSP EQ and vorcE EFF HRM EQ 1 RIGHT1 HARMONY TYPE parameters 2 RIGHT2 LZ are listed on page 214 Select a part zs 4 LEFT EQ HARMONY EFFECT HIGH LOH TYPE ON ON OFF OFF OFF avy 1 l av These four sets can be individu ally turned ON or OFF for each part RIGHT1 2 3 LEFT Reference The 9000Pro Functions Harmony Echo Sett
440. siness MachinesCorporation Windows is the registered trademark of Microsoft amp Corporation All other trademarks are the property of their respective holders 2 Panel logos The logos printed on the 9000Pro panel indicate the standards formats it supports and special features it includes wm System Level 1 XF mil GM System Level 1 is an addition to the MIDI standard Ga The Yamaha XF format enhances the SMF Standard MIDI which guarantees that any data conforming to the standard File standard with greater functionality and open ended will play accurately on any GM compatible tone generator expandability for the future The 9000Pro is capable of dis or synthesizer from any manufacturer playing lyrics when an XF file containing lyric data is wei XG played XG is a new Yamaha MIDI specification which significantly Vocal Harmony expands and improves on the GM System Level 1 stan ferXG Vocal Harmony employs state of the art digital signal pro dard with greater voice handling capacity expressive con cessing technology to automatically add appropriate vocal trol and effect capability while retaining full compatibility harmony to a lead vocal line sung by the user Vocal Har with GM By using the 9000Pro s XG voices it is possible mony can even change the character and gender of the to record XG compatible song files lead voice as well as the added voices to produce a wide range of vocal harmony effects
441. sly un checked and vice versa Select the event boxes to be displayed Modulation Portamento Time Data Entry HSB volume Panpot expression Bank Select LSB sustain Portamento sostenuto soft N Removes all check marks at once Select the desired event Enters removes the check mark in the selected box Chord Step Quick Recording The Chord Step recording feature makes it possible to record Auto Accompaniment chord page 70 changes one at a time with precise timing Since the changes don t have to be entered in real time it is easy to create even complex chord changes and accompaniment before recording the melody The explanations here apply to step 6 on page 111 E Entering the Chord Section Chord Step For example the following chord progression can be entered by the procedure described below MAIN D FILL IN C MAIN C 4 4 ade lg t 1 tt t 1 Dm7 Em7 Dm7 G7 1 Press the MAIN D button to specify the sec gen THESE 001 1 000 tion and enter the chords as shown at right STEP REC WSC EIER 1 000 Sty Pi 01 Heart Beat Chord C cc CM7 ACCOMPANIMENT 5 11 000 Tempo CODER ES VARIATION t 001 3 000 End Dm7 00 000 HEAS E BEAT f CLK 002 1 000 Select this resolution and play chords as shown at right
442. ss the root key and Inl H press the root key and both a white and In Il a black key to its left black key to its left ds V 2 Multi Finger The Multi Finger mode automatically detects Single Finger or Fingered chord fingerings so you can use either type of fingering without having to switch fingering modes Fingered This mode lets you finger your own chords on the auto accompaniment section of the keyboard while the 9000Pro supplies appropriately orchestrated rhythm bass and chord accompaniment in the selected style The Fingered mode recognizes the various chord types listed on the next page Fingered Pro This mode is basically the same as Fingered with the exception that more than three notes must be played to indi cate the chords Playing the root note and its octave produces accompaniment based only on the root On Bass This mode accepts the same fingerings as the Fingered mode but the lowest note played in the Auto Accompani ment section of the keyboard is used as the bass note allowing you to play on bass chords in the Fingered mode the root of the chord is always used as the bass note On Bass Pro This mode is basically the same as On Bass with the exception that more than three notes must be played to indi cate the chords Playing the root note and its octave produces accompaniment based only on the root Full Keyboard When this advanced auto accompaniment mode is engaged the 9000Pro will
443. st the desired parameter Select the desired menu Select the desired menu Select the desired parameter Ej You can also select the desired menu by pressing the NEXT or BACK button You can change the value of all parts simultaneously To do this press any of the LCD 1 8 buttons or rotate the data dial while holding the cor Select the desired parameter Adjust the parame ter for each part ita 73 Oa IN GN 3 You can use the data dial to adjust the parameter responding LCD button First select the desired part by pressing the any of the 1 8 IA J buttons and then rotate the data dial to adjust the parameter V 2 The operations for each parameter corresponding to step 2 are covered in the follow ing explanations Part Settings In addition to the keyboard played voices the 9000Pro features many different instru mental parts including those contained in the auto accompaniment song playback and vocal harmony See the next page for details Reference evi 143 Mixing Console e Brightness e Harmonic Content Effect Depth This increases or decreases the brightness of the sound This increases or decreases the harmonic content giving the sound more or less punch This parameter set
444. t Ss 2 Cl When the 9000Pro is turned on the LED below the floppy disk slot will be lit indicating that the Disk Drive is ready to use To eject a floppy disk Before ejecting the disk be sure to confirm that the FDD is stopped check if the DISK IN USE lamp is off Press the eject button slowly as far as it will go the disk will automatically pop out When the disk is fully ejected carefully remove it by hand This lamp is always on when the power is on regardless of the disk oper ation DISK IN USE 5 N This lamp lights during d disk read write opera tions such as when a dam disk has been inserted during recording play y back formatting etc DISKINUSE MIN eee MAX If the eject button is pressed too quickly or if it is not pressed in as far as it will go the disk may not eject properly The eject but ton may become stuck in a half pressed position with the disk extending from the drive slot by only a few millimeters If this happens do not attempt to pull out the partially ejected disk since using force in this situation can damage the disk drive mechanism or the floppy disk To remove a partially ejected disk try pressing the eject button once again or push the disk back into the slot and then repeat the eject procedure Never attempt to remove the disk or turn the power off during recording reading
445. t MIDI IN assignment s is trans mitted to the 9000Pro MIDI OUT B Set the THRU PORT set 1 Computer and software with ting in the MIDI SYSTEM le z n 179 en bett eee capability 9000Pro THRU PORT Comments NO THRU All incoming MIDI data from the computer is recognized by the 9000Pro but is not transmitted through the MIDI B OUT terminal THRU All incoming MIDI data from the computer is recognized by the 9000Pro and is also transmitted unproc essed through the MIDI B OUT terminal In this case the MIDI B OUT terminal functions as MIDI THRU OFF Only MIDI data assigned to Port 1 from the computer is recognized by the 9000Pro The data is not transmitted through the MIDI B OUT terminal Any MIDI data that is assigned to ports other than Port 1 is not recognized or transmitted 1 8 Only MIDI data assigned to Port 1 from the computer is recognized by the 9000Pro The data that is assigned to the port number set here is transmitted through the MIDI B OUT terminal Any MIDI data that is assigned to ports other than the one selected here and Port 1 is not recognized or transmitted Reference MIDI Functions The 9000Pro offers a range of MIDI functions that allow it to be used effectively in even the most sophis ticated M
446. t commercially available software is recorded as Format 0 The 9000Pro is compatible with both Format 0 and Format 1 Song data recorded on the 9000Pro is automatically recorded as SMF Format 0 ESEQ This sequence format is compatible with many of Yamaha s MIDI devices including the Clavinova series instruments This is a common format used with various Yamaha software The 9000Pro is compatible with ESEQ XF fa The Yamaha XF format enhances the SMF Standard MIDI File strandard with greater functional ity and open ended expandability for the future The 9000 is capable of displaying lyrics when an XF file containing lyric data is played Sm Style File The Style File Format SFF is Yamaha s original style file format which uses a unique conver sion system to provide high quality automatic accompaniment based on a wide range of chord types The 9000Pro uses the SFF internally reads optional SFF style disks and creates SFF styles using the Style recording feature Voice allocation format With MIDI voices are assigned to specific numbers called program numbers The numbering standard order of voice allocation is referred to as the voice allocation format MIDI Functions Voices may not play back as expected unless the voice allocation format of the song data matches that of the compatible MIDI device used for playback sera System Level 1 ort Thi fth t i llocation f t is is
447. td 11 Ubi Road 06 00 Meiban Industrial Building Singapore Tel 65 747 4374 TAIWAN Yamaha KHS Music Co Ltd 10F 150 Tun Hwa Northroad Taipei Taiwan R O C Tel 02 2713 8999 THAILAND Siam Music Yamaha Co Ltd 121 60 61 RS Tower 17th Floor Ratchadaphisek RD Dindaeng Bangkok 10320 Thailand Tel 02 641 2951 THE PEOPLE S REPUBLIC OF CHINA AND OTHER ASIAN COUNTRIES Yamaha Corporation International Marketing Division Nakazawa cho 10 1 Hamamatsu Japan 430 8650 Tel 053 460 2317 OCEANIA AUSTRALIA Yamaha Music Australia Pty Ltd 17 33 Market Street South Melbourne Vic 3205 Australia Tel 3 699 2388 NEW ZEALAND Music Houses of N Z Ltd 146 148 Captain Springs Road Te Papapa Auckland New Zealand Tel 9 634 0099 COUNTRIES AND TRUST TERRITORIES IN PACIFIC OCEAN Yamaha Corporation International Marketing Group Nakazawa cho 10 1 Hamamatsu Japan 430 8650 Tel 053 460 2312 HEAD OFFICE Yamaha Corporation Pro Audio amp Digital Musical Instrument Division Nakazawa cho 10 1 Hamamatsu Japan 430 8650 Tel 053 460 3273 YAMAHA Yamaha PK CLUB Portable Keyboard Home Page http www yamaha co jp english product pk Yamaha Manual Library English versions only http www2 yamaha co jp manual english This document is printed on chlorine free ECF paper with soy ink Auf Umweltpapier mit Sojatinte gedruckt Ce document a t imprim sur du papier non blanchi au chlore
448. te Messages which are generated when the keyboard is played Each message includes a specific note number which corresponds to the key which is pressed plus a velocity value based on how hard the key is played The abbreviation of Control Change Control change data includes modulation wheel foot controller and any other controller data except the pitch bend wheel which has its own switch below PIQCING DEE The abbreviation of Program Change Program change data corresponds to voice or patch numbers Pitch Refer to page 59 After Tch Refer to page 60 QD Reference 211 175 MIDI Functions Root Settings The note on off messages received at the channel s set to ON are recognized as the root notes in the accompaniment section The root notes will be detected regardless of wort the accompaniment on off and split point settings on the 9000Pro panel Channels 1 16 are handled The explanations here apply to step 5 of the Basic Procedure on page 174 nels 1 16 of a second MIDI port or device are handled as channels 17 32 with the MIDI B terminals Select channel groups 1 through 8 9 through 16 17 through 24 and 25 through 32 respec tively fo When several channels Press this to set all channels to OFF Channel simultaneously set to ON
449. tes you play on the keyboard VOICE R1 R2 R3 L and or song data which includes Vocal Harmony tracks CHORDAL During accompaniment playback chords played in the auto accompaniment section of the keyboard control the harmony During song playback chords contained in song data control the harmony Not available if the song does not contain any chord data AUTO The harmony notes are produced in either Vocoder or Chordal mode according to the current performance method e Chord The following parameters specify the song data which will be used for chord detection OFF Chords are not detected Chords format are detected TR1 TR16 Chords are detected from note data in the specified song track Microphone The following parameters determine how the microphone sound is controlled e Mute When set to OFF the microphone sound is turned off Volume Adjusts the volume of the microphone sound Reference e 81 Quick Guide on page 40 This function lets you record your own sounds via a microphone or line source to be played from the key board During use sampled sounds are kept in the internal wave RAM memory The 9000Pro comes with a 1 megabyte wave memory which can be expanded up to a maximum of 65 megabytes by installing optional SIMM memory modules see page 185 for details Sampled wave data can be saved to floppy or hard disk
450. that recording will begin from the measure Punch In recording has specified at the MEASURE SET and all data from that point to the end another exceptionally conve of the song will be replaced by the newly recorded material nient advantage it automati cally records any panel Punch In This function allows you to selectively re record a portion of a song track settings you ve made allowing the measures between the specified punch in and punch out points you to have various settings such as voice volume pan etc change instantly and In the eight measure example below measures 3 through 5 are re recorded automatically right before the Punch In point Recording start Recording stop Punch In Punch Out v wv 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 gt 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Previously a Newly played data Previously played data played data Measure Set When the RECORD MODE is set to REPLACE this parameter specifies the mea sure you want to start recording from When the RECORD MODE is set to PUNCH this parameter specifies the first playback measure Be sure to give yourself a few measures lead in prior to the actual punch in point Reference OLL 111 Song Creator Punch In Trigger e First Key On When FIRST KEY ON is selected recording will begin when the first key is played on the keyboard e Footswitch 1 2 When FOOT SW 1 or FOOT SW 2 is selected recording will begin
451. the Set the desired track root note is detected from Cr Ei Qr qu qr m to ON or OFF merged MIDI data received OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF over the channels 1 12 fags J e J J Chord Detect Settings The note on off messages received at the channel s set to ON are recognized as the fingerings in the accompaniment section The chords to be detected depend on the fin gering mode on the 9000Pro The chords will be detected regardless of the accompani C we Channels 1 16 are handled ment on off and split point settings on the 9000Pro panel with the MIDI terminals or The explanations here apply to step 5 of the Basic Procedure on page 174 the TO HOST terminal chan nels 1 16 of a second MIDI port or device are handled as channels 17 32 with the MIDI B terminals Select channel groups 1 through 8 9 through 16 17 through 24 and 25 through 32 respec tively Pup Channel When several channels are simultaneously set to ON the chord is detected from merged MIDI data received over the channels Press this to set all channels to OFF Set the desired track to ON or OFF ON MEM ON ON MEM ON ON M ON EM ON OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF or OFF L2 12 5161 Storing the MIDI Settings This allows you to store your custom MIDI se
452. the 9000Pro lets you add optional Plug in Boards giving you access to an exciting and wide array of various synthesizer voices plus the ability to edit those voices and create your own original sounds In order to make the most of your 9000Pro s features and vast performance potential we urge you to read the manual thoroughly while trying out the various features described Keep the manual in a safe place for later reference Packing List Your 9000Pro includes the following items 9000Pro x 1 AC Power Cord x 5 Ea oe Saee ed page 14 Music Stand x page 14 Floppy Disk Disk Styles and MIDI Driver 1 page 25 Floppy Disks Factory Data Backup Disk No 1 2 2 A page 54 These include the following factory set data One Touch Setting Registration Memory Music Database Multi Pad Flash Style and Setup Floppy Disk Plug in Custom Voice Disk si page 42 This includes the voice files for Plug in Boards Owner s Manual Unauthorized copying of copyrighted software for purposes other than the purchaser s personal use is prohib ited This product 9000Pro is manufactured under license of U S Patents No 5231671 No 5301259 No 5428708 and No 5567901 of IVL Technologies Ltd Trademarks Apple and Macintosh are trademarks of Apple Computer Inc registered in the U S and other countries IBM PC AT is a trademark of International Bu
453. the cord can damage it outlet using a multiple con Also do not place vinyl plas this might discolor the panel Do not rest your weight on 0 do not use excessive force on ic or rubber objects on the instrument since or keyboard place heavy objects on the instrument and the buttons switches or connectors nector Doing so can result in heating in the outlet lower sound quality or possibly cause over Do not place objects in front of the instrument s air vent since this may prevent adequate ventilation of the internal components and possibly result in the instrument overheating Remove the electric plug from the outlet when the instrument is not to be used for extended periods of time or during electrical storms Do not operate the instrument for long period of time at high or uncom ortable volume level since this can cause permanent hearing loss If you experience any hearing loss or ringing in the ears consult a physician Before connecting the instrument to other electronic components turn off the power for all components Before turning the power on or off for all components set all volume levels to minimum Also be sure to set the volumes of all components at their minimum levels and gradually raise the volume controls while playing the instrument to set the desired listening level IISSAVING USER DATA e Always save data to a floppy disk frequently i
454. toff frequency or effective frequency range of the filter See diagram below Higher values result in a brighter sound Volume Cutoff frequency Volume Cutoff frequency Frequency pitch Frequency pitch These frequencies are passed by the filter RESONANCE Determines the emphasis given to the cutoff frequency set in Cutoff above See diagram below Higher values result in a more pronounced effect Volume Resonance Frequency pitch e EG The EG Envelope Generator settings determine how the level of the sound changes in time This lets you reproduce many sound characteristics of natural acoustic instruments such as the quick attack and decay of percussion sounds or the long release of a sustained piano tone e ATTACK Determines how quickly the sound reaches its maximum level after ind the key is played The higher the value the quicker the attack e DECAY Determines how quickly the sound reaches its sustain level a slightly lower level than maximum The higher the value the quicker the decay e RELEASE Determines how quickly the sound decays to silence after the key is KETON Aor released The higher the value the shorter the release VIBRATO DEPTH Determines the intensity of the Vibrato effect see diagram Higher settings result in a more pronounced Vibrato 5 Determines the speed of the Vibrato effect
455. ton The play mode on off status is retained in Flash ROM and is maintained even when the power is turned off Reference Installing Optional Hardware The following optional units can be installed to the 9000Pro Plug in Boards Hard disk unit SIMM SIMM cover Plug in board Hard disk cover Installation Precautions WARNING 7 Before beginning installation switch off the power to the 9000Pro and connected peripherals unplug them from the B power outlet Then remove all cables connecting the 9000Pro to other devices Leaving the power cord connected while working can result in electric shock Leaving other cables connected can interfere with work Be careful not to drop any screws inside the instrument during installation this can be prevented by keeping the Plug in Board hard disk unit and cover away from the instrument while attaching If this does happen be sure to remove the screw s from inside the unit before turning the power on Loose screws inside the instrument can cause improper opera tion or serious damage If you are unable to retrieve a dropped screw consult your Yamaha dealer for advice Install the Plug in boards the hard disk unit and the SIMM modules carefully as described in the procedure below Improper installation can cause shorts which may result in irreparable damage and pose a fire haz ard Do not disassemble modify or app
456. ttings to Flash ROM E note The explanations here apply to step 6 of the Basic Procedure on page 174 Since all MIDI settings data is stored to Flash ROM any data in the MIDI settings location This allows you to assign a will be erased and replaced by name to your group of your new settings This a MIDI settings For details includes the factory pro 2 STORE on entering name refer grammed preset MIDI set on tings If you ve deleted the factory set data you can use Press this to execute the the Restore function page Store operation 154 to load a copy of it from SELECT the included disks page 6 XY ALL Parts Select the destination Has terKBD2 EE ay Reference MIDI Functions MFC10 Settings Various functions can be assigned to an optional Yamaha MFC10 MIDI Foot Controller connected to the 9000Pro Connect the MFC10 to the MIDI B terminals and set the MIDI channel for the MFC10 messages by following the on screen instructions The 9000Pro provides two ways to set Easy Setup and Full Setup pw 9000Pro When the MIDI B terminals are C eS MIDI OUT MIDI IN connected to the MFC10 the D BE functions of the MIDI B port are 7 A MIDI cable e o oJ limited For details refer t
457. tune 26 No Effect 00 00 e Appendix Anhang Annexe DSP3 5 4 7 DSP8 Effect Name Type Type Panel Panel Panel MSB LSB Order Order Order 1 1 1 Halli 01 00 2 2 2 Hall2 01 16 3 3 3 Room1 02 16 4 4 4 Room2 02 17 5 5 5 Stage1 03 16 6 6 6 Stage2 03 17 7 7 7 Chorus1 66 17 8 8 8 Chorus2 66 08 9 9 9 Symphonic1 68 16 10 10 10 TempoDelay 21 00 11 11 11 TempoEcho 21 08 12 12 12 TempoCross 22 00 13 13 13 DelayLCR1 05 16 14 14 14 DelayLR 06 00 15 15 15 Echo 07 00 16 16 16 CrossDelay 08 00 17 17 17 Flanger1 67 08 18 18 18 Flanger2 67 16 19 19 19 EP Phaser1 72 17 20 20 20 EP Phaser2 72 18 21 21 21 EP Phaser3 72 16 22 22 DualRotSP1 Dual Rotor Speaker1 99 00 23 23 DualRotSP2 Dual Rotor Speaker2 99 01 24 24 22 GtTremolo1 Guitar Tremolo1 70 19 25 25 23 EP Tremolo 70 18 26 26 24 EP AutoPan 71 21 27 27 StAmp1 Stereo Amp Simulator1 75 20 28 28 StAmp2 Stereo Amp Simulator2 75 21 29 29 VDstH TDly 103 00 V Distortion Hard Tempo Delay 30 30 VDstS TDly 103 01 V Distortion Soft Tempo Delay 31 31 V_DstH Dly 98 01 V Distortion Hard Delay 32 32 V_DstS Dly 98 03 V Distortion Soft Delay 33 33 Dst TDly 100 00 Distortion Tempo Delay 34 34 Dst 2RotSP 86 01 Distortion 2way Rotary Speaker 35 35 OD 2RotSP 86 02 Overdrive 2way Rotary Speaker 36 36 Amp 2RotSP 86 03 Amp Simulator 2way Rotary Speaker 37 37 25 HmEnhance1 81 16 Harmonic E
458. turn the corre sponding elements ON or OFF The circular indicators next to the element numbers in the upper section of the display indicate the mute status for each element A CUSTOM VOICE CREATOR Grand Piano Select the desired menu Sets the amount of Filter Amplitude 2 MODULATION SE Jaren rouen a 1 1 1 Ee ee Can be used during edit ing to compare the sound of the original voice with the edited voice P COMPARE PRESET CURVE1 CURVE2 Sets the overall volume of the current edited voice INITIAL TOUCH MASTER VOLUME CURVE and LFO modulation types PMOD FMOD AMOD applied via the MODULATION wheel and via key board After Touch response See page 98 for details about LFO 5 SCALE CURVE FLRT PIANO1 PIANO2 Selects the desired scale pitch curve to be used by the current edited voice for the 9000Pro keyboard The CURVE LCD button provides a choice of four keyboard initial touch sen sitivity curves and the SENS LCD but tons adjust initial touch sensitivity Reference 26 E1 WAVEFORM See page 85 for details about Waveform NOTE LIMIT specifies the note range over which the voice will sound and VELOCITY LIMIT sets the CUSTOM VOICE CREATOR Grand Piano N STORE CL ER WOICE SET STORE CLEAR VOICE 4 KA 1 HAVEFORH Grand Piano 1 COARSE TUNE 0 FINE TUNE VOLUME KEY DELAY
459. two measures m el Phrase 1 Phrase 2 Replacing are repeatedly recorded Notes that you record will play back from the next repetition loop letting you record while hearing previously recorded mate rial Overdub Recording This method records new material to a track already containing recorded data without deleting the original data In style recording the recorded data is not deleted except when using functions such as Clear and Drum Cancel page 132 For example if you start recording with a two measure main section the two measures are repeated many times Notes that you record will play back from the next repetition letting you overdub new material to the loop while hearing previously recorded material Reference vel 125 Style Creator The following functions are also available Revoice Determines the basic volume tempo and Part on off settings for your original style e Groove amp Dynamics This gives you a comprehensive variety of tools for changing the rhythmic feel of your original style Specifically it allows you to alter the timing for each section and velocity of notes for each track Setup This be used to change the voices assigned to any of the current selected sec tion part SEG cree The six editing features that contain Quantize allow you to edit
460. ty 2 16Beat Dance Shuf 7 Swing Waltz 4 16 Beat 4 2 Samba Rio fle 8 Pop Waltz 5 Slow amp Easy 3 Bossa Nova 3 70 s Disco 2 9 Christmas 3 4 6 Smooth Jazz 4 Fast Bossa 4 Dance Funk 10 Christmas 4 4 7 Uptown Beat 5 Mambo 1 5 Dance Soul 8 Jazz Rock 6 Caribbean 6 Disco 9 Kool Shuffle 7 Carnival 7 Disco Fusion 10 West End Shuffle 8 Gypsy Rumba 8 Disco Hands DANCE 9 Pop Rumba 9 Eurobeat 1 House Musik 10 Sheriff Reggae 10 Groundbeat 2 DJ Berlin MARCH amp WALTZ 11 Handbag 3 Trance 1 1 US March 12 Party Pop 4 Hip Hop 2 German March 1 13 Soul Dance 5 Trip Hop 3 6 8 March 14 Techno 6 Disco Chocolate 4 Polka Oberkrainer 15 Trance 2 7 70 s Disco 1 5 Waltz Oberkrainer IV SWING amp JAZZ 8 Saturday Night 6 Guitar Serenade 1 Bebop 9 Disco Fox 7 Tarantella 1 2 Big Band Shuffle 10 Techno Polis 8 Polka Pop 1 3 Cat Groove 11 Euro Shop 9 Jazz Waltz 4 Foxtrot 1 12 Entrance 10 Slow Waltz 5 Foxtrot 2 13 Clubdance BALLROOM 6 Jazz Ballad 2 14 Flip Hop 1 Viennese Waltz 7 Lounge Piano 15 Disco Samba 2 English Waltz 8 Midnight Swing SWING amp JAZZ 3 Slowfox 1 9 Miller Ballad 1 Big Band 1 4 Quickstep 10 Organ Quickstep 2 Big Band 2 5 Tango 11 Vocal Swing 3 Big Band 3 6 Samba 12 Jazz Singer 4 Swing 1 7 Rumba V R amp B 5 Swing 2 8 Cha Cha Cha 1 16 Beat Funk 6 Acoustic Jazz 9 Pasodoble 1 2 60 s Rock 3 7 Electric Jazz 10 Jive 3 Blues Shuffle 8 Jazz Ballad 1 11 Metronome 1 4 4 Boogie Woogie 2 9 Gypsy Swing 12 Metronome 2 4 5 Lovely Shuffle 10 Swingfox 13 Metronome 3 4 6 M
461. tyle Name Category Style Name Category Style Name Category Style Name 8 BEAT 4 Rock amp Roll I 8 BEAT 5 Country 8 Beat 1 1 Heart Beat 5 Croco Twist 1 60 s Rock 1 6 Country Pop 2 8 Beat 1 6 Gospel Brothers 2 60 s Rock 2 7 Country Swing 2 3 8 Beat 2 7 Gospel Sisters 3 8 Beat 5 8 Cowboy Boogie 4 8 Beat 3 8 Gospel Shuffle 4 8 Beat Rock 2 9 Cowboy Rock 5 8 Beat 4 9 6 8 Blues 5 8 Beat Rock 3 10 Singer Song Writer 6 6 8 Slow Rock 10 Boogie Woogie 1 6 8 Beat Ballad 2 VII LATIN 7 Spicy Beat 11 Amazing Gospel 7 Barock 1 Espagnole 8 8 Beat Adria 12 Blueberry Blues 8 Root Rock 2 2 Rumba Flamenca 9 Off Beat 13 60 s Rock amp Roll 9 Root Rock 3 3 Salsa 10 8 Beat Rock 1 14 Funky Fusion 10 Slow Rock 4 Rumba Island 11 Piano Ballad 15 Rock Shuffle 1 16 BEAT 5 Piano Rumba 12 Guitar Ballad COUNTRY 1 Uptown Shuffle 7 Beguine 13 Organ Ballad 1 Country Rock 2 LA Groove 8 Guitar Bossa 14 Love Song 2 Country 2 4 3 Funk 9 Bossa Band 15 8 Beat Ballad 1 3 Country Swing 1 4 Analog Ballad 10 Happy Reggae 16 Acoustic Ballad 4 Country Shuffle 1 5 Hip Hop Pop 11 Jumbo Reggae 17 Modern 6 8 5 Country Ballad 6 16Beat Ballad 1 Vill MARCH amp WALTZ 18 Root Rock 1 6 Country Waltz 7 16Beat Ballad 2 1 Showtune 19 Soft Rock 7 Bluegrass 1 8 EP Ballad 2 Polka Pop 2 20 Hard Rock 8 Hoedown 9 Pop Ballad 3 German March 2 16 BEAT 9 Country Brothers 10 16Beat Rock Ballad 4 Jig 1 16 Beat 1 10 Guitar Pop Ill DANCE 5 Reel 2 16 Beat 2 LATIN 1 6 8 Trance 6 Musette 3 16 Beat 3 1 Samba Ci
462. u can record complex fully orchestrated pieces of music in any music style or arrangement from solo piano and church organ to rock band big band Latin ensemble and even a full symphony orchestra quickly easily and all by yourself Quick Recording gt Press the DIGITAL RECORDING button to engage the Record mode DIGITAL STUDIO SOUND ER EATOR S CUSTOM VOICE PLUG IN VOICE Ee 2 Select SONG CREATOR STYLE MULTI PAD Mee Ce PART 4 gt 3 Select NEW SONG 4 Select QUICK RECORD DIGITAL REC SONG CREATOR ONG CREATOR STYLE CREATOR SONG Egg MULTI PAD CREATOR 2 g sons SONG CREATOR QUICK RECORD a MULTI TRACK RECORD 5 Set the track modes When MANUAL is set to REC your keyboard performance and Multi Pad playback can be recorded to the corresponding tracks as listed below When ACMP is set to REC Auto Accompaniment is automatically set to on and accompaniment playback can be recorded to the corresponding tracks as listed below QO REALTIME SONG NEHSONG HID the MANUAL ACHP track settings above REG 4 The voices Multi Pad notes and accompaniment parts are Press WEKT when
463. ually fade in The FADE IN OUT indicator will flash during the fade in and then go out when full volume has been reached gt 3 Press the FADE IN OUT button so that its indicator lights The indicator will flash during the fade out then the accompaniment will stop when the fade out is complete Tempo Control Each style of the 9000Pro has been programmed with a default or standard tempo T however this be changed to any value between 32 and 280 beats per minute by 12 using the data dial see page 44 when the TEMPO lamp is engaged This can be done either before the accompaniment is started or while it is playing DATA ENTRY When you select a different style while the accompaniment is not playing the default tempo for that style is also selected If the accompaniment is playing the same tempo Rotating the data dial to the is maintained even if you select a different style right clockwise increases the value while rotating it to the left counterclock Tap Tempo wise decreases it This useful function lets you press the TAP TEMPO button to tap out the tempo and automatically start the accompaniment at that tapped speed Simply tap press release the button four times for a 4 4 time signature and the accompaniment starts automat ically at the tempo you tapped The tempo can also be changed during playback by tap ping the button twice at the desired tempo When a 4 beat style is selecte
464. uency sig nal The LFO can be used to modulate pitch filter cutoff frequency or amplitude to create a wide range of modulation effects 4 Compare FHOD AMOD SPEED TYPE TIME RATE Vibrato effect based on LFO modulation with a variable delay between the time a key is TEE played and the beginning of the vibrato effect 25 See the diagram below Selects the LFO wave Various kinds of modulated sounds can be created depending on the selected wave See the diagram below Sets the speed of LFO variation Abbreviation for Amplitude Modulation This determines how greatly the LFO will affect the output level Larger val ues widen the range of the volume change Abbreviation for Filter Modulation This determines how greatly the LFO will affect the filter cutoff frequency Larger values widen the range of change in the cutoff frequency Abbreviation for Pitch Modulation This determines how greatly the LFO will affect the pitch Larger values widen the range of the change in pitch TYPE wave type Saw Triangle e DELAY TIME Short Delay Long Delay Key on Key on DELAY RATE Time e Reference 96 97 VOICE SET See page 163 for details about the Voice Set function You can specify the Voice Set data to the Custom Voice CUSTOM VOICE CREATOR Grand Piano E STORE CLEAR VOICE E1 HAVEFORH VOICE SET REVERB DEPTH CHORUS DEPTH DSP DEPT
465. ug in Boards that support the Assignable Controller AC1 mm In this example the PLG150 AN is installed to the 9000Pro and the MODULATION Wheel is used to change the sound of the Plug in voice Make the follow ing settings on the 9000Pro 1 Set the AC1 CTRL No to Mod 2 Select the desired AC1 Control Parameter e g 34 in the Native Part Parameter display 3 Adjust the AC1 Control Depth in the Native Part Parameter display When you play the keyboard and move the MODULA TION Wheel the sound of the Plug in voice changes according to the AC1 Control parameter you selected in step 2 Reference Creating Plu g in Custom Voices E3 NATIVE PRM Native Part Parameter The word native here describes the parameters that are exclusive to each of the Plug in Boards Because of this the editing screens displayed on the 9000Pro will differ depending on the particular Plug in Board being used For example when editing Plug in voices of the PLG150 DX parameter names such as Carrier and Modulator which are unique to the FM Synthesis system are displayed as shown below on the left Likewise when editing Plug in voices of the PLG150 VL the 9000Pro displays parameters unique to the VL tone generation system such as Brth Mode Breath Mode and Emb CC No Embouchure Control Change Number as s hown below on the right When editing a DX plug in voice e PLUG IN CUSTOM VOICE CRE
466. ug in Voice List Plug In Stimmenliste Liste des voix plug in PLG150 DX Plug in Voice List Category voice Name MSB amp LSB Program Category Voice Name MSB LSB Prarain Change Change 16 4 35 0 32 1 E Pno1 35 1 1 17 PowerPno 35 1 15 2 DX Road2 35 1 12 18 lronEch2 67 0 71 3 E PIANO1 35 0 10 19 MiniBell 35 1 27 4 WurliEP1 35 1 11 20 Carillon 35 1 25 5 RatioDob 35 1 8 IV 6 CosaRosa 35 1 13 1 Gtr Box 83 71 25 7 E PIANO2 35 0 34 2 Folknik 83 74 25 8 Knock EP 83 70 4 3 Tite Gtr 35 1 40 9 Hard 83 97 4 4 DX JzGt1 83 0 26 10 Vics EP 83 68 5 5 DX AcGt4 83 66 24 11 Duke EP 83 72 5 6 DX PkGt3 83 65 25 12 DynoRoad 83 96 5 7 DX PkGt7 83 69 25 13 E Pno 2 35 1 3 8 DX JzGt2 83 64 26 14 Bell Pno 83 69 3 9 DX CIGt6 83 68 27 15 BigWurlt 83 64 4 10 DX CIGt9 83 96 27 16 DX Road3 83 68 4 11 DX CIGt1 35 1 42 17 EP 1970 83 71 4 12 DX CIGt5 35 1 43 18 Urban 83 66 5 13 GUITAR 5 35 0 56 19 E Pno 4 83 69 5 14 GUITAR 2 35 0 12 20 Mark III 83 70 2 15 KOTO 35 0 22 ll 16 Mrmb Gtr 83 69 24 1 MM Clav1 35 1 19 17 DX CIGt4 83 66 27 2 CLAV 1 35 0 19 18 DX DsGt5 83 68 30 3 Clavecn1 83 68 7 19 GUITAR 1 35 0 11 4 MM Clav2 83 64 7 20 RytmPluk 83 75 25 5 CLAV 2 35 0 42 V 6 SkltnClv 35 1 20 1 BASS 1 35 0 14 7 ClavStf1 35 1 21 2 BogiBass 35 1 30 8
467. uick Guide on page 32 This unique feature incorporates advanced voice processing technology to automatically produce vocal harmony based on a single lead vocal An extensive selection of preset Vocal Harmony types are pro vided each functioning in one of three main modes which determine how the harmony notes are applied In addition to straightforward harmony the 9000Pro Vocal Harmony feature can change the pitch and timbre of the harmony and or lead vocal sound to effectively change the apparent gender of the voice So for example if you are a male singer you can have a two part female vocal backup the Vocal Harmony feature can add up to two harmony notes to the main lead voice A full range of parameters is provided to allow detailed editing to produce precisely the type of vocal harmony sound you need Setting Up Quick Guide Setting Up The microphone oci nerit cde rond EF RR nU Or RODEO Fn ni d on page 32 DI Please note the following points A standard dynamic microphone with an impedance of about 250 ohms is recommended The 9000Pro does sup port phantom powered condenser microphones The Yamaha MZ106s microphone is recommended for use with the 9000Pro The level of the microphone sound may vary considerably according to the type of microphone used Placing a microphone which is connected to the 9000Pro too close to those of an external sound system connected to the 9000Pro can
468. upplied as a part of the prod uct or as optional accessories Some of these items are designed to be dealer assembled or installed Please make sure that benches are stable and any optional fixtures where applicable are well secured BEFORE using Benches supplied by Yamaha are designed for seating only No other uses are recommended PLEASE KEEP THIS MANUAL 92 469 3 PRECAUTIONS PLEASE READ CAREFULLY BEFORE PROCEEDING Please keep these precautions a safe place for future reference A WARNING SSS ee ee EE Always follow the basic precautions listed below to avoid the possibility of serious injury or even death from electrical shock short circuiting damages fire or other hazards These precautions include but are not limited to the following e This instrument contains no user serviceable parts Do no assemble or modify the internal components in any way Do not expose the instrument to rain use it near water or in damp or wet conditions or place containers on it containing liquids which might spill into any openings attempt to dis Only use the voltage specified as correct for the instrument The required voltage is printed on the name plate of the instrument e Always connect the three pin attachment plug to a properly grounded power source For more information about the main power supply see page 14 Before cleaning the instrument always remove the electric plug from the outlet Ne
469. variation insertion block MSB 20 9 No Parameter Display Value See Table Control 10 Dry Wet D63 gt W D W D lt W63 1427 e 1 Delay Time 0 1m 400 0mS 0 127 table 7 2 Feedback Level 63 63 1 127 11 3 HPF Cutoff Thru 8 0kHz 0 52 table 3 12 4 LPF Cutoff 1 0k Thru 34 60 table 3 13 EQ Low Frequency 32Hz 2 0kHz 4 40 table 3 5 14 EQ Low Gain 12 129 52 76 5 15 EQ High Frequency 500 2 16 0 2 28 58 table 3 7 16 EQ High Gain 12 12dB 52 76 5 ECHO variation insertion block MSB 07 10 Dry Wet D63 gt W D W D lt W63 1 127 No Parameter Display Value See Table Control 1 Lch Delay1 0 1 743 0ms variation block 1 7430 0 1 743 0ms insertion block 1 7430 2 Lch Feedback Level 63 63 1 127 3 Rch Delay1 0 1 743 0ms variation block 1 7430 0 1 743 0ms insertion block 1 7430 4 Feedback Level 63 63 1 127 5 High Damp 0 1 1 0 1 10 PK S 6 Lch Delay2 0 1 743 0ms variation block 1 7430 TEMPO DELAY variation Insertion block 0 1 743 0ms insertion block 1 7430 TEMPO ECHO variation Insertion block MSB 21 7 Delay2 0 1 743 0ms variation block 1 7430 No Parameter Display Value See Table Control 0 1 743 0ms insertion block 1 7430 1 Delay Time 64th 3 4thx6 0 19 table 14 8 Delay2 Level 0 127 0 127 2 Feedback Level 63 63 1 127 9 3 Feedback High Dump 0 10 0 10 10 Dry Wet D63 gt W D W D lt W63 1 127 e 4 L R Diffusion 1 63ms 64 0ms 127 63ms 1 127 5 Lag 1 63ms
470. various panel settings to Registration Memory One 28 73 Touch Setting 19 VOICE PIANO SYNTHESIZER Selecting the 9000Pro original preset voices 16 PERCUSSION Selecting the 9000Pro original preset percussive voices and Drum Kits 58 XG Selecting the preset XG voices 58 ORGAN FLUTES Selecting Editing the Organ Flutes 62 CUSTOM VOICE Selecting the Custom voices 92 20 PLUG IN VOICE SLOT 1 Selecting the Plug in Board installed to Slot1 43 SLOT 2 Selecting the Plug in Board installed to Slot2 43 XI Selecting the Plug in Voices 43 PLUG IN MANAGER LOAD PLUG IN CUSTOM VOICE Loading Plug in voice data from disk to the internal Flash ROM 66 SAVE PLUG IN CUSTOM VOICE Saving Plug in voice data in the internal Flash ROM to disk 68 DELETE PLUG IN CUSTOM VOICE Deleting Plug in voice data in the internal Flash ROM 68 PLUG IN SETTING Setting various parameters related to the Plug in Board 69 BOARD VOICE Selecting the Board Preset Custom Voices 43 100 21 PART SELECT LEFT RIGHT 1 RIGHT 2 Selecting part for voice assignments 57 RIGHT 3 22 PART ON OFF LEFT HOLD Turning Left Hold function on or off 61 LEFT Turning LEFT part on or off 57 RIGHT 1 Turning RIGHT 1 part on or off 57 RIGHT 2 Turning RIGHT 2 part on or off 57 RIGHT 3 Turning RIGHT 3 part on or off 57 23 UPPER OCTAVE Transposing Upper parts RIGHT1 3 up down
471. ved to a floppy disk an optional hard disk or an optional SCSI device The explanations here apply to step 3 of the Basic Procedure on page 150 Select the data type to be saved 3 SAVE TO DISK All setup data see list on page 214 All User effect data page 146 All Registration Memory data page 214 You can set the individual banks to ON or OFF All Multi Pad data page 141 You can set the individual banks to ON or OFF All Custom Voice data page 92 You can set the individual numbers to ON or OFF If necessary use the Wave save option USER DATA SAVE Select the SETUP 5255 desired group of 1 SETUP data to be saved EFFECT DATA The data types d listed at right can be set to ON or Press NEXT to continue OFF as desired TION BANK SETUP EFFECT DATA MULTI PAD OFF OFF Set the data type to or OFF CUSTOM Data types set to ON are saved VOICE PAGE CONTROL CT Y FLUTES All Organ Flutes voice set tings page 62 You can set the individual numbers to ON or OFF Select the destination file in the disk SAVE TO DISK 1420K DEVICE FD DIRECTORY 24121 Press NEXT to continue mees DIRECTORY CONTENTS For details on directory file selection see page 151 No file If an optional hard disk has been installed or an PAGE CONTROL optional SCSI device has
472. ver insert or remove an electric plug with wet hands Check the electric plug periodically and remove any dirt or dust which may have accumulated on it e f the power cord or plug becomes frayed or damaged or if there is a sud den loss of sound during use of the instrument or if any unusual smells or smoke should appear to be caused by it immediately turn off the power Switch disconnect the electric plug from the outlet and have the instru ment inspected by qualified Yamaha service personnel A CAUTION uu E Always follow the basic precautions listed below to avoid the possibility of physical injury to you others or damage to the instrument or other property These precautions include but are not limited to the following Do not place the power cord near heat sources such as heaters or radia tors and do not excessively bend or otherwise damage the cord place heavy objects on it or place it in a position where anyone could walk on trip over or roll anything over it e Before moving the instrument remove all connected cables 9 When cleaning the instrument use soft dry cloth Do not use paint thin ners solvents cleaning fluids or chemical impregnated wiping cloths When removing hold the p ug itse Do not connect th he electric plug from the ins instrument to an electrica rument or an outlet always f and not the cord Pulling by
473. verb DSP Type Typ DSP Type DSP Reverb Effect Name Type Type Panel MSB LSB Order 1 Hall1 01 00 2 Hall2 01 16 3 Hall3 01 17 4 Hall4 01 18 5 Hall5 01 01 6 Hall M 01 06 7 Hall L 01 07 8 Room1 02 16 9 Room2 02 17 10 3 02 18 11 Room4 02 19 12 5 02 00 13 02 01 14 Room7 02 02 15 Room S 02 05 16 Room M 02 06 17 Room 02 07 18 Stage1 03 16 19 Stage2 03 17 20 Stage3 03 00 21 Stage4 03 01 22 Plate1 04 16 23 Plate2 04 T7 24 Plate3 04 00 25 GM Plate 04 07 26 WhiteRoom 16 00 27 Tunnel 17 00 28 Canyon 18 00 29 Basement 19 00 30 No Effect 00 00 Chorus Type Typ Chor Type Chorus Chorus Effect Name Type Type Panel MSB LSB Order 1 Chorus1 66 17 2 Chorus2 66 08 3 Chorus3 66 16 4 Chorus4 66 01 5 Chorus5 65 02 6 Chorus6 65 00 T Chorus 65 01 8 Chorus8 65 08 9 GM Chorus1 65 03 10 GM Chorus2 65 04 11 GM Chorus3 65 05 12 GM Chorus4 65 06 13 FB Chorus 65 07 14 Celeste1 66 00 15 Celeste2 66 02 16 Flanger1 67 08 17 Flanger2 67 16 18 Flanger3 67 17 19 Flanger4 67 01 20 Flanger5 67 00 21 GM Flanger 67 07 22 Symphonic1 68 16 23 Synphonic2 68 00 24 Phaser1 72 00 25 EnsDetune 87 00 Ensemble De
474. w audio data created whenever you sample a new sound or import a WAV or AIFF format wave file The 9000Pro WAVE EDIT mode includes functions which allow you to edit this basic data e g resampling to change the sampling frequency trimming and loop ing normalization for maximum level and minimum noise etc Waveform All 9000Pro waves are contained in a waveform which is basically a set of parameters which define the keyboard range over which the wave or waves it contains will play A wave form can contain one or more waves and waves can be shared by more than one waveform Waves in a waveform can be assigned to different ranges of the keyboard but they cannot be layered i e they will not sound simultaneously when a single key is played The 9000Pro WAVEFORM EDIT mode lets you add or delete waves from a waveform and assign the waves to different keyboard ranges Sampling Sound WAV AIFF WAVE EDIT WAVEFORM waver WAVED WAVES WAVE WAVE WAVE Reference Basic Procedure 2 Select SAMPLING 1 Press the SOUND CREATOR button SOUND CREATOR HENU DIGITAL STUDIO SOUND CREATOR SAMPLING CUSTOM VOICE PLUG IN VOICE f DIGITAL ELA SONG STYLE MULTI PAD MIXING CONSOLE EFFECTS FILTER EQ TUNING been 3 Select the desired menu SAMPLING 4 Follow the on screen instruct
475. which may cause damage or result in a malfunction After mounting the hard disk unit be sure to tighten the screws as directed so it is completely stable and does not move any way wer 5 Hard disk drives of a maximum 8 GB capacity can be formatted however the maximum partition size is 2 GB For example an 8 GB hard disk drive would have to be formatted into four separate 2 GB partitions Hard disk drives of a capacity greater than 8 GB can be installed however the 9000Pro is capable of formatting only up to maximum 8 GB on the drive Hard disk drives wider than 12 7 mm cannot be installed to the 9000Pro 2 For information on the hard disk recommendations ask your nearest Yamaha representative or authorized distributor listed at the end of this owner s manual Install a hard disk at your own risk Yamaha will not be held responsible for any damage or injury resulting from improper installation or the use of a hard disk other than one of the types recommended by Yamaha gt 1 4 Use the same operation as in Optional Plug in Board Installation page 181 WARNING In order to drop any screws inside the 9000Pro keep the Plug in Board and cover away from the 9000Pro in the following steps 5 8 If the Plug in Board has been installed pull out the cable connector from the Plug in Board connector Silver screws 5 Remove the four screws from the Plug in b
476. wn risk Yamaha will not be held responsible for any damage or injury resulting from improper installation Reference Installing Optional Hardware e 1 2 Use the same operation as in Optional Plug in Board Installation page 181 3 Move to a position facing the rear panel of the keyboard and remove the six screws from the SIMM cover with a Phillips screwdriver Do not remove the other screws 4 Remove the SIMM cover gt Insert the SIMMs in the SIMM slots as described below 5 1 Make sure the orientation is correct Make sure that the cutout on the SIMM module is aligned with the protruding key on the con nector slot CAUTION Do not install the SIMM back wards SIMM cutout Slot key 5 12 Install the first SIMM in the rear slot the slot closest to the 9000Pro rear panel inserting it at an angle as shown in the illus tration Make sure that the parts at locations A B and C are properly aligned N CAUTION Make sure that the entire length of Clamp the SIMM is evenly inserted SIMM hole Slot protrusion Reference vel Installing Optional Hardware 5 13 Holding both edges of the SIMM module raise it to the vertical position until it firmly locks in place with the left and right clamps 5 4 After confirming the orientation insert the second SIMM into the front slot the slot closest to the 9000Pro keyboard and
477. x x D D Acmp Chord 2 Part Harmonic Content x o x Acmp x Song EQ Low x x D D Acmp Pad Part Harmonic Content x o D Acmp x Song EQ High x x x D D Acmp Phrase 1 Part Harmonic Content x x Acmp x Song Panpot x x x D D Acmp Phrase 2 Part Harmonic Content x Acmp x Song Reverb Depth x x X x Acmp Rhythm 1 Part Brightness Song Chorus Depth x x x x Acmp Rhythm 2 Part Brightness x x Acmp x Song Variation DSP3 Depth x x x x Acmp Bass Part Brightness x o D Acmp x Song Track Solo Mute Play 1 16 x x D D Acmp Chord 1 Part Brightness x x Acmp x Song Track Volume Track1 16 x x x x Acmp Chord 2 Part Brightness x x Acmp x Song Track Panpot Track1 16 x x x x x Acmp Pad Part Brightness x x Acmp x Song Track EQ Low Track1 16 x x X x Acmp Phrase 1 Part Brightness x x Acmp x Song Track EQ High Track1 16 x x x x x Acmp Phrase 2 Part Brightness x x Acmp x Song Track Reverb Depth Track1 16 x x Rhythm 1 Part EQ Low x x Acmp x Song Track Chorus Depth Track1 16 x x x x x Acmp Rhythm 2 Part EQ Low x x Acmp x Song Track Variation DSP3 Depth X x x
478. xpansion and upgrade capa bilities for XG Plug in compatible tone generators The XG Plug in System enables you to equip the 9000Pro with the latest and most sophisticated technology ensuring that you keep pace with the rapid and multi faceted advances in modern music production Contents Packing Det ettet 6 0005 25 452 4 2 44 2 254 454 801128 6 How to use the 7 Contents e 8 Top Panel amp Connections 10 Music stand 10 Rear Panel amp Connections 12 Starting 14 15 Quick Guide Playing Voices eee 16 Blayingra Voices ere 16 Playing Two or Three Voices Simultaneously 17 Playing Different Voices with the Left and 22 20 0200 16 18 Adjusting the Octave setting 18 19 Auto Accompaniment 20 Using Auto Accompaniment 20 Accompaniment Sections 22 24 Track amp Volume 24 25 Music 26 Using the Music Database 26 Searching the Music Database 27 Registration
479. y contact When moving a cable be careful not to let it catch on the circuit Plug in board Forcing the cable in anyway may cut the cable cause damage or result in a malfunction Be careful not to misplace any of the screws since all of them are used Do not use any screws other than what are installed on the instrument Reference 841 179 Installing Optional Hardware Optional Plug in Board Installation A variety of optional Plug in boards sold separately let you expand the voice library of your instrument The following types of Plug in boards can be used with your instrument PLG150 AN PLG150 PF PLG100 VL PLG150 VL PLG100 DX PLG150 DX PLG100 XG CAUTION When inserting Plug in boards and connecting cables make sure that you check that they are inserted and connected properly Improperly inserted Plug in boards and cables may cause faulty contacts and an electri cal short circuit which may cause damage or result in a malfunction After mounting the Plug in board be sure to tighten the screws as directed so it is completely stable and does not move in any way P 1 Turn the 9000Pro power off and disconnect the AC power cord Also if the keyboard is connected with other external device s disconnect the device s gt 2 Turn the 9000Pro face down on a blanket or some soft sur face giving you direct access to the bottom of the instru ment Plug in board Hard disk cover
480. yle PAD 7 Multi Pad 3 15 Accompaniment Style PHRASE1 8 Multi Pad 4 16 Accompaniment Style PHRASE2 Realtime Recording Step Recording Realtime Recording This method records performance data in real time overwriting any data already present in the destination track The new data replaces the previous data Basic information on recording a new song refer to the Quick Guide on pages 36 and 38 Step Recording This method lets you compose your performance by writing it down one event at a time This is a non realtime step recording method similar to writing music notation onto paper The Song Creator offers two different step recording types Chord Step available for Quick Recording and Step Recording available for Multi Track Recording Reference 801 109 Basic Procedure 1 Press the DIGITAL RECORDING button DIGITAL REC DIGITAL STUDIO SOUND CREATOR SAMPLING CUSTOM VOICE PLUG IN VOICE gt STYLE CREATOR 2 Select SONG CREATOR SONG fk MULTI PAD CREATOR STYLE MULTI PAD MIXING CONSOLE EFFECTS FILTER EQ TUNING Crn CA SONG CREATOR SONG NAHE SONG 01 3 Select the desired menu CURRENT SONG SONG CREATOR SONG NAHE SONG 01 4 Select the Record method jac QUICK RECORD ES MULTI TRACK RECORD Song Creator If an optional hard disk has been installed or a
481. yle from scratch STYLE CREATOR HENU ay NEH STYLE ASSEMBLY Select a preset flash style The Easy Edit mode makes it possible to create new styles by editing the Preset Flash styles ORIGINAL STYLE 8 BEAT Heart Beat Before continuing to the next step confirm that enough memory space is available in the Flash Style 049152Bytes Ah STYLE CREATOR EASY EDIT j r 5 STYLE ASSEMBLY Pattern Combination Lets you create your own styles by Combining pre programmed f Mm patterns First decide the time M E Signature of the style S STYLE ASSEMBLY 1 For normal 8 beat 16 beat and Suing gt V styles select 4 4 For waltz styles TEMPO 148 BEAT 4 4 select 3 4 PART COPY Press NEXT to continue MEG PRRT RECORD Press NEXT to conti M REC DENA PLAY GE GE GER GR 66v e MUTE MUTE MUTE MUTE HUTE Select this to call up the Step Recording display 4 Select the desired menu 5 Create Edit a style by following the on screen instructions store as a Flash style to Flash ROM See NOTE on page 55 7 Exit from the Digital Recording mode Reference 921 Style Creator Style Assembly Creating a Style This operation lets you create the patterns rhythm bass and chords that will make up your original style The explanations here apply to step 5 of the Basic Procedure on page 128 Set up f
482. you perform and the selected accompaniment style matching your music will automatically play along instantly following the chords you play With auto accompaniment even a solo performer can enjoy playing with the backing of an entire band or orchestra This section explains some important functions of the auto accompaniment that are not covered in the Quick Guide For basic information on playing the auto accompaniment refer to page 20 in the Quick Guide Chord Fingerings a The way in which chords are played or indicated with your left hand on the left side of the keyboard from the Split Point is referred to as fingering There are 7 types of fingerings as described below Refer to page 159 for instructions on setting the split point and fingering mode Single Finger Single Finger accompaniment makes it simple to produce beautifully orchestrated accompaniment using major seventh minor and minor seventh chords by pressing a minimum number of keys on the Auto Accompaniment section of the keyboard The abbreviated chord fingerings described below are used For a major chord press the For a seventh chord simultaneously press root key only n H the root key and a white key to its left H H For a minor chord simulta For a minor seventh chord simultaneously neously pre
483. yric data when the song is down to the appropriate tempo at the first settings to the selected allowing the lyrics to be dis note of the song This allows you to start selected song played immediately after you press the actual song playback as quickly as possi See below for details START STOP button ble with a minimum pause for reading of When set to SEARCH OFF the 9000 88 reads the lyric data after playback is started This may result in a slight delay before the lyrics are displayed When set to NEVER DISPLAY the lyrics will not be shown in the LCD display dur ing playback About Vocal Harmony Microphone Settings for a Song The Vocal Harmony and Microphone settings can be stored as Song Setup data When EE e using the Vocal Harmony function with a song this convenient feature lets you store all function during playback See relevant Vocal Harmony and Microphone settings with the song so that they are auto m matically called up the next time you select the song The actual settings that can be stored are listed below CA Vocal Harmony type and parameter Setting Page 81 Vocal Harmony Vocoder track settings keyboard and Page 82 Effect type and parameter settings for the microphone Page 146 Volume Pan Reverb depth Chorus depth and DSP 8 depth for the microphone sound Page 145 Reference Q

Yamaha 4XE-F8199-13 Offroad Vehicle User Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents